Owner’s manual
SEAT Alhambra
7N5012720BM
Inglés
7N5012720BM (07.19)
SEAT Alhambra Inglés (07.19)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.19
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Introduction
Thank you f
or your trust choosing a SEAT v
e-
hicl
e
.
With your ne
w SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology
and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety infor-
mation concerning the passenger's
front airbag
›››
page 30, Fitting and us-
ing child seats.
About this manual
This manual describes the f
eat
ur
es
of the v
e-
hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of
the features described below will be intro-
duced in the future or will only be available in
certain markets.
Some of the features described here are
not included in all the types or variations
of the model and they can be varied or
modified based on technical or marketing
requirements without it being considered
misleading advertising.
Some details on the drawings may vary from
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a
standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-
ted.
The audiovisual material is only meant to
help the users better understand some fea-
tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the
instruction manual. Access the instruction
manual to see the complete information and
warnings.
The features marked with an asterisk
are included by default only in certain
versions of the model, supplied as op-
tional only for certain versions or only of-
fered in certain countries.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
It indicates that the section continues on
the next page.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about safety and warn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
CAUTION
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage to the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about the protection of the environ-
ment.
®
Note
Texts after this symbol contain addition-
al information.
Printed and digital instruction man-
ual
The print
ed instruction manual cont
ains r
el
e-
v
ant information about the use of the vehicle
and the Infotainment System.
The digital version of the manuals contains
more in-depth information. It is available on
SEAT's official website.
To view the digital version of the manual:
Fig. 1 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
›
›
Fig. 1
●
OR
ent
er the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline.html
and select your vehicl
e.
Related videos
The oper
ation of some of the vehicle's fea-
t
ures can be shown as an instruction video:
Fig. 2 SEAT website
●
scan the QR code
›
›
›
Fig. 2
●
OR
ent
er the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline.html
choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
certain languages.
Frequently Asked Ques-
tions
Before driving
How do you adjust the seat?
›››
page 129
How do you adjust the st
eering wheel?
›››
page 13
How do you adjust the e
xterior mirrors?
›››
page 126
How do you t
urn on the exterior lights?
›››
page 115
Ho
w does the automatic gearbox selector lever
work?
›››
page 2
46
How do you refuel?
›
›
›
page 308
Ho
w do you activ
ate the windscreen wipers and
windscreen washer system?
›››
page 123
Emergency situations
A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does
this mean?
›››
page 85
Ho
w do you open the bonnet?
›››
page 316
Ho
w do you perform a jump start?
›››
page 50
Where is the v
ehicle tool kit located?
›››
page 39
How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture
kit?
›››
page 42
How do you change a wheel?
›››
page 44
Ho
w do you change a fuse?
›››
page 56
Ho
w do you change a light?
›››
page 58
Ho
w do you tow a vehicle?
›››
page 52
Useful tips
How do you set the time?
›››
page 78
When shoul
d the vehicle inspection should be
performed?
›››
page 81
What functions do the butt
ons/thumbwheels on
the steering wheel perform?
›››
page 87
How do you remove the luggage compartment
cover?
›››
page 139
How do you drive in an economical and environ-
mentally-friendly way?
›››
page 255
How do you check and top up the engine oil?
›
›
›
page 318
Ho
w do you check and t
op up the engine cool-
ant?
›››
page 321
How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?
›››
page 323
How do you check and top up the brake fluid?
›››
page 323
How do you check and adjust t
yre pressure val-
ues?
›››
page 330
V
ehicle washing tips
›››
page 339
Functions of interest
How does the START-STOP system work?
›››
page 243
What parking assist
ants are available?
›››
page 287
How does the rear assist work?
›››
page 294
How does the adaptiv
e cruise control work?
›››
page 263
How does the l
ane departure warning system
work?
›››
page 27
1
How does tyre pressure monitoring work?
›
›
›
page 333
Ho
w do you open the v
ehicle without a key (Key-
less Access)?
›››
page 96
Interior lighting and ambient light
›››
page 122
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Gener
al vie
ws of the v
ehicl
e
. . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 14
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 17
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 49
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Instruments and warning/control
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Three button unit in the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 138
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Net partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Auxiliary heating (additional heating)* . . . . . 166
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-
box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Dynamic chassis control (DCC)* . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5
Table of Contents
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with
parking assist
ant (RC
T
A)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
3
Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-
tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 287
Park assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Reverse Assist* (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . 294
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . 305
Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
AdBlue
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Engine management and emissions control
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 336
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Accessories and modifications to the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 344
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 347
Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Information about the EU Directive
2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Indications about the technical data . . . . 355
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
6
General views of the vehicle
Exterior view
Rear lid
– Opening fr
om outside
›
›
›
page 107
– Emer
gency opening
›››
page 110
Fuel tank
– Fuel capacity
›››
page 355
– Open/Close cap
›››
page 308
Opening and closing
– Doors
›››
page 101
– Central locking
›››
page 93
– Manual release
›››
page 102
1
2
3
Bonnet
– Unl
ocking l
e
v
er
›
››
page 316
– Open/close
›››
page 316
Levels control
– Oil
›››
page 318
– Brake fluid
›››
page 323
– Battery
›››
page 324
Towing the vehicle
– Towline anchorage
›››
page 55
– Tow start
›››
page 53
4
5
6
Action in the event of a puncture
– Anti-punct
ur
e kit
›
›
›
page 41
– Wheel change
›››
page 44
7
7
General views of the vehicle
Overview (left hand drive)
Electric windows
›
›
›
page 1
1
1
Central locking
›››
page 93
Exterior mirror adjustment
›››
page 126
Open bonnet lever
›››
page 316
Headlight switch
›››
page 115
Turn signal and main beam lever
›››
page 117
Cruise control
›››
page 258
Warning lamps
›››
page 85
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wipers and rear window wiper
›
›
›
page 123
Driv
er inf
ormation system
›››
page 83
Infotainment system (factory fitted)
›››
page 170
Hazard warning lights
›››
page 120
Fuses
›››
page 56
Steering wheel adjustment
›››
page 13
Ignition lock
›››
page 239
Air conditioning
›››
page 159
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Starter button
›
›
›
page 2
40
Fr
ont passenger airbag disconnection
display
›››
page 25
16
17
8
General views of the vehicle
Interior view
Access to the third row of seats
›
›
›
page 135
Seat belts
›
›
›
page 14
Isofix anchors
›››
page 31
Headrest adjustment
›››
page 131
Panoramic roof
›››
page 112
Interior mirror
›››
page 126
1
2
3
4
5
6
Disconnecting the front passenger front
airbag
›
›
›
page 25
Armr
est
›
››
page 137
Seat adjustment
›››
page 129
7
8
9
9
Safety
Safety
Saf
e driving
Advice about driving
Saf
et
y first
!
WARNING
●
This manual contains important informa-
tion about the oper
ation of the vehicle,
both for the driver and the passengers. The
other sections of the on-board documenta-
tion also contain further information that
you should be aware of for your own safety
and for the safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-
pecially important when lending or selling
the vehicle to another person.
Before driving
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, al
w
ays not
e the f
oll
owing points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››
page 138.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors
properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the headrests in the in-use po-
sition
›››
page 131.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests
according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
›››
page 29.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position
›››
page 11.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly
›››
page 14.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers.
–
Al
w
ays pay att
ention t
o tr
affic and do not
get distracted by passengers or telephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, traffic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
Driving under the influence of alcohol,
drugs, medication or narcotics may result
in sever
e accidents and even loss of life.
●
Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics
may significantly alter perception, affect
reaction times and safety while driving,
which could result in the loss of control of
the vehicle.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger
. In the e
v
ent of an acci-
dent, the saf
et
y equipment may reduce the
10
Safe driving
risk of injury. The following points cover part
of the saf
et
y equipment in your SEAT
1)
:
●
thr
ee-point seat belts,
●
belt t
ension limit
ers for the front and rear
side seats,
●
belt tensioners in the front seats and out-
side seats in the second row of seats
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
●
front airbags,
●
knee airbags,
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear
child seat system
●
height-adjustable front headrests,
●
rear headrests with in-use position and
non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct sitting position of
vehicle occupants
Correct position on the seat
Fig. 3
The correct distance between the driver
and the st
eering wheel must be at l
east 25 cm
(10 inches).
Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions
The correct sitting positions for the driver and
passengers ar
e sho
wn bel
o
w
.
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct sitting position,
contact a specialised workshop for help with
any special devices. The seat belt and airbag
can only provide optimum protection if a cor-
rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-
mends taking your car in for technical serv-
ice.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the
following positions:
Valid for all vehicle occupants:
●
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head, or
»
1)
Depending on the version/market.
11
Safety
as close as possible to the same level as the
t
op of your head and under no cir
cumst
ances
bel
o
w eye level. Keep the back of your neck
as close as possible to the headrest
›››
Fig. 4.
●
Short people must lower the headrest com-
pletely, even if your head is below its upper
edge.
●
Tall people must raise the headrest com-
pletely.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
●
Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly
›››
page 17.
The following also applies to the driver:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the steering wheel so it is at least
25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum
›››
Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands
on both sides, on the outer part, with your
arms slightly bent.
●
The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and never towards the face.
●
Move the seat in such a way that you can
step on the pedals with your knees slightly
bent and with a distance between the knees
and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-
ches)
›››
Fig. 3.
●
Adjust the height of the seat so that you
can reach the top of the steering wheel.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell so
that you have the vehicle under control at all
times.
For the passenger, the following applies:
●
Move the seat backrest to an almost up-
right position so that your back rests com-
pletely against it.
●
Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-
mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-
board check translation). If you are sitting
closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot
protect you properly.
Number of seats
The vehicle has 5 or 7 seats, depending on
the f
eat
ur
es. All seats ar
e equipped with a
saf
ety belt.
5 seats 7 seats
Seats in the
front
2 2
Seats in the
second row
3 3
Seats in the
third row
– 2
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position may in-
crease the risk of severe or l
ethal injuries in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring, in case of collision or accident and if
the airbags deploy.
●
Before starting the car, all passengers
must be sitting in a correct position and
stay like that for the entire journey. This al-
so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.
●
The maximum amount of people in the
vehicle is the same as the amount of seats
with seat belts.
●
For children, always use a certified pro-
tection system, certified and suited for their
weight and height
›››
page 29.
●
While driving, always keep your feet in
the footwell. Never place them over the
seat or the dashboard, for example, or out-
side the window. Otherwise the airbag and
seat belt may offer insufficient protection
and also increase the risk of injury in the
event of an accident.
Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-
tion
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,
the risk of se
v
er
e or l
ethal injuries incr
eases.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect
sitting positions substantially reduce the
12
Safe driving
protective function of seat belts and, there-
f
or
e
, incr
ease the risk of se
vere or even lethal
injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is
especially heightened when a deploying air-
bag strikes a vehicle occupant who has as-
sumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver
is responsible for all people, particularly chil-
dren, inside the vehicle.
The following list contains examples of incor-
rect sitting positions that could be dangerous
for all vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is in motion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the
rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear seats.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
●
Never put your feet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never place your feet on the bench or on
the backrest of the seat.
●
Never travel in a footwell.
●
Never sit on the armrests.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Never travel in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Sitting in an incorrect position increases
the risk of severe or fat
al injuries in the
event of accidents and sudden braking or
manoeuvres.
●
All occupants must sit correctly during
the journey and wear the seat belt correct-
ly.
●
Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-
ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or
are not at a proper distance of the airbag
risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,
especially if the airbags deploy and strike
them.
Steering wheel position adjust-
ment
Fig. 5
Lever in the lower left side of the steering
column.
Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and
only when the v
ehicl
e is st
ationary.
●
Pull the
›
›
›
Fig. 5
1
lever down, move the
st
eering wheel t
o the desir
ed position and lift
the l
e
ver back up until it locks.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment function and an incorrect adjustment
of the steering wheel can result in sev
ere or
fatal injury.
●
After adjusting the steering column, push
the lever
›››
Fig. 5
1
firmly upwards to en-
sure the steering wheel does not acciden-
tally change position while driving.
»
13
Safety
●
Never adjust the steering wheel while the
v
ehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust
the steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion, stop safely and make the proper
adjustment.
●
The adjusted steering wheel should be
facing your chest and not your face so as
not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-
tection in the event of an accident.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
to reduce injuries when the driver's front
airbag deploys.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,
you may sustain injuries to your arms,
hands and head.
Pedal area
P
edal
s
–
Ensure that you can always press the ac-
cel
er
at
or
, br
ake and clutch pedals unim-
paired to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use fl
oor mats which l
eav
e the pedal
s
cl
ear and which are secured to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
Restricting pedal operation can lead to
critical sit
uations while driving.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation.
Seat belts
The whys and wher
ef
or
es of
seat belts
Contr
ol l
amps
Lights up or flashes
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
Objects on the front passenger seat.
Remove the objects fr
om the front passenger seat
and store them safely.
The control lamp lights up t
o r
emind the
driv
er t
o f
asten their seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight
›››
page 29.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
while driving, a warning sound will be heard
for a few seconds. The warning light will also
flash .
14
Seat belts
The lamp goes out when the driv
er and
passenger seat belts ar
e f
ast
ened with the
ignition s
witched on.
Rear seat belts fastened display*
Fig. 6 Example of seat belt status display for
the r
ear seats (her
e
, a 7-seat v
ehicl
e) on the in-
strument panel:: upper part, second row; lower
part, third row.
Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is s
wit
ched on, the seat belt st
at
us
displ
ay
›››
Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-
forms the driver whether the passengers in
the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
It indicates that the corresponding seat
is empty.
Indicates that the seat is occupied and
the occupant is wearing the seat belt.
The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An
audible warning will also be heard if the vehi-
cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).
The rear seat display can be enabled or disa-
bled by a technical service centre.
If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while
driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt
status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-
onds. The indication can be hidden by press-
ing the
button on the dash panel.
The protective function of seat
belts
Fig. 7
Drivers with properly worn seat belts will
not be thr
o
wn f
orw
ar
d in the event of sudden
braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper position. They al
so help pr
e
v
ent
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
belts before every trip, even when "just driving
around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and
improving the chances of survival when in-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, overturns or accidents in which the
»
15
Safety
airbag trigger threshold value in the control
unit is not e
x
ceeded.
Impor
t
ant saf
ety instructions for
the use of seat belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
all, the risk of sev
ere injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
etc.) because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as
an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
ducing their capacity to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other ob
jects, as
this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in
the event of an accident. Therefore, you
must check the condition of all seat belts
at regular intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an
accident and have been stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage
should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly.
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 8
A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown
f
orw
ar
d viol
ently.
Fig. 9
The unbelted passenger in the rear seat
is thr
o
wn f
orw
ar
d violently, hitting the driver
who is wearing a seat belt.
The effects of the laws of physics in the case
of a head-on collision ar
e easy t
o e
xpl
ain: the
16
Seat belts
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
er
gy call
ed “kinetic ener
gy” st
arts acting on
both the v
ehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
they are, the more energy there is to be “ab-
sorbed” in the event of an accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-
gy is multiplied by four.
Given that the passengers of the vehicle in
our example do not have their seat belts fas-
tened, in the event of a collision the entire
amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will
be only absorbed by the mentioned impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
thrown forward and will make violent contact
with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
screen or whatever else is in the way
›››
Fig. 8.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants
›››
Fig. 9.
How to properly adjust your
seat belt
Fastening and unfastening the seat
belt
Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt
int
o the buckl
e
.
Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.
»
17
Safety
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
ot
ects
them in the e
v
ent of an accident or sudden
br
aking
›››
.
F
ast
ening the seat belt
F
ast
en your seat belt bef
ore each trip.
●
Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly
›››
page 11.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
●
Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-
bing e
v
enly acr
oss your chest and l
ap
. Do
not twist the seat belt when doing so
›››
.
●
Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the
corr
esponding seat
›
›
›
Fig. 10
.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
Releasing the seat belt
Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle
has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
›
›
Fig. 1
1
. The latch plate is released from the
buckle.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-
tion unless the seat backr
est is in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
●
The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,
can cause severe injuries if the belt moves
from hard areas of the body to soft areas
(e.g. the stomach).
Correct seat belt position
Fig. 12
Correct seat belt and headrest posi-
tions, vie
w
ed fr
om fr
ont and the side
.
Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection in
the e
v
ent of an accident and r
educe the risk
of sust
aining se
vere or fatal injuries only when
they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if
the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat
belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-
timum position to ensure the airbag provides
the maximum protection. The seat belt must
therefore always be worn and the webbing
correctly positioned.
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe
or even fatal injuries
›››
page 11, Correct sit-
ting position of vehicle occupants.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind
the shoulder.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across
the pelvis, never across the stomach.
18
Seat belts
●
The seat belt must lie fl
at and fit comf
ort
a-
bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary t
o t
ake up
any slack.
In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt
must lie evenly across the chest and as low
as possible over the pelvis, never across the
stomach and must be worn properly at all
times during the pregnancy
›››
Fig. 13.
Adapting the position of the belt webbing
to your size
The seat belt can be adapted using the fol-
lowing equipment:
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats.
●
Front seat height adjustment.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause severe or fat
al injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap par
t of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over
the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”
the stomach
›››
Fig. 13.
●
Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-
tened.
●
Once the seat belt is positioned correct-
ly, don't pull it away from your body with
your hand.
●
Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or
fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.
●
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings
or similar instruments to alter the position
of the belt webbing.
Note
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the correct position of the
belt webbing, cont
act a specialised work-
shop for help with any special devices to
ensure the optimum protection of the seat
belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking
your car in for technical service.
Fastening or unfastening the seat
belt with tw
o buckl
es
Fig. 14
Fasten the seat belt on the centre seat
in the second r
o
w of seats
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-
cupants in the position that most pr
ot
ects
them in the e
v
ent of an accident or sudden
br
aking
›››
.
The seat belts f
or the centr
e seat in the sec-
ond r
o
w of seats and f
or the seats in the third
row of seats are fastened using two buckles.
Fastening the seat belt
Fasten your seat belt before each trip.
●
Adjust the rear seat and headrest correctly
›››
page 11.
●
Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in
an upright position
›››
.
»
19
Safety
●
Use l
at
ch pl
at
e of the belt
›
››
Fig. 14
1
to
pull the seat belt do
wn. Do
not
twist the seat
belt when doing so
›
›
›
.
●
Engage the latch plate
1
in the buckle of
the corr
esponding seat
A
.
●
Use the latch plate
›
›
›
Fig. 14
2
to pull the
seat belt acr
oss your l
ap
.
●
Engage the l
at
ch plate
2
in the buckle of
the corr
esponding seat
B
.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that both l
at
ch
pl
at
es ar
e securely engaged in the buckles.
Unfastening the seat belt
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the
vehicle has come to a standstill
›››
.
●
Press the red button on the buckle
›
›
›
Fig. 14
A
. The latch plate will come out of
the buckl
e
.
●
Pr
ess the r
ed butt
on on the buckle
›››
Fig. 14
B
. The latch plate will come out of
the buckl
e
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it r
oll
s
up easily and the trim will not be damaged.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can
cause severe or fat
al injuries in the event of
an accident.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-
tion unless the seat backr
ests are in an up-
right position and the seat belt is worn cor-
rectly, according to your size.
●
Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
Note
Seat belts with two buckles include a dia-
gr
am to show how t
o fasten the seat belt.
Seat belt height adjustment
Fig. 15
Next to the front seats: belt height ad-
just
er
.
Using the height adjusters for the front seats
and the out
er seats of the second r
o
w
, the
position of the seat belts can be adjust
ed in
the shoulder area according to the height of
the occupant:
●
Keep the guide device pressed down in the
direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 15.
●
Move the guide device up or down until the
seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder
›››
page 17.
●
Release the guide device.
●
Pull the belt sharply to check that the de-
vice is engaged securely.
WARNING
Never adjust the belt height while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Seat belt tensioners
Ho
w the seat belt t
ensioner w
orks
The seat belts for the front seats and the side
r
ear seats on the second r
o
w
1)
ar
e equipped
with belt t
ensioners.
The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,
although only in severe head-on, lateral and
1)
Depending on version/market.
20
Airbag system
rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens
the seat belts, r
educing the f
orw
ar
d motion of
the occupants.
The belt pr
e-tensioners work in combination
with the airbag system. In case of overturn,
the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the
head airbags are deployed.
Note
●
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it
is not an indication of fir
e in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. Specialised
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
Maintenance and disposal of seat
belt t
ensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that ar
e inst
all
ed in the seats of
your v
ehicl
e. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence
may be that, in the event of an accident, the
belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to the
specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
●
Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
ver
e or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other re-
pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only provide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
changed if they have been activated.
For the sake of the environment
Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
contain perchlorat
e. Observe the legal re-
quirements for their disposal.
Airbag system
Brief intr
oduction
Why is it so impor
t
ant t
o w
ear a
seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be w
orn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it
is most important to properly wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
quired by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 14, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
»
21
Safety
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case
, the infl
ating airbag may
inflict critical or f
at
al injuries on the occupant.
This al
so applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
head-protection airbags will not be triggered.
Take into account that the visible damage in
a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter
how serious, is not a determining factor for
the airbags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-
suming an incorrect sitting position can
lead t
o critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
gered. Children up to 12 years old should
always travel on the r
ear seat. Never trans-
port children in the vehicle if they are not
restrained or the restraint system is not ap-
propriate for their age, size or weight.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
erly
›››
page 14.
Description of the airbag system
The airbag system offers additional protec-
tion f
or the occupants in combination with the
seat belts.
The airbag syst
em comprises the f
oll
o
w-
ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):
●
Electronic control unit
●
Front airbags for driver and passenger
●
Knee airbag for the driver
●
Side airbags
●
Head airbag
●
Airbag control lamp on the instrument
panel
›››
page 23
●
Key-operated switch for front passenger
airbag
●
Control lamp for disabled/enabled status
of the front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
›››
page 23,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pro-
vide maximum protection if the occupants
are seat
ed correctly
›››
page 11.
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
tem, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise
there is a danger that during a collision, the
22
Airbag system
system may fail to trigger, or not trigger
correctly.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousands of a second, to provide additional
prot
ection in the event of an accident. A fine
dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and it is not an indication of fire
in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respectiv
e restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
accident may cause extensive damage to the
car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
●
Knee airbag for the driver.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions:
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Operation of the airbags
Airbag system control lamps
It lights up on the combi-instru-
ment
Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .
Have the system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up on the dash panel
Fault in the airbag system.
Have the system checked immediately by a special
-
ised workshop.
Front passenger front airbag deactivated.
Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
the warning lamp
re-
mains lit on the dash panel to remind you that
the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front
passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the
control lamp
on the instrument panel,
there is a fault in the airbag system
›››
. If
the contr
ol l
amp is fl
ashing, ther
e is a f
ault in
the disabling of the airbag system
›››
. Have
»
23
Safety
the system checked immediately by a speci-
alised w
orkshop
.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat
belts may not trigger correctly, may fail t
o
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
●
The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the
system checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
●
Do not mount a child seat in the front
passenger seat or remove the mounted
child seat! The front passenger front airbag
may deploy during an accident in spite of
the fault.
CAUTION
Always pay attention to any lit control
lamps and to the corresponding descrip-
tions and instructions to av
oid damage to
the vehicle or harm to the occupants.
Front airbags
Fig. 16
Driver airbag located in steering
wheel
.
Fig. 17 Front passenger airbag located in dash
panel
.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the
st
eering wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 16
and the airbag for
the front passenger is located in the dash
panel
›››
Fig. 17. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
24
Airbag system
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tiv
ely
›
›
›
Fig. 16
›››
Fig. 17.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the front occupants ad-
ditional protection for the head and chest in
the event of a severe frontal collision
›››
.
Their special design all
o
ws the contr
oll
ed es-
cape of the pr
opellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.
WARNING
●
The deployment space between the front
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and ob
jects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
Activate and deactivate front pas-
senger fr
ont airbag*
Fig. 18
In the glove compartment, on the front
passenger side: k
ey s
wit
ch f
or activ
ating and
deactivating the front passenger airbag.
Fig. 19
Control lamp for disabling the front
passenger fr
ont airbag on the dash panel
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag
only if you hav
e t
o use a r
ear
-f
acing child
seat in the front passenger seat.
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the
front passenger airbag.
When the front passenger airbag is deacti-
vated, this means that only the front passen-
ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other
airbags in the vehicle remain activated.
Deactivate and activate the front passen-
ger front airbag
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side.
●
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
›››
Fig. 18. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
●
Turn the key gently to change its position to
(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have
difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the
key as far as it will go.
●
Close the glove compartment.
●
When deactivating the airbag, switch the
ignition on and check that the control lamp
remains lit where it says
in the central part of the
dashboard
›››
Fig. 19.
●
When reactivating the airbag, check that
when the ignition is switched on, the
control lamp does not turn on.
»
25
Safety
WARNING
●
The driver of the vehicle is responsibl
e for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
deactivation system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
able or disable the airbag during driving.
●
If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it
can fulfil its protective function.
Knee airbag*
Fig. 20
On the driver side: location of the knee
airbag
Fig. 21 On the driver side: airbag action radius
for the knees.
The knee airbag is located on the driver side
bel
o
w the dash panel
›
›
›
Fig. 20. Airbags are
identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
The area framed in red (deployment area)
›››
Fig. 21 is covered by the knee airbag when
it is deployed. Objects should never be
placed or mounted in this area.
WARNING
●
The knee airbag is deployed in front of
the driver's knees. Al
ways keep the deploy-
ment areas of the knee airbags free.
●
Never not fix objects to the cover or in the
deployment area of the knee airbag.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a
distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-
tween your knees and the location of the
this airbag. If your physical constitution
prevents you from meeting these require-
ments, make sure you contact a special-
ised workshop.
Side airbags*
Fig. 22
Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 23 Range of action of the front and rear
side airbags. With 5 and 7 seats.
26
Airbag system
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and fr
ont passenger seat backr
ests
›
›
›
Fig. 22.
Depending on the equipment of the model,
the outer seats of the second row of seats
may also be fitted with side airbags, located
between the seat backrests and the access
area.
The locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
In a side collision, the side airbags r
educe the
risk of injury t
o passengers t
o the ar
eas of the
body f
acing the impact. In addition to their
normal protection, the seat belts also hold
the passengers in the event of a side collision;
this is how these airbags provide maximum
protection.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forwar
d, or are not seated correctly while
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
risk of injury if the side airbag system is
triggered in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed
sitting position must always be maintained
with seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressur
e increase on the inte-
rior of the doors, due to air escaping
through the areas with holes or openings in
the door panel.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels
have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
ers in the door panels have been removed,
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
els.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no circumstances should prot
ec-
tive covers be fitted over seats with side
airbags unless the covers have been ap-
proved for use in your vehicle. Because the
airbag deploys from the side of the back-
rest, the use of conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat uphols-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag
units must be repaired immediately by a
specialised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag com-
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
of the front seat) should only be performed
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system
operation.
27
Safety
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 24
On the left side of the vehicle: location
and fiel
d of action of the head-pr
ot
ection air
-
bag.
Fig. 25 Deployed head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the int
erior abo
v
e the doors
›
›
›
Fig. 24 and are identified with the text
“AIRBAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
.
The ar
ea fr
amed in r
ed is co
v
ered by the
head-protection airbag when it is deployed
›››
Fig. 24 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
jects should never be placed or mounted in
this area
›››
.
In the e
v
ent of a side collision the head-pr
o-
t
ection airbag is trigger
ed on the impact side
of the vehicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.
WARNING
●
In order for the head-protection airbags
t
o provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be
maintained with seat belts fastened while
travelling.
●
For safety reasons, the head-protection
airbag must be disabled in those vehicles
fitted with a screen dividing the interior of
the vehicle. See your technical service to
make this adjustment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
outer seats and the deployment space of
the head-protection airbags so that the
head-protection airbag can deploy com-
pletely without restriction and pro
vide the
greatest possible protection. Therefore,
sun blinds which have not been expressly
approved for use in your vehicle may not be
attached to the side windows
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
coat hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such
as removal of the roof lining) should only
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-
bag system operation.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and head-protection air-
bags neither the doors nor the door panels
should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-
aged, the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly. All work carried out on the front door
must be done in a specialised workshop.
28
Transporting children safely
Transporting children
saf
ely
Saf
et
y f
or chil
dren
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we recommend that chil-
dr
en under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 16. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see
www.seat.com).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approved, complying with the
ECE-R44. regul
ation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note
›››
page 30.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Child seats group classification
Fig. 26
Examples of child seats.
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
pr
o
v
ed and suit
abl
e for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.
Child seats by weight group
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Age group Weight of the child
Group 0 Up to 10 kg
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg
Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
pr
o
v
ed under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129
st
andar
d bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or
ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
child seat for your model and age group at
SEAT dealers.
»
29
Safety
Child seats by approval category
Chil
d seats may hav
e the appr
o
v
al category
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-
Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).
●
Universal: child seats with universal appro-
val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no
need to consult any list of models. In the case
of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child
seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether
belt.
●
Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,
in addition to the standard requirements of
universal approval, requires safety devices to
lock the child seat, which require additional
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
proval include a list of vehicle models for
which they can be installed.
●
Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for
each vehicle model separately. Child seats
with vehicle-specific approval also include a
list of vehicle models for which they can be
installed.
●
i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must
meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-
R 129 standard in relation to installation and
safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
cle.
Fitting and using child seats
Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun
visor
Fig. 28 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the
passenger side door
Warnings about fitting a child seat
T
ak
e the f
oll
o
wing general warnings into ac-
count if you are going to fit a child seat. They
are valid for all child seats regardless of their
attachment system.
●
Please read and follow the child seat man-
ufacturer's operating instructions.
●
The child seat should preferably be fitted to
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat
so that the child can exit the vehicle on the
pavement side.
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts to the child seat naturally, without
twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
To correctly use a child seat in the back,
the front backrest must be adjusted so that
there is no contact with the child seat in the
back in the case that it goes opposite to the
direction of the car. In the case of front facing
restraint systems, the front backrest must be
adjusted so that there is no contact with the
child's feet.
●
If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
led, in which the method of attachment to the
car is through the seat belt and support
bracket, it should never be installed in the
central rear seat as the ground clearance is
lower than in other places and the support
bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
ciently stable.
●
When fitting a child seat on the front pas-
senger seat, the seat must be moved back-
wards as far as possible and placed in the
30
Transporting children safely
highest position. The backrest must also be
put in a v
ertical position
1)
.
Impor
t
ant inf
ormation about the fr
ont pas-
senger front airbag
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is located on the passeng-
er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
door frame
›››
Fig. 27.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag
›››
page 21.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag
›››
in Front airbags
on page 25.
The passenger side fr
ont airbag, when ena-
bl
ed, is a serious risk f
or a chil
d that is f
acing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch
›››
page 25.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
›››
page 29.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
senger seat, the risk t
o the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if necessary, the front
passenger front airbag must be deactiva-
ted
›››
page 25. If the passenger seat has a
height adjustment option, move it to the
highest, most upright position. If you have a
fixed seat, do not install any child restraint
system in this location.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a
key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
the vehicle must be taken to a technical
service. Do not forget to reconnect the air-
bag when an adult wants to sit in the front
passenger seat.
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or
t
o stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or in the vehicle.
●
Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
the abdominal and neck areas during a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
dent.
●
When a child seat is mounted in the rear
seats, the door child-proof lock should be
activated
›››
page 105.
Attachment systems
Depending on the country, different attach-
ment syst
ems ar
e used f
or saf
ely inst
alling
child seats.
»
1)
Compliance with current national legislation
and the manufacturer's instructions is r
equired
when using or installing child seats.
31
Safety
Attachment systems overview
●
ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a st
andar
dised att
ach-
ment syst
em all
owing quick and safe attach-
ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
tween the child seat and the car body.
The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
called connectors. These connectors are fit-
ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
between the seat cushion and the backrest
of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-
FIX attachment systems are used mainly in
Europe
›››
page 32. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
tachment may have to be supplemented with
a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
●
Automatic three-point seat belt. When-
ever possible, it is preferable to attach the
child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than
attaching them with an automatic three-point
seat belt
›››
page 34.
Additional attachment:
●
Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided
over the back of the rear seat and attached
to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points
are located at the back of the rear seat back-
rest on the boot side
›››
page 34. The rings
for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked
with an anchor symbol.
●
Support bracket: some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.
The support bracket prevents the child seat
from tipping forward in the event of impact.
Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat
and side rear seats
›››
. For the assembly of
this t
ype of seat you shoul
d al
so consult the
list of appr
o
ved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.
Recommended systems for attaching
child seats
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:
●
Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-
site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support
bracket or i-Size.
●
Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
FIX and Top Tether.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the support bracket can
cause serious or fatal injury.
●
Make sure the suppor
t bracket is correct-
ly and safely installed.
Fix a child seat with the ISOFIX and
T
op T
ether* syst
em
Fig. 29
Rear seats: ISOFIX securing rings.
Fig. 30
Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the
ISOFIX syst
em.
Child seats can be secured quickly, easily
and saf
ely on the r
ear seats with the “ISOFIX”
and T
op T
ether* syst
em.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each
rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are
32
Transporting children safely
secured to the seat frame and, in others, they
ar
e secur
ed t
o the r
ear fl
oor. The “ISOFIX”
rings are located between the rear seat
backrest and the seat cushioning
›››
Fig. 29.
The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear
part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-
hind the seat backrest or in the boot)
›››
page 34.
To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-
FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the table
below.
Age
group
Class
accord-
ing to
size
a)
Front
passen-
ger seat
R
ear
seats
Group 0:
up to 10 kg
E X IUF
Group 0+
:
up to 13 kg
E X IUF
D X IUF
C X
IUF
Group 1:
9 to 18 kg
D X IUF
C X IUF
B X
IUF
B1 X IUF
A X IUF
IUF: suitable place for installing an ISOFIX child seat
with universal approv
al.
a)
The indication of class according to size corre-
sponds t
o the authorised bodyw
eight f
or the chil
d
seat. In chil
d seats with universal or semi-universal
approval, the class according to size is indicated on
the ECE approval label. The indication of class ac-
cording to size is stated on the corresponding child
seat.
Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX”
system
You are obliged to follow the seat manufac-
turer's instructions.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage securely
›››
Fig. 30. If the child
seat is equipped with Top Tether* anchor
points, secure it to the correspondent ring
›››
page 34. Observe the manufacturer's in-
structions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is properly anchored.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Tech-
nical Services.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
●
Ne
ver secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-
tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-
tening rings - this can result in potentially
fatal injuries to the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
securing rings.
33
Safety
Top Tether* securing belts
Fig. 31
Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se-
curing rings.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
with a str
ap f
or securing the seat t
o the v
ehi-
cl
e anchor point, located at the back of the
rear seat backrest and provide greater re-
straint.
The objective of this strap is to reduce for-
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.
Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-
ted seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.
Securing the retainer strap
●
Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining
strap.
●
Place the belt under the headrest of the
back seat (depending on the instructions of
the chair itself, lift or remove the headrest if
necessary).
●
Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest
›››
Fig. 31.
●
Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Releasing the retaining strap
●
Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
er's instructions.
●
Push the lock and release it from the an-
choring support.
WARNING
An undue installation of the safety seat will
increase the risk of injury in the event of a
crash.
●
Ne
ver tie the retainer strap to a hook in
the luggage compartment.
●
Never secure or tie luggage or other
items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or
the upper ones (Top Tether).
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
If you want to fit a universal approval catego-
ry (U) chil
d seat in your v
ehicl
e
, you must
check that the seat is appr
oved for your vehi-
cle. You will find any necessary information
on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-
bel. The following table shows the different
fitting options.
34
Transporting children safely
Age group
Weight of the
child
Front passenger seat Second row of seats:
Thir
d row of
seats
Airbag activa-
t
ed
Airbag deacti-
vat
ed
Int
erior
Ext
erior
Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U U
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U U
Group 1
Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U U
Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U U
Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U U/B U
Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U U/B U
U: univ
ersal.
X: vehicl
e seat unsuitable for fitting this group of child seat.
B: integrated child seat.
Fitting a child seat using the seat belt
●
Set the height of the seat belt such that it
adapts t
o the chil
d seat nat
ur
ally, without
twisting. The l
owest position of the seat belt
height regulator must be used with rear-fac-
ing child seats.
●
Put the seat belt in place and pass it
through the child seat according to the in-
structions of the child seat manufacturer.
●
Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
●
Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle
until you hear the engagement click.
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured
in the vehicle with a restraint syst
em suita-
ble for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information
and warnings concerning the use of child
seats
›››
page 30.
Integrated child seat
Introduction
The integrated child seat is only suitable for
chil
dr
en in Gr
oup 2 (
15-25 k
g) and Group 3
(22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R44 regula-
tion.
WARNING
Child travelling without their seat belt fas-
tened or not secured using a suitable r
e-
straint system may sustain fatal injuries if
the airbag is deployed.
●
Children up to 12 years old should always
travel on the rear seat.
●
Always disable the front passenger front
airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no
alternative but to transport a child in a
rear-facing child safety seat on the front
passenger seat.
»
35
Safety
●
Children must always be pr
otected with
a child restraint system suited to their
height and weight.
●
Always fasten children's seat belts cor-
rectly.
WARNING
Children must travel in a child seat appro-
priat
e to their weight and height while the
v
ehicle is in motion.
●
Children must always be protected with
a child restraint system suited to their
height and weight.
●
Children must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belted in while
travelling.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
approximately on the centre of the shoul-
der, never across the neck or the arm.
●
The seat belt must lie close to the upper
part of the body.
●
The lap belt part must lie across the pel-
vis, not across the stomach, and always fit
closely.
●
Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly
over the child's seat.
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap.
●
Always use a child seat and the seat belt
for children who are under 1.5 m tall. The
normal seat belt could cause injuries to the
abdominal and neck areas.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat.
●
Read and follow the inf
ormation and
warnings provided by the child seat manu-
facturer.
●
Never leave an unsupervised child alone
on a child seat or in the vehicle.
●
All modifications to the integrated child
seat must be carried out by a specialised
workshop.
●
Replace the child seat or any seat com-
ponents damaged or involved in an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Loose objects could fly uncontrollably
around the vehicle interior and cause inju-
ries in the e
vent of an accident or sudden
braking.
●
Do not leave toys or other hard, loose ob-
jects on the child seat or on the seat while
the vehicle is in motion.
Unfold the integrated child seat
Fig. 32
Integrated child seat: lift the cushion.
Fig. 33 Integrated child seat: fit its headrest.
Lifting the cushion
●
Pull the unlock lever
›
›
›
Fig. 32
A
on the
cushion in the dir
ection of the arr
o
w
›
›
›
Fig. 32
1
.
36
Transporting children safely
●
F
ol
d both sides
›
›
›
Fig. 32
B
up in the direc-
tion of the arr
o
w
›
›
›
Fig. 32
2
.
●
Push the cushion
›
›
›
Fig. 32
C
back in the
dir
ection of the arr
o
w
›
›
›
Fig. 32
3
until it en-
gages.
Inst
all the headr
est on the chil
d saf
et
y
seat
●
Remove the head support and store it safe-
ly in the vehicle
›››
page 131.
●
Make sure that the seat belt guide is instal-
led in the head support of the seat for chil-
dren on the window side
›››
page 37.
●
Enter the child seat head support in the
corresponding backrest until it fits correctly
into place
›››
Fig. 33.
●
Make sure that the rear seats and backr-
ests are correctly locked into place, pulling
on both of them.
Seat belt route with integrated
child seat
Fig. 34
Integrated child seat: fitting the seat
belt.
Fig. 35 Integrated child seat: seat belt route
with guide handl
e
.
Using the guide handle
›
›
›
Fig. 35
, position
the seat belt so that the shoul
der part of the
belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder.
Seat belt guide handle
●
Secure the seat belt guide handle to the
side headrest on the window side. The guide
handle is secured by a button.
●
Open the upper button on the seat belt
guide handle and pass the belt webbing be-
low the side headrest and through the guide
handle.
●
Close the button again.
Adjusting the seat belt
●
Guide the automatic three-point seat belt
below the side headrest.
●
Pull the latch plate and slowly place the
belt webbing across the child's chest and lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
WARNING
The seat belt only offers maximum protec-
tion from severe or f
atal injuries when it is
correctly positioned.
»
37
Safety
●
Children must assume the proper sitting
position and be properly belt
ed in while
travelling.
●
The shoulder belt must be positioned
against the middle of the shoulder.
●
The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-
ably.
●
Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly
over the child's seat.
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat.
Removing the child seat
Fig. 36
Integrated child seat: lowering the
cushion.
Lowering the cushion
●
Pull the unlock lever
›
›
›
Fig. 36
A
on the
cushion in the dir
ection of the arr
o
w
1
.
●
Push the cushion do
wn thr
ough the centr
al
ar
ea
B
in the direction of the arrow
2
until it
saf
ely engages
›
›
›
. The side supports fold
aw
ay aut
omatically.
R
emo
v
e the headrest on the child safety
seat
●
Open the guide lever on the seat belt and
guide it by hand to pull the belt back in more
easily and without damaging the trim.
●
Lift the child seat headrest to the top.
●
Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards
›››
page 133.
●
Remove the headrest on the child safety
seat.
●
Fitting the headrest.
CAUTION
When lowering the integrated child seat,
only press on the centre of the cushion
›››
Fig. 36
2
. Otherwise the cushion could
bend and not engage properly.
38
Self-help
Emergencies
Self
-help
Emer
gency equipment
First aid kit, w
arning triangl
e
, re-
flective vests and fire extinguish-
ers*
Fig. 37
On the rear lid: warning triangle brack-
et.
Warning triangle
With the r
ear lid open, r
ot
at
e the l
ock 90°
›››
Fig. 37. Lower the bracket and remove the
warning triangle.
First aid kit
There is a first aid kit
›››
page 150 in the rear
left-hand side storage compartment of the
luggage compartment.
The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
quirements. Check the expiry date of the
contents of the first aid kit.
Reflective vests
Some vehicles have a driver door compart-
ment to store a reflective vest .
Fire extinguisher
There is a fire extinguisher underneath the
front passenger seat.
The fire extinguisher must conform to legal
requirements, be ready for use and be
checked regularly. Check the certification
seal on the extinguisher.
WARNING
Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be
violently thrown in case of a sudden ma-
noeuvre or br
aking and especially in acci-
dents causing serious injury.
●
Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aid
kit, reflective vests and warning triangle
securely in the vehicle.
Note
●
The first aid kit, warning triangle, refl
ec-
tive vests and fire extinguishers are not part
of the vehicle's standard equipment.
●
The warning triangle should meet legal
requirements.
●
Before acquiring accessories and emer-
gency equipment see the instructions in
“Accessories and spares”
›››
page 344.
39
Emergencies
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 38
In the luggage compartment, seen
fr
om inside the v
ehicl
e: v
ehicl
e tool kit in a cavi-
ty located in the lock carrier area.
Fig. 39 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-
gage compartment: v
ehicl
e t
ool kit.
Depending on the model, the vehicle tools
may be k
ept in the luggage compartment, in
a cavit
y cl
ose t
o the l
ock carrier
›››
Fig. 38.
Loosen the safety straps and remove the ve-
hicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with
winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a
toolbox located in the luggage compartment.
The tool kit includes:
Adapter for the anti-theft bolt
Towing eye, removable
Wheel spanner
Crank handle for jack
Jack
Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the
handle for screwing and unscrewing the
wheel nuts
Hook for pulling off wheel trims or wheel
bolt caps
Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional extras.
WARNING
When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set
and spare wheel are loose in the interior
they can be viol
ently thrown in case of a
sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-
cially in accidents, causing serious injury.
●
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre
mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-
rary spare wheel are safely secured in the
luggage compartment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can
cause injury or accidents.
●
Never work with inappropriate or dam-
aged tools.
Note
The jack does not generally require any
maintenance. If required, it shoul
d be
greased using universal type grease.
Folding chocks*
Fig. 40 To unfold the foldable wedges.
The folding chocks are in the tool kit
›
›
›
page 40
.
Assembl
e the folding chocks
●
Lift the base plate
›››
Fig. 40
1
.
40
Self-help
●
Insert the tw
o “t
abs” of the mounting pl
at
e
int
o the long openings on the base plate
2
.
Corr
ect use
The f
ol
ding chocks may be used t
o bl
ock the
wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed.
The chocks should be placed directly in front
and behind the wheel and only be used on
firm ground.
WARNING
If the folding chocks are assembled or used
incorrectly, an accident may occur and se-
rious injury caused.
●
Never use damaged chocks.
●
Nev
er use chocks to immobilize the vehi-
cle on a slope.
Tyre repairs
T
MS (T
yr
e Mobilit
y Syst
em)*
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)
will r
eliably seal punct
ur
es caused by the
penetr
ation of a f
oreign body of up to about
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign
objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,
you must again check the tyre pressure
about 10 minutes after starting the engine.
You should only use the tyre mobility set if the
vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-
miliar with the procedure and you have the
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you
should seek professional assistance.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following
cases:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged.
●
In outside temperatures below -20°C
(-4°F).
●
In the event of cuts or perforations in the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
●
If you have been driving with very low pres-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
●
If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
date.
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerous, especially when filling the tyre at
the roadside
. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is
flat and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must k
eep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
porary emergency use only until you can
reach the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre
mobility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must
be cleaned immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
the reach of small children.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the elec-
tronic parking brake and put it in gear when
using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce
the risk of involuntary movement of the ve-
hicle .
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance properties as a conven-
tional t
yre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
»
41
Emergencies
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard br
aking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
ing any l
egal requirements.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased
at SEAT dealerships.
Note
Take into account the separate instruction
manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-
t
urer.
Anti-puncture kit contents*
Fig. 41
Standard representation: anti-punc-
t
ur
e kit cont
ents.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the fl
oor co
v
ering in the luggage compart
-
ment. It includes the f
ollowing components
›››
Fig. 41:
Valve insert remover
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor
ON/OFF switch
Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated
in the inflator tube).
1
2
3
4
5
6
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
t
oring syst
em (it can al
so be int
egr
ated in
the inflator tube).
Tube for inflating tyres
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at
the l
o
w
er end f
or a v
alve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
Sealing and inflating a tyre
Sealing the tyre
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the
›
›
›
Fig. 41
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ace it on a cl
ean surf
ace
.
●
Shak
e the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››
Fig. 41
10
.
●
Screw the inflator tube
›
›
›
Fig. 41
3
into the
seal
ant bottl
e
. The bottl
e's seal will br
eak au-
tomatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
›››
Fig. 41
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube int
o the t
yr
e v
alve.
●
With the bottle upside down, empty all of
the contents into the tyre.
7
8
9
10
11
42
Self-help
●
R
emo
v
e the bottl
e fr
om the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool
›››
Fig. 41
1
.
Infl
ating the t
yr
e
●
Scr
e
w the compressor tyre inflator tube
›››
Fig. 41
8
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
›
›
Fig. 41
6
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector
›
›
›
Fig. 41
9
into the
v
ehicl
e's 12-v
olt sock
et
›
››
page 156.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the
ON/OFF switch
›››
Fig. 41
5
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches 2.
0 t
o 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kP
a).
A maximum of 8 minut
es
.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker
›››
Fig. 41
2
to the instru-
ment clust
er
, within the driv
er
's visual fiel
d.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 43.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
sor and the inflator tube may become hot.
●
Prot
ect hands and skin from hot parts.
●
Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
rial.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid
o
verheating! Before switching on the air
compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
nutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube
›››
Fig. 41
5
again
and check the pressure on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
●
St
op the vehicle! The tyre cannot be
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressur
e to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
reach the nearest specialised workshop with-
out ex
ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-
sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and low
er.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
43
Emergencies
Changing a wheel
Intr
oduction
The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard
with anti-puncture technology t
yres (Conti-
Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of
up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro-
tective layer inside the tread.
The inclusion of this technology means that
there is no type of spare wheel included in
the vehicle's equipment.
Not all Alhambra models have the TMS (Tyre
Mobility System).
If a tyre needs to be changed the tools nec-
essary are available at spare parts dealers:
●
Jack,
●
box spanner for wheel nuts,
●
tool to remove wheel bolt caps
The tyres mounted on the vehicl
e are anti-
puncture. The wheels should only be
changed when switching from summer to
winter tyres or vice-versa.
The vehicle only comes with the necessary
tools for changing wheels if factory supplied
with winter tyres. If this is not the case, you
need to go to a specialised workshop to get
the wheels changed.
What to do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and
in a safe place as far away fr
om traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.
●
Automatic transmission: Move the selector
lever to position P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Keep the vehicle tool kit available
›››
page 40.
●
Observ
e the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Always observe the abov
e steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from moving.
Integral wheel trim
Fig. 42
Remove the wheel cover.
The wheel covers must be removed for ac-
cess t
o the wheel nuts.
R
emo
ving
●
T
ak
e the wheel brace and the wire hook
from the vehicle tool kit
›››
page 40.
●
Hook the wire through one of the grooves of
the trim.
●
Insert the box spanner through the hook,
rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim
›››
Fig. 42.
Fitting
Before installing the full trim, the anti-theft
wheel lock must be threaded into position
›››
Fig. 46
2
ó
3
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e t
o inst
all the full hubcap
.
44
Self-help
●
Pr
ess the trim against the wheel so that the
v
al
v
e hol
e is in the same position as the tyre's
valve
›››
Fig. 46
1
. Make sure that the trim is
corr
ectly fitt
ed all the w
ay ar
ound the wheel.
Wheel bolt caps*
Fig. 43
Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.
Removal
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools
›
›
›
Fig. 39
)
o
ver the cap until it clicks into place
›››
Fig. 43.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
The caps protect the wheel nuts and should
be remounted after changing the tyre.
The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a
special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking
bolts and is not for use with standard wheel
nuts.
Anti-theft wheel nuts
Fig. 44
Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and
adapt
er
.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
●
Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.
●
Insert the special adapter
›
›
›
Fig. 44
1
(ve-
hicl
e t
ool
s
›
›
›
page 40) onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.
●
Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto
the adapter as far as it will go.
●
Remove the wheel bolt
›››
page 45.
Note
Make a note of the code number of the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe
place, but not in your v
ehicle. If you need a
new adapter, you can obtain it from the
SEAT Official Service, indicating the code
number.
Loosening wheel nuts
Fig. 45
Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.
Fig. 46
Wheel change: tyre valve
1
and the
corr
ect position f
or the anti-theft wheel l
ocking
bolt
2
or
3
.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the
car t
o l
oosen the wheel nuts.
L
oosen the wheel nuts only about one t
urn
bef
ore raising the vehicle with the jack.
»
45
Emergencies
If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push
on the end of the wheel wr
ench with your
f
oot. Hol
d on t
o the v
ehicle for support and
take care not to slip during this operation.
Loosening wheel nuts
●
Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 45.
●
Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise
›››
.
Impor
t
ant inf
ormation about wheel nuts
F
act
ory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-
cially matched during construction. There-
fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
wheel nuts with the right length and heads
must be used. This ensures that wheels are
fitted securely and that the brake system
functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you should not even
use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same
model.
In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
›››
Fig. 46
2
or
3
, taking the tyre valve’s po-
sition as r
ef
er
ence
1
. Otherwise it will not be
possibl
e t
o mount the hubcap
.
WARNING
If the wheel nuts are not properly tight-
ened, they could come loose while driving
and cause an accident, serious injury and
loss of vehicle control.
●
Use only wheel nuts which corr
espond to
the rim in question.
●
Never use different wheel nuts.
●
Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,
free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-
sible to screw them easily.
●
To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only
use the wheel wrench that came with the
car from the factory.
●
The wheel nuts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
●
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or
to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts
have been tightened to the prescribed tor-
que, they could come loose while driving.
●
Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel
rims with bolted ring trims.
●
If wheel nuts are tightened below the
prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could
come loose while driving. If tightening tor-
que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads
can be damaged.
Raise the vehicle
Fig. 47
Jack position points.
Fig. 48
Jack mounted on the left rear part of
the v
ehicl
e
●
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
gr
ound. If necessary use a l
ar
ge
, str
ong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping
›››
.
46
Self-help
●
Bl
ock the wheel diagonally opposit
e the
wheel being changed with f
ol
ding wheel
chocks* or other suit
able objects.
●
Find the support point on the strut (sunken
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
›››
Fig. 47.
●
Turn the jack* crank handle, located below
the strut support point, to raise it until the
tab
›››
Fig. 48 is below the housing that is
provided.
●
Align the jack* so that the tab “grips” onto
the housing provided on the cross member
and the mobile base is resting on the ground.
The base plate 2 should fall vertically with re-
spect to the support point.
●
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is
slightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
The factory-supplied jack* is only de-
signed for changing wheels on this model.
On no account attempt to use it f
or lifting
heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-
jury.
●
Make sure that the jack* remains stable.
If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*
could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-
sultant risk of injury.
●
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,
even those approved for other SEAT mod-
els could slip, with the consequent risk of
injury.
●
Only mount the jack* on the support
points designed for this purpose on the
strut, and always align the jack corr
ectly. If
you do not, the jack* could slip as it does
not have an adequate grip on the vehicle:
risk of injury!
●
You should never place a body limb such
as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that
is solely supported by the jack.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!.
●
Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one
side or the engine is running.
●
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised. The vehicle may come loose from
the jack due to the engine vibrations.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the
crossbar. Only place the jack* on the
points designed for this purpose on the
strut. Otherwise
, the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Removing and installing a wheel
Fig. 49
Wheel change: loosen wheel nuts with
the sock
et in the handl
e of the scr
e
w
driver.
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
nuts and r
aising the v
ehicl
e with the jack
.
When r
emoving/fitting the wheel, the rim may
hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-
son, please take care and get a second per-
son to assist you.
Taking off the wheel
●
Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel
brace
›››
Fig. 49, unscrew the slackened
wheel nuts and place them on a clean sur-
face.
●
Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
●
Take off the wheel.
»
47
Emergencies
Putting on the spare wheel
Check the dir
ection of r
ot
ation of the t
yr
e
›››
page 48.
●
Place the spare wheel or temporary spare
wheel into position.
●
Replace the wheel nuts and tighten slightly
using the hexagonal socket on the end of the
wheel brace.
●
To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts
use the corresponding adaptor.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
●
Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the
wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-
agonal pairs (not in a circle).
●
Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on
›››
page 44.
The wheel nuts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tightening torque of the wheel nuts
The recommended tightening torque for
wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is
140 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the
tightening torque checked immediately with a
torque wrench that is working perfectly.
Before checking tightening torque, have any
rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they
could come loose while driving.
WARNING
The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace
should be used for turning wheel nuts only.
Do not use it to l
oosen or tighten the wheel
nuts.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern have
been designed t
o oper
at
e best when r
ot
ating
in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre
sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on
tyres with directional tread. Always observe
the indicated direction of rotation in order to
guarantee optimum grip and help avoid
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction
of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the
tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is
of particular importance when the road sur-
face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-
sible or remount it with the correct direction
of rotation.
Works after changing a wheel
●
Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Plate wheel
s: replace the wheel hubcap .
●
Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
gage compartment
›››
page 138.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
tor, adjust the pressure and st
ore it in memory
›››
page 333.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench
›››
page 48. Meanwhile, drive
carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
48
Self-help
Changing the windscreen
wiper bl
ades
Wiper service position
Fig. 50
Wipers in service position.
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
The wiper arms can be r
aised when the wip-
ers ar
e in service position
›
›
›
Fig. 50.
●
Close the bonnet
›››
page 315.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the windscreen wiper lever down-
wards briefly
›››
page 123
4
.
Bef
or
e driving, al
w
ays l
ower the wiper arms.
Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-
screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-
tion.
Note
●
The windscreen wiper arms can be
moved to the service position only when
the bonnet is pr
operly closed.
●
You can also use the service position, for
example, if you want to fix a cover over the
windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of
ice.
Changing the wiper rear wiper
blades
Fig. 51 Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 52 Changing the rear wiper blade
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as
st
andar
d with a l
ayer of gr
aphit
e. This layer is
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.
If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of
the water as it is wiped across the windscreen
will be louder.
Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-
ularly. If the wipers scrape across the
glass, they should be changed if they are
damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty
›››
.
If this does not pr
oduce the desir
ed r
esults,
the setting angl
e of the windscr
een wiper
arms might be incorrect. They should be
checked by a specialised workshop and cor-
rected if necessary.
Damaged windscreen wiper blades should
be replaced immediately. These are availa-
ble from qualified workshops.
»
49
Emergencies
Raising and lowering windscreen wiper
arms
●
Place the windscreen wipers in the service
position
›
›
›
page 49
.
●
Grip the wiper arms
only by the blade's
fastening point.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
●
Raise the wiper arms.
●
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt
from the windscreen wiper blades.
●
If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or
damp cloth may be used
›››
.
Changing the windscr
een wiper bl
ades
●
Lift and unf
ol
d the wiper arms.
●
Pr
ess and hold release button
›››
Fig. 51
1
and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-
r
ection of the arr
o
w
.
●
Fit a ne
w wiper blade of the same length
and design on to the wiper arm and hook it
into place.
●
Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
Changing the rear wiper blade
●
Lift and fold the wiper arm.
●
Turn the blade slightly
›››
Fig. 52 (arrow
A
).
●
Hol
d do
wn the r
el
ease butt
on
1
while gen-
tly pulling the bl
ade in the dir
ection of arr
o
w
B
.
●
Insert a new blade of the same l
ength and
t
ype
in the r
ear wiper arm in the opposit
e di-
rection to the arrow
B
and hook into place
butt
on
1
.
●
Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.
WARNING
Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-
duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-
dent and serious injury.
●
Always r
eplace damaged or worn wind-
screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-
ger clean the windscreen properly.
CAUTION
●
Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers
could scr
atch the glass.
●
If products containing solvents, rough
sponges or sharp objects are used to clean
the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-
aged.
●
Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 49.
CAUTION
●
To prevent damage t
o the bonnet and the
wiper arms, only leave them in the service
position.
●
Before driving, always lower the wiper
arms.
Jump start
Jump leads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cr
oss section.
If the engine f
ail
s t
o st
art because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
For vehicles whose battery is not in the en-
gine compartment, the jump leads should on-
ly be connected to the starting assistance
connection points in the engine compart-
ment.
50
Self-help
Note
●
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise el
ectricity could flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be properly
connected to the on-board network.
Positive pole at the jump start
points
Fig. 53
In the engine compartment: jump start
positiv
e pol
e
+
.
On some vehicles, there is a starting assis-
t
ance t
erminal in the engine compartment,
under a l
abell
ed co
ver.
Jump start: description
Fig. 54
Diagram of connections for vehicles
without St
art St
op syst
em
Fig. 55
Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art St
op syst
em
Jump lead terminal connections
S
wit
ch off the ignition of both v
ehicl
es
›
››
.
1.
Connect one end of the r
ed
jump l
ead t
o
the positiv
e
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the fl
at batt
ery
A
›
›
›
Fig. 54
.
Connect the other end of the
red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicl
e pr
o
viding assist
ance
B
.
In v
ehicl
es without a St
art
-St
op system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
o
viding the curr
ent
B
›
›
›
Fig. 54.
In v
ehicl
es with a Start-stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
id piece of met
al in the engine bl
ock
, or
t
o the engine bl
ock itself
›››
Fig. 55.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bol-
t
ed t
o the engine bl
ock or t
o the engine
bl
ock itself of the vehicle with the flat
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery
A
.
P
osition the l
eads in such a w
ay that
they cannot come int
o cont
act with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
»
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
5.
6.
7.
51
Emergencies
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
fl
at batt
ery and w
ait f
or 2 or 3 minut
es
until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads,
switch off the dipped beam headlights if
they are switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage
peaks which are generated when the
leads are disconnected.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
minals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Please note the safety w
arnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 315.
●
The battery providing assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
(12V) and approximately the same capaci-
8.
9.
10.
11.
ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-
ply could result in an explosion.
●
Ne
ver use jump leads when one of the
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!
Even after the battery has thawed, battery
acid could leak and cause chemical burns.
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an
explosion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-
ted from the battery could be ignited by
sparks. Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in
the other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This could
result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise electricity could flo
w as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
Tow start and towing
Introduction
Tow-starting means starting the engine of
the vehicle while another pull
s it.
Towing means one vehicle pulling another
that is not roadworthy.
Always consider the legal provisions relating
to tow-starting and towing.
For technical reasons, towing a vehicle
with a discharged battery is not allowed.
The jump start should be used instead
›››
page 50.
If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
tion on!
The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is
towed with the engine switched off and the
ignition connected. Depending on the battery
charge status, the drop in voltage may be so
large, even after just a few minutes, that no
electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the
52
Self-help
Keyless Access system, the steering wheel
coul
d l
ock
›
›
›
.
WARNING
A vehicle with no power should never be
towed.
●
When to
wing, never remove the ignition
key or disconnect the ignition with the start
button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of
the steering column could suddenly be-
come blocked and it would be impossible
to steer the vehicle. This could cause an
accident, serious injury and loss of control
of the vehicle.
●
If during towing the vehicle runs out of
power, stop towing immediately and re-
quest the assistance of specialist person-
nel.
WARNING
Vehicle handling and braking capacity
change considerably during towing. Please
observ
e the following instructions to mini-
mise the risk of serious accidents and in-
jury:
●
As the driver of the vehicle being towed:
–
You should depress the brake much
harder as the brake servo does not op-
erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid
crashing into the towing vehicle.
–
More strength is required at the steer-
ing wheel as the power steering does
not operate when the engine is switch-
ed off.
●
As the driver of the towing v
ehicle:
–
Accelerate with particular care and
caution.
–
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
–
Brake earlier than usual and more
smoothly.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the vehicle
, for exam-
ple the paint, remove and replace the lid
and towing eye carefully.
●
Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and damage it during towing.
Instructions for tow-starting
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-
st
ar
t
ed. The jump st
ar
t should be used in-
stead
›››
page 50.
For technical reasons, towing the following
vehicles is not allowed:
●
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access
locking and ignition system the steering re-
mains locked and the electronic parking
brake cannot be deactivated nor can the
electronic lock of the steering column be re-
leased if they are activated.
●
If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
ly.
However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
tow-started (in the case of manual gear-
boxes):
●
Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.
●
Keep the clutch pressed down.
●
Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
ing lights of both vehicles.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
Once the engine starts, press the clutch
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding
with the towing vehicle.
CAUTION
●
When tow-starting, unburnt fuel coul
d
enter the catalytic converter and damage
it.
●
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m
in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-
age to the catalytic converter.
Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
electronic parking brake and, if appr
opri-
ate, the electronic lock of the steering
»
53
Emergencies
column are deactivated. If the vehicle has
no power supply or there is an electric sys-
t
em fault, the engine must be tow-started
to deactivate the electronic parking brake
and the electronic lock of the steering col-
umn.
Towing instructions
Towing requires some expertise and experi-
ence, especially when using a tow rope
. Both
drivers should be familiar with the difficulties
involved in towing. For this reason, inexper-
ienced drivers should abstain from towing.
During towing, it should be ensured that no
impermissible tractive forces or shocks are
generated. When towing on an unpaved
road, there is always a risk of overloading and
damaging the anchorage points.
During towing, the towing vehicle can signal
the change of direction even with the hazard
warning lights turned on. To do so, at the
same time, the turn signal lever must be oper-
ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the
hazard warning lights will go off. When the
turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-
tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-
matically reactivated.
Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle
●
Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is
not blocked, and the electronic parking br
ake
may be deactivated and the turn signals and
wash/wipe operated.
●
More strength is required at the steering
wheel as the power steering does not oper-
ate when the engine is switched off.
●
You should depress the brake much harder
as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid
hitting the towing vehicle.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.
●
Bear in mind the information and instruc-
tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a
tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A
tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is
not available.
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid
damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to
use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-
ilarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to
the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-
vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted
if it has been specially designed to be instal-
led on a tow hitch
›››
page 298.
When the vehicle has to be towed:
Check whether the vehicle may be towed
›››
page 55, Cases where towing the ve-
hicle is not permitted.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the
road.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-
lector lever in the N
›››
page 245 position.
●
Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at
speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles).
●
If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with
automatic transmission are only allowed to
be towed with the front wheels suspended.
54
Self-help
Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive
(
4Driv
e)
F
our
-wheel driv
e vehicles (4Drive) can be
towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-
cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-
pended, the engine must be switched off,
otherwise the transmission may be damaged.
Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-
mitted
●
If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-
cant.
●
If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-
cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-
propriate, the electronic parking brake can-
not be deactivated or the electronic lock of
the steering column released.
●
If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-
elled.
●
When, for example, after an accident, the
smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering
operation cannot be guaranteed.
When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:
●
Observe legal requirements.
●
Keep in mind the instructions in the manual
on towing vehicles.
CAUTION
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-
cant in the automatic transmission the car
may only be towed with the driven wheels
lifted clear of the road, or transpor
ted on a
special car transporter or trailer.
Note
The vehicle can only be towed if the elec-
tr
onic parking brake and the electr
onic
lock of the steering column are deactiva-
ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or
there is an electric system fault, the engine
must be tow-started
›››
page 50 to deacti-
vate the electronic parking brake and the
electronic lock of the steering column.
Front towline anchorage
Fig. 56
On the right side of the front bumper:
scr
e
w in the t
o
wline anchor
age
The housing of the removable towline an-
chor
age is on the right side of the fr
ont bump-
er underneath a co
v
er .
The t
owing eye should always be kept in the
vehicle.
Bear in mind the instructions for towing
›››
page 54.
Fitting the towline anchorage
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 40.
●
Remove the cover by pressing down on the
top and leave it hanging from the vehicle.
●
Screw the towing eye in the housing by
turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
Fig. 56
›››
. Use a suitable object
that can compl
et
ely and secur
ely tight
en the
t
owing eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until it is inserted into the bump-
er.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
The towing eye must always be completely
and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be
rel
eased while towing and tow-starting.
55
Emergencies
Rear towline anchorage
Fig. 57
On the right side of the rear bumper:
t
o
wline anchor
age in position.
The housing of the screw towing eye is on the
right side of the r
ear bumper behind a lid
›
›
›
Fig. 57
.
Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing
bracket do not have any housing for the
screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,
the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-
led and used for towing
›››
page 298,
›››
.
Bear in mind the instructions f
or t
o
wing
›
›
›
page 54.
Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-
out a factory-equipped towing bracket)
●
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit in the luggage compartment
›››
page 40.
●
Press the upper side of the lid
›››
Fig. 57 to
unclip it.
●
Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-
hicle.
●
Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-
ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-
wise
›››
. Use a suitable object that can
compl
et
ely and secur
ely tight
en the t
owing
eye in its housing.
●
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise with a suitable object.
●
Insert the upper flange of the lid into the
opening of the bumper and press the lower
side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted
into the bumper.
●
Clean the towing eye if necessary and then
store it in the luggage compartment along
with the other vehicle tools.
CAUTION
●
The towing eye must always be com-
pl
etely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it
could be released while towing and tow-
starting.
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a
towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow
with a tow bar if this has been specially de-
signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an
unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow
hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-
stead, a tow rope should be used.
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Intr
oduction
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an el
ectrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can give serious electrical shocks, causing
burns and even death!
●
Ne
ver touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fire and serious injury.
●
Nev
er use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same
56
Fuses and bulbs
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
●
Never r
eplace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
CAUTION
●
T
o prevent damage t
o the vehicle's elec-
tric system, before replacing a fuse always
turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-
trical elements and remove the key from
the ignition.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they
can damage the electrical system.
Note
●
One component may have more than one
fuse.
●
Sev
eral components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter.
Fuses inside the vehicle
Fig. 58
On the driver's side dashboard: fuse
bo
x co
v
er
.
Opening and closing the fuse box situated
bel
o
w the dash panel
●
T
o r
emo
ve the cover, move the activation
lever in the lower part to the right
›››
Fig. 58.
●
For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lev-
er to the left.
Identifying fuses below below the dash-
board by colours
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Colour Amp rating
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
CAUTION
●
Al
ways carefully remo
ve the fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid
problems with your vehicle.
●
Protect the fuse boxes when open to
avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and
humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-
age to the electrical system.
57
Emergencies
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 59
In the engine compartment: fuse box
co
v
er
.
To open the engine compartment fuse box
●
Open the bonnet
›
›
›
page 315
.
●
Mo
ve the attachment tabs forwards, in the
direction indicated by the arrow to release
the fuse box cover
›››
Fig. 59.
●
Then lift the cover out.
●
To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.
Push the attachment tabs back, in the oppo-
site direction indicated by the arrow until they
click audibly into place.
In is possible that there are more fuses behind
a cover in the lower left-hand side of the lug-
gage compartment.
Replace a blown fuse
Fig. 60
Image of a blown fuse.
Fig. 61
Removing or fitting a fuse
Preparations
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
cal equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›
›
›
page 57
,
›
››
page 58.
Recognise a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 60.
●
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has
blown.
To replace a fuse
●
If necessary, remove the plastic pincers
from the fuse box cover.
●
Small fuses: fit the pincer in from above
›››
Fig. 61 .
●
Large fuses: move the pincer sideways over
the fuse
›››
Fig. 61 .
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
identical amperage rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Changing bulbs
Introduction
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
pr
actical skill. If you ar
e unsur
e
, SEAT r
ecom-
mends that you consult a technical service or
request assistance from a specialist. In gen-
eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the
58
Fuses and bulbs
bulbs, other vehicle components require re-
mo
v
al.
If you choose t
o change the engine compart
-
ment l
amps yourself, remember that it is a
dangerous area
›››
in Working in the en-
gine compar
tment on page 315
.
Al
w
ays use identical bulbs with the same
designation. The name can be f
ound on the
base of the bulb holder.
Bulbs (12 V)
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Light source used for each function
Halogen headlights. Type
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
Main beam headlights/day-
time running lights (DRL)
H15 (double element)
Side lights W5W
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
AFS bi-xenon main
headlight
Type
Daytime running lights
(DRL)
P21W SLL
Side lights W5W
AFS bi-xenon main
headlight
Type
Turn signal PY21W NA LL
Dipped beam / Main beam
Xenon bulb. Visit an
authorised workshop
for replacement.
Front fog light Type
Fog lights HB4
LED rear lights Type
Side/brake light LED
Turn signal WY21W
Reverse lights W16W
WARNING
●
Take particular car
e when working on
components in the engine compartment if
the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care
not to injure yourself on sharp edges, in
particular on the headlight housing.
CAUTION
●
Remove the ignition key bef
ore working
on the electric system. Otherwise, a short
circuit could occur.
●
Switch off the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
●
Take good care to avoid damaging any
components.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to
dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Please check at regular interv
als that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb
with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper
towel instead, since the fingerprints left on
the glass will vaporise as a result of the
heat generated by the bulb, they will be
deposited on the reflector and will impair
its surface.
●
Depending on the level of equipment fit-
ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for
part or all of the interior and/or exterior
lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that
»
59
Emergencies
exceeds than that of the car. If an LED light
fails, go to an authorised workshop f
or its
replacement.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulbs
Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: coatings
on the l
eft headlight.
Fig. 63 Left headlight.
Dipped beam headlights
Daytime running lights
Main beam headlight and side light
T
urn signal
s
Ther
e is no need t
o r
emove the headlight to
replace bulbs.
Complete operations only in the sequence
given:
Turn signals (small bulb holder)
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 62
1
all the
w
ay t
o the l
eft and pull it out backw
ar
ds to-
gether with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
A
Dipped beam headlights and
B
Day-
time running lights
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
A
B
C
1
–
R
ot
at
e the bulb hol
der t
o the left all the
way and pull it out backwards together
with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
C
Main beam headlights
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
–
Press the wire clip downwards and pull the
bulb hol
der
›
›
›
Fig. 63
2
out together with
the bulb
.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is r
e-
mo
v
ed dir
ectly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
pull the wire clip upwards until it clicks into
place.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
60
Fuses and bulbs
C
Side light
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the
headlight.
–
Pull the bulb holder
›
›
›
Fig. 63
3
out back-
w
ar
ds t
ogether with the bulb
.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is r
e-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
insert completely.
–
Insert the rubber cover.
Note
The images show the left hand headlight
from behind. The structure of the right hand
side headlight is symmetric.
Replacing the xenon headlight
bulbs
Fig. 64
In the engine compartment: turn signal
co
v
er
.
Fig. 65
Turn signal bulb holder
1
and turning
light
2
.
There is no need to remove the headlight to
r
epl
ace bulbs.
Compl
et
e oper
ations only in the sequence
given:
1
Turn signal
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the cover
›
›
›
Fig. 64
in the dir
ection
of the arrow and remove it.
–
Rotate the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 65
1
all the
w
ay t
o the l
eft and pull it out backw
ar
ds to-
gether with the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Rotate the cover
›››
Fig. 64 in the opposite
direction to the arrow as far as it will go.
2
Cornering light
–
Open the bonnet .
–
Rotate the cover
›
›
›
Fig. 64
in the dir
ection
of the arrow and remove it.
–
Press the wire clip downwards and pull the
bulb holder
2
›
›
›
Fig. 65
out t
ogether with
the bulb.
–
Depending on the model, the bulb is re-
moved directly from the bulb holder or it
may need to be rotated and then removed.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
»
61
Emergencies
–
Pl
ace the bulb hol
der in the headlight and
pull the wir
e clip up
w
ards until it clicks into
place.
–
Rotate the cover
›››
Fig. 64 in the opposite
direction to the arrow as far as it will go.
Always seek the help of a specialist when
changing the Xenon dipped beam and main
beam headlamps
›››
in Introduction on
page 59.
Note
The illustrations show the left hand head-
light. The structure of the right hand side
headlight is symmetric.
Replacing the front bumper bulb
Fig. 66
On the right side of the front bumper:
disassembling the headlights.
Fig. 67 Changing the bulbs in the headlights
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en:
–
Pull the co
v
er f
orw
ards, in the direction of
the arrow
›››
Fig. 66.
–
Unscrew the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 66
1
using the screwdriver from the vehicle
t
ool kit
›
›
›
page 40
.
–
Tilt the headlight slightly forward and ex-
tract it from its lateral attachments
›››
Fig. 67 (small arrows).
–
Release the connector
›››
Fig. 67
1
and re-
mo
v
e it.
–
R
ot
at
e the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 67
2
to the
l
eft all the w
ay, in the dir
ection of the arr
o
w,
and pull it out backwards together with the
bulb.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the headlight and
rotate to the right all the way.
–
Insert the connector
›››
Fig. 67
1
on the
bulb hol
der
2
. The connector must audibly
click int
o pl
ace
.
–
Pl
ace the headlight int
o its position
›››
Fig. 67 (small arrows) and tilt it back-
wards.
–
Tighten the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 66
1
using the screwdriver.
–
Replace the cover on the bumper
›
›
›
Fig. 66
.
62
Fuses and bulbs
Replace the rear lid light bulbs
Fig. 68
On the rear lid: remove the cover.
Fig. 69
On the rear lid: remove the bulb holder.
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en:
–
Open the r
ear lid.
–
Extr
act the co
v
er carefully using the flat
part of the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit as a lever (
›››
page 40) on the indent
›››
Fig. 68
1
.
–
R
el
ease the bulb hol
der connect
or by pull
-
ing on the red connector block.
–
Press on the attachment tabs in the direc-
tion of the arrow
›››
Fig. 69 and pull out the
bulb holder.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Install the bulb holder. The attachment tabs
should audibly click into place.
–
Insert the cover. The cover should lock into
place.
Replacing the tail light bulbs in the
bodywork
Fig. 70 Side of the luggage compartment:
R
emo
ving the l
eft t
ail light unit.
Removing
the right tail light unit.
»
63
Emergencies
Fig. 71
Tail light unit in the bodywork: removing
the bulb hol
der
.
Complete operations only in the sequence
giv
en.
R
emo
ving the r
ear light units
–
Open the r
ear lid.
–
Left tail light: open the storage compart-
ment on the left side of the luggage com-
partment
›››
page 150 and then rotate cap
›››
Fig. 70
1
90 ° in the direction of the ar-
r
o
w and r
emo
v
e it.
–
Right tail light: Move the 12 V power socket
support by pressing gently downwards
›››
Fig. 70 (arrow).
–
Unscrew the attachment screw
›››
Fig. 70
2
using the screwdriver from the vehicle
t
ool kit
›
›
›
page 40
. The bolt is secured in its
position.
–
Extract the rear light from the bodywork by
carefully pulling backwards.
–
Pull the red strip on the connector and ex-
tract the connector.
–
Disassemble the tail light unit and place it
on a flat, clean surface.
To change the bulb
–
To release the bulb holder, press on the at-
tachment tabs
›››
Fig. 71
1
to
4
in the di-
r
ection of the arr
o
w
.
–
R
emove the bulb holder from the rear light
unit.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit.
The attachment tabs should audibly click
into place.
–
Insert the connector and press the red at-
tachment strip in so that the connector is
locked into place.
Assembling the rear light units
–
Carefully insert the tail light unit into the
opening in the bodywork. To do this, insert
the upper rear light unit guide into the at-
tachment ring.
–
Tighten the white attachment screw using
the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit.
–
Ensure that the tail light unit has been cor-
rectly fitted and is firmly secured.
–
Left tail light: replace the cap
›››
Fig. 70
1
and turn it through 90º in the opposite di-
r
ection t
o the arr
o
w
. Close the storage
compartment.
–
Right tail light: Move the 12 V power socket
support upwards gently until it is properly
closed.
–
Close the rear lid
›››
page 105.
64
Fuses and bulbs
Changing the number plate bulbs
Fig. 72
In the rear bumper: Number plate light.
Fig. 73
number plate light: remove the bulb
hol
der
.
Follow the steps indicated:
Fix
ed number pl
at
e light
–
Use the fl
at part of the scr
ewdriver included
in the vehicle tool kit (
›››
page 40) to press
in the direction of the arrow, in the groove of
the number plate light
›››
Fig. 72.
–
Detach the number plate light.
–
Turn the connector lock
›››
Fig. 73 in the di-
rection of arrow
1
and pull on the connec-
t
or
.
–
R
ot
at
e the bulb holder in the direction of
the arrow
›››
Fig. 73
2
and extract it to-
gether with the bulb
.
–
R
epl
ace the f
ault
y bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder into the number plate
light and rotate all the way in the opposite
direction to the arrow
›››
Fig. 73
2
.
–
Plug the connector into the bulb holder.
–
Insert the number plate light carefully into
the opening on the bumper
. Ensur
e that the
number pl
at
e light is in the corr
ect position.
–
Insert the number plate light into the bump-
er until it audibly clicks into place.
Bolted number plate light
–
Unscrew the number plate light screws us-
ing the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit
(
›››
page 40).
–
Detach the number plate light.
–
Separate the attachment tabs from the
rear panel of the number plate light by
pressing.
–
Take the bulb holder out of the number
plate light.
–
Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical
bulb.
–
Insert the bulb holder into the number plate
light.
–
Press on the attachment tabs. The bulb
holder must be firmly attached to the num-
ber plate light.
–
Insert the number plate light carefully into
the opening on the bumper. Ensure that the
number plate light is in the correct position.
–
Tighten the attachment screws for the
number plate light using the screwdriver.
Additional brake light
Taking into account that it consists of LED
bulbs, the change shoul
d be made at a t
ech-
nical service centr
e
.
65
Operation
Fig. 74
Instruments and controls.
66
Controls and displays
Operation
Contr
ol
s and displ
ays
Int
erior vie
w
Overview
Interior door handle
Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Contr
ol for the electric adjustment
of the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Brightness r
egulation for instrument
panel and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lever for: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
–
Turn signals
–
Main beam headlights
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Steering wheel with horn and
–
Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
–
On-board computer controls . . . . . 83
–
Controls for radio, telephone,
navigation and speech dialogue
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
–
Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 248
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Control lever for:
–
Windscr
een wipers and w
asher
. . . 123
–
Wipe and w
ash syst
em . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
–
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Left seat heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . . 120
Depending on the equipment, con-
trols for:
–
Electronic manual air condition-
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
–
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Right seat heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Depending on the equipment, but-
tons for:
–
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . 281
–
Start-stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
–
Parking distance warning system
(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
–
Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
–
Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
–
Dynamic chassis control
(DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
–
The rear lid is opened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
–
Opening and closing of electric
sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Locking handle to open glove com-
partment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . 23
Switch for deactivating the front
passenger fr
ont airbag
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
P
assenger fr
ont airbag off w
arning
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Gear lever for:
–
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
–
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12 volt power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 281
Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-
cess closing and start-up system)
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Steering column adjustment lev-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Lever for:
–
Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 258
–
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 263
Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
»
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
67
Operation
Note
●
Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
tion is only fitted on certain model
s or are
optional extras.
●
The arrangement of switches and con-
trols on right-hand drive models* may be
slightly different from the layout shown in
›››
page 66. However, the symbols used to
identify the controls are the same.
Instruments and warn-
ing/contr
ol l
amps
Instrument panel
Intr
oduction
After switching the engine on with a 12-volt
battery that is heavily discharged or newly
changed some system settings (such as the
time
, the date, the personalised comfort set-
tings and the programming) might be altered
or deleted. Check and correct these settings
once the battery is sufficiently charged.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
●
To reduce the risk of accident and injury,
only mak
e adjustments to the instructions
on the screen of the instrument panel and
to the instructions on the screen of the Info-
tainment system when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Instrument panel
Fig. 75 Instrument panel, on dash panel.
Details of the instruments
›
›
›
Fig. 75
: Time set butt
on
›››
page 78.
1
68
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Revolutions counter (with the engine
running, in thousands of r
e
v
olutions per
minut
e)
›
››
page 78.
Engine coolant temperature indicator
›››
page 79.
Displays on the screen
›››
page 69.
Fuel reserve display
›››
page 79.
Speedometer.
Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).
Status display
Possible indications on the instrument
panel displ
ay
Diff
er
ent pieces of inf
ormation can be dis-
pl
ayed on the screen of the instrument panel,
depending on the features of the vehicle.
●
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
●
Warning and information messages
●
Odometer
●
Time
›››
page 78
●
Indications of the radio and navigation sys-
tem
●
Indications of the phone
●
Outside temperature
●
Indications of the compass
●
Selector lever positions
2
3
4
5
6
7
●
Gear
-change r
ecommendation
›
›
›
page 252
●
Display of travel data (multifunction dis-
play) and menus for different settings
›››
page 70
●
Service interval display
›››
page 81
●
Second speed indication
›››
page 70.
●
Start-Stop system status display
›››
page 243
●
Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-
tion system
›››
page 76
Doors, bonnet and rear lid open
When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-
ing, the instrument panel display shows if any
of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are
opened and, in some cases, it is also indica-
ted by an audible warning. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
el fitted.
Selector lever positions (DSG
®
dual clutch
shift)
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the side of the lever and on the in-
strument panel display. When the lever is in
the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in
some cases, the gear engaged in each case
is shown on the instrument panel display .
Outside temperature indicator
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C
(+43 °F)
›››
.
When the v
ehicl
e is st
ationary, when the aux-
iliary heat
er is s
witched on or when driving at
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
perature due to the heat produced by the en-
gine.
The margin of measurement ranges from
-40 °C (-50 °F) to +50 °C (+122 °F).
Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
tion for saving fuel
›››
page 252.
Odometer
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-
tance travelled since the last time it was reset
to zero.
●
Press button
›
›
›
Fig. 75
7
to reset
the trip r
ecor
der t
o 0.
»
69
Operation
Indications of the compass
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
t
em on, the car
dinal point corr
esponding t
o
the v
ehicle's direction of travel is displayed
on the instrument panel
›››
page 81.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
To change the units, in the Settings menu,
select the option Second speed
›››
page 70.
Vehicles without menu display on the instru-
ment panel
●
Switch on the engine.
●
Press the button three times. The odom-
eter display flashes on the instrument panel
display.
●
Press the key once
. “mph” or “km/h”
is displ
ayed briefly inst
ead of the odomet
er
.
●
This activ
ates the second speed display. To
switch it off, repeat the procedure.
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
WARNING
Even when the outside temperature is high-
er than freezing temperat
ure, some roads
and bridges could be frozen.
●
The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that
there may be a risk of freezing.
●
At outside temperatures above +4 °C
(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the
“ice crystal symbol” is not on.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
There are different instrument panel
s and
therefore the versions and instructions on
the display may vary. In the case of dis-
plays without warning or information texts,
faults are indicated exclusively by the con-
trol warning lamps.
●
Some indications on the instrument panel
screen may be concealed by a sudden
event, e.g. an incoming call.
●
If there are several warnings at the same
time, the symbols will be displayed one af-
ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-
bols will stay on until you remove the
cause.
Instrument panel menus
The number of menus and information items
available will depend on the vehicl
e’s elec-
tronics and features.
A specialised workshop can programme or
modify additional functions, according to the
vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting
a SEAT dealership for this.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is stationary.
■
Multifunction indicator (driving data)
›››
page 71
■
Assists (enable or disable)
■
Sign Assist
›››
page 76
■
Lane Assist
›››
page 271
■
Exit Assist
■
Blind spot
›››
page 273
■
Fatigue detection
›››
page 74
■
Front Assist
›››
page 260
■
Audio
■
Navigation
■
Telephone
■
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 166
■
Vehicle status
›››
page 74
■
Setup
›››
page 72
70
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Driving data indicator (multifunc-
tion displ
ay)
The display of the travel data (multifunction
display) shows different v
alues about the
journey and the consumption.
Change from one display to another
In vehicles without a multifunction steering
wheel:
●
Press the rocker switch
on the wiper
lever .
In vehicl
es with a multifunction steering
wheel:
●
Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-
tion steering wheel
›››
page 84
.
Driving data memories
The multifunction display has two automatic
memories:
Partial memory: The memory collects
journey and consumption data from
when the ignition is turned on until when
it is turned off. The memory is automati-
cally deleted if the journey is interrupted
for more than 2 hours. If the journey is
continued in less than 2 hours after the
ignition is switched off, the new data is
added to the data already stored in the
memory.
1
Total memory: The memory records the
values for a specific number of partial
trips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-
nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or
1,999.9 km (or miles) for 9,999 km (or
miles), depending on the model of in-
strument panel. On reaching either of
these limits, the memory is automatically
erased and starts to count from 0 again.
The selected memory will be shown in the
upper right-hand corner of the display.
Changing memory
●
With the ignition switched on, and display-
ing memory 1 or 2, briefly press the
key on the wiper lever or the on the multi-
function st
eering wheel t
o s
wit
ch fr
om one
memory to the another
Manually erasing memory 1 or 2
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Hold the
button on the wiper lever
or the
button on the multi-function steer-
ing wheel do
wn f
or about 2 seconds.
P
ossibl
e displ
ays
●
Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h)
and minutes (min) since the ignition was
switched on.
●
Current fuel consumption: The current
fuel consumption while driving is displayed in
2 l/100 km (or miles per gallon, mpg); when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not mov-
ing, in l/h (or gallons per hour).
●
Average consumption: When the ignition
is switched on, the average consumption (in
l/100 km or in mpg) is displayed after the ve-
hicle has moved approximately 100 metres
(328 feet). Otherwise horizontal lines are dis-
played. The value shown is updated approxi-
mately every 5 seconds.
●
Range: Approximate distance in km (or
miles) that can still be travelled with the fuel
remaining in the tank, assuming the same
style of driving is maintained. This is calcula-
ted using the current fuel consumption.
●
Distance travelled: Distance travelled, af-
ter ignition is switched on, in km (or miles).
●
Average speed: After the ignition is switch-
ed on, the average speed will be shown after
a distance of approximately 100 metres (328
feet) has been travelled. Otherwise horizontal
lines are displayed. The value shown is upda-
ted approximately every 5 seconds.
●
Digital speed display: Current speed dis-
played digitally.
●
Digital oil temperature display: Updated
engine oil temperature digital display
●
Speed warning at --- km/h: If the stored
speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h,
or 18 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given
together with a visual warning.
»
71
Operation
Storing a speed for the speed warning
●
Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h.
●
Press the button on the windscreen
wiper l
e
v
er or the butt
on on the multifunc-
tion st
eering wheel t
o st
or
e the curr
ent speed
and activate the warning.
●
Activate: adjust to the desired speed within
5 seconds using the rocker switch
on the
windscr
een wiper l
e
v
er or by t
urning the
thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel. Next, press the
or key
again or w
ait f
or a f
e
w seconds. The speed is
st
ored and the warning activated.
●
Deactivate: press button
or button
. The stored speed is deleted.
P
ersonalising the displ
ays
It is possibl
e t
o sel
ect which of the displays in
the multifunction display you wish to see on
the instrument panel in the Settings menu.
The units of measurement can also be modi-
fied
›››
page 72.
Settings menu
The number of menus and information items
av
ail
abl
e will depend on the v
ehicl
e’s elec-
tronics and features.
Assistance systems
Settings for different driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 84.
Multifunction display data
Configuration of the multifunction display da-
ta that you wish to see on the instrument pan-
el display
›››
page 71.
Compass
Changing the magnetic region and calibrat-
ing the compass
›››
page 81.
Convenience
Changing vehicle convenience functions
›››
page 72.
Lights and visibility
Configuration of vehicle lighting
›››
page 73.
Time
Changing the hours and minutes of the in-
strument panel clock and the navigation sys-
tem. The time can be displayed in 12 or 24
hour format. The S in the upper part of the
display indicates that the clock is set to sum-
mer time.
Winter tyres
Changing the visual and audible speed
warnings. This function should only be used
when the vehicle is fitted with winter tyres,
which are not designed for letting the vehicle
reach its maximum speed.
Language
Changing the language of the display texts
and the navigation system.
Units
Changing the units of measurement for the
temperature, consumption and distance.
Second speed
Switching second speed display on and off.
Service
Check the service notifications or reset the
service intervals to zero.
Factory settings
Some functions of the Configuration menu
will be reset to the factory value.
Submenu Convenience
Central locking
●
Auto. lock (Auto Lock): aut
omatic l
ocking
of all doors and boot when r
eaching a speed
of ar
ound 15 km/h (
10 mph). In order to unlock
the vehicle when it is stopped, push the
72
Instruments and warning/control lamps
central locking button, pull the door handle or
r
emo
v
e the k
ey fr
om the ignition lock if the
Auto unlock function is enabled.
●
Auto unlock (Auto Unlock): Unlocking all
doors and the boot by removing the ignition
key.
●
Unlock door: when unlocking with the key
the following doors are unlocked:
All
One door: only the driver’s door unlocks.
Pressing the key a second time un-
locks all of the doors and the rear lid.
Vehicle side: the doors on the driver's
side are unlocked. In vehicles with the
Keyless Access system
›››
page 93,
when the corresponding handle is
moved, the doors on the side of the vehi-
cle where the key is located are un-
locked.
Handling windows
Window operation settings: this enables the
windows to be opened or closed when the
vehicle is unlocked or locked respectively.
The open function can only be activated from
the driver door
›››
page 111.
Rear vision mirror adjustment
Tilts passenger mirror downwards when re-
verse gear is engaged. This enables the driv-
–
–
–
er to see the edge of the pavement, for exam-
ple
›››
page 127.
Exterior mirror adjust.
If synchronised adjustment is selected,
when the driver side exterior mirror is adjus-
ted, the passenger exterior mirror is also
moved.
Factory settings
Some functions of the Convenience subme-
nu will be reset to the factory value.
Lights and visibility subme-
nu
Coming home and leaving home
This permits the adjustment of the time the
headl
amps st
ay on aft
er l
ocking or unl
ocking
the vehicle, the function can also be connec-
ted or disconnected here
›››
page 119.
Footwell light
This permits the adjustment of the brightness
of the footwell lighting when the doors are
open, the function can also be connected or
disconnected here
Convenience turn signals
Switching convenience turn signals on and
off When the convenience turn signals are
connected,, these flash at least three times
when the turn signal is switched on
›››
page 115.
Factory settings
All the configurations in the Lights & visi-
bility sub-menu will be reset to the factory
settings.
Tourist light
Headlamp adjustment for countries in which
vehicles are driven on the other side of the
road. When the mark is activated, the head-
lamps of a left-hand drive vehicle are adjus-
ted for driving on the left. This function must
only be used for a short period.
Personal convenience settings
When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recom-
mends that each person al
w
ays uses “their”
o
wn r
emot
e control key. When the ignition is
switched off, or the vehicle is locked, the per-
sonal convenience settings are stored and
automatically allocated to the vehicle key.
The values of the personalised convenience
settings of the following menu options are al-
located to the vehicle key:
■
Parking heating menu
■
Configuration Menu
■
Time
»
73
Operation
■
L
anguage
■
Units
■
Convenience settings menu
■
Door unl
ock (individual opening, Aut
o
L
ock)
■
Conv
enience handling of windows
■
Rear vision mirror adjustment
■
Lights & visibility settings menu
■
Coming home and leaving home
■
Footwell light
■
Convenience turn signals
The stored settings are automatically activa-
ted, at the latest when the ignition is switched
on. Please refer to the information and tips re-
lating to the seat memory
›››
page 133.
Warning and information messages
(Vehicle status)
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and whil
e the v
ehicl
e is moving.
Faults displayed on the instrument panel as
red and yellow warning symbols accompa-
nied with messages and, depending on the
case, even an audible warning
›››
page 85.
The representation of the messages and
symbols may vary depending on the version
of the instrument panel.
Existing faults can also be checked manually.
To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or
Vehicle
›››
page 70.
Priority 1 warning (red)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Stop
driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-
nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-
nal assistance.
Priority 2 warning (yellow)
The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-
companied by audible warnings). Operating
faults or the lack of operating fluids can
cause damage to the vehicle or a fault.
Check the faulty function as soon as possible.
If necessary, seek professional assistance.
Information message
It provides information about processes in the
vehicle.
Driver alert system (break recom-
mendation)*
Fig. 76
On the instrument panel display: driver
al
ert syst
em symbol
.
Function and operation
F
atigue det
ection det
ermines the driving be-
haviour of the driv
er when st
arting a journey,
making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 76. The mes-
sage on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
74
Instruments and warning/control lamps
button on the multi function steering
wheel
›
›
›
page 83
.
The message can be r
ecalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display
›››
page 71.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
The system can be switched on or off in the
Assistants menu. A mark indicates that the
adjustment has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
gue detection system tempt you into t
aking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsi-
bility of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
the information in the section
›››
page 75,
System limitations.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly int
erpret an intended driving ma-
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue detection has been devel
oped
for driving on motorways and well paved
roads only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
75
Operation
Road signs detection system*
1)
Fig. 77
On the instrument panel display: ex-
ampl
es of speed limits or o
v
ert
aking pr
ohibi-
tions with their respective additional signs.
The traffic sign detection system records the
st
andar
d tr
affic signs in fr
ont of the v
ehicle
with a camera located on the base of the in-
terior mirror and provides information about
speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.
Within its limitations, the system also displays
additional signals, such as time-specific pro-
hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers
›››
page 298 or limitations that only apply in
the event of rain. Even on journeys without
signs, the system may display any applicable
speed limits.
Applicable countries
At the time of printing this instruction manual,
the road signs detection system worked in the
following countries:
Germany, Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Vatican
City, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Ire-
land, Italy, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Mona-
co, Norway, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal,
United Kingdom, Czech Republic, San Marino,
Sweden, Switzerland.
Road sign detection system messages:
Error: Sign Assist
●
System fault. Have the system checked by
a specialised workshop.
Sign Assist: Clean the windscreen!
●
The windscreen is dirty in the area of the
camera. Clean the windscreen.
Sign Assist: only partly available
at the moment.
●
The navigator does not transmit data. Con-
nect the navigator and insert the navigation
data media.
●
OR: road sign detection is not supported in
the country where the vehicle is currently
driving.
Switching on and off
●
Connect or disconnect the assist system in
the Settings menu in the SEAT information
system
›››
page 72.
●
OR: press the button for the driver assis-
tance systems on the main beam lever
›››
page 84.
Display of traffic signs
Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions to-
gether with the corresponding additional
signs are shown on the instrument panel dis-
play. Depending on the navigation system in-
stalled in the vehicle, traffic signs will be
shown as above and also in the navigation
system's map display.
When the traffic sign detection system is con-
nected, a camera located on the base of the
interior rear-view mirror records the traffic
signs in front of the vehicle. After checking
1)
System available depending on the country.
76
Instruments and warning/control lamps
and evaluating the information from the cam-
er
a, the navigation syst
em and the curr
ent
v
ehicl
e data, up to three valid road signs are
displayed,
›››
Fig. 77 with their additional
signs.
●
First: The sign that is currently valid for the
driver is shown in the left side of the screen
For example, a maximum speed limit of
130 km/h (100 mph)
›››
Fig. 77 .
●
Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-
stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec-
ond, together with the additional rain sign.
●
Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is
working while you are driving, the signal with
the additional rain sign will be shown first, on
the left, as it is the one that is applicable at
the time.
●
Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.
No overtaking at certain times, will be dis-
played in third place
›››
Fig. 77 .
The permanent display on the instrument
panel screen is shown as you pass the real
traffic signs.
The signs for entering and leaving towns acti-
vate the display of the usual speed limits for
that country on roads in populated areas and
national highways, even if the speed is not
limited by an actual traffic sign.
The end of a prohibition or limitation is not
displayed.
If you exceed the speed limits shown, a warn-
ing will not appear. The system does not rec-
ognise residential street signs. The current le-
gal provisions apply.
Trailer mode
Connect or disconnect the secondary dis-
play for speed limits and overtaking bans that
apply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Set-
tings menu in the SEAT information system
›››
page 70.
Limited operation
The traffic sign detection system has certain
limitations. The following cases may lead the
system to operate with limitations or not at
all:
●
In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,
rain, fog or intense mist.
●
In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-
on traffic or by the sun.
●
When driving at high speeds.
●
If the camera is covered or dirty.
●
If the traffic signs are out of the camera's
field of vision.
●
If the traffic signs are partially or totally
covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-
cles.
●
In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil
the regulations.
●
In the case of damaged or bent traffic
signs.
●
In the case of variable messages on over-
head or gantry signs (LED-based variable
traffic signs or other lighting units).
●
If the maps on the navigation system are
not up-to-date.
●
In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles
that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on
lorries.
WARNING
The technology in the traffic sign detection
system cannot change the limits imposed
by the laws of physics and only works with-
in the system's limits. Do not l
et the extra
convenience afforded by the traffic sign
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and
fog may lead to the system failing to dis-
play traffic signs or not displaying them
correctly.
●
If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-
ered or damaged, system operation may
be impaired.
»
77
Operation
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications shown on the traffic sign detec-
tion system may diff
er from the actual cur-
rent traffic situation.
●
The system may not detect or correctly
show all the traffic signs.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the system.
WARNING
If messages are ignored, the vehicle may
stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
Ne
ver ignore the messages displayed.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Note
To avoid affecting the correct operation of
the system, take the foll
owing points into
consideration:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Always replace damaged or worn blades
when required to avoid lines on the cam-
era's field of vision.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-
sion.
●
The use of out
dated maps on the naviga-
tion system may cause the system to show
traffic signs incorrectly.
●
In the waypoints mode of the navigation
system, the traffic sign detection system is
only partly available.
●
Failure to heed the control lamps and
corresponding text messages when they
light up may result in damage to the vehi-
cle.
Time
●
Press the
›
›
›
Fig. 75
1
to select the hour
or minut
e displ
ay.
●
T
o continue setting, pr
ess the
›››
Fig. 75
7
button. Hold button down to
scr
oll thr
ough the numbers quickly.
●
Pr
ess the
butt
on again to end the clock
setting.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine r
e
v
olutions per minut
e
.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in any
gear after running-in and with the engine hot.
However, it is advisable to change up a gear
or move the selector lever to D (or lift your
foot off the accelerator) before the needle
reaches the red zone
›››
.
W
e r
ecommend that you av
oid high r
e
vs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
al information in
›››
page 252, Selecting the
optimal gear.
CAUTION
●
To prevent damage t
o the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the
red zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
save fuel and minimise emissions and en-
gine noise.
78
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Fuel gauge
Fig. 78
On the instrument panel: fuel gauge for
petr
ol and diesel
.
Control lamps
It lights up.
Gauge position in the red mark
(arrow)
››
›
Fig. 78
The fuel tank is almost empty
›››
. The fuel tank re-
serve has been consumed
›››
page 355
.
Refuel as soon as possible
›››
.
It lights up
The fuel tank is not properly closed.
Stop the vehicle and close the t
ank cap correctly.
The display only works when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on.
The fuel r
ange is displ
ayed on the instrument
panel.
Y
ou can consult the tank capacity of your ve-
hicle in the
›››
page 355 section.
When the control lamp lights up the addi-
tional petrol powered heating and the addi-
tional heater are automatically switched off.
WARNING
When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may
stall in traffic and cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
●
If the fuel t
ank level is too low, fuel could
reach the engine irregularly, particularly
when driving up or down slopes.
●
The steering system and the driver assis-
tance systems and brakes do not work
when the engine is running irregularly or
switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-
lar supply thereof.
●
Always refuel when there is only one
quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle
to stop due to lack of fuel.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An
irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring
and unburnt fuel could enter the e
xhaust
system. The catalytic converter or the par-
ticulate filter may get damaged!
Note
The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to
the fuel pump symbol points out towards
the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank
flap.
Engine coolant temperature indica-
tor
Fig. 79 Instrument panel: engine coolant tem-
per
at
ur
e indicat
or
.
Cool zone. The engine has not r
eached
oper
ating t
emper
at
ure yet. Avoid high
speeds and stressing the engine if it has
not reached operating temperature.
Normal zone. At high outside tempera-
tures and when the engine is subject to
high forces, the needle may move consid-
erably to the right. This is no cause for
concern, provided the control lamp does
not light up
»
A
B
79
Operation
Warning area. When the engine is w
ork
-
ing har
d, especially at high outside t
em-
per
atures, the needle may move into the
warning area.
The coolant temperature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on.
Control and warning lamp
It lights up red
Engine coolant system faulty.
Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
It lights up red
Indicator in the normal area
B
Insufficient engine coolant level.
Check the engine coolant when the engine has
cooled and, if it is low
, refill with engine coolant
›››
page 321.
Even if the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.
C
It lights up red
Indicator in the warning zone
C
Excessive engine coolant temperature.
Stop the vehicle! St
op the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Switch off the engine and wait for it to
cool down and for the needle to return to the normal
area. Check the engine coolant level
›››
page 321.
Flashes red
Engine coolant system faulty.
Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
●
To ensure a long useful life f
or the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
›››
page 71 as a guide.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine o
verheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
80
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Compass*
Fig. 80
Magnetic zones
The compass does not require calibration in
v
ehicl
es f
or which the navigation syst
em w
as
mounted at the factory. The option compass
disappears.
The compass in vehicles in which the naviga-
tion system was not mounted at the factory,
is permanently and automatically calibrated.
If electronic or metal accessories (mobile
phone, television) are subsequently mounted
in the vehicle, the compass should be recali-
brated manually.
Adjusting the magnetic zone
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select the Settings menu followed by the
option Compass and Zone.
●
Select the magnetic zone corresponding to
the position of the vehicle
›››
Fig. 80.
●
Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone
(1-15).
Calibrating compass
To calibrate the compass you must be in one
of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient
space to be able to trace a circumference
with the vehicle.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select the Settings menu followed by the
option Compass and Calibrate.
●
Confirm the message Turn through a
full circle to calibrate the compass
with key
on the wiper lever or key
on the multifunction steering wheel and then
t
urn thr
ough a full cir
cl
e at ar
ound 10 km/h (6
mph).
When the corresponding cardinal point is dis-
played, the calibration is complete.
Service intervals
The service interval indication is shown on the
instrument panel display.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e
.g. Oil change service) and
services without engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
»
81
Operation
In vehicles with Services est
ablished by
time or mil
eage
, the service int
erv
als are al-
ready pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use
and individual driving styles are considered.
The advance warning first appears 20 days
before the date established for the corre-
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-
maining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and
the time is given in complete days. The cur-
rent service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
ly lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
If a service or an inspection has to be carried
out soon, a service reminder will be dis-
played when the ignition is switched on.
In vehicles without text messages, a spanner
symbol is displayed on the instrument
panel and a figure given in km. The number of
kilometres shown is the maximum number
that may be driven until the next service. After
a few seconds, the display mode changes. A
clock symbol appears and the number of
days until the next service appointment is
due.
In vehicles with text messages, Service in
--- km (miles) or --- days is displayed
on the instrument panel.
Service due
After the service date, an audible warning is
given when the ignition is switched on and the
spanner displayed on the screen flashes
for a few seconds. In vehicles with text mes-
sages, the following will be displayed on the
instrument panel: Service now.
Consult a service notification
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
●
Press the button on the instrument panel
several times until the spanner symbol is
displayed.
●
OR: select the Settings > Service
menu.
●
Select the Info option.
When the service date has past, a minus
sign is displayed in front of the number of kilo-
metres or days. In vehicles with text messag-
es the following is displayed: Service ---
km (miles) or --- days ago.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
Vehicles with text messages
●
Select the menu Settings> Service.
●
Select the Reset option.
●
Confirm with key
on the multifunction
st
eering wheel when r
equir
ed by the syst
em.
V
ehicles without text messages
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Press and hold the
›
›
›
Fig. 75
7
but-
t
on.
●
S
wit
ch ignition back on.
●
R
el
ease key
and, within the next 20
seconds, pr
ess k
ey
›
›
›
Fig. 75
1
Do not r
estart the indicator between the
service int
erv
al
s, otherwise the inf
ormation
displayed will be incorrect.
If the oil change service is reset manually, the
service interval display changes to a fixed
service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible
oil change service.
Note
●
The service message disappears after a
few seconds, when the engine is star
ted or
when
button is pressed on the wiper
82
Instruments and warning/control lamps
lever, or the button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
●
In vehicles with the LongLif
e system in
which the battery has been disconnected
for a long period of time, it is not possible to
calculate the date of the next service.
Therefore the service interval display may
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the
maximum service intervals permitted
›››
page 336.
●
If you reset the display manually, the next
service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
cles with fixed service intervals. For this
reason we recommend that the service in-
terval display be reset by a SEAT author-
ised Dealer.
Using the instrument panel
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
r
ead the diff
er
ent functions of the displ
ay by
scr
olling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
to an accident and cause injuries.
●
Never use the menus on the instrument
panel display whil
e the vehicle is in motion.
Note
After loading or changing the 12-volt bat-
tery, check the system settings. If the pow-
er supply is interrupt
ed, the system settings
might be incorrect or deleted.
Operation with the wiper lever
Fig. 81
Wiper lever: buttons for using the in-
strument panel menus.
As long as a priority 1
›
›
›
page 7
4
warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button
›››
Fig. 81
1
.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
pr
ess butt
on
1
; if necessary, several times.
●
To display the menus
›
›
›
page 70
or t
o re-
turn to the selection of menus from a menu or
from an informative display, hold down the
rocker button
2
.
●
To change from one menu to another, press
the upper or l
o
w
er part of the r
ock
er switch.
●
To open the menu or the informative display
shown, press button
1
or wait a few seconds
until the menu or the inf
ormativ
e displ
ay
opens aut
omatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displ
ayed, press the upper or
lower part of the rocker switch
2
until the re-
quir
ed menu option is check
ed. The option
appears fr
amed.
●
Pr
ess butt
on
1
to make the required modi-
fications. A mark indicat
es that the syst
em or
function is activ
at
ed.
Back t
o menu selection
Select Back on the corresponding menu to
exit.
Note
If when switching on the ignition warnings
are shown about existing faults, it might not
»
83
Operation
be possible to change the settings or show
the information as described. In this case,
go to a specialised workshop and r
equest a
repair.
Operation using the multifunction
steering wheel
Fig. 82
Multifunction steering wheel: buttons
f
or using the instrument panel menus.
As long as a priority 1
›
›
›
page 7
4
warning is
active, it will not be possible to access any
menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and
hidden with the button
of the multifunction
st
eering wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 82
.
Select a menu or an informative display
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,
press the button
›
›
›
Fig. 82
; if necessary,
se
veral times.
●
To change menus, use buttons
or
›
›
›
Fig. 82
.
●
T
o open the menu or the information dis-
played, press the button
›
›
›
Fig. 82
or w
ait
a few seconds until the menu or the informa-
tive display opens automatically.
Changing menu settings
●
In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-
wheel of the multifunction steering wheel
›››
Fig. 82 until the desired option of the menu
is highlighted. The option appears framed.
●
Press the button
›
›
›
Fig. 82
t
o make the
required modifications. A mark indicates that
the system or function is activated.
Back to menu selection
Press the button
or
›
›
›
Fig. 82
.
Butt
on for the driver assistance
systems*
Fig. 83
On the turn signal and main beam lev-
er: butt
on f
or driv
er assist
ance syst
ems.
With the turn signal and main beam headlight
l
e
v
er butt
on, you can activ
ate or deactivate
the driver assistance systems displayed in the
Assistance systems menu .
Activate or deactivate a driver assistance
system
●
Briefly press the
›››
Fig. 83 button to open
the Assistants menu.
●
Select the driver assistance system and ac-
tivate or deactivate it
›››
page 83. A mark in-
dicates that driver assistance system is
switched on.
●
Afterwards, mark or confirm the selection
with button
on the windscreen wiper
l
e
v
er or butt
on on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel .
84
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Control lamps
Contr
ol and w
arning l
amps
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings
›››
, faults or certain functions.
Some control and warning lamps come on
when the ignition is swit
ched on, and switch
off when the engine starts running, or while
driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action
›››
page 68, Instrument panel.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
Red warning lamps
Parking brake engaged OR anomaly in the
brake system
››
›
page 279.
Engine cooling fluid
›››
page 79
.
Engine oil pressure
›
›
›
page 319
.
Open or not pr
operly closed door
›››
page 102.
Open or not properly closed rear lid
›››
page 106
Fault in the st
eering system
›››
page 253.
AdBlue l
evel too low, OR fault in the SCR
system
›››
page 312.
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
belt
›››
page 14.
Pr
ess the foot brake
›››
page 279
,
›››
page 246,
›››
page 264.
Fault in the generator
›››
page 326.
Yellow warning lamps
Front brake pads worn
›››
page 279
.
Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by
the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation
›
››
page 284.
ASR manually deactivated
›››
page 284.
Fault in the ABS
›
››
page 284.
El
ectronic parking brake faulty
›››
page 279
.
Rear fog light switched on
›››
page 115
.
Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
›
›
›
page 1
15
.
Fault in the emission control system
›››
page 313.
Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault
in the management of the diesel engine
›››
page 313
.
Fault in the petrol engine management
›››
page 313.
P
articulate filter blocked
›››
page 313.
F
ault in the steering system
›››
page 253.
T
yre monitor system
›››
page 333.
Windshiel
d cleaning fluid too low
›››
page 123.
Fuel t
ank almost empty
›
›
›
page 7
9
.
Low engine oil level
›››
page 319.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
sioners
›››
page 23.
Front passenger front airbag disabled
›››
page 23.
Adblue l
evel low, OR fault in the SCR sys-
tem
›››
page 312.
Gas tank lid is open
›››
page 79.
Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)
›››
page 271
.
Other warning lamps
Turn lights or emergency lights on
›››
page 115
.
»
85
Operation
Press the foot brake
›››
page 246.
Speed regulator
›››
page 258; OR
Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)
›››
page 264.
Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning
›››
page 271
.
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 115
.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)
›››
page 115
.
Service interval display
›››
page 81.
Mobil
e phone connected through Blue-
t
ooth
›
›
›
page 22
4.
Mobile telephone battery charge status
›››
page 224
.
Risk of freezing
›››
page 69.
St
art-Stop system activated
›
›
›
page 2
43
.
Start-Stop system unavailable
›››
page 243
.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nored, faults may occur in the vehicle
, it
may stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-
ous injuries may occur.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other driv
ers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries
›››
page 315.
86
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Multifunction steering wheel*
Oper
ation of the audio
, t
el
ephone and navigation syst
em with voice control
Fig. 84 Controls on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
modul
e fr
om wher
e it is possibl
e t
o control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the driv-
er.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*
A
Turn
Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down.
Turn announcement volume
up/down.
A
Press
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation
B
a)
– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long pr
ess).
– Active call: hang up active call (short press).
– No active / incoming call: open phone menu (short press), re-dial the last active call (long press).
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, driving data).
C
/
D
Search for the previous/next
station
b)
.
Short press: Swit
ch to the
pre
vious/next track.
Long press: Fast rewind/for-
ward
c)
.
No function
– No active call: Radio/Me-
dia functionality (except
AUX)
– Active call: no function
No function for the other modes
(navigation, assistants, vehicle
status, travel data).
»
87
Operation
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*
E
/
F
a)
Change menu on instrument panel.
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle st
atus, travel data).
G
Activate/deactivate voice control.
d)
This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.
H
Turn
Next/previous pre-tuning
(only if the instrument panel
is in the audio menu).
Next/previous pre-tuning
(only if the instrument panel
is in the audio menu).
Operates the instrument
panel menu, depending on
the one that is displayed.
Operates the instrument
panel menu, depending on
the one that is displayed.
Oper
ates the instrument panel
menu, depending on the one that
is displayed.
H
Press
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c)
These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
d)
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).
88
Instruments and warning/control lamps
Three button unit in the roof
Thr
ee butt
on modul
e*
Fig. 85
Three button module in the roof: tele-
phone management syst
em contr
ol
s.
Press it briefly: to accept or end a call.
Keep it pressed do
wn: to reject a call.
Short press: to start or stop the voice contr
ol
function, for example, to make a call.
a)
Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain infor-
mation about the SEAT br
and and selected
additional services related to traffic and trav-
el.
Hold down for over 2 seconds: to obtain help
from the network of SEAT deal
ers in the event
of a breakdown.
a)
Not operational if a navigation system with voice
contr
ol is fitt
ed.
Inf
ormation and assist
ance call
s
Communication with the SEAT Customer
Care Service is established using the and
buttons of the three-button unit
1)
. The system
will automatically connect you with the Assis-
tance Centre of the relevant country. You will
only be able to make calls if your mobile is
turned on and connected to the pre-installed
Bluetooth.
Information call
The Information call button offers infor-
mation on the SEAT brand and selected addi-
tional services related to traffic and your
travel.
To establish communication, press the but-
ton for more than 2 seconds.
In countries where there is no information tel-
ephone number, an information call is made
by pressing the button.
Assistance call
The assistance call button gives im-
mediate help in case of a breakdown. To this
end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile
assistance vehicles, is at your disposal.
To establish communication, press the but-
ton for more than 2 seconds.
Note
●
Calls made with the and butt
ons take
priority over normal calls. If the or but-
ton is pressed during a normal telephone
call, this call will be cut off and an informa-
tion call or assistance call will be made.
●
If the assistance call button is pressed
during an information call, the information
call will be interrupted to make the assis-
tance call (and vice versa).
●
Mobile phone coverage must be availa-
ble to place a call to the information and
assistance services. This service might not
be available in some countries.
Activate and deactivate voice con-
tr
ol
Switching on the speech control system
●
Press the butt
on on the multi-function
st
eering wheel.
●
OR:
on the thr
ee-butt
on unit, press .
●
Wait for the acoustic signal.
●
Give the command.
●
Follow the dialogue instructions (extended
dialogue).
»
1)
Depending upon country.
89
Operation
Ending voice control
●
Press the butt
on on the multi-function
st
eering wheel.
●
OR:
on the thr
ee-butt
on unit, press .
Interrupting the instructions
●
During the instructions, press the button
on the multi-function steering wheel.
●
OR: on the three-button unit, press .
●
You will be able to give a command imme-
diately afterwards.
90
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Set of v
ehicl
e k
eys
V
ehicl
e key
Fig. 86 Assignment of buttons on the remote
contr
ol k
ey.
Key to the
›
›
›
Fig. 86
Unl
ock the v
ehicle
Lock the vehicle
Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button
until all the turn signals on the vehicle
flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open
the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it
1
2
3
will lock again. In addition, the lamp on
the k
ey fl
ashes.
F
ol
ding the k
ey shaft in and out
Open the electric sliding door.
With the vehicle key the vehicle may be
locked or unlocked remotely
›››
page 93.
The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-
tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-
cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote
control and new battery is several metres
around the vehicle.
If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle
using the remote control key, this should be
re-synchronised
›››
page 93 or the battery
changed
›››
page 92.
Different keys belonging to the vehicle may
be used.
Control lamp on the vehicle key
When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,
the control lamp flashes
›››
Fig. 86 (arrow)
once briefly, but if the button is held down for
a longer period the control lamp flashes sev-
eral times, such as in convenience opening.
If the vehicle key control lamp does not light
up when the button is pressed, replace the
key's battery
›››
page 92.
4
5
Spare key
T
o obt
ain a spar
e k
ey and other v
ehicle keys,
the vehicle ID number is required.
Each new key contains a microchip which
must be coded with the data from the vehicle
electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not
work if it does not contain a microchip or the
microchip has not been encoded. This is also
true for keys which are specially cut for the
vehicle.
The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be
obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-
cialised workshop or an approved key service
qualified to create this kind of key.
New keys or spare keys must be synchronised
before use
›››
page 93.
WARNING
●
Never leave chil
dren or disabled persons
in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they
may not be able to leave the vehicle or
manage on their own.
●
An uncontrolled use of the key could start
the engine or activate any electric equip-
ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk
of accident. The doors can be locked using
the remote control key. This could become
an obstacle for assistance in an emergen-
cy situation.
●
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.
An unauthorised use of your vehicle could
result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore
»
91
Operation
always take the key with you when you
leave the vehicle
.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly block and it would
be impossible to steer the vehicle.
CAUTION
All of the vehicle keys contain electronic
components. Pr
otect them from damage,
impacts and humidit
y.
Note
●
Only use the key button when you require
the corr
esponding function. Pushing the
button unnecessarily could accidentally
unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is
also possible even when you are outside
the radius of action.
●
Key operation can be greatly influenced
by overlapping radio signals close to the
vehicle working in the same range of fre-
quencies, for example, radio transmitters or
mobile telephones.
●
Obstacles between the remote control
and the vehicle, bad weather conditions
and discharged batteries can considerably
reduce the range of the remote control.
●
If the buttons of the vehicle key are
pressed or one of the central locking but-
tons
›››
page 95 is pressed repeatedly in
short succession, the central locking brief-
ly disconnects as protection against over-
loading. The vehicle is then unlock
ed. Lock
it if necessary.
●
Spare remote control keys are available
at your Technical Service, where they must
be matched to the locking system.
●
Up to five remote control keys can be
used.
To change the battery
Fig. 87
Vehicle key: battery compartment cov-
er
.
Fig. 88 Vehicle key: remove the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
orkshop t
o r
epl
ace the batt
ery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
cle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 91.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key
›››
Fig. 87 in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suit
abl
e thin ob
ject
›
›
›
Fig. 88.
●
Place the new battery in the compartment
as shown
›››
Fig. 88, pressing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow
›››
.
●
Fit the cover as shown
›
›
›
Fig. 87
, pr
essing it
onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di-
rection to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
92
Opening and closing
CAUTION
●
If the battery is not changed correctly,
the vehicle k
ey may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the
polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
rectly and with respect for the environ-
ment.
Synchronize the vehicle key
If the butt
on is pr
essed fr
equently outside
of the v
ehicl
e range, it is possible that the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-
ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-
synchronised as described below:
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 91.
●
If necessary, remove the cover from the
driver door lever
›››
page 102.
●
Press the button on the vehicle key. For
this, it must remain with the vehicle.
●
Open the vehicle within one minute using
the key blade. The key has been synchron-
ised.
●
If necessary, fit the cap.
Central locking
Introduction
Central locking functions correctly when all
the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If
the driver door is open, the v
ehicle cannot be
locked with the key.
If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system, it may only be locked
with the ignition off and the driver's door
closed.
The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for
a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may
run down and fail to start the motor.
WARNING
The incorrect use of the central locking
system may cause serious injuries.
●
The central locking system will l
ock all
doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can
prevent any non-authorised individual from
opening the doors and accessing the vehi-
cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or
accident, locked doors will complicate ac-
cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-
sengers.
●
Never leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle. The central locking
button can be used to lock all the doors
from within. Therefore
, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked
in the vehicle can be exposed to very high
or very low temperatures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
●
Never leave individuals locked in a closed
and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,
they may not be able to exit the vehicle by
themselves or get help.
Description
Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid
and the t
ank fl
ap t
o be unl
ock
ed centrally:
●
From outside, using the vehicle key
›››
page 95.
●
From outside with the Keyless Access
›››
page 96 system,
●
From inside, by pushing the central locking
button
›››
page 95.
Various functions are available to improve the
vehicle safety:
●
Security system “Safe”
›››
page 99
●
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
»
93
Operation
●
Sel
ectiv
e unl
ocking syst
em
●
Aut
omatic speed dependent locking and
unlocking system (Auto Lock)
●
Emergency unlocking system
The Settings > Comfort menu can be
used to connect or disconnect special cen-
tral locking functions
›››
page 70, or this can
be done at a specialised workshop.
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary
unlocking
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-
intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-
cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-
onds, it re-locks automatically.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*
The Auto Lock function locks the doors and
the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-
tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle
can also be unlocked via the central locking
switch or by pulling one of the inside door
handles.
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, the doors will be automatically
unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.
Depending on the amount of damage, it can
be locked following an accident in the follow-
ing ways:
With the central locking button
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Open a vehicle door once and close it
again.
●
Press the central locking button
With the vehicle key
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
OR: remove the key from the ignition switch.
●
Open a vehicle door once.
●
Use the key to lock the vehicle.
Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)
When the key is removed from the ignition
slot, here the vehicle unlocks all doors and
the boot automatically
›››
page 70.
Turn signals
The turn signals will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle
is locked.
If it does not flash, this indicates that one of
the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not
closed correctly.
Accidental lock-out
The central locking system prevents you from
being locked out of the vehicle in the follow-
ing situations:
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked with the central locking switch
›››
page 95.
Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,
when all the doors and the rear lid have been
closed. This prevents the accidental locking
of the vehicle.
Note
●
Never leave any v
aluable items in the ve-
hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is
not a safe.
●
If the LED on the driver door sill lights up
for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is
locked, the central locking system or anti-
theft alarm* is not working properly. You
should have the fault repaired at a SEAT
Official Service or specialised workshop.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-
ti-theft alarm* system will only function as
intended if the windows and the sunroof*
are closed.
94
Opening and closing
Unlock and lock from the outside
Fig. 89
Remote control key: buttons.
●
Lock: press the
›
›
›
Fig. 89
butt
on.
●
Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-
curity system: push the button again and
hold for 2 seconds.
●
Unlock: press the button.
●
Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the
button for at least 1 second.
Warning: depending on the central locking
function selected in the Comfort submenu,
you may have to push the button twice to
unlock all doors and the rear lid
›››
page 70.
The vehicle will be locked again automatical-
ly if you do not open one of the doors or the
rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the
car. This function prevents the vehicle from
remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you
press the button for at least one second.
Convenience open/close function
●
See
›››
page 111, Convenience
open/close function.
●
See
›››
page 114, Convenience function
to open or close the sunroof*.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Lock-
ing system “Safe” on page 99.
Note
Do not use the remote control key until the
vehicle is visible.
Unlocking and locking from the in-
side
Fig. 90
Driver's door: central locking switch.
●
Lock: press the
›
›
›
Fig. 90
butt
on.
●
Unlock: press the
›››
Fig. 90 button.
Please note the following when using the
central locking switch to lock your vehicle:
●
It is not possible to open the doors or the
rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,
e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).
●
The LED in the central locking switch lights
up when all the doors are closed and locked.
●
You can open the doors individually from
the inside by pulling the inside door handle.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will
be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-
cess and assistance.
»
95
Operation
WARNING
●
The central locking switch al
so works
with the ignition switched off, except when
the “safe” system is activated.
●
The central locking switch does not oper-
ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside
and the security system is switched on.
●
Locked doors could delay assistance in
an emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-
cially children, in the vehicle.
Note
Your vehicle will lock automatically when it
reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)
(Auto Lock)
››
›
page 93. You can unlock the
vehicle again using the button on the
central locking switch.
Unlock and lock the vehicle with
K
eyl
ess Access*
Fig. 91
Keyless Access: proximity zones.
Fig. 92 Door handle: sensor surfaces
›››
Fig. 92
Unl
ocking sensor surf
ace on the inside of
the door handl
e
.
L
ocking sensor surface on the outside of
the door handle.
A
B
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
may hav
e the K
eyl
ess Access syst
em.
K
eyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. To do this, all
that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in
the detection area where you are attempting
to access the vehicle
›››
Fig. 91 and to touch
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles
›››
Fig. 92
›››
.
The v
ehicl
e can be unl
ock
ed and l
ocked via
the front doors only. When doing so, the re-
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key,
e.g. in your jacket pocket.
Once the doors have been locked, they can-
not be opened again immediately. This will
enable you to check that the doors are prop-
erly closed.
If you wish you may unlock only the corre-
sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-
essary adjustments can be made in vehicles
with a driver information system
›››
page 70.
General information
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the
car
›››
Fig. 91, the Keyless Access lock and ig-
nition system gives the key entry as soon as
96
Opening and closing
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dl
es is t
ouched or the push butt
on on the
boot hat
ch is oper
ated.
The following features are then available
without having to use the vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with
the handles on the four doors or the button
located on the rear lid.
●
Keyless-Exit: locking of the vehicle with one
of the four door handles.
●
Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one
foot below the rear bumper
›››
page 109.
●
Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine
with the starter button
›››
page 239.
The central locking and locking systems op-
erate in the same way as a normal locking
and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
a single flash.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
Unlocking and opening the doors
(Keyless-Entry)
●
Grip the door handle. When you do this, you
touch the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
A
(ar-
r
o
w) on the handl
e and the v
ehicl
e unlocks.
●
Open the door.
In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle. The door that
is used must be cl
osed.
In v
ehicl
es with the “Saf
e” securit
y sys-
tem: closing and locking the doors
(Keyless-Exit)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle. The vehicle
l
ocks with the “Saf
e” securit
y syst
em
›
››
page 102. The door that is used must be
closed.
●
Touch (twice) the sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on the door handle to lock the ve-
hicl
e without the “Saf
e” securit
y syst
em
›
››
page 102.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
id vehicle key in the proximity
›››
Fig. 91.
Open or close the rear lid normally.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
will not lock automatically after closing it.
What happens when locking the vehicle
with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
for engine ignition
›››
page 239. In order to
enable engine ignition, press the button on
the key inside the vehicle.
Automatically disabling sensors
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensors on
the passenger doors are automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a certain period of
time.
Sensors will again be enabled:
●
After a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton on the key.
●
OR: if the boot is opened.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with
the key.
»
97
Operation
Keyless Access temporary disconnection
function*
Y
ou can deactiv
at
e the v
ehicl
e's Keyless
Access unlocking for one locking and unlock-
ing cycle.
●
Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Close the door.
●
Push the central locking button on the re-
mote control and touch the locking sensor
surface of the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 92
B
within the following 5 seconds.
Do not gr
asp the door handl
e; otherwise the
v
ehicl
e will not unl
ock. Deactivation is also
possible if the vehicle is locked through the
driver’s door lock.
●
To check that the function has been deacti-
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull
on the door handle. The door should not
open.
The next time the door can only be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
Keyless Access will be active again.
Convenience functions
To close all the electric windows and the
panoramic sliding sunroof using the comfort
function, keep a finger for a few seconds on
the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(ar-
r
o
w) of the door handl
e until the windo
ws and
r
oof have closed.
The way that the doors open when the door
handle sensor surface is touched will depend
on the settings activated in the Settings -
Comfort
›››
page 70 menu.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
could engage if hit with a water jet or high
pressur
e steam if there is a valid vehicle
key in the proximity. If at least one of the
electric windows is open and the sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 92
B
(arrow) on one of the
handles is activated continuously, all win-
dows will cl
ose.
Note
●
If the vehicle battery has little or no
char
ge, or the vehicle key battery is almost
or entirely out of charge, you will probably
not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-
cle can be unlocked or locked manually
›››
page 102.
●
To control the proper locking of the v
ehi-
cle, the release function is disabled for ap-
prox. 2 seconds.
●
If the message Keyless access system
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
operation of the Keyless Access system.
Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.
from a mobile device accessory) or if the
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case).
●
If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a
layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
sensors on the door handles may be affec-
ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the
gear stick is in position P.
●
To improve the safety of your vehicle, the
remote control of the system is equipped
with a position sensor. If this remote control
does not detect movement for a certain
length of time, the system will conclude
98
Opening and closing
that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
a night table) so it will be disabled.
Locking system “Safe”
1)
When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-
ty system puts the door handles out of opera-
tion and mak
es it difficult for unauthorized
people to enter. The doors cannot be opened
from inside
›››
.
Depending on the vehicle, when swit
ching the
ignition off, a warning may be displayed on
the dash panel screen stating that the “Safe”
security system is activated (SAFE Lock or
SAFELOCK).
Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”
security system.
●
Press the locking button once on the ve-
hicle key.
Lock the v
ehicle without activating the
“Safe” system.
●
Press the locking button on the vehicle
key twice.
●
On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking
and ignition system: touch the sensor surface
on the outside part of the door handle twice.
When the “Safe” security system is disa-
bled, the following needs to be taken into
account:
●
The vehicle can be opened and unlocked
from the inside using an inside door handle.
●
The anti-theft alarm is activated.
●
The vehicle interior monitoring system and
the anti-tow system are disabled.
WARNING
Do not leave anyone (especially children)
in the vehicle if it is locked fr
om the outside
and the “Safe” security system* is activa-
ted, as the doors and windows cannot then
be opened from the inside. Locked doors
could delay assistance in an emergency.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
br
eak int
o the v
ehicl
e or st
eal it. The system
will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned
on when the vehicle is locked with the key.
The system is immediately activated and the
turn signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
that the alarm and the locking security sys-
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
they will not be included in the protection
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
when the doors close.
●
The turn signal light will flash twice on
opening and deactivating the alarm.
●
The turn signal light will flash once on clos-
ing and activating the alarm.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for
about 30 seconds alongside a sound and
optical (flashing) warning signals and will be
repeated about ten times when the vehicle is
locked and the following unauthorised ac-
tions are attempted:
●
Opening a door that is mechanically un-
locked using the vehicle key without switching
on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-
tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is
»
1)
Available depending on market and version.
99
Operation
no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is
activ
at
ed immediat
ely on opening the door).
●
A door is opened.
●
Opening the bonnet.
●
The r
ear lid is opened.
●
When the ignition is s
witched on with a non-
authorised key.
●
Undue manipulation of the alarm.
●
Disconnection of the vehicle battery.
●
Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles
with interior monitoring
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with
anti-tow system
›››
page 100).
●
When the vehicle is transported on a ferry
or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or
vehicle interior monitoring
›››
page 100).
●
When a trailer connected to the anti-theft
alarm system is disconnected.
How to turn OFF the alarm
●
Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button
of the key.
●
OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.
If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically
using the key, the key must be inserted into
the ignition, and the ignition must be turned
on within 15 seconds of opening the door.
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
and the ignition will be blocked.
CAUTION
If the anti-theft security system is switched
off, the vehicle interior monit
oring and the
tow-away protection are automatically
disconnected.
Note
●
After 28 days, the indicator light will be
switched off t
o prevent the battery from ex-
hausting if the vehicle has been left parked
for a long period of time. The alarm system
remains activated.
●
If, after the audible warning goes off, an-
other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the
rear lid is opened after a door has been
opened), the alarm is triggered again.
●
The anti-theft alarm is not activated
when the vehicle is locked from within using
the central locking button .
●
If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-
ly with the key, only the driver door is un-
locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.
Only when the ignition has been turned on
will the other doors be available - but not
unlocked - and the central locking button
will be activated.
●
If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
then the anti-theft alarm will not operate
correctly.
●
Vehicle monitoring remains activ
e even if
the battery is disconnected or not working
for any reason.
●
The alarm is triggered immediately if one
of the battery cables is disconnected while
the alarm system is active.
Interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system*
Fig. 93
On the roof console: passenger com-
partment monit
oring sensors.
It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-
r
at
ed in the anti-theft al
arm* which det
ects
unauthorised v
ehicle entry by means of ultra-
sound.
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and
the rear lid must be closed.
100
Opening and closing
If the “Safe” security system*
›
›
›
page 99
is
s
witched off, the vehicle interior monitoring
and the tow-away protection are automati-
cally disconnected.
Activation
●
Close the storage compartment
›››
Fig. 93
1
on the roof console, otherwise the interior
monit
oring function (arr
o
w) is not guar
ant
eed
to work freely.
●
It is automatically switched on when the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
Deactivation
●
Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
chanically or by pressing the button on the
remote control. The time period from when
the door is opened until the key is inserted in
the contact should not exceed 15 seconds,
otherwise the alarm will be triggered.
●
Press the button on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors
will be deactivated. The alarm system re-
mains activated.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system are automatically switched on
again next time the vehicle is locked.
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must
be done each time that the vehicle is locked;
if not, they will be automatically switched on.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-
tow system should be switched off if animals
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,
their movements will trigger the alarm) or
when, for example, the vehicle is transported
or has to be towed with only one axle on the
ground.
False alarms
Interior monitoring will only operate correctly
if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-
serve related legal requirements.
The following cases may cause a false
alarm:
●
Open windows (partially or fully).
●
Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or
completely).
●
Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
such as loose papers, items hanging from the
rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
Note
●
If the vehicle is relock
ed and the alarm is
activated without the volumetric sensor
function, relocking will activate the alarm
with all its functions, except the volumetric
sensor. This function is reactivated when
the alarm is switched on again, unless it is
deliberately switched off.
●
If the alarm has been triggered by the
volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by
a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver
door when the vehicle is opened. The flash
is differ
ent to the flash indicating the alarm
is activated.
●
The vibration of a mobile phone left in-
side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-
terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both
sensors react to movements and shakes in-
side the vehicle.
●
If on activating the alarm, any door or the
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-
vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and
the anti-tow system will only be activated
once all the doors are closed (including the
rear lid).
Doors
Intr
oduction
The doors and rear lid can be locked man-
ually and partially opened, f
or e
x
ampl
e if the
k
ey or the central locking is damaged.
WARNING
Opening and closing doors carelessly can
cause serious injury.
●
If the vehicle is locked from outside, the
doors and windows cannot be opened from
the inside.
»
101
Operation
●
Never leave chil
dren or disabled people
alone in the car. They could be trapped in
the car in an emergency and will not be
able to get themselves to safety.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
WARNING
Getting in the way of the doors and the rear
lid is danger
ous and can lead to serious in-
jury.
●
Open and close the doors and the r
ear lid
only when there is nobody in the way.
CAUTION
When opening and closing in an emergen-
cy, carefully disassemble components and
then reassemble them car
efully to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
Warning lamp
It lights up
At least one vehicle door is open or not correctly
shut.
Do not continue driving! Open the corresponding
door and close it immediately.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If a door is open or not properly closed, the
warning lamp or will light up on the in-
strument panel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-
bol may be displayed on the dash panel
screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-
cation is also visible when the ignition is
switched off. The indication disappears
around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been
locked.
Emergency unlocking or locking of
the driver’s door
Fig. 94 Driver door handle: Concealed lock
cylinder
.
Fig. 95
Driver door handle: lever the cover off
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
at
e
, the driv
er door can still be l
ocked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
As a general rule, when the driver door is
locked manually all other doors are locked.
When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
door opens. Please observe the instructions
relating to the anti-theft alarm system
›››
page 99.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 91.
●
Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 95
then remove the cover upwards.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
102
Opening and closing
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when v
ehicl
es ar
e unl
ock
ed. However, the
alarm will not be triggered
›››
page 99.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
●
Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is locked manually using the
k
ey shaft
›››
page 93.
Locking the front passenger door
and the sliding doors manually
Fig. 96
On the front of the sliding door: emer-
gency l
ock
, hidden by a rubber seal
.
Fig. 97 Emergency locking of the vehicle using
the vehicle key
The front passenger door and the sliding
doors can be l
ock
ed manually. The anti-theft
al
arm is
not
activated in this case.
●
Open the door.
●
Remove the rubber cap to the front of the
door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock
symbol
›››
Fig. 96.
●
Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››
page 91.
●
Insert the key shaft horizontally into the
opening and moved the coloured lever for-
ward
›››
Fig. 97.
●
Replace the rubber cap and close the door.
●
Check if the door is locked.
●
Carry out the same operation on the other
doors if necessary.
●
Have the vehicle checked by a specialised
workshop.
Note
The doors can be opened and unlocked in-
dividually from the inside by pulling the
door handle. To open, pull the inner door
r
elease lever twice
›››
page 93.
Sliding doors
Introduction
WARNING
If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it
could open unexpectedly when driving and
cause serious injuries.
●
Stop immediat
ely and close it.
●
When closing, ensure that the sliding
door has closed correctly. A closed sliding
door should be flush with the correspond-
ing parts of the bodywork.
●
Only open and close sliding doors when
no body is in the way of the door.
WARNING
If a sliding door is not fully open, it could
close unexpectedly and cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Alw
ays open the sliding door fully.
»
103
Operation
WARNING
Opening sliding doors while driving is dan-
gerous. These doors may be pushed open
or closed when the vehicle accel
erates or
brakes and cause serious injuries.
●
Never open the sliding doors when the
vehicle is in movement.
Manually opening and closing the
sliding door
Fig. 98
On the sliding door: door handle
1
.
Opening the sliding door from the outside.
●
When the sliding door is released, open the
door fully by pulling on the outside handl
e
.
Opening the sliding door fr
om the inside
●
When the sliding door is r
el
eased, open the
door fully by pulling on its interior handle
›››
Fig. 98
1
.
Cl
osing the sliding door
●
Pull on the inside or outside door handl
e
and cl
ose the sliding door
, pushing it gently.
Mak
e sure that it is completely closed.
Electrically opening and closing
the sliding door*
Fig. 99
On the instrument panel, on the vehi-
cl
e k
ey and on the inside lining of the sliding
door: butt
on t
o open and cl
ose an electric slid-
ing door.
All of the electric sliding doors can be
opened and cl
osed manually using mor
e
f
or
ce
.
Electrical opening of the sliding door
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 99 button on the dash
panel, on the remote control key and on the
interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding
door opens with the rollback anti-trap func-
tion as long as the button is not pressed
again.
●
OR: pull briefly on the interior or exterior
door handle. The sliding door opens auto-
matically.
Electrical closing of the sliding door
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 99 button on the dash
panel, on the remote control key and on the
interior lining of the sliding door. The sliding
door closes with the rollback anti-trap func-
tion as long as the button is not pressed
again. As it closes, a warning sound is given.
●
OR: pull briefly on the interior or exterior
door handle. The sliding door closes with the
roll-back function. As it closes, a warning
sound is given.
Note
●
When the fuel tank flap is open, the right-
hand side electric sliding door is l
ocked
and can only be opened manually.
●
If the window of a sliding door is lowered
them this door cannot open fully.
104
Opening and closing
Anti-trap function of the electric
sliding doors
The rollback anti-trap function of the electric
sliding doors can reduce the risk of injury
when opening and closing the sliding doors
›››
.
If an object gets in the way of the sliding door
while it is cl
osing, it will open again.
If an object gets in the way of the sliding door
while it is opening, the door will be immobi-
lised at this point.
●
Check the reason for which the sliding door
does not open or close.
●
Try to open or cl
ose the sliding door again.
To close the sliding door without the roll-
back anti-trap function
●
Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.
●
Press and hold the button
›››
Fig. 99.
The sliding door closes with full force.
WARNING
Closing the electric windows without the
anti-trap function can cause serious injury.
●
Always close the sliding doors car
efully.
●
Nobody should ever get in the way of the
electric sliding doors, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent
fingers or other par
ts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame and
causing injury.
Electric child lock
Fig. 100
On the driver’s door: electric child
l
ock butt
ons.
The electric child lock prevents the sliding
doors and their el
ectric windo
ws fr
om being
opened and cl
osed. The el
ectric window and
door lock controls can be disconnected and
connected separately.
Activate and deactivate the electric child
lock
●
Activate: Press button
1
or
2
.
●
Deactivate: Pr
ess the butt
on again.
The yell
o
w contr
ol lamp indicates that the
feature is on for the corresponding button.
WARNING
When the electric child safety function is
activated, the sliding door can be opened
from the outside only.
●
Nev
er leave children or disabled people
alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be
locked. Therefore, passengers will be
locked inside the vehicle. They could be
trapped in the car in an emergency and will
not be able to get themselves to safety. In-
dividuals locked in the vehicle can be ex-
posed to very high or very low tempera-
tures.
●
Depending on the time of the year, tem-
peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-
cle can be extremely high or extremely low
resulting in serious injuries and illness or
even death, particularly for young children.
Rear lid
Intr
oduction
WARNING
Careless and unsuitable locking, opening
and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-
dents and serious injury.
»
105
Operation
●
The rear lid must not be opened when the
reverse or r
ear fog lights are lit. This may
damage the tail lights.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
down with your hand on the rear window.
The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
driving.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-
low children to play inside or next to it, es-
pecially if the rear lid is open. Children
could enter the luggage compartment,
close the rear lid and become trapped. A
locked vehicle can reach extremely high
and low temperatures, depending on the
time of year, thus causing serious injuries,
illness or even death.
CAUTION
Before opening or closing the rear lid, make
sure that there is enough space to open or
close it, e
.g. when pulling a trailer or in a
garage.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the key has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
Note
At outside temperatures of less than 0°C
(+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot
always automatically lift the r
ear lid. In this
case, open the rear lid manually.
Warning lamp
It lights up
The rear lid is open or not correctly shut.
Do not continue driving! Open the rear lid and
close it again.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
The warning lamp appears on the dash
panel if the rear lid is open or not properly
closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a sym-
bol may be displayed on the dash panel
screen instead of the warning lamp. The indi-
cation is also visible when the ignition is
switched off. The indication disappears
around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been
locked.
WARNING
If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it
could open unexpectedly when driving and
cause serious injuries.
●
Alw
ays stop immediately and close the
rear lid.
●
Ensure that the rear lid has been locked
into place by the element on the lock carri-
er when you close it.
106
Opening and closing
Opening the rear lid
Fig. 101
Opening the boot hatch from the out-
side
Fig. 102 Detailed view of the centre console:
r
ear lid unl
ocking butt
on.
Before opening the rear lid, always remove
any l
oad on its luggage r
ack
.
Opening the r
ear lid
●
Unl
ock the vehicle or open a door.
●
Raise and open the rear lid by pressing the
button
›››
Fig. 101 (arrow).
Opening with the vehicle key
●
Press the button on the vehicle key until
the rear lid opens automatically.
To open using the centre console control
●
Press the button on the centre console
›››
Fig. 102. The rear lid will be automatically
opened.
●
The button is still operative when the igni-
tion is switched off.
Closing the rear lid
Fig. 103
Rear lid open: space for pulling.
Closing the rear lid
●
Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid
›
›
›
Fig. 103
(arr
ow).
●
Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in-
to place in the lock.
●
Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling
on it firmly.
Locking the rear lid
If you unlock the vehicle without opening any
doors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto-
matically after 30 seconds. This function pre-
vents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if
the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
Locking is only possible when the rear lid is
correctly and fully closed.
●
The rear lid is also locked by a central lock-
ing.
●
If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked
using the button of the vehicle key, when it
is closed again it will lock automatically.
●
A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-
tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h
(7 mph).
WARNING
Unsuitable or careless closing and locking
of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.
●
Never l
eave the vehicle unattended, or
allow children to play inside or around the
vehicle without supervision, especially if
the rear lid is open. Children could enter
the luggage compartment, close the rear
lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle
»
107
Operation
can be subjected to extremely high and low
temperatures, depending on the time of
year
, thus causing serious injuries/illness
and even death.
Note
Before closing the rear lid, make sure that
the k
ey has not been left inside the luggage
compartment.
Operate the rear lid electrically
Fig. 104 Button with rear lid open
Fig. 105 Opening the boot hatch from the out-
side
Opening the rear lid
●
Press and hold the butt
on on the v
ehicl
e
k
ey until the r
ear lid opens automatically.
●
OR: press and hold the button on the
centre console for approximately one second
›››
Fig. 102.
●
OR: press the
›››
Fig. 105 boot hatch button
(arrow).
In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic
opening of the rear lid is interrupted.
Electronically opening the rear lid does not
work when a trailer is electrically connected
and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch
›››
page 298.
The rear lid can be opened manually by ap-
plying more force.
Closing the rear lid
●
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
key for approximately 1 second.
●
OR: press and hold the button on the
centre console for approximately one second
›››
Fig. 102.
●
OR: press the
›››
Fig. 105 boot hatch button
(arrow).
●
OR: press the button on the open rear lid
›››
Fig. 104
›››
in Introduction on
page 105.
●
OR: manually push the r
ear lid do
wn t
o
cl
ose it.
The r
ear lid will move down to the closed po-
sition to close and lock itself automatically
using the power-close feature
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 105.
In case of difficult
y or obstruction, aut
omatic
cl
osing of the r
ear lid is int
errupted and it will
open slightly.
Check why the rear lid could not close.
Attempt to close it once more.
Interrupting the opening and closing proc-
ess
Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped
by pressing one of the buttons. Each time
one of the buttons is pressed, the rear lid
moves to its initial position.
108
Opening and closing
Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To
do this, apply a littl
e mor
e f
or
ce
.
Memorising the opening angle
The rear lid must be at least half open to
memorise an opening angle.
●
Stop automatic opening in the opening po-
sition required
›››
page 108.
●
Hold down the button
›››
Fig. 104 with the
rear lid open for at least three seconds. The
opening angle is memorised.
Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the
hazard warning lights and an audible warn-
ing.
To fully open the boot hatch again, the open-
ing angle must be memorised once more.
●
Release the rear lid and open it to the
memorised height.
●
Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this,
apply a little more force.
●
Hold down the button
›››
Fig. 104 with the
rear lid open for at least three seconds.
●
The opening angle is reset to the original
factory setting.
WARNING
It is possible that the rear lid does not open
completely or, if it is open, closes al
one if a
large amount of snow has built up on it or if
a luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the
rear lid must be supported.
CAUTION
●
When using a tr
ailer, ensure that ther
e is
sufficient space to open and close the rear
lid.
●
Before opening the rear lid, any kind of
equipment carrier should be removed, for
example a bicycle carrier.
CAUTION
In case of repeated short-term use, the sys-
tem is turned off to avoid o
verheating.
●
When it has cooled, it may be used once
again. During this time, the rear lid may be
manually opened or closed applying a lit-
tle more effort.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
the fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the
rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do
this, close the rear lid.
Rear lid with sensor-controlled
opening and cl
osing (Easy Open)
Fig. 106
Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-
ing (Easy Open).
If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity
of the r
ear lid, it is possibl
e t
o unl
ock and
open or cl
ose it moving one foot in the area of
the sensors located under the rear bumper.
●
Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the
middle.
●
With a brisk movement, bring your foot and
lower leg as close as you can to the bumper.
The lower part of the leg needs to be close to
the upper sensor area and your foot must be
close to the lower sensor area
›››
Fig. 106
1
.
●
Quickly remove your foot and lower leg
fr
om the sensor ar
eas
›
›
›
Fig. 106
2
. The rear
lid will be aut
omatically opened.
●
If the r
ear lid f
ail
s t
o open, repeat the pro-
cedure after a few seconds.
»
109
Operation
To notify that the rear lid has been opened
with the Easy Open function, the t
urn lights
blink twice
.
The r
ear lid can be cl
osed with another f
oot
movement similar to the opening one (provi-
ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of
the rear lid).
When closed, the rear lid automatically locks
if the vehicle has been locked beforehand
and there is no valid key inside.
Switching the Easy Open function on or off
The Easy Open function can be activated
and deactivated in the Vehicle settings
menu of the infotainment system
›››
page 70.
WARNING
If there is a valid key in the proximity of the
rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-
tion may be accidentally activated and the
r
ear lid will open, for example, when
sweeping under the rear bumper, when di-
recting a water jet or high pressure steam
to the area or when carrying out mainte-
nance work or repairs in that area. If acci-
dentally opened, the rear lid could injure
somebody situated in its area of operation
or cause material damage.
●
Therefore, always make sure that there is
no unsupervised valid key in the area near
the rear lid.
●
Before carrying out any maintenance or
repair w
ork on the vehicle, always disable
the Easy Open feature via the infotainment
system.
●
Before washing the vehicle, always disa-
ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-
ment system.
●
Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-
er,
›››
page 298, always disable the Easy
Open feature via the infotainment system.
Emergency unlocking of the rear lid
Fig. 107
Detail of the luggage compartment:
access t
o emer
gency unl
ocking.
Fig. 108 Detail of the luggage compartment:
emergency unlocking
The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in
the e
v
ent of an emer
gency (e
.g. no batt
ery).
There is a groove in the luggage compart-
ment allowing access to the emergency
opening mechanism.
Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-
gage compartment
●
Remove equipment to access the inside of
the rear lid.
●
Remove the rectangular cover from the in-
ner trim of the rear lid
›››
Fig. 107.
●
Move the unlocking lever
›››
Fig. 108
A
in
the dir
ection of the arr
o
w t
o unl
ock the rear
lid.
●
Manually open the rear lid.
110
Opening and closing
Window controls
El
ectrically opening and cl
osing
the windo
ws
Fig. 109 Detail of the driver's door: window
contr
ol
s, as w
ell as el
ectric chil
d lock buttons.
●
Opening the window: press the button .
●
Closing the window: pull the button .
Butt
ons on the driv
er door
F
or the fr
ont el
ectric windows.
For the sliding door electric windows.
To lock the sliding doors and their win-
dows.
The front and rear electric windows can be
operated by using the controls on the driver
door. The other doors each have a switch for
their own window.
1
2
3
Always close the windows fully if you park the
v
ehicl
e or l
eav
e it unatt
ended
›››
.
Y
ou can use the el
ectric windo
ws f
or appr
ox.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
neither the driver door nor the front passen-
ger door has been opened and the key has
not been removed from the ignition.
Convenience open/close function
The electric windows can be opened or
closed from outside using the vehicle key:
Convenience opening:
●
Press and hold the button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof* have reached the desired position.
●
OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-
ton on the remote control key and then keep
the key in the driver door lock until all the win-
dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-
quired position.
Convenience closing:
●
Press and hold button on the remote
control key until all the windows and the sun-
roof* are closed
›››
.
●
OR: K
eep the key in the driver door in the
"l
ock" position until all the windo
ws and the
sunr
oof* ar
e closed.
During convenience closing, first the windows
and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.
In the Settings - comfort menu, there are
different settings for operating the windows
›››
page 70.
One-touch opening and closing
The one-touch automatic opening and clos-
ing is used to open or close the windows
completely. It will not be necessary to hold
the button of the corresponding electric win-
dow.
For the automatic raising function: pull the
button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
For the automatic lowering function: pull
the button for the corresponding window up-
wards until it reaches the second position.
Stop automatic movement: push or pull on
the button of the corresponding window.
Resetting one-touch opening and closing
The one-touch opening and closing function
is not active after the vehicle battery has
been disconnected or is flat and will have to
be reset.
●
Close all windows and doors.
●
Pull the button of the corresponding win-
dow and hold it for one second in this posi-
tion.
»
111
Operation
●
R
el
ease the butt
on and pull up
w
ards and
hold again. The one-touch function is now
ready for operation.
The automatic one-touch electric windows
can be reinitialised individually or several at a
time.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 101.
●
Incorrect use of the electric windows can
result in injury.
●
Never close the r
ear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise
could cause serious injury to you and third
parties. Make sure that no one is in the path
of a window.
●
If the ignition is switched on, the electric
equipment could be activated with risk of
injury, for example, in the electric windows.
●
The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an
obstacle for assistance in an emergency
situation.
●
Therefore always take the key with you
when you leave the vehicle.
●
The electric windows will work until the
ignition has been switched off and one of
the front doors has been opened.
●
If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-
able the rear electric windows. Make sure
that they have been disabled.
●
For safety reasons, you shoul
d only use
the remote control open and close func-
tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.
To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the
windows when pressing the button to close
them. The windows stop moving as soon as
the button is released.
Note
If the window is not able to close because it
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the
windo
w will automatically open again
›››
page 112. If this happens, check why the
window could not be closed before at-
tempting to close it again.
Window anti-trap function
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-
jury when the el
ectric windo
ws cl
ose
.
●
If a windo
w is obstructed when closing au-
tomatically, the window stops at this point
and lowers immediately
›››
.
●
Next, check why the window does not close
bef
or
e att
empting it again.
●
If you try within the f
oll
owing 10 seconds
and the window closes again with difficulty or
there is an obstruction, the automatic closing
will stop working for 10 seconds.
●
If the window is still obstructed, the window
will stop at this point.
●
If there is no obvious reason why the win-
dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-
dow closes with maximum force. The roll-
back function is now deactivated.
●
If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Elec-
trically opening and closing the windows
on page 112.
●
The r
oll-back function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body getting
pinched against the window frame. Risk of
accident.
Sunroof*
Intr
oduction
The sunroof only works when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on. Once the ignition has been
s
wit
ched off
, you can still open or close the
sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver
door and the front passenger door are not
opened.
112
Opening and closing
WARNING
If the sunroof is used negligently or without
paying due attention, it can cause serious
injury.
●
Open or close the sunroof and the sun
blind only when no one is in their path of
mov
ement.
●
Never leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting.
●
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle, espe-
cially if they have access to the vehicle
key. If using they key unattended, they
could lock the vehicle, start the engine,
switch on the ignition and activate the sun-
roof.
●
After switching off, it is still possible to
open or close the sunroof during a short
space of time provided that neither the
driver nor passenger door is opened.
CAUTION
●
To prevent damage
, during winter tem-
peratures remove any ice or snow that
might be on the car roof before opening the
sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.
●
Before leaving the vehicle or in case of
rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the
sunroof open or in a tilted position, water
can enter the interior and can cause con-
siderable damage to the electrical system.
As a result, other damage can occur in the
vehicle.
Note
●
Leaves and other loose objects that ac-
cumul
ate on the sunroof rails should be
regularly cleaned away either by hand or
with a vacuum.
●
If the sunroof does not work correctly, the
anti-trap function will not work either. Con-
tact a specialised workshop.
Opening and closing the sunroof
Fig. 110
On the interior roof lining: turn the
s
wit
ch t
o open and cl
ose
.
Fig. 111 On the interior roof lining: press the
switch and pull on it to raise and lower the roof.
To open the sunroof, the switch must be in the
position
1
.
●
Open: turn the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 1
10
3
.
●
Comfort position: turn the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 1
10
2
.
●
Close: turn the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 1
10
1
.
●
Lift: Push the switch to position
›
›
›
Fig. 1
1
1
4
. For an intermediate position, hold down
the s
wit
ch until you r
each the desir
ed posi-
tion.
●
L
ower: pull the switch to position
›››
Fig. 111
5
. For an intermediate position, hold down
the s
wit
ch until you r
each the desir
ed posi-
tion.
1
13
Operation
Opening and closing the sunshade
blind
3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds
Fig. 112
On the interior roof lining: sunshade
blind butt
ons.
Once the ignition has been switched off, you
can still open or cl
ose the sun blind f
or a f
e
w
minut
es provided the driver door and the
front passenger door are not opened.
Opening completely (automatic function)
●
Press button
›››
Fig. 112
1
briefly.
Cl
osing compl
et
ely (aut
omatic function)
●
Pr
ess the button
2
briefly.
St
op aut
omatic oper
ation
●
Pr
ess butt
on
1
or button
2
briefly.
To set the intermediate position
●
Press button
1
or button
2
until the cor-
r
ect position is set.
Conv
enience function t
o open or
cl
ose the sunr
oof*
Fig. 113 Door handle: sensor surface.
The sunroof can be opened and closed with
the conv
enience function, just lik
e the win-
do
ws.
Using the r
emot
e control
●
Keep the locking or unlocking button press-
ed to open or close the roof. If you release the
button is the opening or closing will stop.
Using the Keyless Access* system (only
closing)
●
Press and hold the locking sensor surface
›››
Fig. 113 (arrow) on the door handle to
close the sunroof. If you release the sensor
surface, the closing movement stops.
Anti-trap function of the panoramic
sunroof and sunshade
The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of
injury when cl
osing the sunr
oof and the sun
blind
›
›
›
. If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-
t
er r
esist
ance or an obst
acl
e when closing,
they reopen immediately.
●
Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not
close.
●
Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed
due to an obstacle or some resistance, it
stops at the corresponding position and then
opens. For automatic closing, a new closing
attempt might take place.
●
If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to
close, close it without the anti-trap function.
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without
the anti-trap function
●
The switch
›››
Fig. 110 should be in the
“closed” position
1
.
114
Lights
●
Gl
ass r
oof:
within appr
o
x. 5 seconds of the
activation of the anti-trap function, keep the
control pulled backwards
›››
Fig. 111 (arrow
5
) until the roof is completely closed.
●
Sunshade blind: within appr
o
ximat
ely
5 seconds of having activ
at
ed the anti-trap
function, press button
›››
Fig. 112
2
until the
sun blind cl
oses compl
et
ely.
●
The sunr
oof or sun blind cl
ose without
the anti-trap function intervening!
●
If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,
visit a specialised workshop.
WARNING
Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the
anti-trap function can cause serious inju-
ries.
●
Always be careful when cl
osing the sun-
roof and sun blind.
●
No person should ever remain in the way
of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when
closing without the anti-trap function.
●
The anti-trap function does not prevent
fingers or other parts of the body from be-
coming trapped against the roof frame and
injuries occurring.
Lights
V
ehicl
e lighting
Contr
ol l
amps
It lights up
Driving light totally or partially faulty.
Fault in the cornering light .
Flashes
Fault in the cornering light system.
Contact a specialised workshop.
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on
›››
page 11
7.
It lights up
Front fog lights switched on
›››
page 11
7.
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a v
ehicle
or trailer turn signal is faulty. If necessary, check the
vehicle and trailer lighting.
Hazard warning lights on
›››
page 120.
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 11
7.
It lights up
The Light Assist system is on
›››
page 118
.
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a few seconds when the ignition is swit
ch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Headlight switch
Fig. 114 Dash panel: lights control.
»
115
Operation
●
T
urn the s
wit
ch t
o the r
equired position
›››
Fig. 114.
Sym-
bol
Ignition switch-
ed off
Ignition is
switched on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Light off or day-
time driving light
on.
The “Coming
home” and “L
eaving
home” guide lights
may be switched
on.
Automatic contr
ol
of dipped beam
and daytime run-
ning light.
Side light on.
Dipped beam off; if
necessary, the side
light comes on for a
time.
Dipped beam
switched on.
The driver is personally responsible for the
corr
ect use and adjustment of the lights in all
sit
uations.
Aut
omatic dipped beam headlight contr
ol
*
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
intended as an aid and is not able to recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
switch lighting switch on automatically in the
following situations
›››
:
●
The phot
o sensor det
ects
d
arkness
, for ex-
ample, when driving through a tunnel. They
switch off when adequate lighting is detec-
ted.
●
The rain sensor detects rain and activates
the wipers. They switch off when the wipers
have not been activated for a few minutes.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights consist of individu-
al lights, integrated in the front headlights.
These lights come on when the daytime run-
ning lights are switched on. On vehicles
equipped with LED tail lights, the rear side
light is switched on as well
›››
.
The daytime running lights t
urn on e
v
ery time
the ignition is s
wit
ched on, if the switch is in
position or , according to the level of ex-
terior lighting.
When the light switch is in position , a light
sensor automatically switches dipped beam
on and off (including the control and instru-
ment lighting) or the daytime running lights
depending on the level of exterior lighting.
Audible warnings to advise the driver that
the lights have not been switched off
If the key is not in the ignition and the driver
door is open, an audible warning signal is
heard in the following cases: this will remind
you to turn the light off.
●
When the parking light is on
›››
page 117.
●
When the light switch is in position or .
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road
users cannot see the vehicle well enough
or at all, accidents may occur.
●
The aut
omatic dipped beam control
( ) only switches on the dipped beam
when there are changes in light conditions
but not, for example, when it is foggy.
WARNING
The side lights or daytime running lights
are not bright enough to illuminate the road
ahead and t
o ensure that other road users
are able to see you.
●
Always use your dipped beam head
lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.
●
Never drive with daytime lights if the road
is not well lit due to weather or lighting
conditions.
●
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-
cle which does not have the rear lights on
may not be visible to other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
conditions of poor visibility.
116
Lights
WARNING
If the headlights are set too high and not
used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or
distracting other road users. This coul
d re-
sult in a serious accident.
●
Always make sure that the headlights are
correctly adjusted.
Note
●
The legal requirements regar
ding the use
of vehicle lights in each country must be
observed.
●
The dipped beam headlights will only
work with the ignition on. The side lights
come on automatically when the ignition is
turned off.
Fog lights
Fig. 115 Dash panel: lights control.
The warning lamps or al
so sho
w
, on the
light s
wit
ch or instrument panel, when the
front fog lights are on.
●
Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the
light switch out to its first click position
›››
Fig. 115
1
, from positions , or .
●
Turning on the rear fog light : pull the
light s
wit
ch fully out
2
from position , or
.
●
T
o s
wit
ch off the fog lights, press the light
switch or turn it to position .
Note
The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind
you. You should use the rear fog light only
when visibilit
y is very poor.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 116
Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right t
urn light or right
-hand parking light
(ignition s
wit
ched off).
L
eft turn light or left-hand parking light
(ignition switched off).
Main beam on: control lamp lit up on
the instrument panel.
Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-
trol lamp lit up.
Push the lever all the way down to turn off the
corresponding function.
Convenience turn signals
When the ignition is switched on, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals can be activa-
ted and deactivated from the Settings >
Lights & Visibility menu on the instru-
ment panel screen
›››
page 70.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Parking light
The parking lights will only work with the igni-
tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning
will sound while the driver door is open.
»
1
2
3
4
117
Operation
●
S
wit
ch the ignition off
.
●
Mo
v
e the turn signal lever up or down.
When the parking light is switched on, the
front side light and the tail light on the corre-
sponding side of the vehicle turn on.
WARNING
Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,
or forgetting to deactivat
e them can con-
fuse other road users. This could result in a
serious accident.
●
Always give warning when you are going
to change lane, overtake or when turning,
activating the turn signal in good time.
●
As soon as you have finished changing
lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn
signal off.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the headlights may cause
accidents and serious injury, as the main
beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.
Note
●
If the turn signal lever is l
eft on after the
key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
door is opened. This is intended as a re-
minder to switch off the turn signal, unless
you wish to leave the parking light on.
●
If the convenience turn signals are oper
-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-
tive part stops flashing and only flashes
once in the new part selected.
●
The turn signal only works when the igni-
tion is switched on. The hazard warning
lights also work when the ignition is switch-
ed off.
●
If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is
faulty, the warning lamp flashes twice as
fast as usual.
●
The main beam headlights can only be
switched on if the dipped beam headlights
are already on.
●
In cold or damp weather conditions, the
headlights, tail lights and turn signals may
mist up inside temporarily. This is normal
and in no way effects the useful life of the
vehicle lighting system.
●
The parking light does not activate auto-
matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-
nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-
ted.
Main beam assist (Light Assist)*
The main beam assist acts within the limits of
the syst
em and depending on envir
onment
al
and tr
affic conditions. Once s
witched on, the
system is activated as of a speed of about 60
km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below
about 30 km/h (18 mph)
›››
.
When the syst
em is activ
at
ed and the cam-
er
a det
ects other vehicles that may be daz-
zled, the main beam is automatically switch-
ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-
cally switched on.
The main beam assist generally detects illu-
minated areas and deactivates the main
beam when passing through a town, for ex-
ample.
Switching the main beam assist on
●
Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch
to the position .
●
From the base position, press the turn signal
and main beam headlights lever forwards
›››
Fig. 116
3
When the lamp is displ
ayed
on the instrument panel displ
ay, the main
beam assist is s
wit
ched on.
S
witching the main beam assist off
●
Turn the light switch to a position other than
›››
page 115.
●
OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn
signal light and main beam headlights lever
forwards
›››
Fig. 116
4
.
●
OR: push the t
urn signal and main beam
headlight l
e
v
er f
orwards to manually turn on
the main beam. The main beam assist will
then be deactivated.
118
Lights
Malfunctions
The f
oll
o
wing conditions may pr
e
vent the
main beam headlight control from turning off
the headlights in time or from turning off alto-
gether:
●
In poorly lit towns with highly reflective
signs.
●
Other insufficiently lit road users (such as
pedestrians or cyclists).
●
On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)
and when oncoming vehicles are partially
obscured.
●
When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-
cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard
rail in the centre of the road.
●
If the camera is damaged or the power
supply is cut off.
●
In fog, snow and heavy rain.
●
With dust and sand turbulence.
●
With loose gravel in the field of vision of the
camera.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,
ice, etc.
WARNING
The convenience features of the main
beam assist should not encourage the tak-
ing of risks. The syst
em is not a replace-
ment for driver concentration.
●
You are always in contr
ol of the main
beam and adapting it to the light, visibility
and traffic conditions.
●
It is possible that the main beam head-
light control does not recognise all driving
situations and is limited under certain cir-
cumstances.
●
When the field of vision of the camera is
dirty, covered or damaged, operation of
the main beam control may be affected.
This also applies when changes are made
to the vehicle lighting system, for example,
if additional headlights are installed.
CAUTION
To avoid affecting the operation of the sys-
tem, take the foll
owing points into consid-
eration:
●
Clean the field of vision of the camera
regularly and make sure it is free of snow
and ice.
●
Do not cover the field of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the windscreen is not dam-
aged in the area of the field of vision of the
camera.
Note
Main beam and headlight flasher can be
turned on and off manually at any time with
the turn signal and main beam lev
er
›››
page 117.
Cornering lights
Dynamic cornering lights (AFS)
The adaptive headlights only operate when
the dipped beam is on and at speeds of ov
er
10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adaptive
headlights automatically improve lighting on
the road ahead.
The adaptive cornering lights can be activa-
ted or deactivated from the infotainment sys-
tem.
Static cornering lights
When turning slowly to change direction or
going round a tight bend, the static cornering
lights automatically come on. The static cor-
nering lights only work at speeds of less than
40 km/h (25 mph).
The static cornering lights may be incorpora-
ted into the fog lights or the front headlights,
depending upon the equipment.
“Coming home” and “Leav-
ing home” function
The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”
function lights up the v
ehicl
e
’
s immediat
e
proximity when getting into and out of it in the
dark. When switched on, the front position
and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-
cense plate light come on.
»
119
Operation
The “Coming home” function should be
s
wit
ched on manually. Ho
w
e
ver the “Leav-
ing home” function is automatically control-
led by a photo sensor.
The duration of the headlight turn off delay
can be set in the Settings > Lights and
Visibility menu, and the function can be
activated or deactivated
›››
page 70.
Activating the “Coming Home” function
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-
mately 1 second.
When the driver door is opened, the “Coming
Home” lighting comes on. The delay in
switching off the headlights is counted from
when the last door or boot hatch is closed.
The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in
the following cases:
●
Automatically, once the headlight turn off
delay has elapsed.
●
Automatically, when a vehicle door or the
rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting
the engine.
●
When the rotary light switch is turned to po-
sition
›››
page 115.
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Activating the “Leaving Home” function
●
Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.
●
The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-
ted when the light switch is in position
and the light sensor detects darkness.
The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off
in the following cases:
●
Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”
delay period ends (default 30 sec).
●
When the vehicle is locked using the remote
control.
●
When the light switch is turned to position .
●
With the ignition is switched on.
Lighting around the exterior mirrors
The lighting around the exterior mirrors illumi-
nates the door area on entering and leaving
the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is
unlocked, when the vehicle door is opened
and when the “Coming home” or “Leaving
home” function is switched on. If the equip-
ment includes the light sensor, the lighting
around the exterior mirrors only comes when
it is dark.
Note
To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-
ing Home” function, the rotary light switch
must be in position
and the light sensor
must detect darkness.
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 117
Dash panel: hazard warning lights
s
wit
ch
The hazard warning lights are used to draw
the att
ention of other r
oad users t
o your v
ehi-
cl
e in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights
›››
.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Apply the electronic parking brake.
5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
f
or an aut
omatic gearbo
x, mo
v
e the gear
lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-
tention of other road users to your vehicle.
120
Lights
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
you l
eav
e the v
ehicl
e
.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The
two turn signal turn signal lamps and the
turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at
the same time. The simultaneous hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is
switched off.
Emergency braking warning
If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-
ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50
mph), the brake light flashes several times per
second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If
you continue braking, the hazard warning
lights will come on automatically when the
vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off
automatically when the vehicle starts to
move again.
WARNING
●
The risk of an accident increases if your
vehicle breaks do
wn. Always use the haz-
ard warning lights and a warning triangle to
draw the attention of other road users to
your stationary vehicle.
●
Due to the high temperatures that the
catalytic converter can reach, never park
in an area where the catalytic converter
could come into contact with highly inflam-
mable materials, for example dry grass or
spilt petrol. This could start a fire.
Note
●
The battery will run down if the hazard
w
arning lights are left on for a long time,
even if the ignition is switched off.
●
The use of the hazard warning lights de-
scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-
utory requirements.
Light range control
Fig. 118
Next to the steering wheel: headlight
r
ange contr
ol
.
The headlight range control
›
›
›
Fig. 1
18
is
modified according to the value of the head-
light beam and the vehicle load status. This
offers the driver optimum visibility and the
headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers
›››
.
The headlights can only be adjust
ed when
the dipped beam is s
wit
ched on.
T
o r
eset, turn switch
›››
Fig. 118:
Value Vehicle load status
a)
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment empty
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment full. With trailer and minimum
drawbar l
oad.
Driver only, luggage compartment full
With trailer and maximum drawbar load.
a)
If the vehicle load does not correspond to those
sho
wn in the t
abl
e
, it is possibl
e to select intermediary
positions.
Dynamic headlight range control
The control is not mounted in vehicles with
dynamic headlight range control. The head-
light range is automatically adjusted accord-
ing to the vehicle load status when they are
switched on.
WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean
that the headlights dazzle and distract oth-
er drivers. This could r
esult in a serious ac-
cident.
●
Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
status so that it does not blind other driv-
ers.
121
Operation
Stick stickers on the headlights or
adapt them
In those countries where vehicles drive on the
other side of the road to the home country,
the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle
drivers of oncoming v
ehicles.
The direction of the headlights can be adjus-
ted from the instrument cluster, in the Tou-
rist light* of the menu Configuration>
Lights and visibility
›››
page 72.
For those vehicles in which it is not possible to
adjust the headlights from the menu, adhe-
sive strips are used to cover certain parts of
the headlamp cover or the headlights may
be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For
further information, please refer to a special-
ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
technical service.
Note
Use of the Tourist light option and the
adhesives on the headlights is only allowed
if they ar
e to be used for a short period of
time. To modify the direction of the head-
lights permanently, please take the vehicle
to a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a technical service centre.
Interior lights
Instrument and s
wit
ch lighting
Fig. 119
Next to the steering wheel: instrument
and s
wit
ch lighting adjust
er
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, the in-
t
ensit
y of the lighting of the instruments and
contr
ol
s can be infinit
ely adjusted by turning
the regulator while the lights are on
›››
Fig. 119.
Interior and reading lights
Knob Function
Turns off the interior lights.
Turning the interior lights on or off.
Knob Function
The interior lights come on automati-
cally when you unlock the vehicle,
open a door or r
emove the key from
the ignition.
The light goes out a few seconds after
closing all the doors, when locking the
vehicle or connecting the ignition.
Turning the reading light on and off
Glove compartment and luggage com-
partment lighting*
When opening and closing the glov
e com-
partment on the front passenger side and the
rear lid, the respective light will automatically
switch on and off.
Ambient lighting
The ambient lighting in the front covering of
the ceiling lights up the controls on the centre
console from above when the side light or
dipped beam lights are on.
In addition, the lever on the door moulding
can also be illuminated.
Note
The reading lights switch off when the vehi-
cle is locked using a key or aft
er several mi-
nutes if the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
122
Visibility
Visibility
Windscr
een wiper and r
ear
windo
w wiper syst
ems
Contr
ol lamp
It lights up
Windscreen cleaning fluid level too low.
Refill the windscreen washer tank as soon as you
have the opportunity to do so
›››
page 323.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
Window washer lever
Fig. 120
Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
ear wiper
.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers off.
1
Wiper intervals.
Use control
›››
Fig. 120
A
to set the in-
t
erv
al (v
ehicl
es without r
ain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
Hol
d the l
e
v
er do
wn for more time to in-
crease the wipe frequency.
5
Windscreen washer. The windscreen
washer function is activated by push-
ing the le
ver towards the steering
wheel, and the wipers operate simulta-
neously.
More the lever to the required position:
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-
er will wipe the window approximately
e
very six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is acti-
vated by pressing the lever, and the
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
WARNING
In cold conditions you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have
w
armed the windscreen with the heating
and ventilation system. The windscreen
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the
windscreen and obscure your view of the
road.
CAUTION
If the ignition is switched off with the wind-
screen wipers active, they complet
e their
wipe before returning to the rest position.
When switching the ignition back on, the
windscreen wiper will continue to operate
at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-
er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-
age the wiper and the windscreen wiper
motor.
●
If necessary, remove snow and ice from
the windscreen wipers before starting your
journey.
»
123
Operation
●
Carefully lift the frozen windscr
een wip-
ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-
icer spray for this operation.
●
Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if
the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the
windscreen wipers while dry can cause
damage.
●
In icy conditions, always check that the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-
fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it
may help to leave the vehicle parked with
the wipers in service position
›››
page 49.
Note
●
The windscreen and window wipers only
function when the ignition is switched on
and the bonnet or r
ear lid, respectively, are
closed.
●
The interval wipe speed varies according
to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle
is moving, the more often the windscreen is
cleaned.
●
The rear wiper is automatically switched
on when the windscreen wiper is on and the
car is in reverse gear.
Wiper functions
Windscreen wipers performance in differ-
ent situations
●
If the vehicle is stopped, the activ
ated posi-
tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-
tion.
●
The air conditioner comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode
when the windscreen washer is activated,
to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-
er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.
●
When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary
according to the speed. The higher the vehi-
cle speed the short
er the intervals.
Heated windscreen washer jets*
The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does
not thaw the water in the washer hoses.
When the ignition is switched on the heated
windscreen washer jets automatically adjust
the heat depending on the ambient tempera-
ture.
Headlight washer system*
The headlight washer cleans the glass of the
headlights and only works when the dipped
beam headlights are on. After switching on
the ignition, the headlights are also washed
when the automatic wiper is activated for the
first time and then every fifth time.
Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus-
ted on the headlights, e.g., remains of insects.
To ensure the headlight washers work cor-
rectly in winter, clean away any snow that
may be present on the jet covers located on
the bumper. If necessary, remove ice with an
anti-ice spray.
Note
●
The wiper will try to wipe away any ob-
stacles that ar
e on the windscreen. The
wiper will stop moving if the obstacle
blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and
switch the wiper back on again.
●
If you stop the vehicle with the wind-
screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-
matically change to a lower position
speed. The set speed will be resumed when
the vehicle pulls away.
●
The windscreen will be wiped again ap-
proximately 5 seconds after the wind-
screen washer has been activated, provi-
ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).
If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-
onds after the “drip” function, a new wash
sequence will begin without performing the
last wipe. For the “drip” function to work
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
124
Visibility
Rain sensor*
Fig. 121
Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor
A.
Fig. 122
Rain sensor sensitive surface
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the
windscr
een wiper int
erv
al
s, depending on the
amount of r
ain
›››
. The sensitivity of the rain
sensor can be adjust
ed manually. Manual
wipe
›
›
›
page 123
.
Move the lever to the required position
›››
Fig. 121:
Rain sensor off.
Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-
sary.
Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor
–
Set control to the right: high sensitivity.
–
Set control to the left: low sensitivity.
When the ignition is switched off and then
back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts
operating again when the windscreen wipers
are in position
1
and the vehicle is travelling
at mor
e than 16 km/h (
10 mph).
Modified behaviour of the r
ain sensor
P
ossibl
e causes of faults and mistaken read-
ings on the sensitive surface
›››
Fig. 122 of the
rain sensor include:
●
Damaged wipers: a film of water on the
damaged blades may lengthen the activa-
tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-
sult in a fast and continuous wipe.
●
Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger
the windscreen wiper.
●
Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on
the roads may cause an excessively long
wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.
●
Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus
effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may
reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or
make it react more slowly, later or not at all.
0
1
A
●
Windscr
een cr
ack: the impact of a st
one
will trigger a singl
e wipe cycl
e with the rain
sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-
duction in the sensitive surface area and
adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the
sensor will vary with the size of the damage
caused by the stone.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to switch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, swit
ch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
Note
●
Clean the sensitive surface of the rain
sensor r
egularly and check the blades for
damage
›››
Fig. 122 (arrow).
●
To remove wax and coatings, we recom-
mend a window cleaner containing alco-
hol.
●
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause
sensor disruption or faults.
125
Operation
Mirrors
Int
erior mirr
or anti-dazzl
e function
Fig. 123
Manual anti-dazzle function for rear
vision mirr
or
Fig. 124
Automatic anti-dazzle function for
r
ear vision mirr
or
Interior mirror with manual anti-dazzle
function
●
Basic position: place the lever at the bot-
t
om of the mirr
or in the f
orw
ar
d position.
●
Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-
dazzle function
›››
Fig. 123.
Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior
mirror
Key to Fig. 124:
Control lamp
Control
Light incidence sensor
This function can be activated and deactiva-
ted by pressing the rear-view mirror switch
›››
Fig. 124
2
. When it is activated, the warn-
ing l
amp lights up
1
.
When the ignition is on, the sensor
3
aut
o-
matically
mo
v
es the r
ear vision mirror to the
anti-dazzle position depending upon the inci-
dence of the light from behind.
The automatic anti-dazzle function is deacti-
vated when reverse gear is engaged or the
interior or reading lights are on.
WARNING
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
rear vision mirror breaks, an electr
olyte flu-
id may leak. This could cause irritation to
the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you
1
2
3
come into contact with this liquid, it must
be rinsed with large quantities of water
. If
necessary, get medial help.
CAUTION
In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle
r
ear vision mirror breaks, an electr
olyte flu-
id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-
faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon
as possible.
Note
●
If the light incident in the interior rear vi-
sion mirror is obstructed (e
.g. with the sun
blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror
with automatic setting will not operate per-
fectly.
●
When the interior lights are on or reverse
gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken
with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle
position.
●
If you have to stick any type of sticker on
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-
dazzle function from working well or even
from working at all.
126
Visibility
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 125
Detail of the driver's door: control for
the e
xt
erior mirr
or
.
Turn the control to the corresponding posi-
tion:
T
urning the knob t
o the desir
ed position,
adjust the mirr
ors on the driv
er side (L,
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to
the direction desired.
Depending on the equipment fitted on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
Folding in mirrors.
L/R
Synchronized regulation of the exterior
mirrors
In the Settings - Convenience menu, se-
lect whether or not the mirrors should move in
synchronisation
›››
page 70.
●
Turn the knob to position L
1)
.
●
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The
right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the
same time (synchronised).
●
If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-
view mirror: rotate the control to position R
1)
.
Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driv-
er side
The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is
controlled in the same way as the automatic
anti-dazzle rear vision mirror
›››
page 126.
Store the reverse settings for the passen-
ger exterior mirror
●
Select the vehicle key in which the setting is
to be stored.
●
Use this key to unlock the vehicle.
●
Connect the automatic parking brake.
●
Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R
(passenger side).
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Move the gear lever to neutral.
●
Access the Settings menu on the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
steering wheel buttons and select Conven-
ience.
●
Select the Rear vision mirror adjust-
ment function (if it is already checked, un-
check it and check the option again).
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger side exterior mir-
ror so that you can see, for example, the kerb
area.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For
vehicles with seat memory, please see
›››
page 133.
Activating the passenger exterior mirror
settings
●
Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.
●
With the ignition switched on, select reverse
gear.
●
The stored position of the passenger exteri-
or mirror for reverse gear is deleted when
driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the
knob is turned from position R to another po-
sition.
»
1)
Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-
metrical.
127
Operation
WARNING
Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors
give a larger field of vision. Ho
wever, they
make objects look smaller and further
away than they really are. If you use these
mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles
behind you when changing lane, you could
misjudge the distance. Risk of accident!
WARNING
Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking
care to avoid injuries.
●
Only fol
d or unfold the exterior mirror
when there is no-one in the way of the mir-
ror.
●
When moving the mirror, take care not to
trap fingers between the mirror and the
mirror bracket.
CAUTION
●
If one of the mirror housings is knocked
out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-
r
ors must first be fully retracted with the
electric control. Do not readjust the mirror
housing by hand, as this will interfere with
the mirror adjuster function.
●
Before washing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electrically retracta-
ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or
out by hand. Always use the electrical
power control.
Note
●
If the el
ectrical adjustment should fail to
oper
ate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-
ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of
the mirror glass.
●
The fold-in function on the exterior mir-
rors will not activate at speeds over
40 km/h (25 mph).
Sun protection
Sun blind
Fig. 126
Sun visor
Options for adjusting driver and front pas-
senger sun visors
●
Lower the sun visor towards the wind-
scr
een.
●
The sun visor can be pull
ed out of its
mounting and t
urned t
o
wards the door
›››
Fig. 126
1
.
●
Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-
t
udinally backw
ar
ds.
Ther
e is a v
anity mirror on the sun visor, with a
cover. When the cover is opened
2
a light
comes on.
The l
amp goes out when the v
anit
y mirr
or
co
ver is closed or the sun visor is pushed
back up.
WARNING
Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.
●
Always store sun blinds and visors in their
housing when not in use.
Note
The light above the sun visor automatically
switches off after a fe
w minutes in certain
conditions. This prevents the battery from
discharging.
128
Seats and headrests
Rear side window curtains
Fig. 127
On the rear right-hand window: cur-
t
ain.
The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fit-
t
ed in the side panel
s of the windo
ws.
●
Pull the sun blind by the handl
e
›
››
Fig. 127
A
up to the top.
●
Fasten the support rod to both anchorages
in the corr
ect spaces
B
. Verify that the sun
blind when e
xt
ended is hook
ed saf
ely in the
corr
ect spaces
B
.
●
To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the
t
op and l
o
w
er by hand
›
››
.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the blind or the inte-
rior trim, do not lower the sun blind “quick-
ly”.
Seats and headrests
Adjusting seats
Manual adjustment of the fr
ont
seats
Fig. 128
Front left seat controls
Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and
mo
v
e the seat. The seat must engage
when the l
e
v
er is released!
Lumbar support*: move the lever until the
desired position is achieved.
Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.
Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push
down (several times if necessary) from its
home position.
1
2
3
4
WARNING
Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-
cidents and severe injuries.
●
Only adjust the seats when the vehicl
e is
stationary, as the seats could move unex-
pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and
you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, an incorrect position is adopted
when adjusting the seat.
●
Adjust the height, position and inclination
of the front seats only when their move-
ment area is empty.
●
Make sure there are no objects in that
area.
●
Make sure that the movement and lock-
ing areas of the seats are clean.
WARNING
Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-
ers might cause an accidental activation of
the electrical seat adjustment system and
mak
e it move unexpectedly while driving.
This might cause loss of control of the vehi-
cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-
over, the electrical components of the front
seats might be damaged.
●
Never attach or place seat upholstery or
covers on the electric controls.
●
Never use upholstery or seat covers that
have not been explicitly authorised for the
seats of the vehicle.
129
Operation
Electric driver's seat adjustment*
Fig. 129
Driver's seat: electric seat settings.
Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-
t
on accor
ding t
o the desir
ed position.
Seat f
orwards/backwards: press the but-
ton forwards/backwards.
Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the
button up/down. To adjust the angle of
the seat cushion, press the front of the
button up/down.
Backrest further upright/further reclined:
press the button forwards/backwards.
Mechanically and electrically adjusted con-
trols can be combined on the seat.
A
B
C
WARNING
●
If the electric front seats are used negli-
gently or without paying due attention, it
can cause serious injury.
●
The fr
ont seats can also be electrically
adjusted when the ignition is switched off.
Never leave a child or any other person
who may need help in the vehicle.
●
In the event of an emergency, electrical
adjustment can be stopped by pressing
any control.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the electrical compo-
nents of the front seats, please refrain fr
om
kneeling on the seat or applying sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush-
ion and backrest.
Note
●
It may not be possible to electrically ad-
just the seat if the vehicl
e battery is very
low.
●
If the engine is started while the seats are
being electrically adjusted, the adjustment
will stop.
Adjusting the rear seats
Fig. 130
Adjusting rear seats
Adjusting the seat backrest
●
Pull the lever and adjust the seat backrest
t
o the desir
ed position
›
›
›
Fig. 130
1
›
›
›
.
The seat backr
est must be engaged when
the l
e
v
er is r
eleased!
There is a handle instead of the lever on the
third row of seats and on the central seat of
the second row. It is used in the same manner
as the lever.
Move the seat backwards or forwards.
Only in the second row of seats:
●
Pull the lever and move the seat
2
. The
seat must be engaged when the l
e
v
er is r
e-
l
eased!
130
Seats and headrests
CAUTION
●
Tilting the seat backrest of the second
row of seats fully back could damage the
luggage compar
tment tray. Remove the
tray before adjusting the seat backrest.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
could cause damage when moving the rear
seats forwards or backwards.
Headrest
Introduction
The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-
sembly of the headr
ests ar
e described bel
o
w
.
Always make sure that the seats are correctly
adjusted
›››
page 11.
All seats are equipped with a headrest. The
rear headrests have been designed exclu-
sively for the corresponding seat of the sec-
ond or third row. Therefore, never mount them
on any other seat.
Correct adjustment of headrest
Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is
at the same level as the top of your head and
under no circumstances below eye level.
Keep the back of your head always as close
to the headrest as possible.
In vehicles with horizontally adjustable headr-
ests on the front seats, move the headrest as
close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the headrest for short people
Lower the headrest completely, even if your
head is below its upper edge. In the lowest
position, there may be a small distance be-
tween the headrest and the backrest.
Adjusting the headrest for tall people
Push the headrest up as far as it will go.
WARNING
If travelling with the headrests removed or
improperly adjusted, the risk of sever
e or
fatal injuries in the event of accidents and
sudden braking or manoeuvres increases.
●
Always travel with the headrest correctly
installed and adjusted.
●
To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in
the event of an accident, adjust the head-
rest correctly based on your height, always
making sure that its upper edge is at the
same height as the top of the head, but
never below eye level. Keep the back of
your head always as close to the headrest
as possible and centred.
●
Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
●
Under no circumstances should the rear
passengers travel while the headrests are
in the non-use position.
CAUTION
When assembling and disassembling the
headrests, do not let them meet the top lin-
ing of the vehicl
e, the back rest of the front
seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,
this could damage the vehicle.
131
Operation
Adjusting the headrests
Fig. 131 Front seat: headrest adjustment.
Fig. 132 Adjust the headrests in the second or
third row of seats
Adjusting the height of the headrests
●
Move the headrest up or down in the direc-
tion of the corr
esponding arr
o
w
. R
egarding
the rear headrest, to both raise and lower,
press the button
›››
Fig. 131
1
; for the rear
headr
ests it is only necessary t
o pr
ess the
butt
on
›
››
Fig. 132
1
to lower them
›
›
›
in
Intr
oduction on page 131
.
●
The headr
est must l
ock corr
ectly in one po-
sition.
Adjusting the front headrests horizontally
●
Move the headrest forward or back in the
direction of the corresponding arrow while
pressing the button
›››
Fig. 131
1
.
●
The headrest must lock correctly in one po-
sition.
Removing and fitting the headrests
Fig. 133
A: Fitting the headrests with no possi-
bilit
y of l
engthw
ays dir
ection adjustment; B: Fit
-
ting the headrests with lengthways direction
adjustment
132
Seats and headrests
Fig. 134 Fitting the headrests in the second or
third row of seats
Removing and fitting the front headrests
without l
ongit
udinal adjustment
●
Push the headr
est up as f
ar as it will go
›
››
in Introduction on page 131.
●
Pull out the headrest by pressing the button
compl
et
ely
›
›
›
Fig. 133
1
.
●
To refit, insert the headrest into the holes in
the backr
est, pushing it do
wn until it engages,
whil
e pr
essing butt
on
1
.
R
emo
ving and fitting the fr
ont headr
ests
with l
ongitudinal adjustment
●
Push the headrest up and backward as far
as it will go
›››
in Introduction on
page 131.
●
Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card
›
›
›
Fig. 133
2
, on both sides between the
seat backr
est co
v
er and the end pr
ot
ector of
the seat backrest retaining bar and unlock
the retaining bars with a little pressure.
●
Completely pull out the headrest.
●
When re-fitting, pull out the headrest's two
retaining bars as far as possible and insert
them into the holes in the seat back. Push
downwards until the two bars click into place.
Removing the rear headrests
●
If necessary, adjust the backrest of the seat
so the headrest can be removed.
●
Push the headrest up as far as it will go
›››
in Introduction on page 131.
●
Remove the headrest completely while
pr
essing butt
on
›
›
›
Fig. 134
1
.
Fitting the r
ear headr
ests
●
Unl
ock the r
ear seat backr
est and fold it
forward slightly
›››
page 130.
●
Place the headrest in the correct position
on the guides of the corresponding backrest
and insert it.
●
Lower the headrest while pressing button
1
.
●
Raise the rear seat backrest and lock it.
WARNING
Remove the rear headrests only when it is
necessary to fit a child seat. After remo
ving
a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.
Seat functions
L
umbar massage function*
Fig. 135
On the side of the front seat: button
f
or the lumbar massage function.
During the massage operation, the lumbar
support will mo
v
e in a w
ay that massages the
lumbar ar
ea of the back
. While it is operating,
the arch of the lumbar support can be adjus-
ted using the corresponding control based on
your personal preferences
›››
page 11.
Connection
●
Press the button in the control panel of
the seat.
Disconnection
●
Press the button again in the control
panel of the seat.
»
133
Operation
Automatic off
●
The lumbar massage will disconnect auto-
matically aft
er appr
o
x. 10 minut
es.
Memory function*
Fig. 136
Memory buttons on the outside of the
driv
er seat
Memory buttons
The memory butt
ons can be used t
o sav
e
and t
urn on settings f
or the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors.
Save the settings of the driver seat and
the exterior mirrors while driving forward
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Press
for longer than 1 second
›
›
›
Fig. 136
.
●
Pr
ess the memory button in which to store
the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A
warning sound will confirm they have been
stored.
Storing the passenger rear view mirror
settings while driving in reverse
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the required memory button.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so
that you can see, for example, the kerb area
well.
●
The new position of the mirror will be stored
automatically and allocated to the vehicle
key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
Activating exterior mirror settings
●
With the driver door open and the ignition
turned off, push the memory button of the
corresponding door briefly.
●
OR: with the ignition switched on, hold in
the corresponding memory button until the
memorised position is reached.
To activate the memory function of the ve-
hicle key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Open the driver-side door.
●
Press and hold any memory button.
●
Within three seconds of the move being
completed, push the open button on the
vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the
settings have been activated.
Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and
assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle
key
●
Activate the memory function of the vehicle
key
●
Adjust the front seat and the exterior mir-
rors.
●
Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned
to the vehicle key.
To deactivate the memory function of the
vehicle key
Condition: a position must be memorised in
the memory.
●
Press and hold the
button
›
›
›
Fig. 136
.
●
Within the f
ollowing 10 seconds, push the
open button on the vehicle key. An audible
warning confirms the settings have been de-
activated.
134
Seats and headrests
Initialising the seat position memory
The position memory syst
em must be r
est
ar
-
t
ed if, for example, the driver seat has been
changed.
Restarting deletes all memories and assign-
ments for the seat with position memory. The
memory buttons can then be reprogrammed
and the vehicle keys re-assigned.
●
Open the driver door and do not get into
the vehicle.
●
Operating the seat settings from outside
the vehicle.
●
Move the angle of the seat backrest com-
pletely forwards.
●
Release the control to set the angle and
then press again until an audible warning is
heard.
WARNING
Adjust the memory function only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Note
The front passenger side exterior mirror au-
tomatically changes from the position stor-
ed f
or reversing as soon as the vehicle
moves forward at a speed of at least
15 km/h (9 mph) or when the gear selection
lever is changed to a position other than R.
Access aid for the third row of seats
Fig. 137
Second row of seats:: access aid con-
tr
ol
s.
The outer seats of the second row can be fol-
ded t
o mak
e it easier t
o get in and out of the
thir
d r
ow of seats.
Folding down the second row seats
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
If necessary, remove the side headrest of
the integrated child seat
›››
page 35.
●
If necessary, raise the armrests.
●
Remove any objects located in the footwell
of the second row of seats, where applicable
›››
.
●
Push the headrest down as far as it will go
›
›
›
page 1
1
.
●
Push the lever
›››
Fig. 137
1
forwards and
f
ol
d the backr
est of the r
ear seat. This seat
f
olds forward completely
›››
and can still
be mo
v
ed further f
orw
ar
d.
●
Always take care when entering and leav-
ing the vehicle
›››
.
R
epositioning the seat in the second r
o
w
●
Lift the backr
est of the r
ear seat in an up-
right position. The entire seat folds back-
wards
›››
.
●
Make sure that the rear seat is securely en-
gaged so that the seat belts can pr
o
vide
pr
oper pr
ot
ection in the rear seats. The red
mark
›››
Fig. 137
2
should no longer be visi-
bl
e
›
›
›
in Folding the rear seats down as
a car
go surf
ace on page 14
2
.
Emer
gency exit function
If the lever
›››
Fig. 137
1
does not work, e.g.
aft
er an accident, the seats on the second
r
o
w can be f
ol
ded forwards from the third row
to allow vehicle occupants of the third row of
seats to get out of the vehicle
›››
.
●
Pull the handle
›
›
›
Fig. 137
3
back and fold
the backr
est of the r
ear seat. The compl
et
e
r
ear seat folds forward
›››
.
WARNING
Careless or uncontrolled use of the con-
venient entry assistant may result in sev
ere
injury and accident.
»
135
Operation
●
Never use the convenient entry function
when the vehicl
e is in motion.
●
Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt
when folding the rear seats back.
●
Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of the hinges and the seat
locking mechanism when folding and un-
folding.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or rear
seat. This could prevent the seat backrest
from locking safely when positioned up-
right.
●
All seat backrests must engage correctly
for the seat belts on the rear seats to work
properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-
cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,
the passenger can be thrust forward with
the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-
ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.
●
A red mark on the side of the seat
›››
Fig. 137
2
indicates that the seat back-
rest is not engaged. The mark is no longer
visible when it is correctly engaged.
●
If the seat backr
est or seat are folded
down and are not correctly locked in place,
no passenger should use them.
●
When getting in or out, never lean or hold
onto the folded seat on the second row of
seats.
WARNING
If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the
second row then it is possible that the
seats of this ro
w cannot be folded down
from the third row of seats in the event of an
accident. In the event of an emergency,
passengers in the third row of seats will not
be able to leave the vehicle or to help
themselves.
●
Child seats should not occupy all the
seats of the second row if other passengers
are to occupy the third row.
CAUTION
●
Before folding do
wn the rear seat back-
rest for returning it to its position, adjust the
front seats so that the headrests and seat
backrests do not hit each other when fold-
ing and unfolding.
●
Any objects located in the footwell of the
second row of seats may be damaged on
folding the rear seat forwards. Remove any
objects before folding the seat down.
Adjusting or folding the backrest of
the fr
ont passenger seat
Fig. 138
Front passenger seat: fold the back-
r
est of the seat f
orw
ar
ds.
Fig. 139
Unlocking the folding backrest of the
fr
ont passenger seat
The backrest of the front passenger seat can
be f
ol
ded and l
ock
ed horiz
ontally.
136
Seats and headrests
Folding the backrest of the front passen-
ger seat f
orw
ar
d
●
R
emo
ve any objects from the front passen-
ger seat cushion
›››
.
●
Move the passenger seat to its lowest posi-
tion.
●
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possibl
e
.
●
Unl
ock the backr
est of the fr
ont passenger
seat in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 138
1
.
●
Fold the backrest of the front passenger
seat f
orw
ar
ds in the dir
ection of the arr
ow
2
until it is horizontal.
●
Once folded down, the backrest has to be
l
ock
ed saf
ely.
When carrying ob
jects on the f
olded down
backrest of the passenger seat, the front air-
bag of this seat must be disabled
›››
page 25.
Lifting the backrest of the front passenger
seat
●
When lifting the passenger backrest, make
sure there are no objects or body parts within
the hinge movement area.
●
Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat
by first unlocking it again
›››
Fig. 139.
●
Lift the backrest of the seat in an upright
position.
●
Once it is raised again, the backrest must
be correctly engaged.
WARNING
Serious injuries can be caused if the pas-
senger seat backrest is lower
ed or lifted
without due care and attention.
●
Only fold and lift the backrest of the front
passenger seat when the vehicle is station-
ary.
●
When folding down the passenger seat,
always make sure there are no people or
animals in the backrest area.
●
While the passenger backrest is down,
the front airbag must always be disabled
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG warning
lamp must be on.
●
When moving the passenger backrest up
and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet
and other body parts out of the operating
area of the hinges and the locking mecha-
nism of the seat.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the backrest of the front pas-
senger seat. This would cause the backrest
not to be locked in an upright position when
lifting it.
●
Once the backrest is up, it must be cor-
rectly engaged in an upright position. Oth-
erwise, it could move unexpectedly and
cause severe injuries.
WARNING
When folding down the passenger back-
rest, its anchor points and hinges are left
uncov
ered and may cause severe injuries in
the event of a sudden brake or accident.
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered nobody else can travel in the cor-
responding seats (not even a child).
●
When the passenger seat backrest is
lowered, the only permitted seat is the rear
seat behind the driver seat. This also ap-
plies to children travelling on a child seat.
Front centre armrest
Fig. 140
Front centre armrest
To lift the centr
al armr
est, lift it up
w
ar
ds in the
direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 140, setting by
setting.
»
137
Operation
To l
ower the armrest, first lift it to its highest
position. Then l
o
w
er it do
wn.
To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-
ward
›››
Fig. 140 or backward as much as
possible in the direction of the corresponding
arrow.
WARNING
The front centre armrest may obstruct the
driver's arm movements, which coul
d
cause an accident and severe injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
●
Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-
rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even
a child. This position is incorrect and may
cause severe injuries.
Transport and practical
equipment
St
oring ob
jects
P
ositioning the luggage and car
go
It is possible to carry objects and luggage in
the vehicle, in a trail
er
›››
page 298 and on
the roof
›››
page 148. When doing so, please
consider all legal provisions.
Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely
●
Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly
as possible.
●
Always pl
ace equipment and heavy ob-
jects in the boot
›››
.
●
Position heavy items in the boot as far for-
w
ar
d as possibl
e
.
●
T
ake into account the maximum authorised
weight per axle, as well as the maximum au-
thorised weight of the vehicle
›››
page 355.
●
Secure the objects to the fastening rings of
the boot using appropriate chains or belts
›››
page 143.
●
Also place small objects safely.
●
Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into
account the pressure adhesive of the tyres
›››
page 330.
●
In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-
tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-
ry
›››
page 333.
WARNING
Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri-
ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring
or braking or in case of an accident. Partic-
ularly if the airbag hits them when depl
oy-
ing and they are thrown across the inside of
the vehicle. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-
ly.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Place the objects in the cabin in such a
way that they can never reach the airbag
deployment areas while the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
●
Place the objects in such a way that they
never force any occupant of the vehicle to
sit in an incorrect position.
●
When transporting objects that take up a
seat, never let anyone use that seat.
●
Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects
loose in open storage compartment of the
vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat
or on the dashboard.
●
Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects
from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin
and store them safely.
138
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
The transport of heavy object changes ve-
hicle handling and increases braking dis-
tance
. Heavy objects that are not properly
placed or secured may cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.
●
Never put too much load in the vehicle.
Both the carrying capacity as well as the
distribution of the load in the vehicle have
effects on the driving behaviour and brak-
ing ability.
●
When transporting heavy objects, the
driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due
to the displacement of the centre of gravi-
ty.
●
Always distribute the load in the vehicle
as evenly and horizontally as possible.
●
Always place heavy objects in the boot
before the rear axle and as far away from it
as possible.
●
Objects in the luggage compartment
that are unsecured could move suddenly
and modify the handling of the vehicle.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Brake earlier than usual.
WARNING
●
Never leave your v
ehicle unattended, es-
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Close and lock all the doors and the rear
lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you
lock the vehicle, make sure that there are
no adults or children in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Electrical wires or, depending on the fea-
tures, the antenna embedded into the r
ear
windows could be damaged, even irrepara-
bly, if they are in contact with objects.
Note
Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
ing rings are commercially availabl
e from
accessory shops.
Luggage compartment
L
uggage compar
tment shelf*
Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: luggage
compartment tr
ay.
»
139
Operation
Fig. 142
Remove the shelf supports A then put
them aw
ay saf
ely B.
The rear shelf can be fitted behind the sec-
ond or thir
d r
o
w of seats
›
›
›
.
Opening the shelf
●
Pull the shelf handle
›
›
›
Fig. 141
A
a little bit
backw
ar
ds.
●
R
el
ease the shelf up
wards by the side sup-
ports and guide it forward.
Closing the shelf
●
Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide
backwards.
●
Secure the shelf using the left and right side
supports.
Installing the shelf behind the second row
of seats
●
Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-
ing, left-hand side first.
●
Release the shelf in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
Fig. 141
B
.
●
Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,
pr
essing do
wn.
Inst
alling the shelf behind the thir
d r
ow of
seats
●
Remove the shelf from the side trim support
›››
Fig. 142 A. To do this, press the shelf up-
wards (arrow) and remove it.
●
Open the compartment in the left-hand
side boot lining
›››
page 150 and hook the
shelf to the rear of the compartment lid
›››
Fig. 142 B.
●
Close the rear left-hand side lining com-
partment.
●
Place the shelf in its position in the side lin-
ing, left-hand side first.
●
Lift the shelf off in direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 141
B
.
●
Insert the shelf into the right-hand support,
pr
essing do
wn.
R
emo
ving the shelf
●
R
elease the shelf in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
Fig. 141
B
and lift it in the direction of
the arr
o
w
C
.
●
Remove the shelf from the right-hand side
support.
●
Moreover, when detaching the shelf be-
hind the thir
d seat r
o
w
:
cover the supports
of the side trims with their covers.
●
With only 5 seats: support the released
shelf by placing it on the front section of the
boot floor
›››
page 150.
WARNING
If the shelf is placed on one of the rear
seats, this could cause serious injury in
case of sudden braking or an accident.
●
Whenever it the thir
d row seats are occu-
pied, the shelf should be put behind this
row.
WARNING
Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects
or animals on the rear shelf could cause
serious injuries in case of a sudden ma-
noeuvre or br
aking or even an accident.
140
Transport and practical equipment
●
Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp ob-
jects (loose or in bags) on the r
ear shelf.
●
Never transport animals on the rear shelf.
Folding the rear seats down as a
cargo surface
Fig. 143 Second row of seats:: fold down the
r
ear seat , r
ear seat as car
go surf
ace
.
Fig. 144 Third row of seats: folding down the
r
ear seat f
or l
oading
putting it back into
place .
Each rear seat can fold down individually to
e
xt
end the luggage compartment.
F
ol
ding the seats in the second r
ow of
seats for loading
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
If required, remove the headrests from the
integrated seats for children and refit them
›››
page 35.
●
If necessary, raise the armrests.
●
Remove objects from the footwell in front of
and behind the rear seat
›››
.
●
Move the rear seat all the way back.
●
Push the headrest down as far as it will go
›
›
›
page 1
1
.
●
In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier in
the rear of the centre console, if necessary.
●
Pull lever
›››
Fig. 143
1
back and fold the
seat backr
est f
orw
ar
ds. The compl
ete rear
seat folds forward
›››
.
●
Fold the seat backrest forwards until it locks
int
o the l
oad surf
ace position
›
›
›
Fig. 143 .
●
If necessary, pull on the lever
›››
Fig. 144
2
to move the seat to the required position.
●
When the seat is folded down, no adults or
chil
dr
en shoul
d tr
av
el in it
›››
.
F
ol
ding the seats in the thir
d r
o
w of seats
for loading
●
If necessary, open the belt loop and wind
up the seat belt by hand.
●
Open the rear lid.
»
141
Operation
●
Push the headr
est do
wn as f
ar as it will go
›
›
›
page 11.
●
Remove objects from the footwell in front of
and behind the rear seat
›››
.
●
Remove objects from the space below the
r
ear seat.
●
R
emo
v
e the att
achment elements and sup-
ports for the net from the rail system.
●
Pull lever
›››
Fig. 144
1
back and fold the
seat backr
est f
orw
ar
ds. The r
ear seat folds
forward
›››
and the cushion also moves for-
w
ar
d.
●
F
ol
d the seat tr
ay forward on top of the fol-
ded seat.
●
When the seat is folded down, no adults or
children should travel in it
›››
.
Putting the seats in the second r
o
w back in
pl
ace
●
Pull l
e
ver
›››
Fig. 143
1
upwards and place
the seat backr
ests in v
ertical position. The
entir
e seat f
ol
ds backwards.
●
Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest
to ensure that they are correctly locked in
place and that the seat belt protection is
guaranteed for rear seat passengers.
Putting the seats in the third row back in
place
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull on the handle
›››
Fig. 144
2
to put the
seat tr
ay back in position.
●
Pull the handl
e
›
›
›
Fig. 144
3
. The entire
seat f
ol
ds backw
ar
ds.
●
Pr
ess on the seat tray in the seat backrest
until it is held in position by its magnets.
●
Open the sliding door.
●
Put the seat backrest into position and
press firmly until it clicks into place.
●
Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest
to ensure that they are correctly locked in
place and that the seat belt protection is
guaranteed for rear seat passengers.
WARNING
Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly
without paying attention could cause seri-
ous injury.
●
Never f
old or lift the seats while driving.
●
Do no trap or damage seat belts when
raising the seat backrest.
●
Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other
body parts out of the hinges and the seat
locking mechanism when folding and un-
folding.
●
Mats or other objects can be caught in
the hinges of the seat backrests or rear
seat. This could prevent the seat or seat
backrest from locking securely in the verti-
cal position.
●
All seat backrests must engage correctly
for the seat belts on the rear seats t
o work
properly. When the seat backrest of an oc-
cupied seat is not correctly locked in place,
the passenger can be thrust forward with
the seat backrest in case of sudden brak-
ing, sudden manoeuvres or an accident.
●
No seat must be occupied if the seat
backrest or seat is folded or not correctly
engaged.
CAUTION
●
Bef
ore folding the r
ear seat backrest, ad-
just the front seats so that neither the
headrest or backrest hit them when folded.
●
Objects placed in the footrest area in
front of and behind the rear seats can be
damaged when seats are folded down or
put back into position. Remove any objects
in the way before folding seats down or re-
positioning them.
●
Objects placed in the moulding on the
back of the third row of seats can be dam-
aged when folding down the seats or put-
ting them back into position. Remove any
objects in the way before folding seats
down or repositioning them.
●
The attachment elements and supports
for the net partition placed on the rail sys-
tem can be damaged when folding down
seats from the third row or putting them
back into position and these can also dam-
age the seats themselves. Before folding
142
Transport and practical equipment
down or repositioning the seats, remove
the attachment elements and supports for
the net fr
om the rail system.
Fastening rings*
Fig. 145 In the luggage compartment: fasten-
ing rings.
There are fastening rings
›
›
›
Fig. 145
on the
fr
ont and rear of the boot to secure loose ob-
jects and luggage with fastening belts and
cords.
On some models, the fastening rings are lo-
cated right at the back, in the area of the lock
carrier plate.
There are other fastening rings located to the
left and right hand side of the second row
footrests.
WARNING
If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining
straps are used, they could break in the
e
vent of braking or an accident. Objects
could then be launched across the passen-
ger compartment and cause serious or fa-
tal injuries.
●
Always use belts or straps that are suita-
ble and in good condition.
●
Tighten the belts and straps in a cross
layout over the load placed on the boot
floor and secure them to the fastening rings
safely.
●
Never exceed the maximum tensile load
of the fastening rings when securing ob-
jects.
●
Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-
jects, the upper edge of the load is higher
than the fastening rings.
●
Depending on the features, take into ac-
count the instruction panels on the boot on
how to place the load.
●
Never secure a child seat to the fastening
rings.
Note
●
The maximum tensile load that the fas-
t
ening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.
●
Belts, straps and securing systems for the
appropriate load can be obtained from
specialised dealerships. SEAT recom-
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.
Rail system with fasteners*
Fig. 146
In the luggage compartment: system
including r
ail
s, adjust
abl
e att
achment ele-
ments
1
and adjustable tightening straps
2
.
The rails and attachment system consists of
f
our r
ail
s, mo
v
able attachment elements,
straps to be secured to the rails and a net
with supports to cover baggage
›››
page 144. The rail and attachment sys-
tem is designed to secure light objects. If the
seats in the third row are to be occupied by
passengers then attachment elements
should never be placed in the section of the
rails close to the seats
›››
.
Inst
alling the att
achment el
ements
●
Fit the att
achment el
ement with the ruts
facing upwards
›››
Fig. 146
1
to the upper
part of the guide and pr
ess do
wnw
ar
ds.
●
Mo
ve the attachment element to the de-
sired position.
»
143
Operation
●
Al
w
ays ensur
e that the att
achment inserts
int
o the guide system
›››
.
R
emo
ving the att
achment el
ements
●
R
emove the attachment element from the
guide and pull downwards.
Securing a load
●
Pull the strap through the attachment ele-
ment and secure the load
›››
.
WARNING
In case of an accident or sudden braking,
the attachment elements in the parts of the
rail
s close to the seats of the third row
could injure seat occupants.
●
Whenever the seats on the third row are
to be occupied, remove the attachment el-
ements from the rails or move them all the
way back.
WARNING
Movable attachment elements that are not
secured correctly can be released fr
om the
guide in case of sudden braking or acci-
dent. As a result, objects may be fired
through the vehicle interior causing serious
injury or death.
●
Always ensure that the movable attach-
ment elements are correctly inserted into
the guides.
WARNING
Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps
may be released in case of sudden braking
or an accident. As a result, ob
jects may be
fired through the vehicle interior causing
serious injury or death.
●
Always use the attachment straps of the
rail and attachment system.
●
Secure the attachment straps firmly to
the attachment elements.
●
Loose objects in the luggage compart-
ment can suddenly slide and change the
way the vehicle handles.
●
Secure all objects, little and large.
●
Never secure a child seat to the attach-
ment elements.
CAUTION
The attachment elements placed on the
rail system can be damaged when folding
do
wn seats from the third row or putting
them back into position and these can also
damage the seats themselves. Before fold-
ing down or repositioning the seats, remove
the attachment elements and supports for
the net from the rail system.
Net to cover the luggage*
Fig. 147
Hook the baggage net A and use it as
a bag B.
144
Transport and practical equipment
Fig. 148 Release the baggage net
If the seats in the third row are to be occupied
by passengers then att
achment el
ements
shoul
d ne
v
er be placed in the section of the
rails close to the seats
›››
.
Inst
alling the baggage net suppor
ts
●
Fit the baggage net support int
o the guide
fr
om the back and pr
ess downwards.
●
Move the baggage net support to the re-
quired position.
●
Always ensure that the net support inserts
into the rail system
›››
.
Hooking the baggage net int
o the suppor
t
Pl
ace the att
achment r
od on the baggage
net support
›››
Fig. 147
1
and rotate 90° to
the l
eft
2
. The red mark on the attachment
r
od shoul
d not be visibl
e
›
›
›
.
Using the net for bag type baggage
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the upper r
ail
s.
●
Fit a mo
v
abl
e baggage net attachment el-
ement to each one of the lower guides
›››
page 143.
●
Hook the baggage net into the supports.
●
Hook the baggage net attachment strap
underneath into one of the movable attach-
ment elements
›››
Fig. 147 B.
●
Join the baggage net supports to the upper
rails as much as possible by pushing them.
●
Press the sides of the baggage net togeth-
er so that they are held by the Velcro.
Using the baggage net to separate the
luggage compartment
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the upper rails.
●
Fit the baggage net supports to each one
of the lower rails.
●
Hook the baggage net into the supports.
To release the baggage net
●
Rotate the attachment rod 90° to the right
›››
Fig. 148
1
until you can see the red mark
on the r
od. Pull the att
achment r
od up
w
ards
2
.
●
With only 5 seats: aft
er r
emo
ving, pl
ace
the baggage net saf
ely in the front compart-
ment on the floor of the boot
›››
page 150.
Removing the baggage net supports
●
Remove the net attachment element from
the rail and pull it out downwards.
WARNING
In case of an accident or sudden braking,
the net attachment elements in the parts of
the rail
s close to the seats of the third row
could injure seat occupants.
●
Whenever the seats on the third row are
to be occupied, remove the attachment el-
ements from the rails or move them all the
way back.
WARNING
Baggage net supports that are not secured
correctly can be released from the guide in
case of the sudden br
aking or accident. As
a result, objects may be fired through the
vehicle interior causing serious injury or
death.
●
Always ensure that the baggage net sup-
ports are correctly inserted into the rails;
the red mark should not be visible.
●
Never secure a child seat to the baggage
net supports.
»
145
Operation
CAUTION
The baggage net supports placed on the
rail system can be damaged when folding
do
wn seats from the third row or putting
them back into position and these can also
damage the seats themselves. Before fold-
ing down or repositioning the seats, remove
the baggage net supports from the rail sys-
tem.
Luggage net*
Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: net for
hanging luggage
.
The baggage net can be used to secure
light
er it
ems.
Hooking the baggage net int
o the boot
fl
oor
●
Hook the baggage net int
o the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 149
1
and
2
.
Releasing the baggage net
The secur
ed baggage net is t
aut
›
›
›
.
●
Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks
fr
om the f
ast
ening rings
›
›
›
Fig. 149
1
.
●
Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks
fr
om the f
ast
ening rings
›
›
›
Fig. 149
2
.
WARNING
The elastic baggage net stretches when it
is secured to the luggage compartment
fast
ening rings. The secured baggage net
is taut. The hooks on the net can cause in-
jury if the net is incorrectly hooked or un-
hooked.
●
Always ensure that the hooks do not sud-
denly release from the fastening rings
when hooking or un-hooking.
●
Always keep your face and eyes protec-
ted at a safe distance to avoid injury should
a hook slip while hooking or unhooking.
●
Always engage the hooks in the order
given. If a baggage net hook springs back
this can cause injury.
Bag hooks
Fig. 150
In the luggage compartment: bag
hooks.
On the right hand side of the luggage com-
partment ther
e ar
e some f
ol
d-out hooks f
or
hanging bags
›››
Fig. 150.
●
Press the retaining hooks down
›››
Fig. 150
(arrow) and fold them.
After use, raise the hooks again.
The retaining hooks have been designed to
secure light shopping bags.
WARNING
Never use the hooks to hang luggage or
other objects. In case of sudden braking or
an accident, the hooks could break
.
146
Transport and practical equipment
Net partition*
Unf
ol
ding and f
ol
ding the net par
ti-
tion
Fig. 151
Deploying the net partition.
Fig. 152
Folding in the net partition.
Before fitting the net partition in the vehicle it
must be unf
ol
ded.
F
ol
d out the net par
tition
Take out the partition net from the corre-
sponding bag and unroll it.
Extend the cross rods
›››
Fig. 151
1
and
2
of
the net in the dir
ection of the arr
o
ws until it
“clicks”.
F
ol
ding in the net partition
●
Press on the release button
›››
Fig. 152
1
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
o
w with the butt
on pr
essed.
●
Pr
ess on the release button
›››
Fig. 152
2
and bend the cross rod in the direction of the
arr
o
w with the butt
on pr
essed.
●
F
old in the net partition and store it in its
bag.
●
Store the net partition safely in the vehicle.
Using the net partition
Fig. 153
Net partition fitted.
The purpose of the net partition is to prevent
the it
ems in the boot fr
om mo
ving int
o the
cabin, e
.g. in the event of sudden braking.
Fitting the net partition
The partition net can be fitted behind the rear
seat or, depending on the features, behind
the front seats with the second row of seats
lowered.
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 139.
●
Folding out the net partition
›››
page 147.
●
Secure the net partition in the left housing
of the roof
›››
Fig. 153
A
. Make sure to move
the cr
oss r
od do
wn beyond the upper posi-
tion.
»
14
7
Operation
●
Hook in the net partition on the r
ear right
-
hand side r
oof housing by pr
essing on the r
od
›››
Fig. 153
A
.
●
Secure two hooks of the partition net to the
f
ast
ening rings of the boot
›
›
›
Fig. 153
B
and
tight
en the str
aps firmly.
R
emo
ving the net par
tition
●
If required, remove the rear shelf
›››
page 139.
●
Loosen the straps from the net partition.
●
Release the net hooks from the fastening
rings
›››
Fig. 153
B
.
●
Unhook the net partition on the right-hand
side r
oof support
›
›
›
Fig. 153
A
by pressing
on the r
od.
●
Unhook the net partition fr
om the l
eft
-hand
side r
oof housing.
●
Fold in the net partition
›››
page 147.
●
If required, fit the rear shelf
›››
page 139.
WARNING
In order to ensure the proper functioning of
the luggage restraint systems (backrests
t
ogether with the net partition), place the
second row of seats in their rearmost posi-
tion to avoid the possibility of the load on
top moving forward. Risk to vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
During a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-
jects coul
d be flung though the interior and
cause serious or fatal injuries.
●
Check whether the cross rods are cor-
rectly engaged.
●
Always secure objects, even when the
net partition is properly assembled.
●
There should be nobody behind the net
partition when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
If the net partition is secured incorrectly or
to incorrect points, this may damage the
vehicle
.
Roof carrier*
Intr
oduction
The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-
mise aer
odynamics. F
or this r
eason, cr
oss
bars or conv
entional roof carrier systems
cannot be secured to the roof water drains.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems
can be used.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof
carrier system should be disassembled.
●
When they are not used.
●
When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.
●
When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-
mum height, for example, in some garages.
WARNING
●
Always secure the load pr
operly using
belts or retaining straps that are suitable
and in a good condition.
●
Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a
negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-
tre of gravity and driving performance.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
CAUTION
●
Remove the cross bars and the r
oof carri-
er system before entering a car wash.
●
Vehicle height is increased by the instal-
lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system
and the load secured on them. For this pur-
pose, check that your vehicle's height does
not surpass the headspace limit, for exam-
ple, for underpasses or for entering garage
doors.
148
Transport and practical equipment
●
Cross bars, the roof carrier system and
the load secur
ed on them should not inter-
fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path
of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.
●
On opening the rear lid make sure that it
does not knock into the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
When cross bars and a roof carrier system
ar
e installed, the increased air r
esistance
means that the vehicle uses more fuel.
Securing the crossbars and the
r
oof carrier syst
em
Fig. 154
Attachment points for the roof railings
f
or the r
oof carrier syst
em.
The crossbars are the basis of a series of
special r
oof carrier syst
ems. F
or saf
et
y rea-
sons, special fixtures must be used to safely
transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards
or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories
can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
Always secure the crossbars and the roof
carrier system properly. Always take the as-
sembly instructions that come with the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system in question
into account.
The attachment openings are located on the
inner side of the side roof rods
›››
Fig. 154.
WARNING
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross-
bars and the roof carrier system may cause
the whole system t
o detach from the roof
and cause an accident and injuries.
●
Always take the manufacturer assembly
instructions into account.
●
Check threaded joints and attachments
travelling and if necessary tighten them af-
ter you have travelled a short distance.
When making long trips, check the threa-
ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.
●
Do not modify or repair the crossbars or
roof carrier system.
Note
Always read the assembly instructions that
come with the crossbars and the roof carri-
er system carefully and k
eep them in the
vehicle.
Loading the roof carrier system
The load can only be secured if the crossbars
and the roof carrier system are properly in-
st
alled
›››
.
Maximum authorised cargo on the roof
The maximum authorised cargo permitted t
o
be transport on the roof is 100 kg
(220 pounds). This figure comes from the
combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross
bars and the load itself on the roof
›››
.
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
syst
em, the cross bars and the weight of the
load to be transported and weigh them if
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
thorised roof load.
If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
with a lower weight rating, you will not be
able to carry the maximum authorised roof
load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-
mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is
listed in the fitting instructions.
Distributing a load
Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
correctly
›››
.
Check att
achments
Once the cr
oss bars and r
oof carrier syst
em
hav
e been installed, check the bolted con-
nections and attachments after a short
»
149
Operation
journey and subsequently with a certain fre-
quency.
WARNING
●
Never exceed the maximum authorised
l
oad on the roof and on the axles or the ve-
hicle's maximum authorised weight.
●
Never exceed the load capacity of the
cross bars and the roof carrier system,
even if the maximum authorised roof load
has not been reached.
●
Secure heavy items as far forward as
possible and distribute the vehicle load
uniformly.
WARNING
If the load is loose or not secured, it could
fall from the roof carrier system or cause
accidents and injuries.
●
Al
ways use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
Storage compartment
Intr
oduction
Use the storage compartments only for small
or light it
ems.
In the fr
ont centr
e armr
est compartment the
f
ollowing factory-fitted connections are
available: USB/AUX-IN.
The factory-fitted CD changer is located in
the left-hand storage compartment of the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
Objects inside the vehicle that are not se-
cured could be thrown acr
oss the cabin in
the event of sudden braking or manoeu-
vring. This may cause severe injuries as
well as loss of control of the vehicle.
●
Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or
heavy items in open storage compartments
of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the
cover behind the rear seats, or inside
pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-
cle.
●
Keep the storage compartments closed
at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi-
cult the use of the pedals. This may cause
loss of control of the vehicl
e and increases
the risk of severe injuries.
●
Make sure that nothing prevents you from
using the pedals at any time.
●
Always secure the mat in the footwell.
●
Never place other mats or other type of
covers on the factory-fitted mat.
●
Ensure that no objects can fall into the
driv
er's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
●
When the vehicle is stationary, remove
the objects in the footwell.
WARNING
If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they
might be damaged or lit inadv
ertently. This
could l
ead to severe burns and damage to
the vehicle.
●
Before moving a seat, make sure there
are no lighters in the moving part area of
the vehicle.
●
Before closing a storage compartment,
make sure there are no lighters in the clos-
ing area.
●
Never leave a lighter inside a storage
compartment or any other surface of the
vehicle as it could ignite due to the high
temperatures on such surfaces, particular-
ly during the summer.
CAUTION
●
Do not store heat- or cold-sensitiv
e ob-
jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat
and cold could damage them or render
them useless.
●
Objects made from transparent materi-
als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,
magnifying glasses or transparent suction
150
Transport and practical equipment
pads stuck to the windows can concentrate
sunlight and damage the vehicle.
Glove compartment
Fig. 155
On the front passenger side: glove
compartment.
Fig. 156 On the front passenger side: glove
compartment open.
Opening and closing the glove compart-
ment
Unl
ock the gl
o
v
e compartment wher
e neces-
sary. The glove compartment is locked when
the key slot is vertical.
Opening: Pull the handle
›››
Fig. 155 and
open the glove compartment.
Closing: Press the glove compartment up-
wards.
Glove compartment cooling
With the AC on, cool air can be directed to-
wards the inside of the compartment. Turn
the air vent to open and close it.
WARNING
If the glove compartment is left open, the
risk of causing severe injuries in the ev
ent
of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-
vring increases.
●
Always keep the glove compartment
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
For structural reasons, some vehicle ver-
sions will have gaps behind the glove com-
par
tment (for instance, behind the com-
partment for on-board documentation) into
which small objects may fall. This could
lead to strange noises and damage to the
vehicle. You should therefore not keep very
small objects in the glove compar
tment.
Storage compartment in the front
central armrest
Fig. 157 In the front central armrest: storage
compartment.
Opening: Giv
en the case
, pr
ess the unl
ock
butt
on and raise the centre armrest in the di-
rection of the arrow
›››
Fig. 157.
Closing: Lower the armrest.
WARNING
The centre armrest may obstruct the driv-
er's arm movements, which could cause an
accident and se
vere injuries.
●
Keep the storage compartments of the
centre armrest closed at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
151
Operation
Storage compartment in the roof
consol
e (gl
asses case)
Fig. 158
On the roof console: object holder for
gl
asses.
Opening: Pr
ess and r
el
ease the butt
on
›
››
Fig. 158.
Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks
into place.
Note
For the surveillance of the cabin to work
correctly, the storage compartments must
be cl
osed when locking the vehicle
›››
page 93.
Storage compartment in the roof
consol
e
Fig. 159
On the roof console: storage com-
partment.
To open pr
ess the button and release it
›
›
›
Fig. 159
.
To close, press the storage compartment up-
wards until it clicks into place.
To ensure interior monitoring works properly,
the storage compartments must be closed
when the vehicle is locked
›››
page 100.
Compartment in the instrument
panel*
Fig. 160
Storage compartment on the dash
panel
The storage compartment on the instrument
panel may hav
e a co
v
er
.
T
o open, press the button on the cover
›››
Fig. 160 (arrow).
To close, press the cover down until it clicks
into place.
152
Transport and practical equipment
Compartment in the front centre
consol
e
Fig. 161
Compartment in the front centre con-
sol
e
.
There is an open compartment on the centre
consol
e
›
›
›
Fig. 161
in which there may be a 12
volt power socket
›››
page 156.
Card compartment*
Fig. 162 Lower part of the centre console: card
compartment.
To the bottom of the centre console there is a
compartment
›
›
›
Fig. 162
1
for coins, cards,
car park tick
ets and simil
ar it
ems.
Note
To avoid theft or use by others, do not use
the compartment to store cr
edit or ATM
cards or similar.
Folding table
Fig. 163 Folding table on the front seat
Depending on the model version, at the rear
of the fr
ont seats, ther
e may be “pl
ane-st
yl
e”
folding tables for passengers in the rear
seats.
●
To open the tray, open it up in the direction
of the arrow
›››
Fig. 163.
●
To fold it back, push the folding table down
as far as possible.
A drink holder is built into the folding table
›››
page 155.
WARNING
The table must always be closed while
driving to decrease the risk of injuries.
Compartments in the rear footwell
area*
Fig. 164
Storage compartments in the footwell
of the second r
o
w of seats.
Move the mat to one side (where applicable).
T
o
open
, pull on the r
ear centr
e part of the
cover
›››
Fig. 164 (arrow).
To close, press the cover down.
»
153
Operation
WARNING
Make sure children are properly belted in
and correctly secured to avoid se
vere or
fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.
●
If you are using a child seat with a base or
foot, always install this base or foot cor-
rectly and safely.
●
If the vehicle has a storage compartment
in the footwell in front of the last row of
seats, this compartment cannot be used as
designed; on the contrary, it must be filled
using the specially designed accessory so
that the base or foot is correctly supported
by the closed compartment and the child
seat is secured properly. If this compart-
ment is not suitably secured when using a
child seat with a base or foot then the com-
partment cover could rupture in an acci-
dent and the child will be ejected and suf-
fer serious injury.
●
Please read and observe the child seat
manufacturer's handling instructions.
Object holder under front seats*
Fig. 165
Drawer under the front seat
Opening: Pr
ess the t
ab on the dr
aw
er handl
e
and take the drawer out.
Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until
it engages.
WARNING
If the drawer is left open, it could prevent
use of the pedals. This may cause serious
accidents and injuries.
●
Always keep the dr
awer closed while the
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer
and any objects in it could fall into the driv-
er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.
CAUTION
The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.
Portable rubbish bin*
Fig. 166
Left sliding door trim: portable waste
bin.
The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle
hol
der on the trim of the l
eft
-hand sliding
door
.
WARNING
Do not use the portable waste bin as an
ashtray to avoid the risk of fire
.
154
Transport and practical equipment
Other storage compartments
Fig. 167
In the luggage compartment: side
st
or
age compartment.
Fig. 168 Other compartments in the boot floor.
Side compartments in the luggage com-
par
tment
Ther
e ar
e other compartments
›
›
›
Fig. 167
1
and
2
in the side of the boot. To open the
compartment
1
, turn the catch clockwise. To
open the compartment
2
, lift the cover. The
f
act
ory-fitt
ed
CD changer
can be found in
compartment
1
. The shelf support covers
can be saf
ely st
or
ed in the luggage compart
-
ment co
ver
1
.
Compar
tments in the boot fl
oor
Mor
e st
or
age compartments can be found in
the boot floor.
●
Opening: use the handle to lift the rear part
of the luggage compartment floor
›››
Fig. 168
4
.
●
To hold it open, fold out the hook from the
r
ear right of the luggage compartment and
hook the luggage compartment fl
oor ont
o it
›
›
›
page 139.
●
Closing: fold the hook away and press
down on the rear part of the luggage com-
partment floor
4
Other storage compartments:
●
in the centre console, front and rear.
●
in the door trims, front and rear.
●
Coat hooks on the centr
al door pill
ars and
on the r
ear r
oof handl
es.
●
Bag hook in the luggage compartment
›››
page 139.
WARNING
Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re-
strict the driver's view and lead t
o serious
accidents.
●
Hang the clothes from the hooks so that
driver's view is not restricted.
●
The coat hook is suitable for light items of
clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp
objects in the bags.
CAUTION
Keep the CD changer compartment closed
while the vehicle is in motion to r
educe vi-
brations that could damage the changer.
Note
The first aid kit is located in the rear left
compartment of the luggage compart-
ment.
Drink holder
Intr
oduction
There are bottle holders in the storage com-
partments of the driv
er
, fr
ont passenger door
and sliding doors.
The f
ol
ding tables of the front seats contain
more bottle holders
›››
page 153.
»
155
Operation
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bottle holders may
cause injuries.
●
Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.
In the event of sudden braking or an acci-
dent while driving, hot be
verages in the
bottle holders might spill and cause burns.
●
Ensure that no bottles or other objects
are dropped in the driver footwell while
driving, as they could get under the pedals
and obstruct their working.
●
Never place glasses, food or other heavy
objects drink holders. These heavy objects
may be thrown across the cabin in the
event of an accident and cause serious in-
juries.
WARNING
Closed bottles may explode inside the ve-
hicle due to cold or heat.
●
Nev
er leave closed bottles in the vehicle
if the temperature inside is very high or very
low.
CAUTION
Do not leave open cans in the drink holders
when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is
spilled (e.g. due t
o sudden braking) it may
damage the vehicle and its electrical sys-
tem.
Note
The inside elements of the drink holders
can be extracted for cl
eaning.
Front drink holders
Fig. 169
Front centre console: drinks holder.
●
To open, mo
v
e the co
v
er backw
ards
›››
Fig. 169.
●
To close, move the cover forwards.
Rear drinks holder*
Fig. 170
Back of the centre console: unfolding
the drinks hol
ders.
Opening: F
olding the drinks holder
›
›
›
Fig. 1
70.
Closing: Lift the drinks holder.
The third row of seats has a drink holder in the
side trim compartment on the rear left.
Power sockets
Introduction
Electrical equipment can be connected to
the po
w
er sock
ets in the v
ehicl
e.
All connected appliances should be in per-
fect working order without any faults.
156
Transport and practical equipment
WARNING
Improper use of the power sockets or elec-
trical devices could lead to a fir
e and
cause serious injuries.
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. The power sockets and equipment
connected to them can be used when the
ignition is switched on.
●
Should a connected electrical device
overheat, switch it off and unplug it imme-
diately.
CAUTION
●
To avoid damage to the vehicl
e's electri-
cal system, never connect equipment that
generates electrical current, such as solar
panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt
power sockets in order to charge the vehi-
cle's battery.
●
Only use accessories with approved
electromagnetic compatibility according
to current regulations.
●
To avoid damage due to voltage varia-
tions, switch off all devices connected to
the 12 V power sockets before switching the
ignition on or off and before starting the en-
gine.
●
Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt
power socket that consumes more than the
power indicated in watts. Exceeding the
maximum power absorption could damage
the vehicle's electrical system.
For the sake of the environment
Do not leave the engine running when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
Note
●
Using devices with the engine stopped
and the ignition switched on will dr
ain the
battery.
●
Unshielded equipment can cause inter-
ference on the radio equipment and the ve-
hicle's electrical system.
●
Interference can occur on the radio's AM
waveband if electrical appliances are used
near the rear window aerial.
Vehicle power sockets
Fig. 171
Back of the centre console: 12 volt
po
w
er sock
et.
Fig. 172 Detailed view of the rear centre con-
sole: 230 volt European pow
er socket.
Depending on your vehicle version, you may
hav
e a 12-v
olt po
w
er sock
et and/or a 230
volt power socket.
Maximum power consumption
Power socket
Maximum power con-
sumption
12 Volts 120 Watts
230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)
Make sure that the maximum power con-
sumption displ
ayed on each outl
et is not e
x-
ceeded. The po
w
er consumption of devices is
shown on the model plate.
When connecting two or more electrical de-
vices at the same time, make sure that their
total consumption never exceeds 190 watts
›››
.
»
157
Operation
12 volt power socket
The 12 v
olt po
w
er sock
et will only w
ork with
the ignition on.
Using electrical appliances with the engine
stopped and the ignition switched on will
drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi-
ces connected to the power socket can only
be used when the engine is running.
To prevent voltage variations from causing
damage, switch off the electrical consumer
connected to the 12 volt power socket before
switching the ignition on or off and before
starting the engine.
12 volt power sockets can be found in the fol-
lowing locations in the vehicle:
●
Compartment in the centre of the centre
console.
●
Compartment in the front centre console.
●
Storage compartment in the front central
armrest.
●
Rear centre console
›››
Fig. 171.
●
At the rear right of the luggage compart-
ment.
230 volt power socket*
The power socket
›››
Fig. 172 can only be
used when the engine is running
›››
.
Connect an el
ectrical d
e
vice:
Open the co
v-
er and insert the plug into the power socket
as far as possible to unlock the built-in child
lock. The socket only supplies power once
the child lock is unlocked.
LED on the power socket
Steady green
light:
The childproof lock is unlocked.
The socket is ready to operat
e.
Flashing red
light:
There is an anomaly, e.g. dis-
connection due to a current
surge or ov
erheating.
Disconnection due to overheating
When the t
emper
at
ur
e e
xceeds a certain val-
ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automati-
cally disconnected. The disconnection pre-
vents overheating when the power consump-
tion of the connected devices is excessive or
the ambient temperature is very high. The
230-volt power supply can be used once
again after a cooling time. First unplug the
connector of the connected device and then
plug it back in again. This prevents the elec-
trical device from being switched on again if
this is not wanted.
WARNING
The electrical system is under high voltage!
●
Do not spill liquids onto the socket.
●
Do not plug adapters or extension cords
into the 230 volt power sock
et. Otherwise,
the integrated child lock will be unlocked
and the power socket will operate.
●
Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-
ting needl
e, for example) into the 230 volt
power socket.
CAUTION
●
Al
ways follo
w the operating instructions
for the appliances to be connected!
●
Never exceed the maximum power rating
as this could damage the vehicle's general
electrical system.
●
12 volt power socket:
–
Only use accessories with approved
electromagnetic compatibility accord-
ing to current regulations.
–
Never power the socket.
●
230 volt power socket:
–
Do not leave devices or connectors
that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)
hanging directly from the power sock-
et.
–
Do not connect neon lamps.
–
Only connect devices to the socket if
the device and socket voltage match.
–
The built-in overload disconnect func-
tion prevents any electrical devices
that require a high start-up current
from turning on. In this case, unplug the
electrical device's power supply and
re-try the connection after about 10
seconds.
158
Air conditioning
Note
●
Some appliances may not work properly
when connected to the 230 v
olt sockets
due to a lack of power (watts).
●
The 230 Watt Euro power connector can
be modified for 115 Watt appliances and
vice versa. Consult a specialist shop for
advice on accessories to adapt the con-
nector. SEAT recommends taking your car
in for technical service.
Air conditioning
Heating, v
entil
ation and
cooling
Intr
oduction
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-
al systems may have been fitted:
●
The manual air conditioning
and the Cli-
matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They
operate most effectively with the windows
and the sunroof closed.
To switch a specific function on, press the ap-
propriate button. Press the button again to
switch off the function.
The LED on each control lights up to indicate
that the respective function of a control has
been switched on.
Dust and pollen filter
The dust and pollen filter with its activated
charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier
against impurities in the air taken into the ve-
hicle interior.
The dust and pollen filter must be changed
regularly so that air conditioner performance
is not adversely affected.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to
use in areas with very high lev
els of air pollu-
tion, the filter must be changed more fre-
quently than stated in the Service Schedule.
WARNING
Reduced visibility through the windows in-
creases the risk of serious accidents.
●
Always ensure that all windo
ws are free
of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-
ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-
erything outside.
●
Only drive when you have good visibility.
●
Always ensure that you use the air condi-
tioning, heater or rear window heating to
maintain good visibility to the outside.
●
Never leave the air recirculation on for a
long period of time. If the cooling system is
switched off and air recirculation mode
switched on, the windows can mist over
very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
WARNING
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and
reduce driver concentration possibly re-
sulting in a serious accident.
●
Ne
ver leave the fresh air fan turned off or
use the air recirculation for long periods of
time; the air in the vehicle interior will not
be refreshed.
»
159
Operation
CAUTION
●
To replace the pollen filt
er, always visit a
service centre.
●
Switch the climate control or air condi-
tioner off if you think it may be broken. This
will avoid additional damage. Have the cli-
mate control or air conditioning checked
by a specialised workshop.
●
Repairs to the climate control or air con-
ditioning require specialist knowledge and
special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT Official Service.
Note
●
When the cooling system is turned off, air
coming from the outside will not be dried.
To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT
recommends leaving the cooling system
(compressor) t
urned on. To do this, press
the
button. The button lamp should
light up.
●
The maximum heat output required to de-
fr
ost windows as quickly as possible is only
available when the engine has reached its
normal running temperature.
●
Keep the air intake slots in front of the
windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to
ensure heating and cooling are not im-
paired, and to prevent the windows from
misting over.
●
The air from the vents flows through the
vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in
the luggage compartment designed for this
purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-
structing these slots with any kind of ob-
ject.
●
Do not smoke while air recir
culation
mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air
conditioning system leaves residue on the
evaporator, producing a permanent un-
pleasant odour.
●
It is advisable to turn on the air condition-
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-
crease in the cooling capacity is detected,
a Technical Service should be consulted to
check the system.
●
When the engine is under extreme strain,
switch off the compressor for a moment.
Climatronic* controls
Fig. 173 In the centre console: Climatronic con-
trols.
Some Climatronic controls may also be on
the air conditioner contr
ol panel l
ocat
ed in
160
Air conditioning
the rear centre console. These controls are
used t
o mak
e the appr
opriat
e settings f
or the
rear seats.
Automatic mode
Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan,
and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-
bled when the ventilation is modified manual-
ly.
Cooling mode
Press the button to switch on or off the cool-
ing system.
Temperature
1
/
2
The temperature of the right and left sides
can be adjust
ed separ
at
ely using the adjust
-
ers. The sel
ected temperature is shown on
the display of the climate control panel.
Synchronisation: press button so that
settings on the driver's side apply to the pas-
senger side. Use the temperature regulator
for the passenger side to set a different tem-
perature.
Blower
The power of the fan is automatically adjus-
ted.
The fan is also adjusted manually by turning
the control.
Air distribution / /
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.
It can also be manually distributed to the de-
sired zone by pressing the corresponding
button:
The airflow is directed towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed at the windscreen.
Defrost/demist function
The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-
rected at the windscreen and air recirculation
is automatically switched off. To defrost the
windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-
fied at temperatures over approximately
+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum
output.
Residual heat
When the engine is still warm but the ignition
switched off, the residual heat of the engine
can be used to keep the vehicle interior
warm. The function is disabled after 30 mi-
nutes or when the charge of the 12-volt bat-
tery is low.
Air conditioning settings for the rear seats
The air conditioning settings for the rear seats
can be changed using the front control pan-
el. Press the button again to switch the func-
tion off or do not touch any other button for
around 10 seconds.
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 166.
Heated rear window
This only works when the engine is running
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demisted. By saving electrical power you
can also save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Windscreen heating*
It only works when the engine is running and
switches off automatically after a few mi-
nutes.
Air recirculation
›››
page 164
Seat heating
›››
page 165
»
161
Operation
Switching off
Pr
ess butt
on
or manually set the f
an to .
Note
●
Not all Climatronic buttons are opera-
tional in
mode.
●
The button is locked in defrost mode.
Manual air conditioning controls
Fig. 174 In the centre console: manual air condi-
tioning controls.
Cooling mode
Pr
ess the butt
on t
o s
witch on or off the cool-
ing system.
Temperature
1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Bl
o
w
er
T
urning the regulator
2
sets the fan power.
At l
e
v
el 0 the f
an and manual air conditioning
ar
e disconnected. Level 4 is the maximum.
Air distribution / / / /
Turning regulator
3
distributes the air to the
desir
ed z
one:
The airfl
o
w is dir
ected towards the chest
The airflow is directed towards the foot-
well.
The airflow is directed towards the wind-
screen and the footwell area.
Defrost/demist function
When control
3
is in position the air fl
o
w is
dir
ect
ed at the windscr
een and air recircula-
tion is disconnected automatically or not ac-
tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the
windscreen of condensation as soon as pos-
sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling sys-
tem will automatically switch on.
Maximum cooling power
When the regulator is in position air re-
circulation and the cooling system connect
automatically.
Heated rear window
This only works when the engine is running
and switches off automatically after a maxi-
mum of 10 minutes.
162
Air conditioning
It should be switched off as soon as the glass
is demist
ed. By saving el
ectrical po
w
er you
can al
so save fuel.
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
automatic temporary disconnection of this
function is possible, coming back on when
normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed.
Auxiliary heating
›››
page 166.
Air recirculation
›››
page 164
Seat heating
›››
page 165
Controls on the rear seats
Fig. 175
Centre console: details of the rear
seat contr
ol
s.
●
Turn the control
A
to adjust the tempera-
t
ur
e
.
●
T
urn contr
ol
B
to adjust the air flow.
Climate control usage instructions
The interior cooling system only works when
the engine is running and f
an is s
wit
ched on.
Economic use of the air conditioning
When the air conditioning is s
wit
ched on, the
compressor consumes engine power and has
influence on fuel consumption.
The air conditioner operates most effectively
with the windows and the panoramic sliding
sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has
heated up after standing in the sun for some
time, the air inside can be cooled more quick-
ly by opening the windows and the panoram-
ic sliding sunroof briefly.
Change the temperature unit (Climatron-
ic)
The temperature indication can be changed
from Celsius to Fahrenheit using the instru-
ment panel menu of the infotainment system
›››
page 72.
The cooling system cannot be activated
If the air conditioning system cannot be
switched on, this may be caused by the fol-
lowing:
●
The engine is not running.
●
The fan is switched off.
●
The air conditioner fuse has blown.
●
The outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +3°C (+38°F).
●
The air conditioner compressor has been
temporarily switched off because the engine
coolant temperature is too high.
●
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
conditioner checked by a specialised work-
shop.
Special characteristics
If the humidity and temperature outside the
vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
»
163
Operation
the evaporator in the cooling system and
f
orm a pool underneath the v
ehicl
e
. This is
normal and does not indicat
e a leak!
Note
After starting the engine, any residual hu-
midity in the air conditioner could mist over
the windscr
een. Switch on the defrost func-
tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-
screen of condensation.
Air vents
To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-
l
ation in the v
ehicl
e int
erior
, the air vents must
remain open.
●
Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the
required direction to open and close the air
vents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-
tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.
●
Change the air direction using the ventila-
tion grille lever.
There are other additional, non-adjustable air
vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in
the rear area of the passenger compartment.
Note
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen-
sitive objects should nev
er be placed in
front of the air outlets as they may be dam-
aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient
air from entering the interior.
When the outside t
emperature is very high,
selecting manual air recirculation mode for a
short period refreshes the vehicle interior
more quickly.
For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is
switched off when the button is pressed
or the air distributor turned to .
Manual air recirculation mode
●
Manual air conditioning: Press the button
on the control panel t
o connect or dis-
connect the manual air recirculation mode.
●
Climatronic: Press the button until its
left LED lights up.
Climatronic automatic air recirculation
mode
With the automatic air recirculation mode ac-
tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-
terior is enabled. If the system detects a high
concentration of hazardous substances in the
ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically. When the level of impurities
drops to within a normal range, recirculation
mode is switched off.
The system is unable to detect unpleasant
smells.
●
To activate the automatic air recirculation
mode press the button on the control
panel until its right LED lights up.
The air recirculation will not connect auto-
matically in versions without humidity sensor
and in the following external conditions:
●
The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
(+38°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off and the
outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).
●
The cooling system is switched off, the out-
side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and
the windscreen wipers are switched on.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Intro-
duction on page 159.
●
If the cooling system is switched off and
air recirculation mode swit
ched on, the
windows can mist over very quickly, con-
siderably limiting visibility.
●
Switch air recirculation mode off when it
is not required.
CAUTION
Do not smoke when air recirculation is
switched on in vehicles with an air condi-
tioner
. The smoke taken in could lie on the
cooling system vaporiser and on the acti-
vated charcoal cartridge of the dust and
164
Air conditioning
pollen filter, leading to a permanently un-
pleasant smell.
Note
Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-
v
ated to pre
vent exhaust gas or unpleasant
odours from entering the vehicle interior
when it is in reverse and while the automat-
ic windscreen wiper is working.
Seat heating*
The seat cushions can be heated electrically
when the ignition is s
wit
ched on. The backr
est
is al
so heat
ed in some versions.
With the engine on, the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be heated electrically.
Control seat heating
●
Press buttons or on the control panel
to turn on the seat heating as high as possi-
ble.
●
Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust it
to the required level.
●
To turn off the seat heating, press button
or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.
Cases in which the heat seating should
not be switched on
Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the
following conditions are met:
●
The seat is not occupied.
●
The seat has a cover.
●
A child seat has been installed on the seat.
●
The seat cushion is wet or damp.
●
The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-
er than +25°C (77°F).
WARNING
People who cannot perceive pain or tem-
perature because of medications, paralysis
or chr
onic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have
a limited perception of these, may suffer
burns to the back, buttocks or legs when
using seat heating.
●
People with limited pain and temperature
thresholds must never use seat heating.
●
If an abnormality in the device's temper-
ature control is detected, have it checked
by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can
adversely affect the operation of the seat
heating, increasing the risk of burns.
●
Mak
e sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
using the seat heater.
●
Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
●
Do not leav
e clothing that is wet or damp
on the seat.
●
Do not spill liquid on the seat.
CAUTION
●
T
o avoid damaging the heating elements
of the seat heaters, pl
ease do not kneel on
the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single
point on the seat cushion or backrest.
●
Liquids, sharps objects and insulating
materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can
damage the seat heating.
●
In the event of smells, switch off the seat
heating immediately and have it inspected
by a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The seat heating should remain on only
when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-
sary fuel waste.
165
Operation
Auxiliary heating (additional
heating)*
Intr
oduction
The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the ve-
hicle's tank and can be used while you are
driving and when the v
ehicle is stationary.
The auxiliary heater can be switched on using
the fast heating button of the air conditioning
controls, with the remote control or by previ-
ously programming a departure time in the
auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys-
tem.
In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched
on, you can defog the windscreen and leave
it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be-
fore you start driving.
If the outside temperature is very high, the ve-
hicle interior can be ventilated with the en-
gine off using the auxiliary heater.
WARNING
The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour
-
less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause
people to lose consciousness. It can also
cause death.
●
Never switch on the auxiliary heater or
leave it running in enclosed spaces or
areas with no ventilation.
●
Never programme the auxiliary heat
er so
that it switches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no ventila-
tion.
WARNING
The components of the auxiliary heater are
e
xtremely hot and could cause a fire
.
●
Always park your vehicle so that no part
of the exhaust system can come in contact
with easily flammable materials that might
be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.
CAUTION
Never place food, medicines or other tem-
perature-sensitive ob
jects close to the air
vents. Food, medicines and other objects
sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged
or made unsuitable for use by the air com-
ing from the vents.
Switching the auxiliary heater on
and off
Connection
The independent heating can be connect
ed
in the f
oll
o
wing w
ays:
●
Press the fast heating button on the air con-
ditioning control panel
›››
page 160. The
control lamp of the button will light up.
●
Press button on the radio-operated re-
mote control
›››
page 167.
●
Automatically scheduling a departure time
›››
page 168.
Disconnection
The independent heating can be switched off
in the following ways:
●
Press the fast heating button on the air con-
ditioner's control panel . The control lamp
on the button turns off.
●
Press button on the radio-operated re-
mote control
›››
page 167.
●
Automatically at the scheduled departure
time or after the programmed operating time
has elapsed
›››
page 168.
●
Automatically when the control lamp
(fuel level indicator) lights up
›››
page 308.
●
Automatically when the 12-volt battery
charge drops too low
›››
page 324.
Things to note
Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will
continue to operate for a short period of time
in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys-
tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes.
166
Air conditioning
Radio-operated remote control
Fig. 176
Auxiliary heating: remote control.
Fig. 176
S
wit
ch the auxiliary heat
er on
S
wit
ch the auxiliary heater off
Control lamp
Antenna
If the buttons of the remote control are press-
ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili-
ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of
range or when the control lamp is flashing.
To switch on and off the independent heating,
the button must be pressed and held for ap-
proximately 1 second.
Control lamp on the remote control
When the buttons are pressed, the control
lamp on the remote control
1
provides the
user with diff
er
ent inf
ormation:
1
2
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The auxiliary heat
er has been
s
wit
ched on with butt
on
.
●
In red: The auxiliary heater has been
switched off con with button .
Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: No on signal has been received.
The remote control is out of range. Move
closer to the vehicle.
●
In red: No off signal has been received. The
remote control is out of range. Move closer to
the vehicle.
Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds
●
In green: The independent heating is
blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al-
most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is
very low or there is a fault.
It lights up for approx. 2 seconds
●
In orange (then in green or in red): The re-
mote control battery is almost flat. However,
the on or off signal has been received.
●
In orange (then flashes green or red): The
remote control battery is almost flat. No on or
off signal has been received.
Flashes for around 5 seconds
●
In orange: The remote control battery is flat.
No on or off signal has been received.
Changing the battery of the radio-operat-
ed remote control
When pressing the buttons, if the control
lamp of the remote
1
flashes for approx. 5
or
ange or does not light up
, the batt
eries
must be r
epl
aced.
The battery is located beneath a cover on
the back of the remote control.
●
To open the cover, turn the slot to the left
using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a coin).
●
Remove the old battery.
●
Insert the new battery. When doing so, take
into account the polarity and use batteries of
the same type
›››
.
R
ange
The r
eceiv
er is inside the v
ehicl
e. The remote
control, when fitted with new batteries, has a
range of several hundred metres. Obstacles
between the remote control and the vehicle,
bad weather conditions and discharged bat-
teries can considerably reduce the range of
the remote control.
WARNING
Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-
ter or any other button battery can cause
serious and ev
en fatal injuries within a very
short time.
●
Always keep the remote control, keyrings
with batteries, the spare batteries, button
»
167
Operation
batteries and all other batteries over 20
mm out of reach of children.
●
If you suspect that someone may have
s
wallowed a battery, seek immediate med-
ical attention.
CAUTION
●
The r
adio frequency remote contr
ol con-
tains electronic components. Therefore,
avoid getting it wet and exposing it to
knocks or direct sunlight.
●
The use of inappropriate batteries may
damage the radio frequency remote con-
trol. For this reason, always replace the
used battery with another of the same volt-
age, size and specifications.
For the sake of the environment
●
Please dispose of your used batteries
correctly and with respect f
or the environ-
ment.
●
The remote control battery may contain
perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions
regarding disposal.
●
Care should be taken so as not to oper-
ate the remote control unintentionally so
as to prevent the auxiliary heater being
switched on accidentally.
Programming the auxiliary heater
Before programming it, check that the vehi-
cle's date and time are set corr
ectly
›››
.
Opening the Auxiliary heater menu on
the instrument panel
●
From the main menu, select the Auxiliary
heater submenu and press the but-
ton on the wiper lever
.
●
OR: press the
or buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel until the Auxil-
iary heater menu is displayed.
Function button: function
Activate, Deactivate: The auxiliary heater can
be set to come on automatically if requir
ed. Select a
timer for this purpose:
– The timer will be marked with a .
– Only one timer can be selected at a time. If a
timer has been select
ed, the screen will display
Program. ON. If no timer has been selected,
the instrument panel display will show
Prog. OFF.
– To change a programmed timer you must ei-
ther select a different timer or select Deacti-
vate.
Timer 1 - 2 - 3: Three different timers (hh.mm)
can lat
er be selected using the On option. If the auxil-
iary heater is to be switched on for just a certain day
of the week, select the day of the week and the time
for the auxiliary heater to come on.
Function button: function
Duration: The operating time may vary between 10
and 60 minutes and can be set t
o 5-minute intervals.
Operating mode: Set to heat or ventilate the v
ehi-
cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on.
Day: Set the current day of the week.
Factory settings: The predefined f
actory val
-
ues for the functions of this menu are restored.
Back: This returns to the main menu.
Checking the programming
When a depart
ur
e time is activ
at
ed and the
ignition is s
witched off the control lamp of the
fast heating button
lights up for approxi-
mately 10 seconds.
WARNING
Never programme the auxiliary heater so
that it switches itself on and is running in an
enclosed space or an area with no v
entila-
tion. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless
and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide
can cause people to lose consciousness. It
can also cause death.
Usage instructions
The auxiliary heater exhaust system located
bel
o
w the v
ehicl
e must be k
ept clear of snow,
168
Air conditioning
mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes
must be abl
e t
o e
xit fr
eely. The emissions
gener
ated by the auxiliary heater are re-
moved via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath
the vehicle.
On heating the vehicle interior, depending on
the outside temperature, the warm air is first
directed at the windscreen and then to the
rest of the vehicle interior through the air
vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the
windows for example – can affect air distribu-
tion.
Depending on the outside temperature, the
temperature at which the auxiliary heater
warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat
higher if the heating or air conditioner tem-
perature control is set to maximum before
switching the heating on.
Depending on the engine, vehicles with auxili-
ary heater may be fitted with a second bat-
tery in the luggage compartment that is re-
sponsible for powering the auxiliary heater.
When the auxiliary heater is not switched
on
●
The auxiliary heater requires about as
much power as the dipped beam headlights.
If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the
auxiliary heater switches off automatically
and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob-
lems when starting the engine.
●
The heating must be activated every time
you want to set off. Similarly, the departure
time must reactivate each time.
●
The control lamp (fuel level indicator)
lights up.
Note
●
Noises will be heard while the auxiliary
heater is running.
●
When the air humidity is high and the in-
side t
emperature low, condensation from
the heating and ventilating system may
evaporate when the auxiliary heater is
switched on. In this case, steam may be re-
leased from underneath the vehicle. This
does not mean that there is a vehicle mal-
function.
●
If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a
slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater
may be restricted if the fuel tank level is
low (just above the reserve level).
●
If the auxiliary heater is used a number of
times for a long period of time, the 12-volt
battery will lose its charge. To recharge the
battery, the vehicle must be driven for a
number of kilometres from time to time. As
a guideline: the journey should last approx-
imately as long as the heater was connec-
ted.
●
At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the
auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto-
matically when the engine is switched on.
The auxiliary heater is switched off again
after a certain time.
169
Infotainment System
Infotainment System
Intr
oduction
Saf
et
y w
arnings
Saf
ety warnings regarding the Info-
tainment system
Only operate the infotainment system and its
various functions when the traffic situation
really permits this.
WARNING
●
Before starting the trip
, you should famili-
arise yourself with the different infotain-
ment system functions.
●
High audio volume may represent a dan-
ger to you and to others. Hearing may be
impaired if the volume is too high, even for
short periods of time.
●
Changes to the Infotainment system set-
tings should be made when the car is stop-
ped, or by a passenger.
WARNING
Current traffic requires maximum attention
from public road users. Distracting the driv-
er in any way can l
ead to an accident and
cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment
system can distract your attention from the
traffic.
●
Always drive car
efully and responsibly.
●
Select volume settings that allow you to
hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all
times (e.g. emergency services sirens and
horns).
WARNING
The volume level may suddenly change
when you s
witch audio source or connect a
new audio sour
ce.
●
Lower the base volume before connect-
ing or switching audio sources.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications shown on the navigation system
may differ from the curr
ent traffic situation.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the navigation system.
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing a data
medium while driving can distract your at-
tention fr
om the traffic and cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Place the connecting cables of external
equipment so that they do not interfere
with the driver
’s mobility.
WARNING
External devices that are loose or not prop-
erly secured could move ar
ound the pas-
senger compartment during a sharp ma-
noeuvre or accident.
●
Avoid placing external devices on the
doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash
panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or
near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between
these areas and the occupants. They could
cause serious injury in an accident, espe-
cially when the airbags inflate.
WARNING
The armrest* must always remain closed
during the journey as it could restrict the
driver’
s movements.
WARNING
Opening the CD player can lead to injuries
from invisible laser radiation.
●
Hav
e CD repaired only by a specialist
workshop.
170
Introduction
CAUTION
The Infotainment system can be damaged
by the incorrect insertion of a data stor
age
device or the insertion of an incompatible
data storage device.
●
When inserting a data storage device,
make sure it is correctly positioned.
●
Applying force may irreparably damage
the memory card slot locking mechanism.
●
Only use compatible memory cards.
●
When inserting and removing CDs , al-
ways hold them at right angles to the front
of the CD drive without tilting so as not to
scratch them.
●
If a CD is inserted while another is al-
ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD
drive may be damaged. Always wait until
the data medium is completely ejected.
CAUTION
Foreign objects stuck to a CD , or if it is not
round, the player may be damaged.
●
Only clean, standar
d 12 cm CDs should
be used.
–
Do not affix stickers or other items to
the data medium. Stickers may peel off
and damage the drive.
–
Do not use printable data media. Prin-
ted labels and coverings may peel off
and damage the CD drive.
–
Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-
larly shaped CDs .
–
Do not inser
t DVD-Plus discs, Dual
Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker
than normal CDs.
CAUTION
The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-
aged if the v
olume is too high or the sound
is distort
ed.
Note
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ment system it is important that the date
and time set in the v
ehicle are correct.
171
Infotainment System
Overview of the unit
Media Syst
em Col
our
Fig. 177
Overview of the controls The infotainment
system is available in diff
erent versions that may
have different titles and functions of some buttons.
Volume. Off/on
›
›
›
page 1
75
Inf
otainment buttons:
–
: Radio Mode (change of band fre-
quency
›››
page 192.
–
: Media mode (audio sources)
›››
page 201.
–
: Eject the CD
›››
page 201.
–
: Phone mode
›››
page 224.
1
2
–
: Mut
e the sound fr
om the audio
sour
ce
.
–
: Menu and system settings
›››
page 178.
–
: Volume and sound settings
›››
page 179.
Touchscreen
›››
page 176
CD drive
›››
page 201
Settings button (search and selection)
›››
page 175
3
4
5
Slot for memory cards
›
›
›
page 208
AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
›
››
page 210.
6
7
172
Introduction
Media System Plus / Navi System
Fig. 178
Overview of the controls The infotainment
system is available in diff
erent versions that may
have different titles and functions of some buttons
Volume. Off/on
›
›
›
page 1
75
Inf
otainment buttons:
–
: Radio Mode (change of band fre-
quency
›››
page 192.
–
: Media mode (audio sources)
›››
page 201.
–
: Phone mode
›››
page 224.
–
: Voice control
›››
page 181.
–
: Mute the sound from the audio
source.
–
: Eject the CD
›››
page 201.
1
2
–
: Navigation Mode
›
›
›
page 213.
–
: Menu and system settings
›››
page 178.
–
: Traffic reports
›››
page 220.
–
: Volume and sound settings
›››
page 179.
–
: Selection from the main menu
›››
page 174.
Touchscreen
›››
page 176
CD drive
›››
page 201
Settings button (search and selection)
›››
page 175
3
4
5
Slots for memory cards
›
›
›
page 208
Pr
o
ximity sensor
›››
page 178
6
7
173
Infotainment System
Main menus
These menus depend on the equipment in
question.
Radio
›››
page 192
RADIO main menu
››
›
page 192
RDS radio dat
a services
›››
page 193
Digital radio mode
›››
page 194
Memory buttons
›››
page 195
Save station logos
›››
page 195
Select, tune and save stations
›››
page 196
SCAN automatic playback
›››
page 198
TP traffic information
›››
page 198
Setup
›››
page 199
Media
›››
page 201
Data and fil
e formats
›››
page 202
Playback or
der
›››
page 203
›››
page 203
Change the media source
›››
page 205
Change track
›››
page 205
Selecting a track from a track list
›››
page 206
Insert or remove a CD or DVD
›››
page 207
Memory card
›››
page 208
External data storage device connected to the USB
port
›››
page 209
External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-
media socket
›››
page 210
External audio source with Bluetooth
®
›››
page 210
Images
›››
page 211
Setup
›››
page 212
Navigation
›››
page 213
Ne
w destination
›››
page 214
R
oute options
›››
page 215
›››
page 216
My destinations
›››
page 216
Special destinations (POI)
›››
page 218
View
›››
page 219
Split screen
›››
page 219
Map display
›››
page 220
Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide
›››
page 220
Import vCards
›››
page 221
Navigation with images
›››
page 222
Road signs
›››
page 222
Route guidance in Demo mode
›››
page 222
Setup
›››
page 222
Traffic
›››
page 220
Tr
affic information (TP)
›››
page 198
Tr
affic bulletins and dynamic guide
›››
page 220
Telephone
›››
page 224
Bluet
ooth
®
›››
page 225
Tethering
›
››
page 226
Function buttons
›››
page 228
Enter number
›››
page 230
Agenda
›››
page 231
Short messages (SMS)
›››
page 233
Call list
›››
page 234
Quick dial keys
›››
page 235
Setup
›››
page 235
Sound
›››
page 17
9
Full Link
›››
page 184
Requir
ements
›››
page 185
Activation of Full Link
›
››
page 186
MirrorLink
®
›››
page 189
Apple CarPlay™
›››
page 187
Android Auto™
›››
page 188
Frequently Asked Questions
›››
page 190
Images
›››
page 21
1
Setup
›››
page 17
8
174
Introduction
General instructions for use
Intr
oduction
If the setup is changed, this may change the
display on the screen and the Infotainment
syst
em may behave in a manner different to
that described in this manual.
Note
●
Just press a button or the screen to use
the inf
otainment system's functions.
●
The equipment’s software depends on
the market in question, so it is possible that
not all of the function buttons or described
functions are available. The equipment is
not faulty if a function button is missing.
●
Due to country-specific legislation, cer-
tain functions may not be available on the
screen when the vehicle is travelling above
a certain speed.
●
Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-
cle may provoke noise in the speakers.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth
®
technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol-
ume is automatically lowered when reverse
gear is selected. The volume can be low-
ered in the menu Sound > Volume.
Rotary push buttons and infotain-
ment butt
ons
Rotary/push buttons
The left rotary push button
is the on/off
button if pressed and the volume knob if
turned.
The right rotary pushbutton is the search but-
ton if turned and the selection button if press-
ed.
Infotainment buttons
The buttons on the unit are shown in this
manual with the word “infotainment button”
and their function within a rectangle, for ex-
ample, the infotainment button .
The Infotainment buttons are used by press-
ing them or pressing and holding.
Switching on and off
When turned on, the system it starts up with
the v
olume at which it w
as t
urned off
, as l
ong
as it does not exceed the preset maximum
start-up volume
›››
page 179.
The unit will switch off automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition or when
the on/off button is pressed (depending on
the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-
fotainment system is switched on again, it will
switch off automatically after approximately
30 minutes (switch-off delay).
Note
●
The Infotainment system is a part of the
v
ehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-
cle.
●
If the battery has been disconnected, the
ignition must be activated before switching
on the Infotainment system.
Changing the basic volume
Increasing or decreasing the volume or
muting the sound
R
aise the v
olume
: t
urn the v
olume control
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel upward .
Lower the volume: turn the volume control
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel downward
.
Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-
ume bar on the screen. The volume can be
controlled using the steering wheel controls.
In this case, the changes in volume are dis-
played on the instrument panel by a volume
bar.
It is possible to preset certain volume settings
and adjustments
›››
page 179.
»
175
Infotainment System
Muting the Infotainment system sound
●
Turn the volume control anti-cl
ockwise
until it displ
ays
.
●
OR:
press the
1)
infotainment button.
●
OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction
steering wheel.
Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex-
cept AUX). The screen displays .
Operation of the function buttons
and the instructions on the screen
Fig. 179
View of some of the function buttons
on the scr
een.
Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a
cert
ain function ar
e call
ed “function butt
ons”.
These butt
ons are operated by pressing them
on the screen or holding them down.
The function buttons appear in this manual as
a “function button” and a button symbol
inside a rectangle
.
These activ
at
e functions or open submenus.
The curr
ently sel
ect
ed menu is displayed in
the title bar
›››
Fig. 179
A
of the submenus.
Inactiv
e (gr
ey) function butt
ons cannot be se-
l
ect
ed.
Increase or decrease the size of the im-
ages displayed on the screen
The size of the navigation map image and im-
age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do
this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-
rate them or bring them together.
Overview of screen and function buttons
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
A
The title bar shows the selected menu
and other function buttons.
B Press it to open another menu.
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
C
The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll
the bar by sliding your finger vertically on
it
›››
page 1
77, Open list entries and
search in lists.
D
Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid-
ing your finger across the screen.
OR: Press a point on the screen where
you want the sound to be direct
ed.
Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows to
mo
ve the sound around according to your
preferences.
OR: Press the central button to centre the
stereo sound in the centre of the passen-
ger compartment
Pr
ess it on some lists to move up a level,
one by one.
Button to return to the previous menu or
move up through the folder structure.
When pressed, a pop-up window opens
(options window) which displays other
setup options.
/
Some functions are activated or deac-
tivated by pr
essing this box.
OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.
1)
Depends on the device.
176
Introduction
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
×
Press to close a pop-up windo
w or an in-
put window.
/
Press them to change the set
up adjust-
ments one at a time.
Move the scroll butt
on across the screen
by sliding your finger.
Open list entries and search in lists
Fig. 180
Entries on a setup menu list.
The entries on a list can be activated by
pr
essing them on the scr
een or by using the
settings butt
on.
Mark list entries using the set
up butt
on
and open them
●
Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-
lect from the list.
●
Press the setup button to activate the
marked entry on the list.
Search lists (scrolling the screen)
The scroll bar is shown on the right and its
size depends on the entries in the list
›››
Fig. 180
1
.
●
On the bar: Pr
ess abo
v
e or bel
o
w the mark
or slide your finger vertically over the mark
until you reach the desired position.
Input window with on-screen key-
pad
Fig. 181
Text input in entry mask.
The on-screen keypad is used for functions
such as ent
ering an memory name
, sel
ecting
a destination addr
ess or ent
ering a search
term for searching long lists.
The input line with cursor is located in the top
bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed
here.
Input windows for “free text input”
In the input masks for open text, you may en-
ter letters, numbers and characters in any
combination.
Input windows for selecting a saved entry
(e.g. selection of a destination address)
It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-
ters, numbers and characters that matches a
stored entry.
Matches are suggested on the input line. In
the case of compound names, it is necessary
to enter a space.
Overview of the function buttons*
Function button: operation and effect
1
Zip code
a)
: Press this button to enter a zip
code in the Navigation mode
.
123
: Press this button to open the num-
ber and special character input screen.
ABC : Press this button to go back to the
letter input screen.
»
177
Infotainment System
Function button: operation and effect
2
Press this button to change the keypad
language. Keypad languages can be se-
l
ected from the menu system setup.
3
Displays the number and opens the list of
remaining selectable entries that match
the entered text.
Letters
and dig-
its
Press them to copy them into the input
line.
Letters
with
If the button is hel
d down, special char-
act
ers based on that letter are displ
ayed.
Press the desired character to enter it.
Some special char
act
ers can be writt
en
out inst
ead (e
.g. “AE” for “Ä”).
Press this button to change between up-
percase and lowercase.
Space bar
OK
Press this button to confirm the sugges-
ted input and close the input screen.
Deletes characters on the input line from
right to left.
Press and hold to delete several charac-
ters.
Close the input window.
a)
Depends on the market and unit in question.
Proximity sensor
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
The Infotainment system is equipped with an
int
egrated proximity sensor
›››
Fig. 178
7
.
The screen switches from displ
ay mode to
automatic operation when your hand moves
toward it. In operation mode, the function but-
tons are automatically highlighted to facili-
tate their use.
Additional information and display
options
The displays appearing on the screen may
v
ary depending on the settings, and may dif
-
f
er fr
om those described her
e.
The status bar on the screen can display, for
example, the current time and outside tem-
perature.
All displays can be viewed only after com-
pletely restarting the Infotainment system.
Menu and system settings
The settings that can be selected varies de-
pending on the country and the equipment in
question, and on the v
ehicl
e's equipment.
●
Pr
ess the Inf
ot
ainment button and then
press the SETTINGS
function button.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button.
Pr
ess the function butt
on of the main menu or
the functions f
or which you w
ant to change
the settings. All settings are automatically
applied when the menus are closed.
Function button: function
Screen : To change the screen settings.
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is
active and the infotainment system is not used,
the screen will automatically switch off after ap-
prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing
one of the infotainment buttons will turn the
screen on again.
Brightness : To select the brightness level of the
screen.
Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day,
Night or Automatic).
Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a
function button is pressed is active.
Pr
oximity sensor
: The proximity sensors are active.
Also see
›››
page 1
78, Proximity sensor.
Show clock in standby mode
: In standby mode, the
time is displayed on the infotainment system
scr
een.
Date and time
: Change the time and date settings.
Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS
or manual).
178
Introduction
Function button: function
GPS : The time and date can be selected using
the Time zone function button. In this case, the
Time and Date function buttons for manual
entry will not be active.
Manual : The time and date can be set manual-
ly using the Time and Date function buttons.
Time : To set the time manually.
Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.
Time format : To select the time display format (12
or 24 hours).
Date
: To set the current date.
Date format : To select the date display format
(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY).
Language : To select the desired language for texts
and phrases in the voice control system.
K
eyboard
a)
: To select the type (alphabetical or key-
boar
d).
Additional keypad languages
a)
: To select additional
keyboard languages.
Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi-
cle's displays: distance
, speed, temperature, volume,
consumption and pressure.
Data transfer for SEAT apps
a)
External apps : The mobile device app profile inter-
face is active. Deactivating this function av
oids
other settings.
Function button: function
Operation via apps : Change the level of interaction
with apps.
Deactivate : This limits specific functions that
require a higher level of security.
Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app,
and certain specific actions on the Infotain-
ment system hav
e to be confirmed.
Allow
: Allows all available functions to be exe-
cuted from the app.
Voice contr
ol
: To change the voice control settings
›››
page 181.
R
emove safely
: To eject the data medium (SD/USB
card) from the system. After corr
ectly ejecting the
data storage device from the system, the function
button becomes inactive (grey colour).
Factory settings
: When the original factory settings
are restored, all
inputs and settings that are made
are deleted, depending on the selected settings.
Bluetooth
: To change the Bluetooth
®
›››
page 236
settings.
System inf
ormation
: Display of the system information
(device number, hardwar
e and software versions).
Update
a)
: To update the navigation data, do
››
›
page 213 No remove the memory card while
the navigation data are being installed.
Copyright
: Information about copyright.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Note
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ment system it is important that the date
and time set in the v
ehicle are correct.
Volume and sound settings
The settings that can be selected varies de-
pending on the country and the equipment in
question, and on the vehicle's equipment.
●
Press the Infot
ainment button and then
press the Sound
function button.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button
1)
.
●
Pr
ess the main menu function butt
on f
or the
settings that have to be changed. All settings
are applied instantly.
Overview of screen and function buttons
Function button: function
Volume : To change the volume settings.
Warnings
a)
: To set the playback volume of warn-
ings, such as traffic announcements.
Navigation announcements
a)
: To set the playback
volume of audio driving recommendations.
V
oice control
a)
: To set the playback volume of
voice contr
ol.
»
1)
Depends on the equipment in question
179
Infotainment System
Function button: function
Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment's
maximum switch-on volume.
Speed-dependent v
olume adjustment
(GALA): To set
the extent to which the volume is adjusted de-
pending on the speed. The volume of the audio
will increase automatically as the speed of the
vehicle increases.
Volume : To set the playback volume of audio
sources connected via the AUX-IN multimedia
jack (Low, Medium or
High). Also see
›››
page 179, Overview of screen and function
buttons.
Bluetooth audio
: To set the playback volume of
the audio sources connected by Bluetooth
®
(Low,
Medium or High). Also see
›››
page 179,
Overview of screen and function buttons.
Equaliser
b)
: To adjust the sound properties.
Balance - Fader
b)
: To adjust the sound distribution.
The cursor indicates the current sound distribution in
the passenger compartment. To modify the sound
distribution, briefly pr
ess on the desired position in
the passenger compartment view or use the arrow
keys for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound
distribution in the passenger compartment view,
press the central function button located between
the arrows.
Subwoofer
*: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.
Function button: function
Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-
tion button is pressed is active.
Disabling v
oice navigation during calls
a)
: During a tele-
phone conversation, audio driving recommendations
will not be given.
Dynaudio sound properties
a)
: To select or adjust the
sound properties.
Individual : Individual adjustment of sound prop-
erties.
Profile : To adjust the sound properties by select-
ing one of the 4 preset sound profiles ( Authentic ,
Soft , Dynamic or Speech ).
Dynaudio sound focus
a)
: To adjust the sound distribu-
tion (Balance - Fader).
Individual : To adjust the sound distribution. The
crosshair indicates the current distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment. To modify
the sound distribution, briefly pr
ess on the de-
sired position in the passenger compartment
view or use the arrow keys for a step-by-step
modification. To centre sound distribution in the
passenger compartment view, press the func-
tion button located between the arrows.
Function button: function
Profile : 4 preset sound distributions can be se-
lected, which are optimized f
or the indicated po-
sitions ( Front left
, Front right , Rear or
Front and Rear ). Select the desired sound distri-
bution by pressing it.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
b)
The function is not available in equipment with Dy-
naudio. The corresponding settings will be changed in
the Dynaudio menus.
Adjust the playback volume of e
xternal
audio sources
If you need to increase the playback volume
for the external audio source, first lower the
base volume on the infotainment system.
If the sound from the connected audio source
is very low, increase the output volume on
the external audio source. If this is not
enough, change the input volume to medium
or high.
If the sound from the connected external au-
dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the
output volume on the external audio source.
If this is not enough, change the input vol-
ume to medium or low.
180
Introduction
Voice control
Intr
oduction
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
The Navigation
1)
, Telephone, R
adio and Media
menu functions, can be activated by giving
the corresponding commands (voice com-
mands).
Instructions are given during voice control to
facilitate the operation. These instructions will
be given as a long or short dialogue, depend-
ing on the settings
›››
page 183.
Available languages
Voice control is available for most languages
that can be set in the infotainment system.
If voice control is not available for the lan-
guage you wish to set, a message is dis-
played on the screen when you try to acti-
vate it.
Voice control will be used in the set language
of the infotainment system.
●
Set the desired language in the System
Settings menu
›››
page 17
8.
Note
Voice control is not available during a tele-
phone call. Incoming calls interrupt voice
control.
Tips for voice control
To use voice control correctly, keep the fol-
lowing in mind:
●
Avoid ext
ernal and background noise (such
as conversations in the vehicle). Keep all win-
dows, doors and the sunroof closed.
●
Do not direct the air flow from the outlets
towar
ds the interior lining of the roof.
●
Speak the commands when the audio and
audio signals have finished playing, and the
symbol
›››
Fig. 182
1
is displayed on the
scr
een.
●
If possibl
e
, speak cl
early at a normal
speed. If you pr
onounce words or figures
confusingly or mumble syllables, the system
will not be able to recognise them.
●
Speak in a normal tone without stressing
the words too much and avoid long pauses.
Do not articulate or emphasize too much, or
mumble, whisper or shout
●
Speak a little louder if you are driving at
high speed.
●
Phone numbers can be spoken digit by digit
or in blocks of 1-999.
●
After a few commands, the voice control
adapts to the speaker and recognises his/her
commands better.
Using voice control
Fig. 182
Voice control: indication of the help
menu el
ements that can be pr
onounced.
Switching on the speech control system
●
To activate voice control, briefly press the
inf
ot
ainment butt
on
or button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
»
1)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion.
181
Infotainment System
When voice control is activated, a rising audio
signal is hear
d.
A help menu is displ
ayed with the most im-
port
ant or
ders in the activ
e mode at the time
(e.g. Navigation)
›››
Fig. 182
A
. Other ele-
ments that can be spok
en ar
e sho
wn in r
ed
on the corr
esponding screen
›››
Fig. 182. The
help menu indication can be activated and
deactivated in the Voice control set-
tings menu
›››
page 183.
Speak commands
Speak the commands when the audio and
audio signals have finished playing, and the
symbol
1
is displayed on the screen.
●
Say the desired command (e.g. “St
art intr
o-
duction
”) t
o list
en to the voice control intro-
duction. See also
›››
page 182, Introduction
to voice control and
›››
page 182, Voice
control help.
●
The system speech will guide you through
the following dialogue.
●
When an operation is completed, voice
control ends with a downward audio signal.
●
To interrupt a voice control phrase and say
the next command directly, briefly press the
infotainment button or button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
The displayed lists are numbered if voice
control is active. The figures are shown on the
left in the function buttons. Activate the de-
sired entry, e.g. figure 5, with the command
“line 5”.
The “Back” command always takes you to
the previous step of the dialogue.
Ending voice control
To end voice control, manually press and
hold, or briefly press the button of the in-
fotainment system twice (double click), or
press button on the multifunction steering
wheel until the downward audio signal
sounds.
Voice control also ends in the following cir-
cumstances:
●
When a function button is pressed.
●
When an infotainment button is pressed.
●
When activating ParkPilot.
●
With an incoming call.
●
With the reception of a traffic announce-
ment.
Introduction to voice control
We recommend listening to the introduction
to voice control when you use it for the first
time. The introduction is divided into sections
that can be listed to in the set or, or by select-
ing them.
Briefly press the infotainment button or
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Speak the command to start the introduction
in the language set in the infotainment sys-
tem and follow the instructions in the dia-
logue.
Language Order
German Einführung starten
English Start tutorial
English (U S) Start introduction
Spanish Iniciar introducción
French Démarrer introduction
Portuguese Iniciar introdução
Italian Avvia introduzione
Czech Zahájit úvod
Dutch Snelcursus starten
Russian Запустить п
рограм
му
обучения
Swedish Starta introduktion
Turkish Tanıtımı başlat
Polish Rozpocznij
wprowadzenie
Voice control help
The functions f
or which v
oice contr
ol is av
ail
-
able have contextual help.
182
Introduction
Select the function and briefly press infotain-
ment butt
on
, or button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
Say one of the following commands, de-
pending on the language set in the infotain-
ment system.
Language Order
German Hilfe
English Help
Spanish Help
French Aide
Portuguese Ajuda
Italian Aiuto
Czech Nápověda
Dutch Help
Russian Справка
Swedish Hjälp
Turkish Yardım
Polish Pomoc
Voice control settings
Open the Voice control settings menu
●
Press the infotainment
butt
on.
●
Pr
ess the SETTINGS
function button.
●
Then press the V
oice contr
ol function but-
t
on.
Function button: function
Dialogue style : To select the style of the dialogue.
Length : During voice control the phrases are
longer and additional verbal indications may be
given.
Short : Some additional indications are removed
from the long dialogue.
Sho
w possible commands
: The help menu is displayed
with the commands of the active function on the
screen when voice control is activ
ated.
Voice control start tone
: When voice control is activa-
ted, an upward confirmation audio signal is hear
d.
Press to deactivate the audio signal.
Voice control end tone
: When voice control is deactiva-
ted, a downward confirmation audio signal is hear
d.
Press to deactivate the audio signal.
Dialogue input tone
: In addition to the indication a
short acoustic signal is heard on the screen as soon
as you can speak. Press t
o deactivate the audio sig-
nal.
Note
The volume of the voice control indications
can be adjusted in the Sound settings
menu
›››
page 179 or during a speech using
the volume control .
183
Infotainment System
Connectivity
Full Link*
Full Link t
echnol
ogy description
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
The Full Link connection is made through a
USB cable.
The Full Link syst
em brings together technol-
ogies that allow communication between the
Infotainment System and mobile devices:
●
MirrorLink
®
●
Android Auto™
●
Apple CarPlay™
Interfaces
To access the Full Link system, pr
ess the Info-
tainment button (Full Link) and then se-
lect the Full Link context.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or
execute incorrectly may cause damage t
o
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
SEAT recommends the use of the Apps
that SEAT provides for this vehicle.
●
To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must
activate the option Settings > Data
transfer for SEAT apps.
●
The interaction lev
el of the Apps on the
system must be: Allow.
●
Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-
cations from improper use.
●
Never make modifications to the applica-
tions.
●
Consult the instruction manual for the
mobile terminal.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
distr
act your attention from the traffic. Dis-
tr
acting the driver in any way can lead to
an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
CAUTION
●
In areas where special regulations apply
or the use of mobil
es forbidden, it must be
switched off at all times. The radiation pro-
duced by the mobile when switched on
may interfere with sensitive technical and
medical equipment, possibly resulting in
malfunction or damage to the equipment.
●
SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-
age caused to the vehicle as a result of the
use of applications that are of poor quality
or are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
coverage of the network, the loss of data
during transmission or the improper use of
mobiles.
Note
●
The use of Full Link technology could in-
crease the amount you pay f
or data.
●
SEAT recommends having a high battery
charge on the device when connected to
Full Link.
●
SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,
the “Date and time” should be correctly
configured. Select Settings > Time and
date.
●
SEAT apps are designed to communicate
with the vehicle and interact with it through
the Full Link connection.
●
You can find further information on the
technical requirements, compatible devi-
ces, suitable applications and availability
at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.
184
Connectivity
Is Full Link blocked?
Fig. 183
Message on Infotainment system
scr
een.
If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you
can pur
chase it as an accessory at your
SEAT deal
er
›
›
›
Fig. 183.
Requirements for Full Link
Fig. 184 Full Link Requirements
Full Link Activated: If you do not hav
e
Full Link in your v
ehicl
e you can acquir
e it
as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-
ice
.
Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-
Link
®
, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™
1
2
websites to confirm whether your phone
is compatibl
e with the syst
em.
Mirr
or Link
–
Check smartphone compatibilit
y:
www
.mirrorlink.com/phones
–
MirrorLink
®
1.1 or higher
–
Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or
the CCC must be installed in the de-
vice.
Android Auto
–
Check smartphone compatibility. An-
droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/
–
Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher
–
Install Android Auto™ app
Apple CarPlay
–
Check smartphone compatibility. Apple
CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay
–
iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher
–
Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see
phone settings)
USB cable connecting car to phone:
Use the approved USB cable supplied
with the phone.
3
185
Infotainment System
Activation of Full Link
Fig. 185
Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-
put.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not
necessary t
o est
ablish the connection be-
tw
een the smar
tphone and Full Link
.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-
sary to enable all of the app features
1)
.
Proceed as follows to use Full Link:
●
Switch on the Infotainment system
●
Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's
USB port using a USB cable
›››
Fig. 185.
●
On the main menu of the Full Link settings,
select
›››
page 190:
Enable data transfer for SEAT apps.
Preferred connection type: Choose be-
tween MirrorLink™ or Android Auto™ only
for Android™ phones compatible with
both technologies. For iOS (Apple™) sys-
tems, the connection is automatic if the
device is compatible.
Select the device.
Finally, a message will appear stating that
data transfer will commence when the device
is connected. Press OK. Once selected, the
technology compatible with your device can
be used.
Note
Depending on your smartphone, it may
have to be unlocked f
or the connection to
occur.
What should I do if it does not con-
nect?
Restart the mobile device.
Check the USB cabl
e
.
Check whether the
USB cabl
e is damaged. Check that neither
1
2
3
connection (USB/micr
o USB) is damaged or
worn.
Check that the USB ports are correctly
connected. Check that the USB port of the
vehicle and the device are not damaged
and/or deteriorated.
●
Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).
●
Try with another compatible mobile device.
●
Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-
thorised service.
●
Have the mobile device repaired or replace
it.
1)
Using the data connection to transfer the
smartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-
tional char
ges. Please check the charges with
your operator.
186
Connectivity
Full Link main menu
Fig. 186 Full Link main menu.
List of devices : display of connected devi-
ces.
Disconnect : disconnect active connec-
tion.
Settings : Full Link settings.
1
2
3
Apple CarPlay™
Fig. 187 Apple CarPlay™ main menu
Apple CarPlay™ prior requirements
T
o use Appl
e CarPl
ay™ you must meet the
f
oll
owing requirements:
●
The mobile device must support Apple
CarPlay™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system through USB.
Establish connection
If a mobile device is paired for the first time,
follow the instructions on the Infotainment
system display and the mobile device dis-
play.
●
The prior requirements must be met in order
to use Apple CarPlay™.
●
Press the Infotainment button and then
select the Full Link
context.
●
Press the De
vice list
›
›
›
Fig. 186
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobil
e de
vice fr
om the
list of de
vices.
End connection
●
On the Apple CarPlay™ service press the
›››
Fig. 187
1
button to access the Full Link
main menu.
●
Press the
›
›
›
Fig. 186
2
button to end the
activ
e connection.
Special char
act
eristics
During an activ
e Appl
e CarPlay™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth connections between mobile de-
vices and the Infotainment system are not
possible.
●
Any active Bluetooth connections are auto-
matically terminated.
●
Operating the phone is only possible
through Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-
scribed in these instructions for the Infotain-
ment system are not available.
●
The mobile device connected cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
»
187
Infotainment System
●
It is not possibl
e t
o use the built
-in naviga-
tion syst
em and the Appl
e CarPlay™ naviga-
tion system at the same time. The latest navi-
gation system launched will terminate the
previous one.
●
The display of the instrument panel does
not display any turning indications or notifi-
cations from the phone or other communica-
tion media.
Voice control system
●
Briefly press or to start the Infotain-
ment system's voice control system.
●
Press and hold or to start the voice
control system of the connected device.
Note
The information on technical requirements,
compatible end devices, applications and
availabilit
y are available on www.ap-
ple.com/ios/carplay or SEAT Authorised
Services.
Android Auto™
Fig. 188 Android Auto™ Menu
Android Auto™ Prior Requirements
T
o use Andr
oid Aut
o™ you must meet the f
ol
-
lowing requirements:
●
The Android Auto™ application must al-
ready be downloaded and installed on the
mobile device.
●
The mobile device must support Android
Auto™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system through USB.
Initiating the connection
In order to initiate the connection with the
mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-
nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB
connection, and to be sure to follow the in-
structions of the device being paired.
●
Select the Android Auto™ connection type
on Full Link™ Settings.
●
The first connection to Android Auto™ must
be done while the vehicle is stationary.
●
Press the Device list
›
›
›
Fig. 186
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobil
e de
vice fr
om the
list of de
vices.
●
If you are initiating the session using
Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-
bile telephone connects automatically via
Bluetooth™ to the Infotainment system tele-
phone and it will not be possible to pair an-
other mobile telephone via Bluetooth™.
End connection
●
On the Android Auto™ service press
›››
Fig. 188
1
.
●
Select Return to SEAT t
o access t
o the
Full Link main menu.
●
Pr
ess the
›
›
›
Fig. 186
2
button to end the
activ
e connection.
Special char
act
eristics
During an activ
e Andr
oid Auto™ connection,
the following characteristics are applicable:
●
Bluetooth connections between other mo-
bile devices and the Infotainment system are
not possible.
●
Operating the phone is only possible
through Android Auto™. If the Android Auto™
188
Connectivity
device is connected to the Infotainment sys-
t
em thr
ough Bluet
ooth at the same time
, the
t
elephone function of the Infotainment sys-
tem can also be used.
●
An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
●
It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-
tion system and the Android Auto™ navigation
system at the same time. The latest naviga-
tion system launched will terminate the previ-
ous one.
●
The display of the instrument panel does
not display any turning indications or notifi-
cations from the phone or other communica-
tion media.
Voice control system
●
Briefly press or to start the Infotain-
ment system's voice control system.
●
Press and hold or to start the voice
control system of the connected device.
Note
The information on technical requirements,
compatible end devices, applications and
availabilit
y are available on www.seat.com
or SEAT Authorised Services.
MirrorLink™
Fig. 189 Function buttons in the general view
of compatibl
e applications.
Fig. 190
Other MirrorLink™ function buttons.
MirrorLink™ prior requirements
In or
der t
o use Mirr
orLink™, the f
oll
owing re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible
with MirrorLink™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system via USB.
●
Depending on the mobile device used, a
suitable application must be installed for the
use of MirrorLink™ on the device.
Establish connection
The requirements must be met to use Mirror-
Link™.
●
Press the MENU
button on the Infotainment
syst
em.
●
Pr
ess the Full Link button.
●
Select the Mirr
orLink™
connection type on
Full Link Settings.
●
Press the De
vice list
›
›
›
Fig. 186
1
button
and then sel
ect the mobil
e de
vice fr
om the
list of de
vices.
Function buttons and possible messages
Function button: function
Switch-
ing off
Terminating the MirrorLink™ connec-
tion.
Cl
ose
Apps
Press to close the open apps.
Then pr
ess the apps to be closed or
the Cl
ose all
function button to close
all the open applications.
:
Press to change to the mobile device
screen.
»
189
Infotainment System
Function button: function
Setup
To open the Full Link™ settings
›››
ta-
bl
e on page 190.
1
Press to return to the main menu.
2
Press to show the Infotainment Sys-
tem on the display.
3
Press to hide all function buttons.
OR: Press the right setting button to
show or hide all function buttons.
4
Press to display all the function but-
tons in the right-hand margin of the
screen.
5
View other function buttons.
The display of other function buttons
and the number of buttons displayed
depend on the mobile device used.
6
The symbol refers to the right setting
button.
Press the right setting button to sho
w
or hide all function buttons.
Full Link Settings
Full Link™ Settings
Open the menu Full Link Settings
●
On the Full Link main menu, pr
ess the
Settings
function button.
Function button: function
Select device : Press to select the mobile device that
will connect to the Infotainment system.
Pr
eferred connection type
: In devices that support Mir-
rorLink™ and Android Auto™ technologies, you can
select the default technology that you want to use to
pair the mobile device to the Infotainment System.
Activate data transfer for an app, SEAT : Allows the ex-
change of information between the vehicle and e
x-
ternal apps.
MirrorLink™ settings
Function button: function
Screen orientation : Allows the screen display orienta-
tion to be selected from one of the f
ollowing types, on
supported devices:
Landscape
Portrait
Rotated 180°
: It allows the image provided by the de-
vice to be rotated 180°.
Prioritiz
e keyboard of the Infotainment System
a)
: It allows
the keyboard that is made av
ailable to the user to be
the one in the Infotainment System before the one in
the device itself.
a)
This function depends on the device that is used.
Frequently asked questions about
Full Link
What connection method is used?
USB Cable.
Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicl
e?
No. The USB cable supplied with the device should
be used.
Is it possibl
e to navigate?
Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link
technologies if the technol
ogy is available in your
country and if you have the Navigation app.
What is the difference between using the Full Link
system navigator (via a device) instead of anoth-
er navigat
or?
Advantages: Daily updates.
Issues: data consumption, reception problems.
Can I send voice messages?
With certified applications, you can reply, not send.
What applications will be visible while driving?
Depending on the technology:
– for MirrorLink
®
: Apps certified by SEAT and the
CCC,
– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,
– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.
190
Connectivity
Where can I find compatible Apps?
Compatible apps are listed at the foll
owing links:
www.mirrorlink.com/
www.android.com/auto/
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
Where can I download the apps?
On Google Play™ for Android Aut
o™/MirrorLink
®
and
on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.
If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair
it?
If the problem is in the car, you should go t
o the deal-
er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should
see your mobile telephone vendor.
Will WhatsApp be certified?
The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.
Is MirrorLink
®
av
ailable in my country?
Yes, MirrorLink
®
is available in all countries and re-
gions where SEAT is located.
What are the differences between MirrorLink
®
,
Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™?
MirrorLink
®
is not compatible with Android Auto™ and
Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.
They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is
designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-
ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.
Can MirrorLink
®
be installed in a previous SEAT
model?
No
, it is not possible.
Where can I find more information about Full
Link?
If you have any questions, please see our Innov
a-
tion/Connectivity sections on our website:
www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-
191
Infotainment System
Operating modes
R
adio
RADIO main menu
Fig. 191
RADIO main menu.
Fig. 192 Radio mode: station list.
Press the infotainment button
t
o open
the
Radio main menu
›››
Fig. 191.
RADIO main menu function buttons
Function button: function
1
a)
To select the desired frequency
band.
2
To change the preset key group us-
ing the function button.
3
a)
Sort the FM station list.
Alphabetically : The station list is
sorted alphabetically.
Group : The station list is sorted by
st
ation gr
oups.
St
ations
List of radio station that can be
tuned.
Manual
Selecting the frequency manually.
View
b)
Shows additional services. Only
available in DAB mode.
Setup
Settings menu for the current fre-
quency band.
/
T
o change between stored stations
or available stations.
Adjustment of the arr
ow buttons in
the menu.
Function button: function
SCAN
This function button is only available
when automatic playback is on.
Press the settings button t
o start au-
tomatic playback.
1 t
o 15
c)
Preset buttons to st
ore stations
›››
page 195.
To update the station list (frequency
band AM or DAB).
a)
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
b)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
c)
The Media System Colour model has 12 memories.
Indications and possibl
e icons
Display: Meaning
A
Frequency or name of the station or
radio text. The name of the radio st
a-
tion and the radio text will only be dis-
played if RDS is active.
RDS off
a)
The RDS radio data service is deacti-
vated.
TP
a)
Traffic inf
ormation can be retrieved:
select Radio > Settings >
Traffic programme (TP).
No TP
a)
No stations with traffic ne
ws are avail-
abl
e.
The radio station is st
ored on a memo-
ry butt
on.
192
Operating modes
Display: Meaning
a)
DAB not available.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Note
●
Being underground, in tunnels, in ar
eas
with tall buildings or mountains can inter-
fere with the radio reception.
●
Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to
the windows may affect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
●
Radio stations are responsible for the
content of the information they transmit.
Radio data services RDS (FM band)
Fig. 193
RADIO main menu.
Fig. 194 Radio mode: station list (FM).
RDS (Radio Data System) is a radio data sys-
t
em that pr
o
vides additional FM services such
as the name of st
ations, aut
omatic station
tracking, radio text and traffic information
(TP).
Depending on the country and the equip-
ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in
the FM Settings menu
›››
page 199.
In general, no radio data services are avail-
able without RDS.
Station name and automatic station track-
ing
If the RDS function is available, the names of
the stations can be displayed on the RADIO
main menu and on the Station list .
FM stations temporarily transmit other con-
tent on different regional frequencies under
the same name (for example, Radio 3).
In general, automatic station tracking takes
charge of switching to the frequency with the
best reception of the station that is tuned at
any given time, while driving. However, this
may cause a regional broadcast to be inter-
rupted.
Automatic frequency switching and automat-
ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM
Settings
›››
page 199.
Radio text
Some stations that have RDS transmit addi-
tional information in text, the so-called radio
text.
The radio text is displayed in the upper half of
the screen above the memory buttons
›››
Fig. 191
A
.
The r
adio t
e
xt displ
ay can be deactiv
ated in
the Settings
›››
page 199.
193
Infotainment System
Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and
DMB audio)*
3 Not valid in Japan, China, Mexico, Brazil, Can-
ada or the USA.
Fig. 195
DAB Radio mode main menu.
Fig. 196 Station information display in DAB ra-
dio mode
.
The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +
and DMB audio tr
ansmission st
andar
ds.
In Eur
ope
, digital radio is transmitted over
band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240
MHz).
The frequencies are called “channels” and
have an abbreviation (eg 12 A).
In a channel, several available DAB stations
are grouped together in an “ensemble”.
Starting the Digital radio mode
●
In the RADIO main menu, press the
›››
Fig. 195
1
function button and select
D
AB
.
The l
ast D
AB st
ation that w
as sel
ected will be
played, if it can still be tuned in that location.
The selected DAB station is shown in the top
bar of the DAB-3 screen. The selected station
ensemble is shown below ENSEMBLE-A
›››
Fig. 195.
Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-
ice Components)
Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-
nently offer additional stations (for example,
for the transmission of sporting events).
DAB stations containing additional stations
are identified on the station list by the symbol
.
Select additional stations
Press the name of the main station on the
DAB main menu to select an additional sta-
tion. Or, select the additional station from the
station list.
On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-
ditional tuned station is displayed next to the
abbreviated name of the main DAB station.
Additional stations can not be saved.
Automatic station tracking
DAB radio is not currently available every-
where. DAB radio mode displays the areas
without DAB coverage .
For automatic station tracking, a change to
the FM frequency band can be allowed in the
DAB settings
›››
page 200.
If the DAB station being listened to can no
longer be tuned in (e.g., there is no DAB cov-
erage), the infotainment system tries to find
and tune the same station on the FM frequen-
cy band.
For a station to be tracked on all frequencies,
the DAB and FM station need to be broad-
casting the same identification.
OR: DAB indicates which FM station corre-
sponds to the DAB station, and the FM station
in question can be tuned without any prob-
lems.
194
Operating modes
When the corresponding FM station has been
f
ound,
(FM) is displ
ayed behind the name of
the st
ation. If the corr
esponding DAB station
becomes available again, it returns to DAB
mode after a while. The (FM) indication dis-
appears.
If the signal is too weak and the DAB station in
question cannot be found again in the FM
band, the radio sound is muted.
Screen Menu
The function buttons refer to the menu that is
displayed when the View
button is pressed
›
›
›
Fig. 195
.
Function button: function
Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons
›››
Fig. 195.
St
ation List
: Simultaneous display of radio text and
slideshows instead of memory keys
›››
Fig. 196.
Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of the
memory buttons.
Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.
Some DAB stations also offer an image “slideshow”.
Through this slideshow the stations can transmit in-
f
ormation to the infotainment system in the form of
digital images.
When a station is switched it may take some time un-
til the slidesho
w of the t
uned D
AB st
ation is l
oaded in
the background.
Note
Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text
and slideshows.
Memory buttons
Fig. 197 RADIO main menu.
In the R
adio main menu, you can store sta-
tions fr
om all av
ail
abl
e frequency wave-
lengths on the numbered function buttons.
These function buttons are called “memory
buttons”.
Storing the station on the memory buttons
See: Preset stations
›››
page 197.
Change the memory bank (screens)
●
Move your finger over the screen from left
to right or vice-versa.
●
OR: Press one of the function buttons
›››
Fig. 197
1
Selecting the station from the memory
butt
ons
●
Pr
ess the memory butt
on corr
esponding t
o
the desired station.
The stored stations can only be played by
pressing the corresponding memory button
provided it can be received at your current
location.
Storing the station logo on the memory
buttons
Saved stations can be assigned logos
›››
page 195.
Storing or deleting station logos on
the preset buttons
3 Not available for model: Media Syst
em Colour
Depending on the country and the equip-
ment, station logos for the FM and DAB fre-
quency bands are pre-installed in the info-
tainment system. If a station is stored in a pre-
set button, the logo corresponding to the sta-
tion can be displayed on the preset button,
provided that the
Automatic saving (station logos)
function is ac-
tiv
e in the adv
anced settings
›
›
›
page 199,
Settings (FM, AM, DAB).
»
195
Infotainment System
Station logos can be manually assigned to
st
ations that ar
e st
or
ed on pr
eset buttons,
which will then be displayed on the preset
buttons.
Images in standard formats (e.g. jpg, bmp or
even png) with a maximum size of 400 x 240
pixels, may be used as station logos.
In some countries, station logos can be
downloaded from the Internet through a link
on the “SEAT Senderlogos” website (SEAT
logos).
Copy the logos to a compatible data medium
(e.g. a SD card or USB memory) to import
them into the infotainment system.
Automatically saving station logos on the
preset buttons (FM and DAB)
●
Press the function button Settings
on the
RADIO main menu (FM and D
AB fr
equency
band).
●
Pr
ess the Adv
anced settings
function button.
●
Activate the Aut
omatic st
or
age (st
ation l
ogos)
by pressing .
Manually st
oring the st
ation l
ogos on the
pr
eset butt
ons
●
Copy the logos to a compatible data medi-
um (e.g. a SD card or USB memory) to import
them into the infotainment system.
●
Select the desired frequency band in the
RADIO main menu.
●
Press the function button Settings
and
then St
ation l
ogos .
●
Press the preset button to which a logo is to
be assigned.
●
Select the source in which the logo has
been st
or
ed (e
.g. SD 1
).
●
Select the logo. Repeat this process to as-
sign other l
ogos.
●
Pr
ess the inf
ot
ainment butt
on to return
to the RADIO main menu.
Deleting the station logos from the preset
buttons
●
Select the desired frequency band in the
RADIO main menu.
●
Press the function button Settings
and
then St
ation l
ogos .
●
Press the preset button from which the sta-
tion l
ogo is t
o be del
et
ed.
●
OR:
Press the Delete all
function button to
er
ase the st
ation l
ogos of all the pr
esets.
Sel
ecting, tuning and saving a sta-
tion
Fig. 198
RADIO main menu.
Fig. 199
Radio mode: station list (AM).
Selecting stations
Select the sta-
tion using the
arrow keys
Press the < or >
›››
Fig. 198func-
tion butt
on.
196
Operating modes
Selecting stations
/
Depending on the setting of the ar-
row keys, you can swit
ch between
preset stations or tuneable sta-
tions. Setting the arrow buttons in
the menu
›››
page 199, Settings
(FM, AM, DAB),
›››
page 200, DAB
settings.
Selecting sta-
tions fr
om the
st
ation list
T
o open the st
ation list pr
ess the
function Stations
function but-
ton
›››
Fig. 198
.
OR: Turn the adjustment knob.
Browse the list and tune t
o the sta-
tion you want by pressing it.
Press the
›››
Fig. 199 function
butt
on to close the list. If it is not
used, the list will close automati-
cally after a while.
Updating the
st
ation list
The FM, AM
and DAB frequency
band station lists ar
e updated au-
tomatically.
In the AM and DAB frequency
bands you can also update the
station list manually by pressing
the function button
›››
Fig. 199.
Manually tuning a station frequency
Display the
frequency
band
Press the Manual function but-
ton
›››
Fig. 198
.
Manually tuning a station frequency
Changing the
fr
equency st
ep
by st
ep
T
urn the adjustment knob
.
OR: Pr
ess the arrow buttons to the
right or t
o the l
eft of the fr
equency
band.
Quickly tr
ack
the frequency
band
Press one of the arrow butt
ons at
the top of the screen
››
›
Fig. 198.
The next tuneable station is set au-
tomatically.
OR: Press and hold one of the ar-
row buttons at the
top of the
screen
›››
Fig. 198.
Once released, the system auto-
matically switches to the next
t
uneable radio station. In DAB
mode, it switches to the next tunea-
ble ensemble.
OR: Place your finger on the fre-
quency band’s scroll button and
move your finger to move the but-
ton.
Hide the fre-
quency band
Briefly press the settings button.
Selecting a station with the preset
button also ends the manual fre-
quency selection. If no operations
are performed, the frequency
band is hidden after a while.
Presetting stations
Store the cur-
r
ent st
ation on
a pr
eset butt
on
Pr
ess and hold the desired preset
button
›››
Fig. 198
until an audible
signal is heard.
The tuned station will be stored on
that pre-set button.
Save a station
fr
om a stations
list with a pre-
set button
Pr
ess the Stations
›››
Fig. 198
function button or t
urn the settings
button to open the station list.
The stations that are already stor-
ed on a preset button are marked
on the st
ation list with the symbol
›››
Fig. 199.
Select the desired station by
pressing and holding it down on
the screen.
Pr
ess the preset button on which
the station in question is to be
saved.
A signal sounds and the station is
saved on the preset button. Repeat
the process to continue saving oth-
er station on the list.
Delete preset
stations
All saved stations on the frequency
band in question can be del
eted
one by one, or all at the same time
››
›
page 199, Settings (FM, AM,
DAB),
›››
page 200, DAB settings.
197
Infotainment System
Setting a station name (FM fre-
quency band)
Some radio stations transmit very long names
that are represented as pl
ain text on the
screen.
To set the text that is displayed at that mo-
ment, press and hold the name of the station
until an audible signal is heard.
The set station names are displayed with
dots to the left and right of the station name.
The set text is applied to all the preset but-
tons on which that radio station is saved.
Automatic playback (SCAN)
Fig. 200 Radio mode: automatic playback
(SCAN) activ
e
.
When automatic playback is active, all tune-
abl
e st
ations in the sel
ect
ed fr
equency band
are played for approximately 5 seconds
each. SCAN
›
›
›
Fig. 200
is displ
ayed on the
screen.
Start automatic playback
●
Briefly press the settings button.
●
OR: Press the Settings
function button
and then sel
ect Scan
.
End aut
omatic pl
ayback
●
Briefly pr
ess the settings butt
on.
●
OR:
Press the SCAN
function button to end
aut
omatic pl
ayback on the st
ation that is be-
ing pl
ayed.
Aut
omatic playback also ends when a station
is selected manually using the memory but-
tons.
TP function (traffic information sta-
tion)
Fig. 201
RADIO main menu with the TP indica-
tion.
Fig. 202
List of stations with the TP indication.
The TP function (traffic information station) is
not av
ail
abl
e on all equipment, in all pl
aces
or on all FM st
ations.
198
Operating modes
Using the TP function to track traffic informa-
tion is only possibl
e if a st
ation with tr
affic in-
f
ormation can be t
uned. Stations with the
traffic information function are displayed on
the RADIO main menu along with TP
›››
Fig. 201 and
›››
Fig. 202.
Some stations without their own traffic infor-
mation support the TP function by broad-
casting traffic announcement from other sta-
tions (EON).
Activating and deactivating the TP func-
tion
●
Activate or deactivate the
Traffic information station (TP)
function button
by pr
essing it
›
›
›
page 199, Settings (FM,
AM, D
AB),
›››
page 200, DAB settings.
If the station you are listening to does not
have the TP function, No TP will be displayed
on the upper part of the screen.
Active TP function and station selection
If traffic station tracking is active, the acro-
nym TP is displayed on the top right of the
screen in audio mode
›››
Fig. 201. The traffic
bulletins of the station that is being listened
to, or of the station that provides traffic infor-
mation, are played in Audio mode.
In FM mode, the station that is being lis-
tened to must have the TP function. If after
activating the TP function a station is selec-
ted using the preset buttons, or by tuning
manually, that does not have the TP func-
tion, the traffic information station will not be
tracked (indication: No TP).
If it is not possible to continue tuning the cur-
rent traffic station, No TP is also displayed
and a manual station search will have to be
started
›››
page 196.
In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-
tion is automatically tuned in the background,
as long as the station has a good signal. De-
pending on the situation this operation may
take some time.
Incoming traffic announcement
In Audio mode, traffic announcements are
pl
ayed aut
omatically when they ar
e r
e-
ceiv
ed.
While the traffic announcement is playing, a
pop-up window is displayed and the radio
changes, if necessary, to the traffic informa-
tion station (EON).
Media mode is interrupted and the volume is
set as adjusted
›››
page 179.
The traffic announcement volume can be
changed with the volume control . The
modified volume remains as set for subse-
quent bulletins.
●
Press the Interrupt
function button to stop
pl
ayback of the tr
affic bull
etin that is being
list
ened t
o. The TP function remains active.
●
OR: Press the Deactivate
function button to
st
op the tr
affic announcement that is being
pl
ayed and t
o permanently disconnect the
TP function.
Settings (FM, AM, D
AB)
FM settings
Select the FM frequency band by pr
essing
the infotainment key .
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 201
1
and
sel
ect the
FM
fr
equency band.
Pr
ess the SETTINGS
function button to open
the FM settings menu.
Function button: function
Sound : Sound settings
›››
page 17
9.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 198.
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies to all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tween all of the saved stations in the select
ed
frequency band.
»
199
Infotainment System
Function button: function
Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
between all of the tuneable stations in the sel
ec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active
›››
page 198.
Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-
tion logos saved in the memory keys
››
›
page 195.
Radio text
: The radio text is active
›››
page 193, Ra-
dio t
ext.
Advanced settings
a)
: Radio data services (RDS) set-
tings.
Autost
ore station logos
a)
: The stations saved on the
memory buttons are aut
omatically assigned ra-
dio station logos if they are available in the info-
tainment system. Also see
›››
page 195.
Station logo region
a)
: This allows the vehicle
's re-
gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes the
automatic assignment of station logos. The op-
tion also allows the system to select the region
automatically.
Automatic frequency control (AF)
a)
: Automatic sta-
tion tracking is active
. When there is no check in
check box , the function button RDS regional
will be inactive (grey).
Radio data system (RDS)
a)
: The Radio Data System
(RDS) is deactivat
ed
›››
page 193. If there is no
check in check box , the traffic information
station (TP), radio text, station name and pro-
gram type functions will not be available.
Function button: function
RDS regional
a)
: Set the RDS automatic station
tracking
›
››
page 193.
Fixed
: Only alternative frequencies of the
set station with an identical region program
are set.
Automatic : It always changes to the frequen-
cy of the set station that has the best signal
at the time, even if a r
egional broadcast that
is in progress is interrupted.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
AM settings
Select the AM frequency band by pr
essing
the infotainment key .
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 201
1
and
sel
ect the
AM
fr
equency band.
Pr
ess the SETTINGS
function button to open
the AM settings menu.
Function button: function
Sound : Sound settings
›››
page 17
9.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 198.
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies to all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Function button: function
Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tween all of the saved stations in the select
ed
frequency band.
Station List
: The arrow keys are used to switch
between all of the tuneable stations in the selec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active
›
››
page 198.
Delete presets
: To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on
memory buttons
›››
page 195
.
DAB settings
Sel
ect the
D
AB
fr
equency band by pressing
the infotainment button
.
OR: Press function button
›››
Fig. 201
1
and
sel
ect the
D
AB
fr
equency band.
Press the SETTINGS
function button to open
the
DAB settings
menu.
Function button: function
Sound : Sound settings
›››
page 17
9.
Scan
: Automatic playback (SCAN function). When
automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable
stations in the selected frequency band are played
for approximately 5 seconds each
›››
page 198.
200
Operating modes
Function button: function
Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons
and . The setting applies to all frequency bands
(FM, AM and DAB).
Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-
tween all of the saved stations in the selected
frequency band.
Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch
between all of the tuneable stations in the sel
ec-
ted frequency band.
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active
›
››
page 198.
Delete presets
: To erase all or some of the preset sta-
tions.
Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on
memory buttons
›››
page 195
.
Radio text
: The radio text is active
›››
page 193, Ra-
dio t
ext.
Advanced settings
: DAB services settings.
Autostore station logos
a)
: Station logos are as-
signed automatically when the r
adio stations are
stored on the memory buttons
›››
page 195.
DAB traffic announcements
: DAB traffic announce-
ments are played in the same way as TP traffic
announcements in any equipment mode
.
Function button: function
Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements
(news, sports information, weather, w
arnings,
etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-
tive.
DAB - DAB station tracking
: Automatic station track-
ing within the DAB frequency range is active.
Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM
frequency band is permitted for automatic st
a-
tion tracking.
a)
This depends on the country and unit in question.
Media
Intr
oduction
Audio or image sources containing files in dif-
f
er
ent media ar
e kno
wn as “
media sources”.
These audio files can be played through the
corresponding players or the infotainment
system's audio inputs.
Only supported files are displayed and
played. Other files are ignored.
Copyright
Consider the legislation on the intellectual
property of audio and video files.
Note
●
MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo-
gy and patents are licensed by Fr
aunhofer
IIS.
●
This product is protected by certain Mi-
crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-
ty rights. The use or commercialization of
technology of this type outside the config-
uration of this product, without a licence
from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft
branch is prohibited.
●
The infotainment system only plays com-
patible undamaged audio files; other files
are ignored.
●
Check the list of compatible devices on
the SEAT website.
201
Infotainment System
Requirements for data media and files
The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are
class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE
0837.
Only standar
d 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x
24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can
be inserted in the infotainment system.
Any playable file formats on the list will here-
inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-
taining these types of audio files is called an
“audio data CD”.
Data media Requirements for playing audio files
Optical discs:
– Audio CD (up to 80 min).
– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with
the ISO 9660 L
evel 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.
Memory cards:
– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB).
– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.
USB data media:
– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.
– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.
– Different generations of iPods™
a)
, iPads™
a)
and iPhones™
a)
.
– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”..
– Digital Audio Specification.
– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rat
es from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-
ble transfer rate.
– WAV files (.wav).
– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates
of up to 384kbit/s.
– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.
– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.
– FLAC files (.flac).
– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.
– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.
– Fil
e names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.
– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-
rectory.
Pl
ayback of audio fil
es thr
ough the AUX-IN jack
.
– The e
xternal audio source must meet a series of playback conditions
›››
page 210
.
Playing audio files via Bluetooth
®b)
.
– The ext
ernal media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth
®
profile
›››
page 210.
a)
iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.
b)
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Bluet
ooth
®
SIG, Inc.
Read and bear in mind the instruction manual
for the external data st
orage device.
Limitations and indications
Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical
damage can cause data media to fail. Con-
sider the indications provided by the manu-
facturer of the data media.
202
Operating modes
Quality differences between data media pro-
duced by diff
er
ent manuf
act
ur
ers can cause
playback interference.
Consider copyright legislation!
The configuration of data media or of the
equipment or programs used for recording
may cause some tracks or data media to be
unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can
be found information about the best way to
record audio files or data media (compres-
sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).
The reading speed can vary considerably
depending on the size, the usage status
(copying and deleting processes), the struc-
ture of the folders and the type of files of the
data media used.
Playlists only establish a certain playback
order. The files are not saved in them. Play-
lists cannot be played if the files on the data
media are not saved to the path to which the
playlist refers.
A cover can only be displayed when the
name starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-
bum”.
Note
●
Do not use memory card adaptors, USB
extension cor
ds or USB hubs!
●
SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-
ration or loss of files on data storage devi-
ces.
Playback order of files and folders
Fig. 203
Example of the structure of an audio
dat
a CD
.
The audio files st
or
ed on dat
a media ar
e
oft
en arranged by file folders and playlists
to establish a certain playback order.
Depending on their name on the data media,
tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-
merically and alphabetically.
The illustration shows an example of a con-
ventional audio data CD, containing tracks
, folders and subfolders
›››
Fig. 203.
In this case the tracks will be played as fol-
lows
1)
:
Tracks
1
and
2
in the root directory
(R
oot) of the CD
T
r
acks
3
and
4
in the first F1 f
ol
der of
the CD r
oot dir
ect
ory
Track
5
in the first subf
ol
der
F1.
1 of f
old-
er F1.
Track
6
in the first subf
ol
der
F1.
1.
1 of
subfolder F1.1
Track
7
in the second subf
ol
der F1.
2 of
f
ol
der F1
Track
8
and
9
in the second f
ol
der F2
»
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1)
The Mix/repeat including subfolders function must
be active in the Media settings menu
›››
page 212.
203
Infotainment System
Note
●
The playback sequence can be modified
by selecting the different pl
ayback modes
›››
page 204.
●
Playlists do not play automatically, they
have to be selected directly from the track
selection menu
›››
page 206.
MEDIA main menu
Fig. 204 MEDIA main menu.
Using the Media main menu, diff
er
ent media
sour
ces can be sel
ect
ed and played.
●
Press the infotainment button to open
the Media
›››
Fig. 204main menu.
It will continue playing the last media source
selected from the same point.
The media source being played is indicated
on the dropdown list when the
1
function
butt
on is pr
essed.
If ther
e is no av
ail
able media source, the Me-
dia main menu is displayed.
MEDIA main menu function buttons
Function button: function
1
Indicates the media source being
played. Press to select another media
sour
ce
›››
page 205.
CD
: Internal CD drive
›››
page 207.
SD card 1 , SD card 2 *: SD card
›››
page 208.
USB 1 and USB 2 *: External data
storage device connected t
o a USB port
›››
page 209.
AUX
: External audio source connected
to the AUX-IN multimedia socket
›››
page 210.
BT Audio
: Bluetooth
®
audio
›››
page 210
.
Selec-
tion
Opens the track list
›››
page 206.
/
Changes track in Media mode
›››
page 205.
Playback stops. The
function button
changes to
›››
page 205.
Function button: function
Playback is resumed. The function
button changes to
›››
page 205.
Set-
up
Opens the Media Settings
›››
page 212
menu.
Press it to change mode.
: To repeat the current track.
: To repeat all tr
acks.
Repeats all the tracks that are on the
same memory level as the track being
played now. If in the Media Settings
menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is enabled, it also includes the
subfolders
›››
page 212.
Random play. The
function button
changes to
Includes all the tracks that are on the
same memory level as the track being
pl
ayed now. If in the Media Settings
menu the Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is enabled, it also includes the
subfolders
›››
page 212.
204
Operating modes
Indications and symbols of the MEDIA
main menu
Display: Meaning
A
Display track information (CD text , ID3 la-
bel in MP3 files).
Audio CD: Displays the track and tr
ack
number, according to the or
der on the data
storage device.
Audio files: Displays the name of the artist,
the name of the album and the
track if
available.
B
a)
Displays the album cover if available in the
data storage device
.
C
The progress bar and the playing time so far
and time remaining in minutes and seconds.
VBR: In the case of audio files with variabl
e
bit rates the remaining time may vary.
Press the progress bar or press it and move it
to skip to a different part of the track.
a)
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
Note
When the media source is inserted, playing
will not start automatically; it is necessary
for the user t
o select the source. Nor will
the media source change when it is ejec-
ted.
Switching the Media source
Fig. 205 MEDIA main menu.
●
Lower the base volume on the Infotainment
syst
em.
●
Fr
om the
Media
main menu, pr
ess the
SOURCE
function button
›
›
›
Fig. 205
and se-
l
ect the desired media source.
●
OR: From the MEDIA main menu, press the
1
function button and select the desired Me-
dia sour
ce
.
In the pop-up windo
w
, the Media sour
ces not
selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).
When a Media source that has already been
played is selected again, playback is re-
sumed from the point at which it was stop-
ped.
Note
The Media source can be changed in the
Track list view
: select Media > View.
Changing track in the MEDIA main
menu
Fig. 206
MEDIA main menu.
The tracks of the Media source that is being
list
ened t
o can be changed successiv
ely us-
ing the arr
o
w buttons.
The arrow keys cannot be used to switch to
playback from a playlist. Playback from a
playlist must be started manually in the title
selection menu
›››
page 206.
»
205
Infotainment System
Control through the MEDIA main menu
Meaning Function
Briefly press the func-
tion butt
on < once.
If the title has been play-
ing f
or less than 3 sec-
onds, it goes back to the
start of the pr
evious title.
If the title has been play-
ing for 3 seconds or more,
it ret
urns to the beginning
of the title.
Briefly press the func-
tion button > once.
To the next title. From the
last title, pressing this but
-
ton switches to the first ti-
tle of the data media that
is being played.
Press and hold the
function button <
.
Rewind.
Press and hold the
function button > .
Fast forward.
Briefly press the func-
tion button once.
Playback stops. The
function button changes
to .
Briefly press the func-
tion button once.
Playback is resumed. The
function button
changes to .
Selecting a track from a track list
Fig. 207 List of titles of a Media source (folder
vie
w).
Fig. 208
USB data storage device: data bank
vie
w
.
Open a title list
●
Press the Sel
ection
function button
›
›
›
Fig. 206
.
●
OR:
Turn the adjustment knob. The track
that is playing is highlighted
›››
Fig. 207.
Search the title list and press the title that you
want. If there is title information available, the
title and title number (on audio CDs) or file
name (MP3) is displayed instead of Title +
number.
Depending on the media source that is selec-
ted, you can choose between the folder
view and the data bank view
›››
page 207.
Overview of the function buttons in the ti-
tle list
Fig. 207 Function button: function
Open the Sources menu. Press to select
another Media source
.
1
The currently selected Media source is dis-
played on the bar at the top of the screen.
Press to change the media source.
CD : Internal CD drive
›››
page 207.
SD card 1
, SD card 2 *: SD card
›››
page 208.
USB 1
and USB 2 *: External data support
connect
ed
›
›
›
page 209
.
BT Audio
: External Media Player connected
via Bluetooth
®
›››
page 2
10.
Press the function button to open the top
folder of the Media source.
206
Operating modes
Fig. 207 Function button: function
Start playback of the first title.
Repeat all titles. The function button
changes to .
Repeats all the tracks that are on the same
memory level as the track being pl
ayed now.
If in the Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is ena-
bled, it also includes the subfolders
›
››
page 212.
Random play. The
function button
changes to .
Includes all the tracks that are on the same
memory level as the track being pl
ayed now.
If in the Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
option is ena-
bled, it also includes the subfolders
›
››
page 212.
×
To close the list of titles.
Data bank view
1)
The data bank view can only be gener
at
ed
by mass st
or
age de
vices (USB and SD cards).
Depending on the volume of data, it can take
a few minutes to generate the data bank
view.
If there are too many files in the mass storage
device, it may not be possible to generate the
Databank view.
When generating the data bank view, exist-
ing titles are ordered according to the infor-
mation available about titles in different cate-
gories and lists.
The existing tracks can be viewed and
opened from these lists according to different
classifications.
To switch between the Data bank view and
the Folder view, press function button
›››
Fig. 208
2
.
Fig. 208 Function button: name
List of tracks
Artists
Albums
Genres
Title
Note
Titles, folders and playlists can also be se-
lected by turning the setting button and
pl
aying or opening them by pressing on
them.
Insert or eject a CD
The driver should refrain from operating the
unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or
change the data st
orage device before mov-
ing off!
The CD drives can play audio CDs and audio
data CDs .
Insert a CD
●
Insert the CD into the CD reader
›››
Fig. 177
›››
Fig. 178
4
with the printed side
f
acing up
w
ar
ds, until the equipment inserts it
aut
omatically.
Ejecting a CD
●
Press button .
●
The CD in the drive will be ejected and
must be removed within approximately 10
seconds.
If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it
is automatically retracted for security rea-
sons without activating the CD mode.
Unreadable or defective CD
If the data on an inserted CD cannot be read
or a defective CD is inserted, the correspond-
ing warning appears on screen.
»
1)
Not available for model: Media System Colour
207
Infotainment System
Depending on the equipment, unreadable
CDs ar
e aut
omatically e
ject
ed 3 times and
r
einserted to start another three read at-
tempts before this indication is displayed.
Note
●
Uneven road surfaces and str
ong vibra-
tions can cause playback to jump.
●
When the temperature inside the equip-
ment is too high, loading and playback of
CDs is disabled.
●
If after inserting a number of different
and receiving the CD , every time, contact a
specialised workshop.
Insert or eject an SD card
The driver should refrain from operating the
inf
ot
ainment syst
em whil
e the v
ehicle is in
motion. Insert or change the data storage de-
vice before moving off!
Only compatible audio files are displayed.
Other files are ignored.
Inserting the SD card
1)
Media System Colour:
●
Insert compatible SD cards, first on the side
of the cut corner and with the label facing up
(contacts facing down) in SD card slot
›››
Fig. 177
7
until they lock into place.
Media Syst
em Plus / Navi Syst
em:
●
L
eft sl
ot:
Enter a compatible SD card with
the corner cut upwards and the title on the
left (the contact surfaces pointed to the right)
in the left SD card slot
›››
Fig. 178
6
until it
clicks.
●
Right slot: Ent
er a compatibl
e SD car
d with
the corner cut
do
wnwards and the title on
the right (the contact surfaces pointed to the
left) in the right SD card slot
›››
Fig. 178
6
until it clicks.
If an SD car
d cannot be insert
ed, mak
e sur
e it
is positioned corr
ectly and is compatible with
the unit.
Playback does not start automatically if
there are audio files stored in the SD card and
they can be read.
Ejecting the SD card
The inserted SD cards must be prepared for
ejection.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the
Settings
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment button and
then pr
ess Settings to open the System set-
tings menu.
●
Press the R
emo
v
e saf
ely function button and
then SD Car
d
. After correctly ejecting the
dat
a st
or
age de
vice fr
om the system, the
function button becomes inactive (grey col-
our).
●
Press the inserted SD card. The SD card
“jumps” to the eject position.
●
Remove the SD card.
Illegible SD card
If the data on an SD card cannot be read, a
warning will be displayed on the infotainment
system.
The infotainment system switches to the last
source selected.
Note
The navigation SD card may not be used as
memory storage for other files. The Inf
o-
tainment system will not recognise the files
saved on it.
1)
The number of slots for SD cards depends on
the country and device in question.
208
Operating modes
External data storage device con-
nect
ed t
o the USB por
t
Depending on the features and the country,
the vehicle may have one or two USB con-
nections
›
››
page 237.
The location of the USB ports depends on
the vehicle in question.
Where this manual refers to external data
storage devices, this means USB mass stor-
age devices containing supported audio files,
such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.
Only supported audio files are displayed and
played. Other files are ignored.
Playback does not start automatically if
there are audio files stored and readable in
the SD card.
Further operation of the external data medi-
um (changing track, selecting tracks and
playback modes) is described in the appro-
priate chapters of this manual
›››
page 201.
Instructions and restrictions
Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other
media players depends on the unit.
The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-
age of 5 volts for a USB connection.
Due to the large number of different data
storage devices and various iPod™, iPad™
and iPhone™ generations available, it is not
possible to guarantee fault-free operation of
all functions described here.
Take int
o account all other instructions and
limitations regarding requirements for media
sources.
iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™
Depending on the country and equipment,
iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec-
ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-
hicle’s USB port and used as audio sour-
ces.
After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™,
the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-
played at the top selection level ( Play-
lists, Artists, Albums, Tracks,
Podcasts, etc.).
Disconnecting
Data media be prepared for disconnection.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the
Settings
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu.
●
OR: Pr
ess the infotainment
butt
on and
then press Settings
to open the System set-
tings menu.
●
Press the R
emo
v
e saf
ely
function button. A
dr
opdo
wn menu appears with the f
oll
o
wing
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and
USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function
button disables it.
●
Now the data storage device can be dis-
connected.
Unreadable data storage device
If a data storage device with unreadable data
is connected, the infotainment system display
will show a warning.
Note
●
Do not connect an external media player
at the same time to pl
ay music via Blue-
tooth
®
and via the USB port with the In-
fotainment system, as this could cause
playback limitations.
●
If the external player is an Apple™ device,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth
®
.
●
If a connected source is not recognized,
disconnect and reconnect it. If the data
cannot be played, the corresponding indi-
cation will be displayed.
209
Infotainment System
External audio source connected to
the AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
Fig. 209
MEDIA main menu.
Fig. 210
Media Mode: external audio source
connect
ed t
o the AUX-IN sock
et.
Depending on the equipment and country
ther
e may be an AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
›
›
›
page 237.
In order to connect the external audio source
to the AUX-IN socket, a suitable cable is re-
quired with a 3.5 mm jack that is inserted into
the AUX-IN socket of the vehicle.
The connected external audio source cannot
be operated with the infotainment system's
controls.
Connecting an external audio source to
the AUX-IN multimedia socket
●
Connect the external audio source to the
AUX-IN multimedia socket.
●
Start playback on the external audio
source.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the
›››
Fig. 209
1
function button and select
AUX .
The pl
ayback v
olume
of the connect
ed e
x-
ternal audio source should be adjusted to the
volume of the other audio sources
›››
page 179.
Information on operating an external au-
dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-
media socket
Operation Effect
Selection of another au-
dio source from the Info-
tainment syst
em.
The external audio
source continues to run in
the background.
Operation Effect
Stopping playback on
the external audio
source.
The inf
otainment system
remains in the AUX menu.
Remove the connector
from the AUX-IN multi-
media jack.
The infotainment syst
em
remains in the AUX menu.
Note
●
Please read and observe the manufac-
t
urer's instruction manual for the external
audio source.
●
Interference noise may be heard if the ex-
ternal audio source is powered from the 12-
volt power socket of the vehicle.
Connect an external audio source
via Bluet
ooth
®
Fig. 211 MEDIA main menu.
210
Operating modes
In the Bluetooth
®
Audio mode
, audio fil
es that
ar
e pl
aying on a de
vice connected by Blue-
tooth can be listened to on the infotainment
system.
Conditions
●
The Bluetooth
®
audio source must support
the A2DP Bluetooth
®
profile.
●
In the Bluetooth® Settings menu the
Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
function must be
on. Sel
ect
Telephone > Settings >
Bluetooth
St
ar
ting Bluet
ooth
®
audio transfer
●
Activate Bluetooth
®
visibility on the external
Bluetooth
®
audio source.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press function but-
ton
›››
Fig. 211
1
and select B
T audio
.
●
Press Sear
ch f
or ne
w de
vice in order to con-
nect an e
xt
ernal Bluet
ooth
®
audio sour
ce f
or
the first time
›››
page 225.
●
OR: Select a Bluetooth
®
external audio
source from the list.
●
Please refer to the instructions on the
screen of the Infotainment system and on the
Bluetooth
®
audio source regarding the rest of
the procedure.
You may need to manually start playback on
the Bluetooth
®
source.
When the Bluetooth
®
device is disconnected,
the infotainment system remains in Blue-
tooth
®
audio mode.
Controlling playback
The extent to which the Bluetooth
®
audio sys-
tem can be operated through the infotain-
ment system depends on the connected
Bluetooth
®
device.
Note
●
Due to the large number of possible Blue-
t
ooth
®
audio sources, it is not possible to
guarantee fault-free operation of all de-
scribed functions.
●
Always switch off the warning and serv-
ice tones on a connected Bluetooth
®
audio
source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-
phone, to prevent possible interference
noise and malfunctions.
●
The system response time may vary, de-
pending on the connected external play-
back device.
●
If the external player is an Apple™ device,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth
®
.
Images
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
Fig. 212
Images main menu.
Using the Images menu, image fil
es can be
vie
w
ed (e
.g. phot
os) individually or as a slide-
show.
The image files must be stored on a compati-
ble data storage device.
Image files linked to complete address data
can be used for image-based navigation
›››
page 222
1)
.
●
Press the Infotainment button and then
select the Images context.
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 212
1
function button to
sel
ect the sour
ce wher
e the pict
ur
e files in
question are located.
»
1)
Valid for: Navi System
211
Infotainment System
Function button: function
1
Display and selection of the source.
Only sources with compatible image
formats can be selected
›››
page 212.
/
To rotate the view of the image 90 de-
grees to the left or the right.
Reset the vie
w of the image.
Sel
ec-
tion
Opens a list of image fil
es.
/
T
o change t
o the pr
evious or next im-
age.
To stop the playback of a slidesho
w.
The
function button changes to .
To continue the playback of a slide-
show. The function button changes
to .
Setup
Image settings
›››
page 212
.
Enlarging or reducing the view
●
Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving
them further apart or cl
oser t
ogether
.
●
OR:
t
urn the settings button.
Requirements for viewing images
Image files Maximum resolu-
tion
BMP 4MP
JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)
JPG 64MP
GIF 4MP
PNG 4MP
Image settings
Open the Image settings menu
●
Press the SETTINGS function button in the
main Images menu.
Function button: function
Image view : To adjust the image view format.
Automatic: Images scale to the size of the
screen (the image may not be displayed com-
pletely).
Complete: The images are displayed fully on
the screen.
Display time : To adjust the display time of images
during a slideshow.
Function button: function
Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated
infinitely.
Media settings
●
Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing
the infotainment key
.
●
Press the SETTINGS
function button to open
the Media settings menu.
Function button: function
Sound : Sound settings
›››
page 17
9.
Mix/repeat including subfolders
: Subfolders are inclu-
ded in the selected playback mode
›››
page 201.
Bluetooth® : Bluetooth
®
settings
›››
page 236
Remo
ve safely
: To prepare external data media for ex-
traction or disconnection. See also
›››
page 208, In-
sert or eject an SD card and
›››
page 209, Exter-
nal data storage device connected to the USB
port .
Traffic programme (TP)
: The TP function (tracking of
traffic information stations) is active
›
››
page 198.
212
Operating modes
Navigation
1)
Intr
oduction
General information
A GPS (Global Positioning System) satellit
e
system locates the current position of the ve-
hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the dis-
tance travelled. The measurements are com-
pared with the stored detailed map resour-
ces, according to road indications stored in
them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be taken
into account in the route calculation (dynam-
ic route guidance
›››
page 220). Using all the
data available, the Infotainment system cal-
culates the optimum route to the destination.
The destination is defined by entering an ad-
dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-
tion or hotel.
Navigation announcements and graphic rep-
resentations will guide you to your destina-
tion.
Depending on the country, some functions of
the infotainment system will not be available
on the screen when travelling higher than a
certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is
due to compliance with legislation.
CAUTION
The navigation announcements may be in-
accurate (e.g. due to out
-of-date data).
Instructions for navigation
When the Infotainment system is unable to re-
ceive any data from GPS satellit
es (tunnels,
garages), navigation can still continue using
the vehicle sensors.
Possible limitations in navigation
In areas that are not or are only partially digi-
tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way
streets and road categories), the Infotain-
ment system will still attempt to provide route
guidance.
In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-
tion data, it may not be possible to determine
the exact position of the vehicle. This may
mean that navigation is not as precise as usu-
al.
Navigation area and update of navigation
data
Road layouts change continuously. There-
fore, if the navigation data are not updated,
then errors or inaccuracies may occur.
SEAT recommends updating navigation data
on a regular basis.
Updating and using navigation da-
ta from an SD car
d
The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD
cards.
Navigation data that is currently valid f
or this
unit in order to allow all functions to be used
in full.
Updating navigation data
The current navigation data can be downloa-
ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-
ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.
Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT
dealerships.
The procedure is described on the internet at
www.seat.com.
Using navigation data
●
Insert the memory card
›››
page 208.
●
W
ait for the testing icon to disappear.
If the inserted memory card contains valid
navigation data, the following message ap-
pears: “The source contains the
»
1)
Only available for the model: Navi System
213
Infotainment System
navigation database”. Navigation can be
st
art
ed.
Note
●
The inserted memory card must be pre-
par
ed before it is ejected
›››
page 208.
●
Navigation is not possible without the SD
card.
●
Do not remove the memory card while
the navigation data is in use. This could
damage the memory card!
●
The navigation memory card cannot be
used as a memory for other files.
●
SEAT recommends using only the original
SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards
could limit its operation.
Navigation main menu
Fig. 213 Navigation main menu
Navigation functions can only be used if the
navigation dat
a f
or the ar
ea wher
e the v
ehi-
cle is driving is available in the infotainment
system.
The Navigation main menu allows you to se-
lect a new destination, call up a previously
used or stored destination and search for
points of interest.
Opening the main Navigation menu
●
Press the Infotainment button to open
the last menu that was open in navigation.
●
If the Navigation main menu is not dis-
played, press the infotainment button
again until the main navigation menu is dis-
played.
●
OR: Press the function button to return
menu by menu to the Navigation menu.
Navigation main menu function buttons
and indicators
Function button: function
A
The split screen is displayed
›››
page 219
.
B
Messages and function buttons on
the map display
›››
page 220.
Function button: function
1
New destination : To enter a new des-
tination
›››
page 214
.
Route
: During route guidance
›››
page 216
.
2
View the audio source selected (radio
or Media).
My
destina-
tions
To activate or manage stored destina-
tions
›››
page 216
.
My
route
To creat
e or manage a route
›››
page 21
7.
POI
Search for points of interest (e.g. ho-
tels, fuel stations, etc.) within a partic-
ular search area
›››
page 218.
View
To modify or activate or deactiv
ate
the split screen
›››
Fig. 2
13
A
›››
page 219.
Setup
Open the
Navigation Settings
›››
page 222 menu.
New destination (entering the des-
tination)
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
Ne
w destination
function button.
214
Operating modes
●
Pr
ess the Options
function button and se-
l
ect the r
equir
ed t
ype of destination (
Ad-
dress, Address, POI or On map).
Steering
When narrowing down the destination ad-
dress, please note that every entry restricts
the available range of subsequent selections.
To enter an address press the function but-
tons in the following order:
●
Country, City (or postcode), Centre
(starts the route to the centre of the indicated
city), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-
TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance to
the selected destination).
Point of interest
Start the route towards a point of interest.
Function button: function
Search area : To select the area in which special des-
tinations must be searched.
Surroundings of the location : Points of interest will
be searched around the location.
Surroundings of the destination
a)
: Points of interest
will be searched ar
ound the destination.
On the route
a)
: Points of interest will be searched
al
ong the route.
Surroundings of the address
: Points of interest will
be searched around the address enter
ed.
Function button: function
Select on the map : Points of interest will be
searched around the destination selected on
the map
. To select a destination on the map,
press the Edit
button.
Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-
hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air-
ports) and then the desired entry on the list.
Save : To save the selected point of interest in
the destination memory
›››
page 216
.
Dial number
: Establishes a telephone connec-
tion with the number stored for the point of inter
-
est.
Start
: Starts guided navigation to the selected
point of interest.
Search name : To search a point of interest entering
the name or using synonyms of the categories
(e.g. “Sleep” for hot
els and hostels).
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
at
ed.
On the map
●
Sel
ect the destination on the map or ent
er
it using GPS coor
dinates and confirm with
OK
.
●
OR: Ent
er the coordinates and confirm with
OK
.
Function button: function
Store : Store the point of interest in the destination
memory
›››
page 216
.
Function button: function
Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.
Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-
tion Settings > Route options.
Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point
of interest.
After starting route guidance
Fig. 214
Route calculation.
When starting route guidance, the route is
cal
cul
at
ed based on the dat
a that hav
e been
selected in the Route options menu.
Three alternative routes are proposed
›››
Fig. 214. These 3 routes correspond to the
selectable route options: Economical, Fast
and Short.
Blue route: Economic route.
»
–
215
Infotainment System
Red route: F
ast
est r
out
e
.
Orange route: Shortest route to the
destination, even if it results in longer
travelling time.
●
Select the desired route by pressing it.
The route criteria settings in the Route op-
tions menu are modified accordingly.
If a route is not selected, the route guidance
starts automatically after approx. one minute
according to the setting selected in Route
options.
Once the route has been calculated, the sys-
tem gives the first navigation announcement.
Up to 3 navigation announcements are given
before a turn.
●
Press the adjustment knob to listen to the
last audible navigation instruction.
The indicated distances depend to a great
extent on the type of road and the traffic
speed. On motorways, for example, naviga-
tion announcements are received much earli-
er than in urban traffic.
The corresponding navigation announce-
ments are also given on roads with several
lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex-
ample: “Leave the roundabout at the second
exit.”
A navigation announcement informs you
when you have reached your “destination”.
–
–
A navigation announcement informing you
that you have reached the “destination area”
is given if the exact destination cannot be
reached.
During dynamic route guidance, you re-
ceive information about reported traffic con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is given if the route is recalcu-
lated.
During a navigation announcement, you can
change its volume using the button .
For other announcement settings, select
Navigation > Settings > Navigation
announcements.
Note
●
If you miss a turning during route guid-
ance and are curr
ently unable to turn back,
keep on driving until the navigation system
offers a new route.
●
The quality of the announcements and
recommendations depends on the naviga-
tion data available and any reported traffic
problems.
Route
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
R
out
e
function button.
The R
out
e
function button is only displayed
with r
out
e guidance activ
at
ed.
Function button: function
Stopping route guidance : Aborts current route guid-
ance.
New destination/leg : To enter a new destination or a
new stopover
›››
page 214.
Route information : View route information for current
route.
Save destination : To save the selected destina-
tion in the destination memory .
Route : Press to open the route mode
›››
page 21
7.
Congestion ahead
: To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10
km in length) from the current rout
e, e.g. to avoid
congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the
Route
function button and then
Cancel congestion ahead .
My destinations (destination mem-
ory)
The stored destinations can be selected from
the My destinations menu.
●
Press the My destinations function button
in the main Navigation menu.
●
Select the desired function: St
or
e position ,
Destinations or Home .
216
Operating modes
Store position
●
By pressing the St
or
e position function but-
t
on, the ent
er
ed position is st
or
ed as a Flag-
ged destination in the Destination mem-
ory.
To save the stored position permanently as a
flagged destination, change the name of
the position in the destination memory.
Otherwise, the saved position is overwritten
when another flagged destination is saved.
●
Mark the Flagged destination in the
Destination memory.
●
Press the Store
function button.
The name can be changed in the f
oll
o
wing
input windo
w
. Press the
function button to
st
or
e the destination.
Destinations and cont
acts
●
Sel
ect the desir
ed function button.
Function button: function
Latest destinations : View of destinations for which a
route has already been start
ed.
Destination memory
: View of destinations stored
manually and from imported vCards
›››
page 221,
Importing vCards (electronic business cards).
Favourites : View of destinations stored as favour-
ites.
Function button: function
Contacts : View contacts that have a stored ad-
dress (postal address).
Home address
Only one address or position can be stored
as the home address at any one time
. The
stored home address can be edited or over-
written.
If a home address has already been stored,
route guidance will be started to the stored
home address.
If a home address has not yet been stored, an
address can be assigned as the home ad-
dress.
Assigning the home address for the first time:
Current position : Press to store the vehicle's current
position as the home address.
Address : Press to enter the home address manually.
Editing the home address:
The home address can be edited in the Naviga-
tion settings
›››
page 222 menu.
My route (route mode)
Fig. 215 Details of the route during route guid-
ance
.
Several destinations can be defined in the
r
out
e mode
. A trip with se
v
eral destinations is
known as a “route”.
The “starting point” of a route is always the
current vehicle position determined by the In-
fotainment system. The “destination” is the
end point of a route. “Stopover destinations”
are driven to before the destination.
●
Press the My destinations
function button
in the main Navigation menu.
●
Select the desired function button (Edit
route, New route or Route mem.).
»
217
Infotainment System
Pop-up window function buttons My route
Function button: function
Edit route
a)
: To edit and store the active r
oute.
New route
: To create a new route.
Route mem. : To Delete, Edit or Start the routes
stored.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated in the route mode
.
Function buttons and indications in the New
route and Edit route
Function button: function
A
: Stopover.
: Destination.
...: Estimat
ed time of arrival at destination.
...: Calcul
ated distance to destination.
B
Press on the destination to display the function
buttons.
: Delete destination.
: To st
art guidance dir
ect t
o the selected
destination. Destinations that come before the
select
ed destination are ignored.
: To open the detailed view of the destination
in question.
Function button: function
C
Available function buttons.
New dest.: To add a new destination to the tour.
Destinations: To add a new destination from
My destinations to the t
our.
Save: To store the created tour in the tour mem-
ory.
Start: T
o start route guidance.
Calculate
a)
: T
o update calculat
ed distance
and estimated arrival time.
Stop
b)
: To stop route guidance to the active
destination.
1
To move a stopover or a destination to another
position on the list. Press and hold to mov
e the
destination.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
at
ed and when a destination has been
added t
o the t
our
.
b)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated.
Special destinations (POI)
Fig. 216 Points of interest on the map.
The points of interest saved in the memory
ar
e divided int
o diff
er
ent cat
egories. Each
category of special destinations has a sym-
bol assigned to it.
In the Map settings menu, you can indicate
the special destinations that you want to dis-
play on the map. Up to 10 categories can be
selected.
Display of points of interest on the map can
be enabled or disabled with the View
›››
page 2
19
butt
on.
Sel
ecting a point of int
erest on the map
Function button: function
1
There are several points of interest in the area.
Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-
terest.
218
Operating modes
Function button: function
2
The only point of interest in this zone. Press the
symbol to open the detailed view of the point of
int
erest.
Search for a point of interest
In the Navigation main menu, press the
Points of interest function button .
Press the More points of interest button.
Function button: function
Search area : To select the area in which special des-
tinations must be searched.
Surroundings of the location : Points of interest will
be searched around the location.
Surroundings of the destination
a)
: P
oints of int
er
est
will be sear
ched ar
ound the destination.
On the route
a)
: Points of interest will be searched
al
ong the route.
Surroundings of the address
: Points of interest will
be searched around the address enter
ed.
Select on the map
: Points of interest will be
searched around the destination selected on
the map
. To select a destination on the map,
press the Edit
button.
Search category : Select the main category (e.g. Ve-
hicle and travel), the category (e.g. Air-
ports) and then the desired entry on the list.
Sav
e
: To save the selected point of interest in
the destination memory
›››
page 216
.
Function button: function
Dial number : Establishes a telephone connec-
tion with the number stored for the point of inter
-
est.
Start
: Starts guided navigation to the selected
point of interest.
Search name : To search a point of interest entering
the name or using synonyms of the categories
(e.g. “Sleep” for hot
els and hostels).
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated.
View
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
Vie
w
function button.
Function button: function
Map display in two dimensions (con-
ventional).
Map display in three dimensions (bird's
eye vie
w).
a)
To display the destination on the map.
a)
T
o display the route on the map.
Auto /
Day / Night
To switch between day and night for-
mat.
Function button: function
SPLIT
SCREEN
Show the split screen
›››
page 219
.
POI
Press to display the categories of the
points of interest selected on the map
.
Also see
›››
page 218, Special desti-
nations (POI).
In the Navigation settings
menu, under Map settings you can
configure the categories of points of
interest t
o display on the map
›››
page 222.
a)
Only displayed with route guidance activated.
Split screen
Fig. 217 Split screen displayed.
The split screen
›
›
›
Fig. 2
1
7
A
shows the in-
f
ormation det
ail
ed bel
o
w:
»
219
Infotainment System
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
Vie
w
function button.
●
Enable the Split scr
een
button by pressing
.
●
Press the ... function button. the split
scr
een t
o sel
ect a displ
ay option.
Function button: function
Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.
Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-
elling direction and indicates the current position of
the vehicle (street name).
Manoeuvre
a)
: The list of manoeuvres is displayed.
Road signs : Based on the features of the vehicle, the
road signs stored in the navigation data
›
››
page 222
or the road signs recognised by the road sign detec-
tor are displayed
›››
page 222.
Sat. data
: current vehicle position in coordinates and
GPS status (satellite r
eception).
a)
This is only active when route guidance is active.
Pr
ess the function button to close the split
scr
een.
Map displ
ay
Fig. 218 Messages and function buttons on
the map displ
ay.
Function buttons and messages on the
map displ
ay.
T
o activ
at
e function butt
ons
1
and , pr
ess
function butt
on
3
.
Function button: function
1
To select automatic scaling. If the function is
active, the symbol is displayed in blue (
).
2
Current altitude indicator.
3
View map scale ( or ). Rotate the set-
tings butt
on to modify the scale of the map.
To change the orientation of the map (north-
facing or direction of travel). This function is on-
ly av
ailable in 2D mode.
To centre the exact vehicle position on the map.
Function button: function
To centre the exact destination on the map. This
function button is only displayed if either Dis-
play destination on map
is selected
›››
page 219.
Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few sec-
onds, it automatically returns to the l
ast selec-
ted scale.
Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-
nation guidance (TRAFFIC)
The Infotainment system constantly receives
tr
affic r
eports (T
MC/T
MCpr
o) in the back-
ground, if a traffic information station is
tuned.
Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map
with symbols
›››
page 221, Traffic reports
on map (selection) and they are required
dynamic destination guidance
›››
page 221,
Dynamic route guidance.
List of available traffic reports
●
Press the infotainment button to dis-
play the list of current traffic bulletins.
●
Press the
function button and select All
or Route.
Function button: function
All : All traffic bulletins received will be displayed.
220
Operating modes
Function button: function
Route : The traffic bulletins received that affect the
calculated rout
e will be displayed.
Dynamic route guidance
In order for dynamic route guidance t
o func-
tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the
route options.
If a traffic report is received that affects the
route being travelled, an alternative route will
be searched for if the system calculates that
time can be saved.
If, on the other hand, the alternative route
does not save time, the route will continue
with the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-
nouncement will be made.
Shortly before reaching the announced traf-
fic jam, it is indicated again.
Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc-
tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save
time, for example, if alternative routes are
congested. The effectiveness of dynamic
navigation depends on the traffic bulletins
that are received.
The rest of the route that has to be travelled
can be manually excluded to force its recal-
culation
›››
page 216.
Traffic reports on map (selection)
Symbol: Meaning
: Slow traffic
: Tr
affic jam
: Accident
: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)
: Slippery road surf
ace
: Danger
: R
oad works
: Strong wind
: Road closed to traffic
During route guidance, traffic incidents that
do not aff
ect the cal
cul
at
ed r
oute calculated
are displayed in grey.
The length of a traffic jam on the calculated
route is shown by a red line.
Incidents that affect the calculated route and
that have led to the recalculation of the route
are shown in orange.
The position of a symbol indicates the start of
the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the
traffic bulletin.
Importing vCards (electronic busi-
ness cards)
Importing vCards to the destination mem-
ory
●
Insert the data storage device with the stor-
ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment
syst
em
›››
page 201.
●
In the Navigation main menu, press the
SETTINGS
function button.
●
In the Navigation settings menu, press
the Import destinations
function button.
●
Select the data carrier with the vCards
sav
ed in the list.
●
Pr
ess Import all vCar
ds fr
om this f
older
.
●
Confirm the import notice with the OK
function button.
Sav
ed vCar
ds will no
w be in the destinations
memory
›
›
›
page 216.
Note
Only one address per vCard can be impor-
ted. In the event any vCards hav
e multiple
addresses, only the main address will be
imported.
221
Infotainment System
Navigation with images
Fig. 219 Images main menu.
Selecting an image and starting route
guidance
●
Press the Infotainment
butt
on and then
sel
ect the Images context.
●
Press the
›››
Fig. 219
1
function button and
sel
ect the dat
a st
or
age de
vice where the im-
ages are stored.
●
If the image displayed was taken using GPS
localisation, the function button will appear.
Press to start guidance to a destination.
Road signs indication
The road sign indication must be active in the
Navigation settings menu
›
›
›
page 222
.
If ther
e are road signs stored in the navigation
data for the route you are driving on, the sys-
tem can display them on the map (e.g. a
speed limit).
Take into account the age of the navigation
data and the limitations of the navigation sys-
tem
›››
page 213!
Recognition of road signs
Some vehicles have a road sign recognition
camera. If the vehicle has road sign r
ecogni-
tion and it is active, road signs detected by
the system will be displayed on the map,
along with additional information.
Read and take into account the information
and indications of the road signs recognition
system
›››
page 76.
Route guidance in Demo mode
If demo mode is activated in the Navigation
settings menu, an additional pop-up win-
do
w opens when you st
art r
out
e guidance
.
●
Pressing the Demo mode
function button
st
arts a “virt
ual r
out
e guidance” t
o the desti-
nation you have entered.
●
If you press the Normal
function button, a
“r
eal r
out
e guidance” st
arts.
The de
velopment and operation of virtual
route guidance is compatible with the devel-
opment and operation of real route guidance.
Virtual route guidance is repeated after
reaching the fictitious destination and re-
starts from the starting point, if it is not inter-
rupted beforehand.
When the starting point of the Demo mode is
manually set Navigation settings menu,
the virtual route guidance starts from that po-
sition.
A manually entered starting point is overwrit-
ten with the current location of the vehicle, if
the vehicle starts moving.
Note
Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth-
erwise you will always have to sel
ect
whether to start a virtual route or normal
route before starting route guidance.
Navigation settings
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
SETTINGS
function button.
Function button: function
Route options : To make the route calculation adjust-
ments.
222
Operating modes
Function button: function
Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route
guidance, 3 alternative rout
es are proposed
›››
page 215.
Route
: Route type selection.
Economical : Route calculation, taking econom-
ic aspects into account.
Fast : The fastest route to the destination.
Short : The shortest route to the destination,
even if it results in longer tr
avelling time.
Dynamic route
: Dynamic route guidance activates
when a TMC is received
››
›
page 220.
Avoid motorways and highways
: Motorways will be
excluded from the rout
e calculation wherever
possible.
Avoid ferries and motorail trains
: Ferries and motorail
trains will not be taken into account f
or the route
calculation, wherever possible.
Avoid toll roads
: Toll roads will be excluded from
the route calculation, whene
ver possible.
Avoid tunnels
: Tunnels will be excluded from the
route calculation, whene
ver possible.
Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
: Mandatory toll
stickers (stickers certifying that the toll has been
paid) will be ex
cluded from the route calculation
whenever possible.
Function button: function
Show available toll stickers
a)
: To mark the available
t
oll stickers on the list
( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
must be active).
Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-
count in the route calculation if it is marked that
the toll sticker is available.
Map : To adjust the map display settings.
Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-
gation data for the road you are driving on ar
e dis-
played during route guidance
›››
page 222.
Lane guidance
: During route guidance, an addi-
tional indication is displayed to recommend a
lane when driving, and when t
urning on roads with
several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-
mation about the area that is being driven
through.
Show favourites
: The destinations saved as favour-
ites on the map are displayed ().
Sho
w POIs
Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-
gories shown on the map
›››
page 2
18.
Show brand logos for POIs
: Displays logos of the
selected special destinations categories (e.g.
displ
ays logos of service stations).
Manage memory
: To make adjustments to the stored
destinations.
Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of
agenda entries recorded with postal addresses,
see al
so
›››
page 216.
Define home address
: To assign or edit a home ad-
dress, see also
›››
page 217.
Function button: function
Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g.
Last destinations or the Destination
memory).
Navigation announcements : To change the navigation
announcements settings.
Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving
recommendations.
No navigation announcements during calls : During a
telephone conversation, audio driving recommen-
dations will not be giv
en.
Speed limits
: Shows the speed limits, depending on
the road, of the country that is being driven through.
Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.
Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se-
lected service station is given priorit
y in special
destination search results.
Fuel warning
: The fuel warning is active.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri-
ate warning is generated that enabl
es the service
station search.
Import destinations
: To import digital business cards
(vCards) into the destination memory
›››
page 221.
Version information
: Information about stored naviga-
tion data.
Advanced settings : For making advanced changes to
the navigation settings.
Time display : Indication during route guidance.
»
223
Infotainment System
Function button: function
Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival at
the destination is displayed.
Running time : The envisaged travelling time to
the destination is displayed.
Status line : View during route guidance.
Destination : The calculated distance to the
destination is shown.
Next stopo
ver
: The calculated distance to the
next stopover is sho
wn.
Note: National border crossed
: Indication of the
speed limits of the country in question when
crossing a border.
Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active and
route guidance is started, a virt
ual guide to the en-
tered destination may be started
›››
page 222.
Define demo mode starting point
: If the Demo
mode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-
titious st
arting point can be set for the virtual
route guidance.
a)
This functionality will depend on the country.
Telephone
Gener
al inf
ormation
Telephone functions can only be used if there
is a mobil
e phone connect
ed by Bluet
ooth t
o
the inf
otainment system
›››
page 226.
To do this, the phone must have the Blue-
tooth
®
function activated.
The instructions shown on the screen for the
telephone menus will depend on the mobile
telephone used.
Only use compatible Bluetooth
®
devices. For
further information on compatible Bluetooth
®
products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or
check on the internet.
Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-
phone and of any accessories.
If you detect any operating issues between
your mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system, restart your mobile by switching it off
and on again.
Some functions and setup can only be per-
formed when the vehicle is stopped and are
not available on all mobile telephones.
You may experience poor reception or may
be cut off in areas where the signal is weak.
Most electronic devices are shielded against
HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the
electronic equipment may not be protected
from the HF signals of the telephone man-
agement system. This may cause interfer-
ence.
Priority mobile phone
A priority-connected mobile phone has full
access to the user profile.
It offers all the telephone management sys-
tem functions.
Associated mobile phone
A mobile phone connected as an associate
does not have access to the user profile.
Incoming calls can be received and main-
tained through the phone's management sys-
tem.
Outgoing calls can only be maintained
through the phone's management system, if
they have been started with the mobile
phone.
During a telephone call the functions
›››
page 229, During a phone call are avail-
able.
WARNING
General, mandatory, legal and country-
specific instructions and laws for the use of
mobile phones inside the vehicl
e must al-
ways be considered.
WARNING
Speaking by telephone and using the mo-
bile telephone management system whil
st
driving can distract you from the road and
cause an accident.
●
In areas of little coverage your call may
be cut off and you may not be able to make
even emergency calls.
224
Operating modes
WARNING
Mobile telephones may interfere with and
alter the correct operation of pacemakers
if they ar
e carried directly over them.
●
Maintain a minimum distance of at least
20 centimetres between the aerials of the
mobile telephone and the pacemaker.
●
Do not carry your switched-on mobile
telephone in your breast pocket directly
over the pacemaker.
●
If you suspect interference, switch off the
mobile telephone immediately.
CAUTION
High speeds, poor weather or road condi-
tions and the quality of reception can all
affect the audio quality of a t
elephone con-
versation in the vehicle.
Note
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluetooth
®
technol
ogy may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
If you wish to connect a device via Blue-
tooth
®
, consult the safety warnings in its in-
struction manual. Only use compatible
Bluetooth
®
devices.
●
Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-
cle may provoke noise in the speakers.
●
Some networks may not recognise all of
the language charact
ers or offer all of the
services.
Places with special regulations
In the majority of cases, these places are
signposted, but not always clearly. They in-
clude
, for example:
●
the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid
gas (such as propane or butane).
●
places where the air is l
aden with chemi-
cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal
powder.
●
all other places where the vehicle engine
must be switched off.
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of explosion! The mobile tel
ephone can
automatically connect to the mobile tele-
phone network again if it loses the Blue-
tooth
®
connection to the telephone man-
agement system.
CAUTION
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile telephones is prohibit
ed,
both the telephone and the telephone
management system must always be
swit
ched off. Interference may be caused
with sensitive technical and medical equip-
ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or
damage to the equipment.
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
technology allows a mobil
e tele-
phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-
phone management system. Prior pairing be-
tween the two is required for this purpose.
Some Bluetooth
®
mobile telephones connect
automatically when turning on the ignition if a
connection has been previously established.
Its Bluetooth
®
function must be activated for
this purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth
®
connection with other devices.
Bluetooth
®
connections are free.
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth
®
SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth profiles
®
When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
ephone management system, a data ex-
change takes place via one of the Bluetooth
®
profiles.
»
225
Infotainment System
●
Hands-fr
ee t
el
ephone pr
ofil
e (HFP): the
HFP can be used to manage calls through the
infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows
audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It
may require connecting other profiles for
managing and controlling playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows
phone book contents to be downloaded from
the mobile telephone.
●
Message profile (MAP):
1)
It allows short
messages (SMS) to be downloaded and
synchronised.
●
Audio and video remote control profile
(AVRCP): To view information of tracks and
control playback on the mobile device.
Note
The mobile telephone's button and warning
tones should be off. Where necessary, dis-
connect the headset fr
om the mobile tele-
phone you wish to connect to the system.
Pre-installation for mobile phone
Basic
If there is a mobile phone connected to the
Hands-Fr
ee-Pr
ofil
e (
HFP
) Bluetooth
®
to the
phone management system, you can make
phone calls with the hands-free system.
The aerial of the vehicle cannot be used.
Take into account the instructions to use a
mobile telephone in the vehicle without con-
nection to the external antenna
›››
page 345.
Possible types of connection Basic
The types of connection depend on the
country and device in question.
To see the meaning of the acronyms and
terms of the table, see
›››
page 225.
Device 1 Device 2
HFP (with priority) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (associated)
HFP (with priority)
HFP (associated) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (with priority) HFP (associated)
HFP A2DP/AVRCP
HFP (with priority) +
A2DP/AVRCP
HFP
Pairing and connecting a mobile
t
el
ephone t
o the Inf
ot
ainment sys-
tem
In order to manage a mobile telephone via
the Infotainment system, it is necessary to
pair both de
vices once.
For your safety, pairing should be done when
the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is
not possible to perform the pairing with the
vehicle running.
Conditions
●
The ignition must be switched on.
●
The Bluetooth
®
function of the mobile
phone and the Infot
ainment system must be
active and visible.
●
The keypad lock on the mobile telephone
must be deactivated.
Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-
bile telephone.
During the pairing process, it is necessary to
enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.
Pairing a mobile telephone
●
Press the infotainment button.
●
Press the Find telephone
function button.
1)
Not available for the Media System Colour
model.
226
Operating modes
As soon as the search is completed, the
names of the Bluet
ooth
®
de
vices f
ound ar
e
displ
ayed on-screen.
●
Turn on the mobile phone you want to pair
on the list of Bluetooth
®
devices found.
The infotainment system and the mobile
phone can be connected to each other. To
terminate the connection of both devices,
you might have to enter more data on the
mobile phone and the Infotainment system.
●
If necessary, confirm the pairing on the mo-
bile phone.
Depending on the mobile phone:
●
Use your mobile telephone to enter and
confirm your PIN code, as instructed in the
display of the infotainment system.
OR:
●
Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-
play of the Infotainment system with that
shown on the mobile telephone. If they
match, confirm on both devices.
Once the pairing has completed successful-
ly, the Telephone main menu is displayed
along with the phonebook, call list and SMS
stored on the mobile phone, which are auto-
matically loaded. Confirmation on the mobile
phone may be necessary.
The duration of the loading process depends
on the amount of data stored on the mobile
telephone. After loading, the data will be
available on the Infotainment system.
Pairing and connection of mobile tele-
phones
You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to
the Infotainment system, but the number of si-
multaneous connections varies:
●
Media System Colour: a phone connected
to the hands-free profile and the same or a
different one as Bluetooth
®
audio.
●
Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-
bile phones simultaneously connected to the
hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue-
tooth
®
audio.
When the Infotainment system is switched on,
it connects to the last connected mobile tele-
phone. If it is not possible to connect to this
mobile telephone, the system will try to con-
nect to the next mobile telephone on the list
of paired devices.
The maximum range of the connection is ap-
prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter-
rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con-
nection is automatically re-established as
soon as the device is once again within Blue-
tooth
®
range.
WARNING
Do not perform the pairing and connection
process while driving. This may cause an
accident!
Note
Check that there are no requests pending
acceptance in your mobile phone. If there
ar
e, this could block some of the functions
in the Telephone menu.
Switching the telephone manage-
ment syst
em off
●
End the current call.
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
●
Turn the mobile phone off.
If the k
ey is still in the ignition s
wit
ch aft
er
t
urning off the ignition, it will not turn off. After
around 15 minutes of delayed disconnection
(default value) the telephone management
system will switch off.
Note
If there was a mobile phone connected to
the telephone management system, the
emitting unit of the mobile phone will still
be on aft
er turning the phone management
»
227
Infotainment System
system off. You might have to turn off the
mobile phone.
Telephone main menu
Fig. 220
PHONE main menu.
Fig. 221 Incoming call.
User profile
A connect
ed mobil
e phone is st
or
ed in the t
el-
ephone's management system as a user pro-
file.
The telephone management system can
store up to a maximum of 4 user profiles for
mobile telephones. If another mobile phone is
paired, the user profile that has not been
used for the longest time is automatically de-
leted.
The user profile stores the phone’s contact
data, the stored favourites (speed-dial but-
tons) and the settings in the User profile
settings menu.
When the mobile phone connects to the tele-
phone management system again, the data
and settings become available again.
If any entries in the mobile phone book are
modified while connected, a manual update
of the phone book data can be initiated from
the User profile settings
›››
page 236
menu. The next time that the mobile tele-
phone is connected (e.g. on the next journey)
the phonebook is updated automatically.
Opening the PHONE main menu
Press the button on the Infotainment
system to open the Telephone
›››
Fig. 220
main menu.
Function button: function
1
Mobile phone with priority
a)
and con-
nected.
Press to connect or pair a differ
ent
mobile phone.
2
b)
Associated mobile phone
a)
and con-
nected.
Press to change its priority. The asso-
ciat
ed mobile phone becomes the
priority mobile phone and vice-v
ersa.
3
Favourites (speed dial buttons), to
which a contact can be assigned
›››
page 235
.
Dial
number
To open the number pad and enter a
telephone number
›››
page 230.
Con-
tacts
To open the contacts of the paired
mobil
e phone
›››
page 231
.
SMS
c)
To open the SMS menu
›››
page 233.
Calls
To open call lists of the paired mobile
t
elephone
›››
page 234.
Setup
To open the Telephone settings
››
›
page 235. menu.
Pr
ess to accept a call.
Press to end
a call.
OR: Press to
reject an incoming call.
228
Operating modes
Function button: function
Press to mute the call signal during a
call and to reactivate it.
a)
See more information about priority or associated
mobile phones and about user profiles
››
›
page 228.
b)
Only displayed if the associated mobile telephone
is connected. Not available for the Media System Col-
our model.
c)
Depending on the mobile phone connected. Not
available for the Media System Colour model.
Instructions and symbols of the phone
management system
Display: Meaning
A
Name of the mobile network operator
(provider) of the SIM of the paired phone.
B
View of stored telephone number or name.
If the stored contact has an assigned im-
age, it can be displayed
›››
page 235
a)
.
When receiving a call, the name of the
mobile phone receiving the call is dis-
played (priority or associat
ed mobile
phone).
Paired mobile telephone battery charge
status.
Strength of cov
erage signal received by
the mobile telephone.
a)
Depending on the mobile phone connected. Not
av
ail
abl
e f
or the Media Syst
em Colour model.
During a phone call
Fig. 222 During a phone call.
After starting a call with a phone number, the
PHONE main menu s
wit
ches t
o the
Phone call
scr
een
›››
Fig. 222.
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
A
Press to disconnect the microphone of
the pre-installation for mobil
e phone dur-
ing a phone call (button
switches to
).
Press to connect the microphone of the
pre-installation for mobile phone during a
phone call (button switches to ).
a)
Press to keep the phone call through the
pre-installation for mobil
e phone.
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
B
View of stored telephone number or
name. If the stored contact has an as-
signed image
, it can be displayed
›››
page 235
b)
.
When receiving a call, the name of the
mobile phone receiving the call is dis-
played (priority or associat
ed mobile
phone).
Press to open the detailed view of the
contact.
c)
Press to hold a call
.
When there is a call on hold, audio trans-
mission is off
. Phone calls held in the vehi-
cl
e are not transmitted.
Press to end a call.
a)
This button is only displayed when the phone call is
on the mobil
e phone
.
b)
Depending on the mobil
e phone connect
ed. Not
av
ailable for the Media System Colour model.
c)
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
Functions during a phone call
Functions available
Mute the micro-
phone of the pr
e-
inst
all
ation f
or
mobil
e phone
Press the
function button.
The microphone of the pre-in-
stallation for mobile phone is
muted (button switches to
).
»
229
Infotainment System
Functions available
Turn on the mi-
crophone of the
pre-installation
f
or mobile phone
Press the
function button.
The microphone is enabled (but-
t
on switches to ).
Have a phone
call via the mo-
bil
e phone
Press the function button
Settings and then
Hands-free .
The hands-free system is disa-
bled and the phone call contin-
ues on the mobile phone (button
switches to ).
Return to the
phone call
through the pre-
installation for
mobile phone.
Press the function button.
OR: Press the Settings func-
tion button and them press
Hands free .
The hands-free system is ena-
bled and the phone call contin-
ues on the pre-installation f
or
mobile phone (button
switches to ).
Enter telephone number menu
Fig. 223 Enter telephone number menu.
Fig. 224
Enter telephone number menu (select
a cont
act fr
om the list).
Open the Enter telephone number menu
●
Press the Sel
ect number
function button
t
o open the
Enter phone number menu.
SOS
Emer
gency call
1)
●
Pr
ess the function button to make an emer-
gency call.
Breakdown call
1)
●
Press the function button to obtain help in
the event of breakdown.
SEAT, S.A. Authorised Services are also at
your disposal with their mobile units.
Information call
1)
●
Press the function button to obtain informa-
tion about the SEAT, S.A. brand and selected
additional services related to traffic and trav-
el.
Call mailbox
●
Press the Voice mail
function button to
st
art the connection.
●
OR:
Pr
ess the function button for about 2
seconds t
o st
art the connection.
1)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion. Not available for the Media Syst
em Colour
model.
230
Operating modes
If the number for the mailbox has not yet
been st
or
ed, ent
er it and confirm with OK
.
St
or
ed numbers can be modified in the
User
profile settings
›
›
›
page 236 menu.
1)
Prefix function
The prefix function serves to add a prefix to
the phone number entered or stored when di-
alling, e.g. to make a phone call from a differ-
ent profile of the SIM (Dual/TwinBill) or to
cancel service or control orders on the phone
network (e.g. hide phone number).
●
Enter the phone number without the prefix
and press /
.
The pr
efix st
or
ed in the
Use profile set-
tings
›
››
page 236 menu is automatically
placed before the phone number and the call
starts.
2)
Voice input
●
Press the function button to start a connec-
tion through voice control through a phone
number.
Enter telephone number
●
Entering a phone number with the keypad.
Press the
function button to make a call.
Sel
ect a cont
act fr
om the list
●
Ent
er the first l
etters of the contact to find
using the keypad. The available entries ap-
pear on the list of contacts
›››
Fig. 224.
●
Search in the phonebook and press the de-
sired contact to establish the connection.
Enter the country code
To enter a country code, instead of the first
two digits (international access code e.g.
“00”) you can enter the character “+”.
●
Press the function button 0
for approx. 2
seconds t
o add the
+
.
Phonebook Menu (cont
acts)
Fig. 225 Contacts Menu (phonebook).
Fig. 226
Search window.
»
1)
The function button is only displayed when the
prefix button is enabled in the User profile
settings
››
›
page 236 menu.
2)
This depends on the country and unit in ques-
tion. Not available for the Media System Colour
model.
231
Infotainment System
Once the first pairing is made, it may take
some time until the phonebook dat
a
1)
of the
pair
ed mobil
e ar
e av
ailable in the infotain-
ment system. Depending on the volume of
data that has to be transferred, the process
may take several minutes. It may be necessa-
ry to confirm the data transmission on the
mobile phone.
The phonebook can also be viewed during a
telephone conversation.
If the name saved in the phonebook has an
assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list
next to the name. To do this, the option
Show pictures for contacts
in the Phone set
-
tings
cont
e
xt must be enabl
ed and your mo-
bile phone must support this functionality
(check the compatibility list)
›››
page 235,
Phone settings.
In the Telephone main menu, press the
Contacts
function button to access the
cont
acts list.
Sel
ect a cont
act fr
om the list
●
Sear
ch the list and press on the desired
contact to make the call.
●
OR: If the contact has several numbers, first
press on the contact and then press on the
desired number for making the call.
Search for a contact in the search window
●
Press the Search
function button
›
›
›
Fig. 225
t
o open the search window.
●
Enter the name of the contact you are look-
ing for in the window
›››
Fig. 226. While the
characters are being entered, a contact is
displayed in the input field.
●
The number of matching results is dis-
played to the right of the input field. Press the
function button to go to the list.
●
Search the list and press on the desired
contact to make the call.
Opening the detailed view of a contact
●
Press the function button
›››
Fig. 225 lo-
cated next to the entry in the contact list
2)
.
All the telephone numbers are displayed in
the detailed view, and where applicable, the
address recorded for the contact in question.
Read contact name
●
Press the function button on the detailed
list if you want the voice control system to
read the name of the contact
2)
.
Call a contact
●
Press the desired telephone number on the
detailed list to make the call.
Send SMS to a contact
●
Press the function button on the detailed
list
2)
.
Start route guidance to a contact's ad-
dress
3)
If the contact’s address data has been saved,
route guidance can be started to the con-
tact's address.
●
Press address data in the detailed view to
start route guidance.
1)
Depending on the device, only contacts in the
phone's memory are loaded.
2)
Not availabl
e for the Media System Colour
model.
3)
Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.
232
Operating modes
Note
If you edit a number before calling, it will
not be saved in the phonebook but only
used for the call.
Short messages (SMS) menu
3 Not available for model: Media System Colour
Fig. 227
Short messages (SMS) menu.
Fig. 228 Overview of possible function buttons
in submenus.
Requirements
T
o r
eceiv
e
, vie
w and send short messages
(SMS) via the infotainment system, the mobile
phone connected to the infotainment system
must be compatible with the Bluetooth
®
MAP
›››
page 225 profile.
Due to the large number of different Blue-
tooth devices on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that all of the functions will be
executed.
Opening the short messages (SMS) menu
●
Press the SMS
function button from the
TELEPHONE main menu.
Function button: function
A
Indicates the selected menu.
: To return to the short message (SMS) menu
›››
Fig. 227
.
1
New SMS: To write and send an SMS.
2
Inbox: To open the received SMS folder.
3
Sent: To open the sent SMS folder.
4
Outbox: To open the outbox folder. SMS mes-
sages that have not been sent are stor
ed here.
5
Drafts: To open the Drafts folder. SMSs stored
as drafts are saved her
e.
6
Open the Templates menu: To select a text
t
emplate from the list.
During route guidance, a template is prepared
with the current destination (I am on my
way to <...> <...>).
To return to the main PHONE menu.
Possible submenu function buttons
The number of functions available depends on the
mobile phone that is connected.
Function button: function
7
For the voice control system to read the text of
the SMS.
»
233
Infotainment System
Function button: function
8
Open the Options menu.
Reply with template: To select a text template
from a list.
Show numbers: The telephone numbers that
are included in the message are displ
ayed.
9
To forward an SMS.
10
To reply to an incoming SMS.
11
The text is saved as a draft and can be sent lat-
er.
12
Open the Templates menu: To select a text
t
emplate from the list, see also
6
.
13
To open the number pad and enter a tele-
phone number.
OR: To select a r
ecipient from the contacts list.
14
To add more recipients by entering a telephone
number or contacts list.
15
To send an SMS.
16
To delete an SMS.
17
To open the number pad and enter a tele-
phone number.
Calls Menu (call lists)
Fig. 229 Calls Menu (list of calls).
If a telephone number is stored as a contact,
the st
or
ed name is displ
ayed on the call list
inst
ead of the number
.
If an image is assigned to the contact, it can
be displayed on the call list next to the name
›››
page 235.
Open the Calls menu
●
Press the Calls
function button to open
the Calls menu.
●
Press function button
›
›
›
Fig. 229
1
.
●
Select the desired call list: All , Missed call
s
,
Diall
ed numbers or R
eceived calls
.
Possible displays in the Calls menu
Display: Meaning
Missed calls : Displays the numbers of
missed and unanswered calls.
Diall
ed numbers
: Indicates the numbers di-
alled on the mobile telephone and on the
Infotainment system telephone manage-
ment system.
Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the
calls received on the mobile t
elephone and
on the Infotainment system telephone
management system.
The stored prefix is placed before the
phone number automatically and the con-
nection is started. Also see
›
››
page 230,
Enter telephone number menu.
a)
Opening the detailed view of a contact. All
the telephone numbers are displayed in the
detailed view, and where applicable, the
address recorded for the contact in ques-
tion.
The phone number is copied to the Enter
phone number menu
›››
page 230.
a)
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
Note
The availability of the call lists will depend
on the mobile phone used.
234
Operating modes
Quick dial keys
Fig. 230 PHONE main menu.
The speed dial keys
›
›
›
Fig. 230
1
can be
assigned a t
el
ephone number fr
om the
phone book
.
If a phot
o is assigned to the name stored in
the phone book, it can be displayed on the
speed dial key
›››
page 235
1)
.
All speed dial keys have to be manually edi-
ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up
to 12 contacts can be added to the speed di-
al keys.
Assign the speed dial keys
●
In the main Telephone menu, press a free
speed dial key.
●
Select the desired contact from the list. If
the selected contact has several phone num-
bers, select the number you want.
Edit assigned speed dial keys
●
Press and hold an occupied speed dial key
in the Telephone main menu until the Con-
tacts menu opens.
●
Select the desired contact from the list. If
the selected contact has several phone num-
bers, select the number you want.
Delete assigned speed dial keys
●
The phone numbers stored in the speed di-
al buttons can be deleted in the menu User
profile settings > Manage favourites
›››
page 236.
Make a call with a speed dial button
●
Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in
the Telephone main menu to call the tele-
phone number stored in it.
Note
The contacts stored in the speed dial keys
are NOT updated automatically. If a con-
t
act stored on a speed dial key is modified
on the mobile phone, the speed dial key
must be assigned again.
Phone settings
In the Telephone main menu, press the
SETTINGS function button.
Function button: function
Private mode : Private mode can only be activated
during an active call. When private mode is disabled
(by default), the call’s audio is managed through the
vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is
managed through the mobile phone.
Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobile
phone to be connected to the hands-free pr
ofile with
the infotainment system.
OR: Press Find telephone
to connect a new mobile
phone.
Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-
tings
›››
page 236.
User pr
ofile
: Open the User profile settings
menu
›››
page 236.
Note
Some telephones require a restart to down-
load the last added contacts again.
1)
Not available for the Media System Colour
model.
235
Infotainment System
Bluetooth
®
settings
●
In the Telephone main menu, press the
Settings function button.
●
OR: Press the infotainment button.
●
Next, press the Bluetooth function button.
Function button: function
Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth
®
. All active
connections are disconnected.
Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth
®
visi-
bility.
Visible : Bluetooth
®
visibility is active.
Hidden : Bluetooth
®
visibility is deactivated.
Bluetooth
®
visibilit
y must be active for external
pairing of a Bluetooth
®
device with the infotain-
ment system. When a Bluetooth
®
audio device
is active and playing, visibility is automatically
set to Hidden.
Forename
: Display or change the Bluetooth
®
name of
the infotainment system. This will be the name shown
t
o other Bluetooth
®
devices.
Paired devices
: Viewing paired devices. To disconnect
and connect Bluetooth
®
devices and Bluetooth
®
pro-
fil
es.
Find devices
: Search for visible Bluetooth
®
devices
that are within range of the infot
ainment system. The
maximum range is approx. 10 meters.
Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
: If an external audio
source is to be connected to the inf
otainment system
via Bluetooth
®
, this function must be active
›››
page 210.
User profile settings
In the main Telephone menu, press the
SETTINGS
function button and then press
the User profile function button.
Function button: function
Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.
Delete all : All favourites are deleted.
Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete the
st
ored number.
Free speed dial key: Press to save a phone
book number on the speed dial key.
Mailbo
x number
: To enter or change the voice mailbox
number.
Prefix
: To enter the prefix that must be prefixed to the
ent
er
ed number
›
›
›
page 230.
Sort by
: To set the order of appearance of the phone
book entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).
Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of the
connected telephone or to updat
e the imported
phone book.
Delete other user profiles
: To delete all non-active user
profiles or just one of them.
Select ring tone
a)
: To select a ring tone from a list of
pr
eset melodies (tones). The selected ring tone is
played and set when leaving the sub-menu.
Function button: function
Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth
®
connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes-
sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”
appears when the ignition is s
witched off.
Show pictures for contacts
a)
: If the contacts in the
phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be
displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and
phone book
b)
.
a)
Depending on the mobile phone.
b)
Not available for the Media System Colour model.
Note
Some telephones require a restart to down-
load the last added contacts again.
236
Operating modes
Multimedia
USB/AUX-IN input
Fig. 231 Centre front armrest: USB/AUX-IN in-
put.
Depending on the special characteristics and
the country, the v
ehicl
e may hav
e a
USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN port can be f
ound in the
st
orage compartment area of the centre
console
›››
Fig. 231.
Convenience phone system
Fig. 232
The phone holder used for connect-
ing the mobil
e phone t
o the car aerial is l
oca-
t
ed in the fr
ont centre armrest.
Comfort phone service with connection to
the aerial of the v
ehicl
e is av
ail
abl
e for mobile
phone standards GSM 900, GSM 1800 and
UMTS 2100.
If there is a mobile phone connected to the
Hands-Free-Profile (HFP) Bluetooth
®
›››
page 225 to the phone management sys-
tem, you can make phone calls with the
hands-free system.
For the connection to the aerial of the vehicle,
the mobile phone must be on the lodging sur-
face
›››
Fig. 232
1
.
If the mobil
e phone does
not
connect, t
ak
e
into account the instructions to use a mobile
telephone in the vehicle without connection
to the external antenna
›››
page 345.
The location of the mobile phone lodging sur-
face to use the comfort phone service de-
pends on the vehicle in question.
Special characteristics
Take into consideration the following aspects
in order not to hinder the connection of the
phone to the aerial of the vehicle.
●
The dimensions of the mobile phone must
not exceed 120 x 67 mm.
●
Only one mobile phone can be placed on
the lodging surface
1
.
●
Place the mobile phone without a protec-
tion co
v
er or case on the l
odging surf
ace
.
●
Do not place metallic objects (e.g. keys,
coins, etc.) on the lodging surface.
Connection to the external antenna of the
car
Take into account the particular characteris-
tics to connect to the external antenna of the
vehicle.
●
If necessary, open the armrest.
●
Place the mobile phone on the lodging sur-
face
1
(the rear part of the mobile phone
must r
est on the l
odging surf
ace).
If the mobil
e phone has been pl
aced correct-
ly, the antenna of the mobile phone will auto-
matically connect to the external antenna of
the vehicle.
»
237
Infotainment System
An additional antenna amplifier guarantees
the qualit
y of the connection.
USB P
or
t
Depending on the f
eatures, there may be a
USB port in the lodging surface area in
which USB devices can be charged (e.g. mo-
bile phones or Media players).
The maximum charging capacity is 1.6 A.
Depending on the features, the USB devices
connected can also be used as audio sour-
ces
›››
page 201.
●
Connect the desired USB device via a ca-
ble compatible with the USB port .
The charging process is automatically inter-
rupted when turning off the ignition or taking
the key off the ignition.
Compatible charging cables can be pur-
chased from SEAT dealers.
238
Start and driving
Driving
St
ar
t and driving
St
ar
ting and st
opping the
engine
Ignition lock
Fig. 233
Ignition key positions.
Key positions
›
›
›
Fig. 233
Ignition off
. K
ey can be removed from the
vehicle.
Ignition is switched on. Preheating occurs
in diesel vehicles .
Starting the engine.
1
2
3
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Lock the steering wheel: remove the key
fr
om the ignition and t
urn the wheel until it
l
ocks. Depending on the country, in v
ehicl
es
with automatic transmission, in order to re-
move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-
sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-
ing key and release it.
●
Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into
the ignition and turn it at the same time as the
steering wheel in the direction indicated by
the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-
ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.
Start-Stop system*
If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
system* switches off the engine, the ignition
remains switched on.
Automatic transmission: before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-
ed off and the selector lever is in position P.
WARNING
●
Always remov
e the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
short period. This is especially important if
children or disabled people are left alone
in the vehicle. They could accidentally
start the engine or operate electrical
equipment, resulting in an accident.
●
The ignition key must NOT be removed
from the lock until the vehicle comes to a
standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be
immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
Note
●
If it is difficult t
o turn the ignition key to
the position
2
, move the steering wheel to
both sides to release the steering l
ock.
●
If the vehicle battery is disconnected and
reconnected, the key must remain in the
position
2
for around 5 seconds before
starting up.
●
Vehicl
es with automatic transmission,de-
pending on the country, after switching off
the ignition, you can only remove the igni-
tion key if the selector lever is in position
“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector lever
is locked.
239
Driving
Ignition and start button*
Fig. 234
In the centre console: Start button of
the K
eyl
ess Access l
ocking and st
arting sys-
t
em. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is
symmetrical.
The engine can be started with a start button
(Pr
ess & Driv
e). T
o do so
, ther
e must be a valid
key inside the vehicle in the area of the front
or rear seats, or on the centre console.
In vehicles with the Keyless Access
›››
page 93 system, the engine can also be
started with the key in the luggage compart-
ment.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
If you only want to switch on the ignition
(without starting the engine), briefly press the
start button once without pressing the brake
pedal or the clutch pedal
›››
.
Aut
omatic ignition disconnection
If the driv
er l
eav
es the v
ehicle, taking the key
with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-
tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-
nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-
ton on the remote control or by pressing
the sensor surface on the door lever
›››
Fig. 92.
Automatic deactivation of the ignition on
vehicles with the Start-Stop system
The ignition is switched off automatically
when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
matic engine shutdown is active, if:
●
The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
●
the driver does not step on any pedal,
●
the driver door is opened.
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
the dipped beam is on, the side light re-
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is
enough charge in the battery). If the driver
locks the vehicle or manually turns off the
light, the side light goes out.
Engine restart feature
If no key is detected inside the vehicle after
the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-
onds to restart it. A warning will display on the
dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
When switching on the ignition, do not
press the brake or clut
ch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due care, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Never l
eave any key inside the vehicle
when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-
authorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition and
operate any of the electrical equipment.
Note
●
Before leaving the vehicl
e, always dis-
connect the ignition and, if appropriate,
take into account the instructions on the
screen of the dash panel.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the engine off and the ignition on, the
vehicle battery might be discharged and it
might not be possible to start the engine.
240
Start and driving
●
In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until
the warning light
›››
page 241 goes off
before starting the engine.
●
If during the STOP phase you press the
START ENGINE STOP
button, the ignition is
switched off and the button flashes.
●
If the indication is displ
ayed on the in-
strument panel display “Start-Stop system
deactivated: Start the engine manually”,
the START ENGINE STOP
button will blink.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine
●
Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the
gear l
e
v
er in neutr
al, pr
ess the clutch pedal
and keep it it in this position until the engine
starts.
●
Vehicles with automatic transmission: put
the lever in position P or N.
Vehicles with ignition locks
●
Turn the key to position
›››
Fig. 233
2
. Pre-
heating occurs in diesel v
ehicl
es
.
●
K
eep turning the key to position
›››
Fig. 233
3
without stepping on the accel-
er
at
or
.
●
Once the engine st
arts, r
elease the key.
When it is released, the key returns to position
2
.
●
If the engine does not st
art, st
op and w
ait
f
or ar
ound 1 minute to try again.
Vehicles with start buttons
●
Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-
gine starts.
●
Press the starter button
›››
Fig. 234; do not
press the accelerator. There needs to be a
valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to
start.
●
Once the engine starts, release the start-up
button.
●
If the engine does not start, stop and wait
for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,
perform an emergency start
›››
page 243.
Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer
than usual to start on cold days. During pre-
heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To
avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
tery, do not use any other major electrical
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-
heating.
The preheating time depends on the coolant
and exterior temperatures. With the engine at
operating temperature, or at outside temper-
atures above +8°C, the warning lamp will
light up for about one second. This means
that the engine starts immediately.
Starting a diesel engine after having run
out of fuel
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it
may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
This is because the fuel system must elimi-
nate air first.
WARNING
Do not keep the engine running in confined
spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.
●
The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide
, an odourless and colourless poison-
ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-
ness and death.
WARNING
Do not get out of the vehicle with the en-
gine running, especially if a gear is engag-
ed. The vehicle could then suddenly mov
e
or something strange could happen that
would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
WARNING
Never use cold start sprays, they could ex-
plode or cause the engine to run at high
revs. Doing this risks injury.
CAUTION
●
The starter motor or the engine may be
damaged if you try t
o start the engine while
»
241
Driving
driving or if you restart it immediately after
switching it off.
●
When the engine is cold, you shoul
d
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full
throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk
of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the v
ehicle stationary. Star
t off
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
engine reach operating temperature faster
and reduces emissions.
Note
●
Electrical components with a high power
consumption are s
witched off temporarily
when the engine starts.
●
When starting with a cold engine, noise
levels may briefly increase. This is quite
normal, and no cause for concern.
●
When the outside temperature is below
+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some
smoke may appear under the vehicle when
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
Turning off the engine
●
Bring the vehicle to a full stop
›
›
›
.
●
With manual tr
ansmission, pr
ess the clut
ch
all the w
ay do
wn. If the vehicle is automatic,
set the selector lever to the P position.
●
Apply the electronic parking brake.
●
Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key to
position
›››
Fig. 233
1
.
●
Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly pr
ess the
st
art
-up butt
on
›
››
Fig. 234.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not switch off after briefly
pressing the starter button, an emergency
disconnect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ond
›››
in Ignition and start button* on
page 2
40
.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-
tr
ol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
The airbags and belt tensioners do not
work when the ignition is switched off.
●
The brake servo does not work with the
engine off. Therefore, you need to press the
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.
●
Power steering does not work when the
engine is not running. You need more
strength to steer when the engine is switch-
ed off.
●
If the ignition is switched off, the st
eering
column could be locked, making it impossi-
ble to control the vehicle.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the
steering could suddenly lock, making it im-
possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-
dent!
WARNING
Always take the key with you when you
l
eave the vehicle
. This is particularly impor-
tant if there are children in the vehicle, as
they might otherwise be able to start the
engine or use power-operated equipment
(e.g. the electric windows), which could
cause injuries.
CAUTION
●
If the vehicle is stopped and the Star
t-
Stop system* switches off the engine, the
ignition remains switched on. Make sure
that the ignition is switched off before leav-
ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could
discharge.
●
If the engine has been driven at high
speed for a prolonged period of time, it
may overheat when turned off. To avoid en-
gine damage, allow the engine to run for
approximately two minutes in neutral be-
fore switching it off.
242
Start and driving
Note
After the engine is switched off the radiator
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, e
ven if
the ignition is switched off. It is also possi-
ble that the fan turns itself on once more if
the coolant temperature increases due to
the heat accumulated in the engine com-
partment or due to its prolonged exposure
to solar radiation.
Electronic immobilizer
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-
thorised persons fr
om driving the v
ehicl
e
.
Inside the k
ey there is a chip that deactivates
the electronic immobiliser automatically
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The electronic immobiliser will be activated
again automatically as soon as you pull the
key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with
the “Keyless Access” system, the key has to
be outside the vehicle.
If the following message is shown on the in-
strument panel display: SAFE or Immobilis-
er active, it is not possible to start the vehi-
cle.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
ine SEAT key with its correct code.
Note
A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-
ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.
Emergency starting function
Fig. 235 Emergency ignition in vehicles with
K
eyl
ess Access.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emer
gency st
art
-up will be r
equir
ed. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:
●
Immediately after pushing the starter but-
ton, keep the key next to the right trim of the
steering column
›››
Fig. 235, as close as pos-
sible to the Kessy logo.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Start-Stop system*
Control lamps
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active.
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available or has been
disconnected.
Description and operation
The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel
and r
educe CO
2
emissions.
In St
art
-St
op mode
, the engine will automati-
cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
stopping. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine automatically switches back on
when required.
When the ignition is switched on, the Start-
Stop function is automatically activated.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
●
When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it in
neutral and take your foot off the clutch. The
engine switches off.
»
243
Driving
●
Simply depr
ess the clut
ch pedal t
o mo
v
e
off again.
Vehicles with an automatic gearbox
●
Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot
on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold*
system so that the vehicle remains braked.
The engine will switch off. The warning lamp
will appear in the display. The engine can
be stopped before stopping completely (ap-
proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve-
hicle's gearbox).
●
When you take your foot off the brake ped-
al the engine will start up again. The warning
lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto
Hold* system, when the system is active, the
engine will not start if you remove your foot
from the brake pedal. The car starts when
you press the accelerator pedal.
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop
mode
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The bonnet must be closed.
●
The engine has reached operating temper-
ature.
●
The reverse gear must not be engaged.
●
The vehicle must not be on a very steep
slope.
The engine does not turn off for various
reasons
Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri-
fies whether certain conditions are met. The
engine does not switch off, in the following
situations for example:
●
The engine has not yet reached the re-
quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.
●
The temperature selected on the climate
control has not been reached.
●
The interior temperature is very high/low.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 159.
●
The parking aid* is switched on.
●
The battery is very low.
●
The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
ing turned.
●
If there is a danger of misting.
●
After engaging reverse gear.
●
In case of a very steep gradient.
is shown on the instrument panel display,
as well as on the driver information system*
.
The engine starts by itself
When stopped, the normal system mode may
be interrupted in the following situations. The
engine restarts by itself without involvement
from the driver.
●
The interior temperature differs from the
temperature selected on the climate control.
●
Defrost function button activated
›››
page 159.
●
The brake has been pressed several times
consecutively.
●
The battery is too low.
●
High power consumption.
Additional information related to the auto-
matic gearbox
The engine stops when the selector lever is in
the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when
in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P,
the engine will also remain switched off when
you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or-
der to start the engine up again the accelera-
tor must be pressed, or another gear engag-
ed or the brake released.
If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-
ped, the engine will start up again.
Change from D to P to prevent the engine
from accidentally starting when passing
through R.
Additional information about vehicles with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will
start up again in certain operating conditions
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle
ahead drives off again.
244
Start and driving
WARNING
●
Never switch the engine off until the v
ehi-
cle is stationary. The operation of the brake
and steering will not be fully guaranteed.
More force will be needed to turn the steer-
ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an
accident and even serious injuries.
●
To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-
Stop system is switched off when working
in the engine compartment
›››
page 245.
CAUTION
The Start-Stop system must always be
switched off when driving through flooded
ar
eas
›››
page 257.
Note
●
In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
you can contr
ol whether the engine should
switch off or not by reducing or increasing
the brake force applied. While the vehicle
remains stopped, the engine will not stop if
the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic
jams with frequent stopping and starting
for example. As soon as strong pressure is
applied to the brake pedal, the engine will
stop.
●
When stopped, the brake pedal must be
kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle
does not move.
●
If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-
box, it can be dir
ectly started up again by
immediately pressing the clutch pedal.
●
With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is
placed in position D, N or S after engaging
reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards
direction must be reached for the system to
be in a status to stop the engine.
Manually connecting and discon-
necting the Start-Stop syst
em
Fig. 236 Detailed view of the centre console:
St
art
-st
op oper
ation butt
on.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
s
wit
ch it off manually.
●
T
o manually s
wit
ch on/off the Start-Stop
system, press the
button
›››
Fig. 236.
The button will light up when the Start-Stop
function is switched off.
Note
The system switches on every time the en-
gine is turned off voluntarily.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 237 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man-
ual gearbo
x
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbo
x l
e
v
er
›
››
Fig. 237.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
»
245
Driving
Selecting reverse gear
Engage r
e
v
erse gear only when the v
ehicl
e is
stopped.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
›››
Fig. 237
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
Changing do
wn gears
Whil
e driving, changing do
wn a gear must al
-
w
ays be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-
rectly below and when the engine speed is
not too high
›››
. Changing down while by-
passing one or v
arious gears at high speeds
or at high engine speeds can damage the
clut
ch and the gearbo
x, e
v
en if the clutch
pedal remains depressed
›››
.
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
start to mov
e as soon as a gear is engaged
and the clutch released. This also happens
if the electronic parking brake is switched
on.
●
Never engage reverse gear when the ve-
hicle is moving.
WARNING
If the gear is changed down inappropriate-
ly by selecting a gear that is too low
, you
may lose control of the vehicle, causing an
accident and serious injuries.
CAUTION
When travelling at high speeds or at high
engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too
low can cause consider
able damage to the
clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-
cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held
and it does not engage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage and avoid premature
wear, please observe the f
ollowing:
●
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressure applied by your
hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector
forks.
●
Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-
al; although the pressure may seem insig-
nificant, it can cause the premature wear of
the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you
do not need to change gear.
●
Always ensure that the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped before engaging the re-
verse gear.
●
Always press the clutch to the floor when
changing gears.
●
Never hold the vehicl
e “on the clutch” on
hills with the engine on.
Automatic gearbox/DSG au-
tomatic gearbox*
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly controlled manual gearbox. Tor
que be-
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They
replace the torque converter found on con-
ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-
hicle.
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to
change gears manually
›››
page 248,
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.
Control lamps
It lights up green
The brake is not pressed.
To select a gear range, pr
ess the brake pedal.
246
Start and driving
Flashes green
The selector lever locking button is not engaged.
The vehicle is prev
ented from moving forwards. En-
gage the selector lever lock.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 238 Automatic gearbox selector lever with
l
ocking butt
on (arr
o
w)
When the ignition is on, the current position of
the sel
ect
or l
e
v
er is shown on the instrument
panel.
– Parking lock
When the lever is put in this position, the drive
wheels are locked. The lever must only be put
in P when the vehicle is stationary
›››
.
T
o put the l
e
v
er in
P or take it out of P , the
locking button must be pressed and held and
the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.
– Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling
›››
.
T
o mo
v
e the l
e
ver to position R, the lock but-
ton must be pressed and held while pressing
the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse
lights come on when the lever is in the R posi-
tion with the ignition on.
– Neutral
With the lever in this position, the gear is in
neutral.
Press the brake pedal to move the lever from
N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at
speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
.
- St
andar
d f
orw
ar
d driving position (nor-
mal programme)
The gears are changed (up and down) auto-
matically. The gear shifts are determined by
the engine load, your individual driving style
and the speed of the vehicle.
- Standard forward driving position
(sports programme)
The shift up to a higher gear is automatically
delayed and the shift down is faster with re-
spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad-
vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts
are determined by the engine load, your indi-
vidual driving style and the speed of the vehi-
cle.
Selector lever lock
In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range
from being engaged, and prevents the vehi-
cle from moving off accidentally.
To release the gear lever lock, press and hold
the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the
same time, press the lever lock in the direc-
tion of the arrow
›››
Fig. 238.
The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly
through position N (e.g. when shifting from R
to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to
“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if
it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-
gages automatically if the brake pedal is not
pressed and the lever is in position N for more
than about one second at a speed of less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
In vehicles with a DSG
®
automatic gearbox,
on rare occasions the lever lock may not en-
gage. In this case, the transmission is locked
to prevent the vehicle from moving acciden-
tally. The green control light flashes and
an information text is displayed. Proceed as
follows to engage the lever lock:
●
Press the brake pedal and then release.
»
247
Driving
Safety interlock for ignition key
Once the ignition has been t
urned off
, the k
ey
may be r
emo
ved only if the gear selector is in
position P. While the key is not in the ignition,
the selector lever is locked in position P.
WARNING
●
Take care not to pr
ess the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-
hicle could start moving immediately (in
some cases even if the parking brake is en-
gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.
●
Never move the lever to R or P when driv-
ing. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in an accident or failure.
●
With lever in any position (except P), the
foot brake must be pushed down whenever
the engine is running. This is because an
automatic gearbox still transmits power
even at idling speed.
●
While you are selecting a gear and the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running,
do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
As a driver you should never leave your
vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is
engaged. Switch on the electronic parking
brake and select the parking lock (P).
Note
●
If the lever is mov
ed accidentally to N
when driving, release the accelerator and
let the engine speed drop to idling before
selecting gear range D or S again.
●
Should the pow
er supply to the lever be
interrupted in position P, it will not be possi-
ble to move the lever. If this should happen
the manual release can be used
›››
page 251.
Note
●
Despit
e a gear being engaged, the vehi-
cle does not mov
e forwards or back. Pro-
ceed to the next mode:
–
When the vehicle does not move in the
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engag-
ed. Press the brake pedal and engage
the gear range again.
–
If the vehicle still does not move in the
required direction, there is a system
malfunction. Seek specialist assistance
and have the system checked.
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*
Fig. 239
Selector lever in Tiptronic position
(l
eft
-hand driv
e v
ehicl
es). The lay-out in right-
hand drive vehicles is symmetrically opposed.
Fig. 240 Steering wheel with two paddle shifts
f
or Tiptr
onic
Tiptronic gives the driver the option to
change gears manually.
When you change t
o the T
iptr
onic pr
o-
gr
amme, the vehicle remains in the currently
248
Start and driving
selected gear. This is possible as long as the
syst
em is not changing gear aut
omatically
due t
o a tr
affic sit
uation.
Using Tiptronic with the selector lever
It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,
both when the vehicle is stopped and while
driving.
●
Press the selector lever from position D to
the right into the Tiptronic selector gate.
●
Push the lever forwards
+
or backwards
–
to move up or down a gear
›
›
›
Fig. 239
.
●
T
o exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the
left.
Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel
paddles*
●
In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle
shifts
›››
Fig. 240.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
+
to select a
higher gear
›
›
›
Fig. 2
40
.
●
Press the gearshift paddle
–
to select a
l
o
w
er gear
.
●
T
o exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-
hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-
proximately 1 second or move the lever to the
left.
If the paddles are not operated for some time
and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection
position, it will automatically exit from Tip-
tronic mode.
CAUTION
●
When accelerating, if a higher gear is not
selected, it will aut
omatically change
shortly before reaching the maximum per-
mitted RPM.
●
Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-
tem will not change until it detects that the
engine will not reach its maximum RPM.
Driving with an automatic gearbox
The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-
cally as the v
ehicl
e mo
v
es.
The engine can only st
art with the selector
lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,
below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only
start with the selector lever in position P.
Driving down hills
Under certain circumstances it may be ad-
vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-
lect the gear manually according to driving
conditions
›››
.
St
op/P
ark
On l
e
v
el ground, just use the lever to engage
position P. On slopes you should first apply
the parking brake and then set the lever to P.
This makes it easier to remove the lever from
position P when starting.
Stopping on a downhill
Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,
apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
Do not accel
er
at
e whil
e a r
ange of gears is
engaged to prevent the car from rolling
downhill
›››
.
St
ar
ting off uphill with the Aut
o Hol
d func-
tion
●
Once you hav
e engaged a gear, take your
foot off the brake pedal and gently press the
accelerator.
Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold
function
●
Pull on the electronic parking brake button.
●
Once you have engaged a gear, gently
press the accelerator and pull on the elec-
tronic parking brake button.
Back-up programme
If all the positions of the lever are shown over
a light background on the instrument panel
display, there is a system fault and the auto-
matic gearbox will operate in with the backup
»
249
Driving
programme. It is still possible to drive the ve-
hicl
e
, ho
w
e
ver, at low speeds and within a se-
lected range of gears. Driving in reverse
gear may not be possible.
Overload protection of the 6-speed DSG
®
automatic transmission
When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle
begins to jerk and the selector lever position
indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage
to the clutch, this interrupts the power trans-
mission between the engine and the gearbox.
There is no more traction and it is not possible
to accelerate. If the clutch is opened auto-
matically due to overloading, press the brake
pedal. Wait a few seconds before starting to
move again.
Kick-down
The kick-down system provides maximum ac-
celeration when the gear selector lever is in
the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed right
down, the automatic gearbox will shift down
to a lower gear, depending on road speed
and engine speed. This takes advantage of
the maximum acceleration of the vehicle
›››
.
The upshift t
o the ne
xt higher gear is del
ayed
until the engine r
eaches maximum rpm.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Selec-
tor lever positions on page 2
48.
●
Never allow the brake to rub and do not
use the brake pedal too often or for long
periods, as the brakes can overheat. This
reduces the braking power, increases the
braking distance or even causes a brake
system fault.
●
If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-
cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or
parking brake.
WARNING
Please note that if the road surface is slip-
pery or wet, the kick-down feat
ure could
cause the driving wheels to spin, which
could result in skidding.
CAUTION
●
If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do
not att
empt to stop it from rolling by de-
pressing the accelerator when a gear has
been selected. This could cause overheat-
ing and damage the automatic gearbox.
●
If you allow the vehicle to roll with the
lever in position N and the engine off, the
automatic gearbox will be damaged by
lack of lubrication.
●
If the gearbox operates with the backup
programme, take the vehicle to a special-
ised workshop and have the fault repaired
without delay.
Launch-control program
3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more
than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW
.
The Launch-control programme enables
maximum acceleration from a standstill.
Condition: the engine must have reached op-
erating temperature and the steering wheel
must not be turned.
The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-
ent on petrol and diesel engines.
●
With the engine running, switch off traction
control (ASR)
›››
page 286
.
●
Press the brake pedal with your left foot
and hold it down for at least one second.
●
Place the selector lever in position S or Tip-
tronic.
●
Press the accelerator with the right foot un-
til reaching an approximate speed of 3,200
rpm.
●
Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The
vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.
●
Turn on the ASR after accelerating!
250
Start and driving
WARNING
●
Always adapt your driving style t
o the
traffic conditions.
●
Only use the Launch control programme
when road and traffic conditions permit,
and make sure your manner of driving and
accelerating the vehicle does not incon-
venience or endanger other road users.
●
Make sure that the ESC remains switched
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC
are deactivated, the wheels may start to
spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk
of accident!
Note
●
After using the Launch control pro-
gr
amme, the temperature in the gearbox
may have increased considerably. In this
case, the programme could be disabled for
several minutes. The programme can be
used again after the cooling phase.
●
Accelerating with the launch control pro-
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
the vehicle. This can result in increased
wear and tear.
Manual release of the selector lev-
er
Fig. 241
Remove the lining from the area of the
gear indication
Fig. 242
Manual release of gear selector lever
In the event of a power failure when starting
(e
.g. dischar
ged batt
ery), the l
e
ver will remain
locked in position P. To move it to position N to
move the vehicle, there is an emergency re-
lease device under the centre console, on the
right side. Releasing the selector lever re-
quires a certain degree of practical skill.
Removing the cover from the selector lev-
er
●
Apply the electronic parking brake
›››
.
●
Pull the cover up around the dust guard on
the gear l
e
v
er
›
›
›
Fig. 241.
Releasing the selector lever
●
Press the release lever
›››
Fig. 242 in the di-
rection of the arrow and hold it in this position.
●
Press the lock button
›››
Fig. 241
1
on the
gear l
e
v
er knob and pl
ace the gear sel
ector
lever in the N position.
WARNING
Do not move the lever from position P if the
parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you
still think the car could mov
e, press the
brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could
move in an unforeseen way and cause an
accident or serious injury.
251
Driving
Gear-change recommenda-
tion
Sel
ecting the optimal gear
Depending on the equipment on the instru-
ment panel screen, a recommendation is
shown with the gear that should be engaged
t
o optimise consumption.
Display Meaning
Optimum gear.
Recommendation to change up a
gear
.
R
ecommendation t
o change do
wn
a gear
.
Information regarding the “cleanliness” of
the par
ticul
at
e filt
er
When the e
xhaust system detects that the
particulate filter is close to saturation, this
system’s self-cleaning function recommends
the optimal gear for that function
›››
page 314.
WARNING
The gear change recommendation is an
auxiliary function and in no case should be
a substitute for car
eful driving.
●
Responsibility for selecting the corr
ect
gear, depending on the circumstances,
rests solely with the driver.
For the sake of the environment
Selecting the correct gear can help to save
fuel.
Note
The recommended gear indication turns off
when the clutch pedal is pressed or when
the lev
er is removed from the tiptronic posi-
tion.
Steering
Inf
ormation r
el
ating t
o diff
erent ve-
hicle processes.
Electro-mechanical power steering adapts
el
ectr
onically
t
o the speed of the car
, torque
and steering angle.
Even if the power steering fails or the engine
is stopped, it is possible to continue to rotate
the steering wheel as long as the key remains
in the ignition lock, but more force must be
applied.
Electronic steering column lock
Vehicles with Keyless Access: the steering
column locks when the driver's door is
opened and the ignition is switched off.
Therefore, the vehicle should be at a stand-
still and, where applicable, the selector lever
in position P.
If the driver door is opened before the ignition
is switched off, the steering column electronic
lock is activated via the ignition key or the
sensor built into the door handle.
Steering assist
This help assists the driver in critical situa-
tions. It recommends turning the steering
wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre
(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid
skidding
›››
.
WARNING
Steering assist helps the driver in critical
situations. The driver is the person who has
to control the v
ehicle's steering at all times.
252
Start and driving
Control lamp
It lights up red
Faulty steering.
Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible and in a safe manner.
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired as soon as possible.
It lights up yellow
Limited steering operation.
Drive carefully to a specialised workshop t
o have the
steering checked.
If the warning light does not come on again after re-
starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is
not necessary to check the steering.
OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and r
e-
connected.
Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).
Flashes red
Fault in the steering column electronic lock.
Do not continue driving! Seek specialist assis-
tance.
It flashes yellow
The steering column is jammed.
When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions.
OR:
The steering column does not unlock or lock.
Remove the k
ey from the ignition switch and recon-
nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru-
ment panel display.
Do not continue driving if the steering column re-
mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek
specialist assistance.
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ched on. It
shoul
d go out once the engine is st
art
ed.
WARNING
Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
●
If the warning lamps and the correspond-
ing messages are ignored, the vehicle may
st
all in traffic, causing serious damage or
accidents and injuries.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Dynamic chassis control
(DCC)*
Function and oper
ation
Fig. 243
In the centre console: button to adjust
the adaptiv
e suspension.
DCC continuously adapts the suspension to
the condition of the r
oad and curr
ent driving
conditions, accor
ding t
o the pr
e-set pro-
gramme.
Steering is also adapted in the “Sport” pro-
gramme.
Programme Driving recommendations
“COMFORT” C
Adjust it to the most comfortable
setting, for example
, driving on
surfaces in poor condition, or
making long trips.
“NORMAL”
Balanced setting, suitable, for
example, f
or day-to-day use.
»
253
Driving
Programme Driving recommendations
“SPORT” S
Sport setting for sporty style
driving
Select a program
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired pr
ogram is displayed
The “NORMAL” programme is active when
neither the C nor S buttons are lit up.
WARNING
Switching the dynamic chassis control sys-
tem on while the vehicle is in motion coul
d
divert your attention from the traffic and
cause accidents.
WARNING
Adjusting the suspension can change driv-
ing properties. Dynamic chassis control
must nev
er lead to any kinds of risk.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
Note
If the dynamic chassis control does not op-
erate as described in this chapter, go t
o an
authorised workshop and request it be
checked.
Note
In the case of an adaptive suspension fail-
ure, the indications C and
S light up on the
button. The vehicle’s comfort and driving
may be affected by the fault. Have the sys-
tem checked by a specialised workshop.
Driving tips
Running in
Please observe the instructions for running-in
ne
w components.
Running-in the engine
A ne
w engine must be driv
en thr
ough a run-in
period during its first 1500 kil
ometres (1000
miles). During its first few hours of running, the
internal friction in the engine is greater than
later on when all the moving parts have bed-
ded down.
How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km
(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-
formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it
should be driven at a moderate speed (espe-
cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce
engine wear and increase its useful life. Never
drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always
engage a lower gear when the engine works
“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or
600 miles, please note:
●
Do not use full throttle.
●
Do not force the engine above two thirds of
its maximum speed.
●
Do not tow a trailer.
Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600
to 1000 miles), gradually increase power
until reaching the maximum speed and high
engine speeds.
Running in new tyres and brake pads
●
Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres
›››
page 328.
●
Information about brakes
›››
page 280.
For the sake of the environment
If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and the engine oil
consumption reduced.
Four-wheel drive (4Drive)
3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive
On four-wheel driv
e models, the engine pow-
er is distributed to all four wheels
General notes
On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine
power is distributed to all four wheels. The
254
Start and driving
distribution of power is controlled automati-
cally accor
ding t
o your driving st
yl
e and the
r
oad conditions. Also see
›››
page 284.
The four-wheel drive is specially designed to
complement the superior engine power. This
combination gives the vehicle exceptional
handling and performance capabilities, both
on normal roads and in more difficult condi-
tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-
haps especially for this reason), it is important
to observe certain safety points
›››
.
Wint
er t
yr
es
Thanks t
o f
our-wheel drive, your vehicle will
have plenty of traction in winter conditions,
even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,
we still recommend that winter tyres or all-
season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to
give even better braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains are mandatory,
this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive
›››
page 333.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four
tyres must have the same rolling circumfer-
ence. Also avoid using tyres with varying
tread depths
›››
page 328.
Off-roader?
If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it
does not have enough ground clearance to
be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid
rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as
possible.
WARNING
●
Even with four-wheel drive
, you should al-
ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-
tions. Do not let the extra safety features
tempt you into taking any risks when driv-
ing. Risk of accident!
●
The braking capability of your vehicle is
limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no
different from a car without four-wheel
drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast
on firm or slippery roads just because the
vehicle still has good acceleration in these
conditions. Risk of accident!
●
On wet roads bear in mind that the front
wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose
contact with the road if the car is driven too
fast. If this should happen, there will be no
sudden increase in engine speed to warn
the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel
drive car. For this reason you should always
choose a driving speed suitable for the
road conditions. Risk of accident!
Economical and environmentally
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and wear to the engine, brak
es and tyres all
depend largely on driving style. Consumption
can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-
cient driving type. The following section gives
you some tips on lessening the impact on the
environment and reducing your operating
costs at the same time.
Active cylinder management (ACT
®
)*
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT
®
) may deacti-
vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-
ing situation does not require too much pow-
er. The number of active cylinders can be
seen on the instrument panel display.
›››
page 69.
Foresight when driving
If you think ahead when driving, you will need
to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take
advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-
ever possible, with a gear engaged. This
takes advantage of the engine braking effect,
reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-
sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.
»
255
Driving
Changing gear to save energy
An eff
ectiv
e w
ay of saving is t
o change
in ad-
vance to a higher gear.
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
second gear as soon as possible. Choosing
the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the
highest possible gear appropriate for the
driving situation (the engine should continue
functioning with cyclical regularity).
Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-
ally and without reaching the “kick-down”
position.
Avoid driving at high speed
Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,
whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-
sion of harmful gases and noise pollution
multiply as speed is increased. Driving at
moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Reduce idling time
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is
automatically reduced. In vehicles without
the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off
the engine, for example, at level crossings
and at traffic lights that remain red for long
periods of time. When an engine has reached
operating temperature, and depending on
the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off
for a minimum of about 5 seconds already
saves more than the amount of fuel necessa-
ry for restarting.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
tant emissions are also especially high during
this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best
to drive off immediately after starting the en-
gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Regular maintenance
Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even
before the engine is started. A well-serviced
engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel
efficiency as well as maximum reliability and
an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced
engine can consume up to 10% more fuel
than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
The engine and catalytic converter need to
reach their optimal operating temperature
in order to minimise fuel consumption and
emissions.
A cold engine consumes a disproportionate
amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-
ing temperature after about four kilometres
(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return
to a normal level.
Check tyre pressure
Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the
correct pressures
›››
page 330 to save fuel. If
the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-
tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater
rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-
ses tyre wear and impairs handling.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid carrying unnecessary loads
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
Since the luggage rack increases the aero-
dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-
move it when not needed. At speeds of
100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%
of fuel.
Save electrical energy
The engine drives the alternator, thereby
generating electricity. This implies that any
increase in power consumption also increa-
ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switch
off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices
that use a lot of electricity includes the blow-
er at a high setting, the rear window heating
or the seat heating*.
Note
●
If you have the Start-St
op system, it is
recommended that it should not be discon-
nected.
256
Start and driving
●
It is recommended that you close the
windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (37 mph).
●
Do not driv
e with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the
plate slip. This causes wear and can dam-
age the clutch plate.
●
Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the
brake. The fuel consumption will be lower
and you will prevent the clutch plate from
being damaged.
●
Use the engine brake on downhills by
changing to the gear that is best suited for
the gradient. Fuel consumption will be
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
Driving on flooded roads
To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on
fl
ooded r
oads, t
ak
e the f
ollowing into ac-
count:
●
The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork.
●
Drive at pedestrian speed.
WARNING
After driving through flooded zones, brak-
ing effectiveness can decrease if the brak
e
discs or pads are damp
›››
page 280.
CAUTION
●
Driving through flooded areas may dam-
age vehicl
e components such as the en-
gine, transmission or electrical system.
●
Whenever driving through water, the
Start-Stop system* must be switched off
›››
page 243.
Note
●
Check the depth of the water before en-
t
ering the flooded zone.
●
Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,
or stop the engine.
●
Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-
tion cause waves that could exceed your
vehicle's critical height.
●
Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion)
›››
page 339.
Trips abroad
●
With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured
that l
ead-fr
ee petr
ol is av
ail
able throughout
the journey
›››
page 309, Fuel types. Seek in-
formation about service station networks sell-
ing unleaded fuel.
●
In some countries, it is possible that your
vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may
not be available or the technical services
may only be able to make limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will provide
information about the technical preparation
that your vehicle requires and also about
necessary maintenance and repair possibili-
ties.
CAUTION
SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-
age to the vehicle due to the use of a l
ower
quality fuel, an inadequate service or the
non-availability of genuine spare parts.
257
Driving
Driver assistance systems
Cruise contr
ol syst
em
(CCS)*
Contr
ol l
amp
It lights up green
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and
active.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and shoul
d t
urn off aft
er approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Introduction
Fig. 244
Instrument panel display: GRA status
indications.
The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
maint
ain the set speed fr
om 20 km/h (
15
mph).
The CSS only r
educes v
ehicle speed by
ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking
the vehicle
›››
.
St
at
us displ
ay
Ther
e ar
e different versions of the cruise con-
trol system. In vehicles with the multifunction
display (MFD), the set speed is displayed on
the instrument panel screen.
GRA status
›››
Fig. 244
CCS temporarily switched off. The set
speed is displayed in small or darkened
figures.
System error. Contact a specialised
workshop.
CCS switched on. The speed memory is
empty.
The CCS is switched on. The set speed is
displayed in large figures.
Changing gear in CCS mode
The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
cally after a gear is engaged.
Travelling down hills with the CCS
If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed downhill, brake and change down
a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily
disabled by pressing the brake.
Automatic off
The GRA disconnects automatically or is
temporarily interrupted:
●
If the system detects a fault that could af-
fect the working order of the CCS.
●
If you press and maintain the accelerator
pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
●
If the dynamic driving control systems inter-
vene, ASR, ESC, etc.
A
B
C
D
258
Driver assistance systems
●
If the br
ak
e pedal is pr
essed.
●
If the airbag is trigger
ed.
●
If the l
ever is taken out of the D or S posi-
tion.
●
If, in the case of a manual gearbox, 1st gear
is engaged.
●
If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long
time.
WARNING
Use of GRA could cause accidents and se-
vere injuries if it is not possible to driv
e at a
constant speed maintaining the safety dis-
tance.
●
Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-
tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-
cient, on steep roads, with several bends or
in slippery circumstances or on flooded
roads.
●
Never use the CCS when driving off-road
or on unpaved roads.
●
Adapt your speed and the distance to the
vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-
er, the condition of the road and the traffic
situation.
●
To avoid unexpected operation of the
cruise control system, turn it off every time
you finish using it.
●
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
too high for other conditions.
●
If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA
cannot maintain a constant speed. The
speed can increase. In this case, brake and
change down a gear.
Operating the cruise control
Fig. 245
On the left of the steering column:
thir
d l
e
v
er f
or operating the GRA.
Connecting
●
Move the lever towards the steering wheel
t
o position .
If no speed has been pr
ogr
ammed, the sys-
t
em will not contr
ol it.
Activating the cruise control
●
Push button
›››
Fig. 245
1
.
The curr
ent speed is st
or
ed and the cruise
contr
ol is activ
ated.
Temporarily interrupting
●
Move the lever to and release it, or
step on the brake.
The cruise control system is switched off tem-
porarily. The speed is stored.
Reinstating the cruise control
●
Move the lever to and release it.
Cruise control is activated at the stored
speed.
Adjusting the speed
While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be
adjusted:
●
Move the lever to the pressure point
to increase speed in small increments of 1
km/h (1 mph).
●
Move the lever upwards
+
to in-
cr
ease in incr
ements of 10 km/h (5 mph).
●
Pr
ess the butt
on
›››
Fig. 245
1
to re-
duce speed in small incr
ements of 1 km/h (
1
mph).
●
Mo
v
e the l
ever downwards
–
to re-
duce in incr
ements of 10 km/h (5 mph).
T
o change the st
or
ed speed without int
errup-
tion, keep the lever pressed in the direction
+
or
–
. The vehicle adapts the
curr
ent speed by accel
er
ating or st
opping
»
259
Driving
accelerating. The vehicle does not brake ac-
tiv
ely.
S
wit
ching off
●
Mo
v
e the lever to position .
The system is disconnected and the memo-
rised speed is deleted.
Emergency brake assistance
system (Front Assist)*
Introduction
Fig. 246
On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
ance w
arning indications.
The objective of the system is to prevent
head-on collisions against ob
jects that may
be in the v
ehicl
e
’
s path or minimise the con-
sequences of such impacts.
Depending on several factors and how criti-
cal the situation is, the system operates in a
staggered manner. First it warns the driver,
and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or
is insufficient, it activates independent emer-
gency braking.
The function is intended to prevent collisions
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same
lane travelling in the same direction. It may
not activate in other hazard situations
›››
.
Fr
ont Assist is activ
e betw
een 4 km/h (2.5
mph) and 2
10 km/h (
130 mph). Depending on
a range of conditions, some of the functions
described below are omitted to optimize the
behaviour of the system.
Front Assist is a driving assistance function
that can never replace the driver’s atten-
tion.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects that you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the
driver with this indication on the instrument
panel display .
The timing of the warning varies depending
on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 246.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking
›››
.
Critical w
arning
If the driv
er f
ail
s t
o react to the advance
warning, the system may actively intervene
in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn
the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-
sion.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independ-
ent emergency braking by progressively in-
creasing the braking in accordance with how
critical the situation is.
Driver emergency brake assistance sys-
tem
The system may detect that the driver is not
braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In
this case, it will increase the braking intensity.
The system cannot prevent a collision, al-
though it can significantly minimise the con-
sequences by reducing the speed and the
force of the impact.
260
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
WARNING
Front Assist cannot change the laws of
physics or replace the driver in terms of
k
eeping control of the vehicle and reacting
to a possible emergency situation.
WARNING
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-
tion and try t
o avoid the collision as appli-
cable.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly
intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
●
Always adapt your speed and distance
away from the vehicle in front of you at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
In complex driving situations, Front Assist
may issue warnings and intervene in brak-
ing unnecessarily.
●
If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired by dirt or because the radar sensor
has lost its settings, the system may issue
unnecessary warnings and intervene inop-
port
unely in the braking.
●
The Front Assist does not react to animals
or vehicles crossing your path or ap-
proaching head-on down the same lane.
●
The Front Assist does not react to pedes-
trians walking head-on in the same lane.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
●
When Fr
ont Assist is connected, the indi-
cations of other functions on the screen
may be hidden.
●
When the Front Assist causes a br
aking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front As-
sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving
the wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
until it stops completely. However, the
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
manently. Use the foot brake!
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes
several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
Radar sensors
Fig. 247
On the front behind the SEAT badge:
r
adar sensors.
A radar sensor is fitted on the front, behind
the SEAT badge
›
›
›
Fig. 2
47
.
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, or by environmental influences such
as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist
does not work. The instrument panel displays
the following message: Front Assist: No
sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor
›››
.
When the r
adar sensor begins t
o oper
at
e
pr
operly again, the Front Assist will be availa-
ble again. The message will disappear from
the screen.
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
»
261
Driving
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g.
guar
d r
ail
s or sheets used in r
oad w
orks).
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
paired or structural modifications are made
to it, Front Assist operation may be affected.
SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this purpose.
CAUTION
If you have the feeling that the radar sensor
is damaged or has lost its settings, discon-
nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi-
ble danger
ous situations caused by the in-
adequate operation of the system. If this
occurs have it adjusted.
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
●
Clean away the snow with a brush and
the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-
icer spray.
Operation of the emergency brake
assist
ance syst
em (Fr
ont Assist)
Fig. 248
On the instrument panel display:
Fr
ont Assist deactiv
at
ed indication.
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is s
wit
ched on.
When the Fr
ont Assist is s
wit
ched off, so too
are the advance warning and the distance
warning functions.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist
activated. Exceptions
›››
page 263, Deacti-
vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-
lowing situations.
Switching the Front Assist on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist
can be deactivated or activated as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 84.
●
OR: using the instrument panel menu Set-
tings > Assistants > Front Assist. To
access the Settings menu, depending on
the features, use the arrow keys and the
wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or
the button on the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 83.
When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-
cation
›››
Fig. 248 will be shown on the in-
strument panel.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The advance warning can be activated or
deactivated in the instrument panel menu
Settings > Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 70.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping advance warning
active.
Switching distance warning on and off
The distance warning can be activated or
deactivated in the instrument panel menu
Settings > Assistants > Front Assist
›››
page 70.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning active.
262
Driver assistance systems
Deactivating Front Assist tempora-
rily in the f
oll
o
wing sit
uations
In the following situations the Front Assist
should be deactivated due to the syst
em's
limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor receives a violent im-
pact.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is temporarily covered
by an accessory.
●
When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto
transportation.
System limitations
Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Thus, in cert
ain cir
cumst
ances,
some of the r
eactions may be inappropriate
from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention
in order to intervene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after
switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
initial auto-calibration.
●
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
aged.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
●
If the ASR has been disconnected or the
ESC activated in Sport mode
›››
page 286.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or
sheets used in road works.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
●
Loads and accessories of other vehicles
that protrude over the sides, backwards or
over the top.
ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*
Introduction
Fig. 249
Detection area.
The ACC is an e
xt
ension of the v
ehicl
e
’s
cruise control function (GRA)
›››
.
It all
o
ws the driv
er t
o set a cruise speed be-
tw
een 30 km/h (20 mph) and 160 km/h (100
mph) or 210 km/h (130 mph), and select the
desired distance from the previous in front.
The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the
vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from
the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending
on speed.
When driving behind another vehicle, the
ACC reduces speed until it is the same as
that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the
set distance between the vehicles. If the
»
263
Driving
vehicle ahead accelerates, the ACC also ac-
cel
er
at
es the v
ehicl
e, going no higher than
the programmed target speed.
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic
gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it
stops.
The distance programmed should be in-
creased when the road surface is wet.
Driver intervention prompt
ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent
to the system. In other words, in certain cir-
cumstances the driver will have to adjust the
speed and the distance from other vehicles.
In this case, the instrument panel screen will
warn you to intervene by applying the brake
and a warning tone will be heard
›››
page 264.
WARNING
The ACC’s technology cannot overcome
the system's inherent limitations or change
the laws of physics. If used negligently or
inv
oluntarily, it may cause serious acci-
dents and injuries. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or on
roads that are steep
, with lots of curves or
slippery.
●
Never use ACC when driving off-road or
on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-
signed for use on paved roads only.
●
ACC does not react when approaching a
fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic
jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-
ped at the traffic lights.
●
The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-
destrian monitoring system is available.
The system does not react to animals or
vehicles crossing your path or approaching
head-on down the same lane.
●
If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-
ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.
●
If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-
ted, the ACC system could automatically
switch off. Switch off the system when
starting off.
●
If the vehicle continues to move involun-
tarily after a driver intervention prompt,
brake the vehicle.
●
If the instrument panel screen displays a
driver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-
tance.
●
The driver should be ready to accelerate
or brake at all times.
Note
●
If the ACC does not work as described in
this chapter, do not use it until it has been
checked by a specialised w
orkshop. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
●
Maximum speed with the ACC activated
is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).
●
When the ACC is switched on, strange
noises may be heard during braking,
caused by the braking system.
Symbols on the instrument panel
displ
ay and contr
ol l
amps
The speed reduction by the ACC
to maintain the distance from the
v
ehicle in front is not sufficient.
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver int
ervention
prompt.
ACC is not currently available
a)
.
While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine
and start it again. Check the area of the SEAT em-
blem on the front
›
››
Fig. 251. If it is still unavailable,
refer to a specialised workshop to have the system
inspected.
a)
The symbol on the instrument panels with colour
displ
ay is in col
our
.
264
Driver assistance systems
The ACC is active.
No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed
speed remains constant.
If the symbol is white: the ACC is
active.
A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-
justs speed and distance from the vehicle in fr
ont.
If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-
tive (Standby)
The system is swit
ched on, but is not adjusting.
The lamp lights up green
The ACC is active.
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
wit
ched on t
o
check cert
ain functions. They will s
witch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Status display
Fig. 250
On the instrument panel display:
ACC inactiv
e (St
andby).
ACC activ
e
.
Indications on the display
›
›
›
Fig. 250
:
V
ehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-
tive and is not regulating your speed.
Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is
not active and is not regulating your dis-
tance.
Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active
and is regulating your speed.
1
2
3
Distance level 2 set by the driver.
ACC is activ
e and is r
egul
ating your dis-
t
ance based on speed.
Speed pr
ogrammed with the ACC
Note
When the ACC is connected, the indica-
tions on the instrument panel screen may
be concealed by warnings from other func-
tions, such as an incoming call.
Radar sensors
Fig. 251
On the front behind the SEAT badge:
r
adar sensors.
A radar sensor is fitted on the front, behind
the SEAT badge
›
›
›
Fig. 251
.
The r
adar sensor's visibility may be impaired
by dirt, or by environmental influences such
as rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise
»
4
5
6
265
Driving
control (ACC) does not work. The instrument
panel displ
ays the f
oll
o
wing message:
ACC:
No sensor vision! Clean the SEAT badge
area
›››
.
When the r
adar sensor begins t
o oper
at
e
pr
operly, the ACC will become available. The
message on the screen will switch off and the
ACC may be reactivated.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong
radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for
example, in a closed car park or due to the
presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails
or sheets used in road works).
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect ACC operation.
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
paired or structural modifications are made
to it, ACC operation may be affected. In this
scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar
sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,
disconnect the ACC. This way you can
avoid possible damage
. If this occurs have
it adjusted.
●
The sensor may not be adjusted correct-
ly if it receives an impact. This may com-
promise the system's efficacy or discon-
nect it.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
r
ecommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
●
Clean away the snow with a brush and
the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-
icer spray.
ACC operation
Fig. 252
On the left of the steering column:
oper
ating the ACC with the thir
d l
e
v
er.
Fig. 253 On the left of the steering column:
operating the ACC with the third lev
er.
When the ACC is connected, the green con-
tr
ol l
amp
will light up on the instrument
panel, and the pr
ogrammed speed and ACC
status will be displayed
›››
Fig. 250.
What ACC settings are possible?
●
Connecting and activating the ACC
›››
page 267.
●
Setting your speed
›››
page 267.
●
Setting your distance
›››
page 267.
●
Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC
›››
page 267.
●
Adjusting the default distance level at the
start of your journey
›››
page 267.
●
Adjusting the driving profile
›››
page 267.
●
Conditions in which the ACC does not re-
act
›››
page 268.
266
Driver assistance systems
Connecting and activating the ACC
T
o connect and activ
at
e the ACC, the posi-
tion of the gearbo
x l
ever, the vehicle speed
and the position of the third level of the ACC
must all be taken into account.
●
With manual transmission, the gear lever
must be in any gear except first. With auto-
matic transmission, the gear lever must be in
position D or S. Speed must be higher than
30 km/h (18 mph) approx.
●
To activate the ACC, move the third lever to
position
›››
Fig. 252
1
. At this time, the
ACC is not activ
e and ther
e is no pr
ogr
am-
med speed.
●
Ne
xt, press button
›››
Fig. 253
B
or
mo
v
e the l
e
v
er to position
›››
Fig. 252
2
. At this moment the ACC is ac-
tiv
at
ed and the curr
ent speed and dist
ance
ar
e programmed. The picture in the box will
change to Active mode
›››
Fig. 250 .
While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a
set speed and distance from the vehicle
ahead. Both speed and distance can be
changed at any time.
Setting speed
●
To set the speed, move the third lever up
+
or down
–
to the desired speed
›
›
›
Fig. 250
6
. The speed adjustment is
made at 10 km/h (6 mph) int
erv
al
s.
●
If you wish t
o incr
ease speed by intervals of
1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position
›››
Fig. 252
2
, or to decrease it press
butt
on
›
›
›
Fig. 253
B
.
The set speed can be changed when the v
e-
hicl
e is st
opped or during driving.
Setting your dist
ance l
evel
●
To increase or reduce the distance, press
button
A
to the right or left
›
›
›
Fig. 253
.
The instrument panel displ
ay modifies the se-
lected distance
›››
Fig. 250
4
. There are 5
dist
ance l
e
v
el
s to choose from. SEAT recom-
mends level 3. The set distance can be
changed when the vehicle is stopped or while
driving
›››
.
Disconnecting and deactiv
ating the ACC
●
T
o disconnect the ACC mo
v
e the l
ever to
position (fixed)
›››
Fig. 252
0
. An ACC de-
activated message appears and the func-
tion is t
ot
ally deactiv
at
ed.
If you do not wish t
o disconnect the ACC, just
to switch it temporarily to inactive mode
(Standby), move the third lever to position
3
or press the brake pedal.
It will al
so s
wit
ch t
o inactiv
e mode (Standby)
if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is
opened.
Adjusting the default distance level at the
start of your journey
In wet road conditions, you should always set
a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in
front than when driving in dry conditions
›››
.
When connecting the ACC, the dist
ance l
e
v
el
can be pr
eset to: Very short, Short, Medium,
Long, Very long and Last distance. To access
the Settings menu, depending on the fea-
tures, use the arrow keys and the wheel of the
multi-function steering wheel or the button on
the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 83.
Changing the driving profile
The driving profile can be used to modify the
ACC acceleration and braking behaviour.
There are three profiles available though the
instrument panel menu at Settings > As-
sistants > ACC > Basic settings:
●
Normal
●
●
Eco
To access the Settings menu, depending on
the features, use the arrow keys and the
wheel of the multi-function steering wheel or
the button on the windscreen wiper lever
›››
page 83.
»
267
Driving
The following conditions may lead the
ACC not t
o r
eact:
●
If the accel
er
at
or is pressed.
●
If there is no gear engaged.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).
WARNING
There is a danger of rear collision when the
distance to the vehicle in fr
ont is reduced
and the speed difference between both ve-
hicles is so great that a speed reduction by
the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake
immediately!
●
The ACC may not be able to detect all
situations properly.
●
Stepping on the accelerator may cause
the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver
braking will have priority over intervention
by the speed control or adaptive cruise
control.
●
Always be ready to use the brakes!
●
Observe country-specific provisions gov-
erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
●
It is dangerous to activate control and re-
sume the programmed speed if the road,
traffic or weather conditions do not permit
this. Risk of accident!
Note
●
The pr
ogrammed speed is erased once
the ignition or the ACC are s
witched off.
●
When the anti-slip regulation (ASR) is dis-
connected while accelerating, the ACC
disconnects automatically.
●
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,
the engine switches off during the ACC
stopping phase and restarts for moving off.
Deactivating the ACC temporarily
in cer
t
ain sit
uations
In the following situations the ACC should be
deactiv
at
ed due t
o the syst
em's limit
ations
›››
:
●
When overtaking, on closed curves or
mount
ain r
oads, r
oundabouts, slip r
oads or
r
oadwork sections, preventing the system
from accelerating to reach the programmed
speed.
●
When going through a tunnel, as operation
could be affected.
●
When other vehicles are going slower in the
left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
overtaken on the right.
●
In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-
cle in front may not be detected.
WARNING
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
tions described, serious accidents and inju-
ries may occur.
●
Always swit
ch off the ACC in critical sit-
uations.
Note
If you do not switch off the ACC in the
aforementioned situations, you may com-
mit a legal off
ence.
268
Driver assistance systems
Special driving recommendations
Fig. 254
Vehicle on a bend.
Motorcyclist
ahead, out of r
ange of the radar sensor.
Fig. 255 Vehicle changing lanes. One
vehicle t
urning and another stationary.
The ACC has certain limitations inherent to
the syst
em. Cert
ain r
eactions, under cert
ain
cir
cumstances, may be unexpected or come
late from the driver's point of view. So pay at-
tention in order to intervene if necessary.
The following situations require maximum at-
tention:
Starting driving after a stopping phase
(only with automatic transmission)
After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin
driving when the vehicle in front moves off
›››
.
Overtaking
When the t
urn signal lights up bef
or
e the v
e-
hicl
e starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates
the vehicle automatically and thus reduces
the distance from the vehicle in front.
When the vehicle moves to the overtaking
lane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-
hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the
programmed speed.
System acceleration can be interrupted at
any time by pressing the brake or moving the
third lever to position
›››
Fig. 252
3
.
Driving thr
ough a bend
When ent
ering or l
eaving some curv
es, the
r
adar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle
driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the
adjacent lane
›››
Fig. 254 . The vehicle may
brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the
vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to
intervene by accelerating or interrupting
braking by applying the brake or pushing the
third lever to position
›››
Fig. 252
3
.
Driving in t
unnel
s
When driving thr
ough t
unnel
s the radar sen-
sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
nels.
»
269
Driving
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
The r
adar sensor can only det
ect narr
o
w v
e-
hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-
ment when they enter its range
›››
Fig. 254 . In these cases, you should
brake as necessary.
Vehicles with special loads and accesso-
ries
Special loads and accessories of other vehi-
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
SEAT recommends disconnecting it.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
away from your own can only be detected
when they are within range of the sensors. As
a consequence, the ACC will take longer to
react
›››
Fig. 255 . Brake yourself as neces-
sary.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged
vehicles.
If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
moves over and there is a stationary vehicle
in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
›››
Fig. 255 . Brake yourself as necessary.
Vehicles driving in the opposite direction
and vehicles crossing your path
The ACC does not react to vehicles ap-
proaching from the opposite direction or ve-
hicles crossing your path.
Metal objects
Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used
in road works, can confuse the radar sensor
and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
Factors that may affect how the radar
sensor operates
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to
heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-
ted temporarily. A message will be displayed
stating this. If necessary clean the SEAT
badge
›››
Fig. 251.
When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly, the ACC will become available. The
message will turn off and the ACC may be
reactivated.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong
radar reverse reflection, for example in a
closed car park. SEAT recommends discon-
necting it.
Trailer mode
When driving with trailer the ACC controls
less dynamically.
Overheated brakes
If the brakes overheat, for example on long
and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-
vated temporarily. A message will be dis-
played stating this. In this case, adaptive
cruise control cannot be activated.
Cruise control may be reactivated once the
brake temperature has dropped. The mes-
sage will disappear. If the message ACC not
available remains on for quite a long time it
means that there is a fault. Contact a speci-
alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
WARNING
If you do not pay attention to the Press
the brake message, the vehicle may mov
e
and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before
driving off again, check that the road is
clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-
stacles on the road. This could cause an
accident and serious injuries. If necessary,
apply the brake.
270
Driver assistance systems
Lane Assist*
Intr
oduction
Fig. 256
On the windscreen: field of vision of
the L
ane Assist syst
em camer
a.
Using the camera located in the windscreen,
the L
ane Assist syst
em det
ects the possibl
e
lines dividing the l
anes. When the vehicle in-
voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has
detected, the system notifies the driver with a
corrective steering movement. The purpose is
not only to warn the driver, but also to keep
the vehicle inside the lane. This movement
can be over-regulated at any time.
No warning is produced with the turn signals
activated, given that the Lane Assist system
understands that a lane change is required.
Control lamp
It lights up yellow
Lane Assist system active but not available.
The system cannot accurately recognize the lane.
See page 272, The lane assist system is active but
it is not available (the control lamp is lit up yel-
low).
It lights up green
Lane Assist system active and available.
Some control and warning lamps will light up
briefly when the ignition is s
wit
ched on t
o
check cert
ain functions. They will s
witch off
after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Indications on the instrument panel
displ
ay
Fig. 257 On the instrument panel display: Indi-
cation on the L
ane Assist syst
em displ
ay (e
x-
ampl
e 1).
»
271
Driving
Fig. 258 On the instrument panel display: In-
dication on the Lane Assist system display (ex-
ampl
e 2).
Status display
Fig. 257 : The syst
em is activ
e
, but not
av
ail
able, either because the minimum
speed has not been reached or because
the lane lines are not recognised.
Fig. 257 : The system is active and
available, both lane lines are recognised.
The steering angle is not being correc-
ted at this moment.
Fig. 258 : The system is operational,
the highlighted line
1
indicates that
ther
e w
as a risk of inv
olunt
arily cr
ossing
the lane line and that the steering is be-
ing adjusted to correct the angle.
–
–
–
Operating mode
Steering wheel vibration
The following situations can cause vibr
ation
in the steering wheel and require the driver to
take active control of driving:
●
When the steering angle assist value re-
quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higher
than the system’s maximum operating value.
●
If the system ceases to display the lane
lines while assisting with steering.
Switching the Lane Assist system on or off
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
t
ems
›››
page 84.
●
OR: using the instrument panel menu Set-
tings > Assistants > Lane Assist
›››
page 70. The “confirmation sign” indicates
that the driver assist system is switched on.
Automatic deactivation: the lane assist sys-
tem can be deactivated automatically if
there is a system malfunction. Control lamp
switches off.
The lane assist system is active but it is not
available (the control lamp is lit up yellow)
●
When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38
mph).
●
When the Lane Assist system does not de-
tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-
ple, in the event warnings indicating road
works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.
●
When the radius of a curve is too small.
●
When no road markings can be seen.
●
When the distance to the next marking to
too great.
●
When the system does not detect any clear
and active steering movement during a long
period of time.
●
Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic
driving styles.
●
If a turn signal is activated.
●
When the ASR is switched off.
BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot As-
sist)*
The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat-
ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions
›››
page 273. In this case, the Lane Assist
function expands its functions in the following
way:
If the driver tries to change lane and there is a
vehicle in the blind spot:
●
The lamp flashes in the corresponding
rear-view mirror even though the turn signal
has not been activated.
●
The steering wheel vibrates to warn the
driver of the risk of collision.
272
Driver assistance systems
●
t
or
que is applied t
o corr
ect the st
eering
and return the vehicle to its lane.
Switching off the Lane Assist system in the
following situations
Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system,
switch it off in the following situations:
●
When more attention is required of the driv-
er
●
When driving in a sporty style
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In areas of road works
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the Lane As-
sist system cannot change the limits im-
posed by the laws of physics and by the
very natur
e of the system. Careless or un-
controlled use of the Lane Assist system
may cause accidents and injury. The sys-
tem is not a replacement for driver aware-
ness.
●
Always adapt your speed and the dis-
tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-
bility, weather conditions, the condition of
the road and the traffic situation.
●
Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so it can be turned at any time.
●
The Lane Assist system does not detect
all road markings. The road surfaces, road
structures or objects in poor condition can
be incorrectly detected as road markings
under cer
tain circumstances by the Lane
Assist system. In such situations, switch the
Lane Assist system off immediately.
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
●
Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
When the area of vision of the camera
becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the
Lane Assist system function can be affec-
ted.
CAUTION
In order to avoid influencing the operation
of the system, the following points must be
t
aken into account:
●
Regularly clean the area of vision of the
camera and keep it in a clean state, without
snow or ice
›››
Fig. 256.
●
Do not cover the area of vision of the
camera.
●
Check that the area of vision of the wind-
screen camera is not damaged.
Note
●
The lane departure w
arning system has
been exclusively developed for driving on
paved roads only.
●
If the Lane Assist system does not work as
described in this chapter
, do not use it and
contact a specialised workshop.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Using the blind spot detector
(BSD) with parking assistant
(RCTA)*
Introduction
Fig. 259 Related video
The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect
the tr
affic sit
uation behind the v
ehicl
e
.
The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps
the driver when backing out of a parallel
parking spot and in manoeuvring.
The blind spot detector has been developed
for driving on paved roads.
»
273
Driving
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking
assistance (RCT
A) included cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. Accidents and severe injury may
occur if the blind spot detection system or
the rear cross traffic alert are used negli-
gently or involuntarily. The system is not a
replacement for driver awareness.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Keep your hands on the wheel at all times
to be ready to intervene in the steering at
any time.
●
Pay attention to the control lamps that
may come on in the external rear view mir-
rors and on the instrument panel, and fol-
low any instructions they may give.
●
The blind spot assistant could react to
any special constructions that might be
present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high
or irregular dividers. This may cause erro-
neous warnings.
●
Never use the blind spot detector with
rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads.
The blind spot detector with rear cross traf-
fic alert has been designed for use on
paved roads.
●
Always pay attention to the v
ehicle's sur-
roundings.
●
Never use the blind spot detector or the
parking assistant if the radar sensors are
dirty.
●
The external rear view mirror control
lamps may have limited functionality due
to solar radiation.
CAUTION
●
The r
adar sensors on the rear bumper
may be damaged or shifted in the ev
ent of
a collision, for example, when entering or
exiting a parking space. This may result in
the system disconnecting itself, or at least
possibly having its functionality diminished.
●
In order to ensure that the radar sensors
work properly, keep the rear bumper free of
snow and ice and do not cover it.
●
The rear bumper should only be painted
with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind
spot detector's functions may be limited or
work incorrectly if other paints are used.
Note
If the blind spot detector with parking as-
sistant does not work as described in this
chapter, st
op using it and contact a speci-
alised workshop.
Control lamps
Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:
It lights up
It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac-
tivated and ready to operate.
It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi-
cle in the blind spot.
Flashes
The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the
blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in
the direction of the detect
ed vehicle
›››
.
For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist
›››
page 271
, a warning to switch lanes will also ap-
pear even though the turn signal has not been en-
gaged.
The control lamps light up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and shoul
d t
urn off aft
er approxi-
mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for
the function check.
If there are no indications from the control
lamp in the external rear view mirror, this
means that the blind spot detector has not
detected any other vehicles in the area
›››
.
If the dipped beam is on, then the contr
ol
l
amps in the e
xt
ernal r
ear view mirrors will be
dimmed (night mode).
274
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages are ignored when they light up,
the vehicl
e may stall in traffic and cause
accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-
sages.
●
Carry out the necessary operations.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and cor-
responding text messages when they light
up may result in damage t
o the vehicle.
Blind spot detector (BSD)
Fig. 260
In the exterior mirrors: blind spot de-
t
ect
or indication.
Fig. 261 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor
zones.
The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to
monit
or the ar
eas behind the v
ehicl
e
›
››
Fig. 261. The system does this by measur-
ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
and its speed differential. The blind spot de-
tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-
prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-
cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to
notify the driver.
Indication on the exterior mirror
The control lamp (expanded view) provides
an indication in the corresponding external
mirror
›››
Fig. 260 regarding the traffic situa-
tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be
critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-
ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to
the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of
the right-hand external mirror indicates the
traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.
»
275
Driving
In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or
windo
ws with tint
ed film, the indications of the
e
xt
ernal mirr
ors may not be seen clearly or
correctly.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad-
hesives or other similar materials.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located on the left and
right of the bumper and are not visible from
the outside
›››
Fig. 261. The sensors monitor
both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-
hicle
›››
Fig. 262,
›››
Fig. 263. The range to
the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the
width of a lane.
The lane width is not detected individually,
but is rather pre-configured in the system.
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
there are any), and can also detect station-
ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an
incorrect indication.
276
Driver assistance systems
Driving situations
Fig. 262 Schematic representation: Passing
situation with traffic behind the vehicl
e. Indi-
cation from the blind spot detector in the left-
hand external mirror.
Fig. 263 Schematic representation: Situa-
tion of passing and then moving into the right-
hand l
ane. Indication from the blind spot de-
tector in the right-hand external mirror.
In the following situations, an indication will
be displ
ayed in the e
xt
ernal mirr
or
›
››
Fig. 262
(arrow) or
›››
Fig. 263 (arrow):
●
When being overtaken by another vehicle
›››
Fig. 262 .
●
When passing another vehicle
›››
Fig. 263
with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid-
erably higher speed, no indication will be dis-
played.
The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-
er an indication will be displayed in the exter-
nal mirror, because the blind spot detector
takes into account the speed differential with
other vehicles. Thus even though the distance
from the other vehicle is identical, the indica-
tion will appear sooner in some cases and
later in others.
Physical limitations inherent to the system
In some situations the blind spot detector
may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
ly. E.g. in the following situations:
●
on tight bends;
●
in the case of lanes with different widths;
●
at the top of slopes;
●
in adverse weather conditions;
»
277
Driving
●
in the case of special constructions t
o the
side of the v
ehicl
e
, e
.g., high or irregular divid-
ers.
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)
Fig. 264
Schematic representation of the rear
cr
oss tr
affic al
ert assist
ant: z
one monitored
around the vehicle while leaving a parking
space.
The parking assistant uses the radar sensors
on the r
ear bumper
›
›
›
Fig. 261
to monitor the
traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs
out of a parallel parking space or as it is be-
ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-
bility conditions.
If the system detects that someone else on
the road is approaching the rear of the vehi-
cle
›››
Fig. 264, an acoustic alarm is heard.
●
In vehicles without ParkPilot a “gong” will
sound and a message will be displayed on
the instrument panel.
●
If the vehicle is equipped ParkPilot, the
ParkPilot acoustic alarm will sound continu-
ously.
Automatic braking to reduce damages
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
someone else on the road is approaching the
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not
step on the brake, the system will engage the
brakes automatically.
The parking system helps the driver by auto-
matically engaging the brakes to reduce any
damage. The automatic intervention on the
brakes takes place when driving in reverse at
approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting
that the vehicle is stationary, the system
keeps it that way for around 2 seconds.
After automatically braking to reduce dam-
age, the system will not be able to automati-
cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by
stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or
the brake pedal in order to regain control of
the vehicle.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the rear cross traffic aler
t cannot over-
come the limits imposed by the laws of
physics; it only works within the limits of the
system. The parking assistant function
should not tempt you into taking any risks.
The system is not a replacement for driver
awareness.
●
The system should never be used in limi-
ted visibility conditions or complicated
traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when
crossing multiple lanes.
●
Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-
cle's surroundings, since the system often
fails to detect things such as bicycles or
pedestrians.
●
The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
Using the blind spot detector (BSD)
with parking assist
ant (RC
T
A)
Activating and deactivating the blind spot
det
ect
or (BSD) with parking assist
ant
(RC
T
A)
The blind spot detector with parking assistant
can be switched on and off by accessing the
Assistance systems menu on the dash
panel display using the steering wheel con-
trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-
function camera, it can also be accessed by
278
Braking and parking
means of the driver assistance systems key
l
ocat
ed on the main beam headlight l
e
v
er.
Open the Assistants menu.
●
BSD
●
Parking Assist.
If the verification box on the control panel is
checked , the functionality will be automat-
ically activated at ignition.
When the blind spot detector is ready to op-
erate, the indications in the external mirrors
will turn on briefly as confirmation.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust-
ment in the system will remain active.
If the blind spot detector was automatically
deactivated, it will only be possible to restart
the system after turning the vehicle off and
restarting it.
Automatic deactivation of the blind spot
detector (BSD)
The radar sensors of the blind spot detector
with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-
cally deactivated when, among other rea-
sons, one of the sensors is detected to be
permanently covered. This may be the case
if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice
in front of one of the sensors.
The relevant text message will appear in the
dash panel display.
Trailer mode
The Blind spot detector and the rear cross
traffic alert will be automatically deactivated
and it will be impossible to activate them if
the tow hitch is electrically connected to a
trailer or other similar object.
As soon as the driver starts to drive with a
trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a
message will appear on the instrument panel
display indicating that the blind spot detector
and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva-
ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from
the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot
detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you
will have to reactivate them in the corre-
sponding menu.
If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,
then the blind spot detector and the rear
cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated
manually when driving with a trailer.
Braking and parking
Br
aking syst
em
Contr
ol l
amps
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low
›››
page 323 or fault in the
brake system.
Do not carry on driving!
Together with the control lamp on the button:
Electr
onic parking brake on
›››
page 281.
Flashes red
Electronic parking brake faulty. Simultaneously, the
control warning light may light up , or the contr
ol
lamp on the button may flash.
Go to a specialised workshop, as you may not be
able to park safely.
It lights up yellow
Along with the warning lamp flashing: fault in the
el
ectronic parking brake.
Contact a specialised workshop.
It lights up yellow
Front brake pads worn.
Contact a specialised workshop immediately.
»
279
Driving
It lights up red
Brake pedal not pressed!
Fully depress the brake pedal.
It lights up green
Brake pedal not pressed.
Press the brake pedal to sel
ect a gear range.
Brake pedal not pressed.
Press the brake pedal to disengage the el
ectronic
parking brake
›››
page 281.
WARNING
●
If the brake warning lamp
does not go
out or if it lights up when driving, the brake
fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there
is a risk of an accident
›››
page 323, Brake
fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.
Obtain technical assistance.
●
If the brake warning lamp lights up to-
gether with the ABS lamp this could be
due to an ABS fault. When this function
fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under
certain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-
cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-
trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.
●
If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-
panied by a warning message on the in-
strument panel display, please go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to check
the brake pads and to replace them if they
are worn.
Information about the brakes
New brake pads
For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200
mil
es), new brake pads have not yet reached
their maximum braking capacity, and need to
be “run in” first. However, you can compen-
sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by
applying more pressure on the brake pedal.
Avoid overloading the brakes while running
them in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends
a great deal on how you drive and the condi-
tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a
particular problem in urban traffic and short
stretches, or with very sporty driving.
Depending on the speed, the braking force
and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-
perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be
produced when braking.
Wet roads or road salt
In certain situations (for example, on driving
through flooded areas, in severe downpours
or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-
tion could be delayed if the discs and pads
are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the
brakes should be “dried” by pressing the
brake pedal several times.
At high speed and with the windscreen wipers
activated, the brake pads will briefly t
ouch
the brake discs. This takes place, although
unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals
to improve the response time of the brakes
when they are wet.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be
temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for
some distance without using the brakes when
there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The
layer of salt that accumulates on the discs
and pads can be removed by gently apply-
ing the brakes a few times.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for corrosion to
form on the discs and dirt to build up on the
brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently
or the brakes are not used very often.
If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust
has formed on the disks, it is advisable to
clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly
a few times at a moderately high speed
›››
.
F
ault in the br
ak
e syst
em
If the br
ake pedal travel should ever increase
suddenly, this may mean that one of the two
brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to
the nearest specialised workshop and have
the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-
member that you will have to apply more
280
Braking and parking
pressure on the brake pedal and allow for
l
onger st
opping dist
ances.
L
o
w brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if
the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid
level is monitored electronically.
Brake servo
The brake servo increases the pressure you
apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
the engine is running.
WARNING
Any anomaly in the brake system can in-
crease the braking distance, with the r
e-
sulting risk of an accident.
●
New brake pads and discs must be run in
and do not have the correct friction during
the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced
braking capacity may be offset by pressing
on the brake pedal a little harder.
●
If you are driving on roads which have
been salted, braking effectiveness may be
decreased.
●
Brakes can overheat if used excessively
on slopes. Before driving down a long steep
slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and
change down into a lower gear or range.
Therefore, using the engine brake relieves
the brakes.
●
Gentle continuous braking causes the
brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
tance will increase. Apply and then release
the brakes alternately.
●
Apply the br
akes heavily to clean the
brake system only in a suitable traffic situa-
tion. Do not put other road users in danger:
there is risk of causing an accident.
●
Ensure the vehicle does not move while in
neutral, when the engine is stopped. The
braking distance is increased considerably
when the brake servo is not active.
●
If the brake is subjected to high stresses,
vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-
tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of
the brakes.
●
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
accessories please read the relevant in-
structions.
CAUTION
●
Never let the brak
es “drag” by leaving
your foot on the pedal when it is not neces-
sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-
sulting in longer stopping distances and
greater wear.
●
Before driving down a long, steep gradi-
ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-
lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine
braking and relieves the brakes. If you still
have to use the brakes, it is better to brake
firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes
continuously.
Note
●
If the brake servo is out of action, for e
x-
ample when the car is being towed, you will
have to press the brake pedal considerably
harder than normal to make up for the lack
of servo assistance.
●
If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-
cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel
covers, it is important that the flow of air to
the front wheels is not obstructed, other-
wise the brakes can overheat.
Electronic parking brake
Fig. 265
In the centre console: electronic
parking br
ak
e butt
on
The electronic parking brake replaces the
handbr
ak
e
.
»
281
Driving
Applying the electronic parking brake
The el
ectr
onic parking br
ak
e can be activ
a-
ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,
even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-
vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-
cle.
●
Pull and hold the
›››
Fig. 265 button.
●
The parking brake is activated when the
control light of button
›››
Fig. 265 and the
red control lamp on the instrument panel is
always on.
●
Release the button.
Disconnecting the electronic parking
brake
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press the button
›››
Fig. 265. At the same
time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the
engine is running, press the accelerator pedal
slightly.
●
The control lamp of button
›››
Fig. 265 and
the red control lamp on the instrument
panel go out.
Automatic release of the electronic park-
ing brake upon moving off
The electronic parking brake is automatically
switched off when starting if, after the driver's
door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-
tened, any of the following situations take
place:
●
In vehicles with automatic transmission: a
gear range is engaged or the vehicle is
switched to another one and the accelerator
pedal is lightly pressed.
●
In vehicles with manual transmission: the
clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting
off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-
ed.
●
To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are
exceptions that allow the automatic parking
brake to be released without the driver's seat
belt being fastened.
The parking brake can be prevented from be-
ing automatically released by continuously
pulling up the
›››
Fig. 265 switch when
starting off.
The electronic parking brake is not discon-
nected until the button is released. This
can facilitate starting off when a heavy load
is towed
›››
page 298.
Emergency brake function
Only use the emergency brake function if you
are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot
brake
›››
.
●
Pull and hold the
›
›
›
Fig. 265
butt
on in
this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At
the same time, an acoustic warning can be
heard.
●
To stop the braking process, release the
button or press the accelerator.
WARNING
The improper use of the electronic parking
brake can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Never use the el
ectronic parking brake to
stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.
Braking distances can be considerably lon-
ger, since, under certain circumstances,
only the rear wheels brake. Always use the
foot brake.
●
Never accelerate from the engine when a
gear range or a gear is engaged and the
engine is running. The vehicle could move,
even if the electronic parking brake is acti-
vated.
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally
moving when parking it, first apply the
electronic parking brak
e and then remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
Note
●
In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-
l
easing the clutch and accelerating at the
same time automatically disconnects the
electronic parking brake.
●
If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be
possible to disconnect the electronic park-
ing brake. Use the jump-start
›››
page 50.
●
When the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released, noises may be heard.
282
Braking and parking
●
The system performs automatic and au-
dible t
ests sporadically in the parked vehi-
cle if some time elapses without the elec-
tronic parking brake being used.
Auto Hold Function*
Fig. 266
Detailed view of the centre console:
Aut
o Hol
d butt
on
The control lamp on button
›
›
›
Fig. 266 remains on while the Auto Hold
function is connected.
Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-
sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-
ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-
od of time with the engine running, for exam-
ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at
traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-
tent stops.
When connected, the Auto Hold function au-
tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling
when stationary without pressing the brake
pedal.
After detecting that the vehicle is stationary
and the brake pedal has been released, the
Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-
er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.
When the driver touches the accelerator
pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-
ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.
The vehicle moves according to the slope of
the road.
If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-
ditions required by the Auto Hold function is
impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's
control light goes out
›››
Fig. 266. The elec-
tronic parking brake connects automatically,
if necessary, to park the vehicle safely
›››
.
Conditions f
or k
eeping the v
ehicl
e st
ation-
ary with the Auto Hold function
●
The driver door must be closed.
●
The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
●
The engine is running.
Switching the Auto Hold function on and
off
Pulse button
›››
. The control lamp
on the butt
on goes out when the Aut
o Hol
d
function is s
wit
ched off.
Automatically engaging and disengaging
the Auto Hold function
If the Auto Hold function was switched on with
the button before disconnecting
the ignition, the function will remain on after
the ignition is re-connected.
If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,
it will automatically remain off next time the
ignition is engaged.
The Auto Hold function connects automat-
ically if the following conditions are met
(all points must be met at the same time
›››
):
The v
ehicl
e is k
ept
st
ationary with the
brake pedal on a flat surface or on a
slope.
The engine rotates “correctly”.
The Auto Hold function is automatically
turned off if the following conditions are
met:
If any of the conditions mentioned on
›››
page 283, Conditions for keeping
the vehicle stationary with the Au-
to Hold function are no longer met.
If the engine is running irregularly or an
anomaly is detected.
If the engine is turned off or stalls.
Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-
celerator are pressed at the same time.
»
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
283
Driving
Automatic gearbox: If the accel
er
at
or is
pr
essed
Aut
omatic gearbox: If any of the tyres
has only minimal contact with the
ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-
tion.
Permanent Auto Hold connection
The Auto Hold function must be switched on
every time the engine is started. However, to
switch the Auto Hold function on permanent-
ly, the “mark” must be switched on in the
Settings menu, Autohold submenu
›››
page 70.
WARNING
The smart technology incorporated into
the Auto Hold function cannot defy the
laws of physics; it only works within the lim-
its of the syst
em. The greater convenience
provided by the Auto Hold function should
never tempt you to take any risk that may
compromise safety.
●
Never leave the vehicle running and with
the Auto Hold function switched on.
●
The Auto Hold function cannot always
keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-
hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on
slippery or frozen surfaces.
5.
Note
Before entering a car wash, always switch
off the Auto Hold function, because if the
electronic parking br
ake is automatically
connected, it may cause damage.
Stabilisation and brake as-
sistance systems
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by
the system.
The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the
ABS fails, the l
amp also lights up.
Flashes
ESC or ASR activated.
It lights up
ASR manually deactivated.
It lights up yellow
Along with the ESC control lamp : fault in the ABS.
Together with the warning lamp
or : ABS fault.
The control lamps light up together when the
ignition is s
wit
ched on and shoul
d t
urn off af
-
ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time
taken for the function check.
Brake assist systems
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC helps to improve saf
ety. It reduces
the tendency to skid and improves the stabili-
ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC
detects critical handling situations, such as
vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin
on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle
by braking individual wheels or by reducing
the engine torque. The warning lamp will
flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is
intervening .
The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the
traction control system (ASR), electronic dif-
ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control
(XDS).
ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by
changing the torque.
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
is desirable
›››
page 286.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-
der braking until the vehicle has reached a
284
Braking and parking
virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the
v
ehicl
e e
v
en when the br
akes are on full.
Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not
pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal
pulsate while the ABS is working.
If the running gear or brake system is modi-
fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
verely limited.
Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)
The brake assist system can reduce the re-
quired braking distance. The braking force is
automatically boosted if you press the brake
pedal quickly in an emergency. You must
keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-
ger has passed.
Traction control system (ASR)
In the event of wheelspin, the traction control
system reduces the engine torque to match
the amount of grip available. This helps the
car to start moving, accelerate or climb a
gradient.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes
the spinning wheel and directs the power to
the other driven wheel. This function is active
up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).
To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel
from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-
cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-
hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on
again automatically when the brake has
cooled down.
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS)
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-
tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher
speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the
wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-
ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.
This may mean that in certain situations the
torque delivered to the inner wheel is too
high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other
hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower
drive torque than it could transmit. This can
cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this
case the front axle, which results in under-
steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.
The XDS can detect and correct this effect
via the sensors and signals of the ESC.
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside
wheel and counter the excess driving torque
of that wheel. This means that the requested
trajectory is much more precise.
XDS works in combination with the ESC and is
always active, even when ASR is disconnec-
ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-
connected.
WARNING
Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet
ground can result in loss of vehicl
e control
and serious injury to the driver and passen-
gers.
●
The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-
ic torque control system cannot exceed the
limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-
ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or
slippery roads. If you notice the systems
cutting in, you should reduce your speed
immediately to suit the road and traffic
conditions. Do not be encouraged to take
risks by the presence of more safety sys-
tems. If you do, an accident may occur.
●
Please remember that the accident risk
always increases if you drive fast, espe-
cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if
you follow too close behind the vehicle in
front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,
EDS and the electronic torque control sys-
tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-
dents!
●
Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-
faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).
Despite the control systems, the driven
wheels could spin, affecting the stability of
the vehicle: risk of accident!
WARNING
The effectiveness of ESC can be consider-
ably reduced if other components and sys-
tems affecting driving dynamics are not
»
285
Driving
maintained or are not functioning correct-
ly. This includes, among others, brakes,
tyres and other syst
ems already men-
tioned.
●
Remember that changing and fitting oth-
er components to the vehicle can affect
operation of the ABS, HBA and ESC.
●
Changes to the vehicle suspension or us-
ing unapproved wheel/tyre combinations
can affect operation of the ABS, HBA and
ESC, as well as their effectiveness.
●
Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC de-
pends on the use of suitable tyres
›››
page 327.
Note
●
The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-
rectly if the f
our wheels have identical
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius
of the tyres can cause the system to re-
duce engine power when this is not desired.
●
The regulating processes of the systems
can make noises due to their operation.
●
If the warning lamp or lights up,
there could be a fault
›››
page 85.
●
Any modifications made to the vehicle
(for example, to the engine, brake system,
running gear or to the combination of
wheels and tyres) may affect the operation
of the ABS, ASR and EDS.
Connecting and disconnecting the
ASR
Fig. 267
Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on used t
o s
wit
ch ASR on and off (v
ehicles
with ESC)
The electronic stability control ESC consists
of ABS, EDL and ASR and only w
orks when
the engine is running.
The ASR can be s
wit
ched off whil
e the engine
is running by pr
essing the button
›››
Fig. 267. The ASR (and similar) is only
switched off when the required traction is not
obtained:
●
When driving through deep snow or on
loose ground (gravel, etc.).
●
When “freeing” a trapped vehicle.
Turn the ASR back on by pressing the
button
›››
Fig. 267.
Parking
To park the vehicle
When parking your vehicle, all legal require-
ments should be observed.
Always not
e the following points when park-
ing the vehicle:
●
Park the vehicle on a suitable surface
›››
.
●
Connect the electronic parking brake
›››
page 281.
●
F
or an automatic gearbox, move the selec-
tor lever t
o position P.
●
Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel
slightly to engage the steering lock.
●
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse
gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.
●
When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with
you.
Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines
Before switching off the engine, rotate the
steering wheel so that if the vehicle should
move, it will be held by the kerb.
●
On slopes, turn the front wheels so that
they are against the edge of the kerb.
286
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
Uphill, t
urn the wheel
s t
o
w
ards the centre of
the road.
WARNING
●
Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot
e
xhaust system could ignite inflammable
materials, such as dry grass, low bushes,
spilt fuel or flammable materials.
●
Do not leave passengers inside a closed
vehicle, they may not be able to open
doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the
possibility of a rescue.
●
Children should not be left alone in the
vehicle. They could tamper with the hand-
brake or the gears, which could cause the
vehicle to move without control.
●
Depending on weather conditions, it may
become extremely hot or cold inside the
vehicle. This can be fatal.
Note
In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
key can only be removed fr
om the ignition
when the lever is in position P.
Help with parking and ma-
noeuvring
P
ark assist syst
em*
Intr
oduction
Fig. 268 Related video
The Park Assist system helps the driver to find
a suit
abl
e pl
ace t
o park
, to insert the vehicle
into parallel and perpendicular parking pla-
ces and to leave parallel parking places.
The Park Assist system is limited to the system
abilities and requires that the driver is espe-
cially attentive
›››
.
The parking sensor syst
em is a component of
the P
ark Assist syst
em that helps t
o park the
v
ehicle.
For vehicles with the optical parking system
(OPS), the infotainment system screen dis-
plays the detected zones in front of and be-
hind the vehicle, indicating - within the limits
of the system - the position of obstacles in re-
lation to the vehicle.
The park assist system cannot be switched
on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is elec-
trically connected to a trailer.
WARNING
Despite the assistance provided by the
park assist system, do not run any risks
when parking. The system is not a replace-
ment f
or driver awareness.
●
Unintentional movements of the vehicle
could cause serious injury.
●
Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-
ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.
●
The surface of certain objects and items
of clothing and external sound sources
may have a negative affect on the park as-
sist signals or on the system sensors or
may not reflect its signals.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not registered.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the sensors do not always detect
small children, animals or objects.
CAUTION
●
The park assist system aims exclusively
at other park
ed vehicles, without taking
curbs or other circumstances into account.
Make sure you do not damage the tyres
and wheel rims when parking. Where nec-
essary, stop manoeuvring to avoid damag-
ing the vehicle.
»
287
Driving
●
The sensors may not always be able to
det
ect objects such as trailer draw bars,
thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This
could result in damage to your car.
●
Although the parking distance warning
system detects and warns of the presence
of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-
pear from the measurement angle of the
sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-
tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it
will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring
the warnings of the parking sensor system
could cause considerable damage to the
vehicle. This is also valid when using the
park assist (e.g. to park behind a truck or
motorcycle). Therefore, always keep a
close watch on the area in front of and be-
hind the vehicle while parking, and inter-
vene promptly if necessary.
●
To ensure that the system works properly,
the bumper sensors must be kept clean,
free of ice and snow and uncovered.
●
The bumper sensors may become dam-
aged or misaligned, for example, when
parking.
●
When cleaning the sensors with high-
pressure or steam cleaning equipment,
spray the sensors briefly at a distance of
no less than 10 cm.
Note
If there is a fault in the system, go to a spe-
cialised workshop. SEAT recommends tak
-
ing your car in for technical service.
Parking using the park assist sys-
tem
Fig. 269
Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on t
o s
wit
ch the park assist syst
em on man-
ually.
Fig. 270
Space detected: parallel or angle.
Parking preparations
●
The Traction control system ASR must be
t
urned on
›
›
›
page 281
.
●
In parallel parking: press the
›››
Fig. 269 button as many times as neces-
sary to select the desired parking mode.
When the function is enabled, the lamp but-
ton will light up.
288
Help with parking and manoeuvring
●
In head-in parking: pr
ess the
›
›
›
Fig. 269 button as many times as neces-
sary to select the desired parking mode.
When the function is enabled, the lamp but-
ton will light up.
●
If necessary, press the button once more
to change parking mode.
●
Apply the turn signal for the side on which a
gap is to be detected for parking. The instru-
ment panel displays the side corresponding
to the road.
Parking
●
When parking parallel to the road: drive
next to the gap at a speed of no more than
40 km/h (25 mph) and at a distance of be-
tween 0.5 m and 2 m.
●
When parking perpendicular to the road:
drive next to the gap at a speed of no more
than 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of
between 0.5 m and 2 m.
●
The best parking results will be achieved if
you position the vehicle as parallel as possi-
ble to the line of parked cars or the kerb.
●
When a suitable parking place is displayed
on the instrument panel, stop and select re-
verse gear.
●
Follow the instructions given on the instru-
ment panel display
●
Then, release the steering wheel when the
warning signal sounds
›››
: The system
will move the steering wheel! Ob-
serve the surrounding area.
●
Observe the surrounding area and acceler-
at
e car
efully at a maximum of 7 km/h
(
4 mph).
●
The park assist syst
em is
only responsible
for moving the steering wheel during the ma-
noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-
tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.
●
Follow the instructions given by the park
assist system until the manoeuvre is comple-
ted.
●
The park assist system steers the vehicle
forwards and backwards until it is in a straight
position in the parking space.
●
The manoeuvre is complete when the cor-
responding indication is given on the instru-
ment panel display.
Finishing early or interrupting the parking
manoeuvre
The park assist system stops the manoeuvre
in advance in the event of one of the follow-
ing:
●
Press button .
●
Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
●
The driver moves the steering wheel.
●
The parking manoeuvre has not been com-
pleted after 6 minutes since the park assist
system was activated.
●
A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-
noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the
button again.
●
There is a system malfunction (system tem-
porarily unavailable).
●
The ASR system is switched off or the ASR
or ESC is working.
WARNING
The steering wheel turns quickly by itself
when parking using the park assist system.
Placing your hand between the steering
wheel spok
es could lead to injuries.
Note
●
The park assist system has its limitations.
For ex
ample, it is not possible to park on
tight bends using the park assist system.
●
Even if the park assist system recognises
that there is not enough space for parking
the vehicle, the instrument panel display
will still show this place. In this case, the
parking manoeuvre should not be reques-
ted.
●
Changing gears between forward and re-
verse gears before indicated (that is, be-
fore the signal from the parking sensor sys-
tem) the parking results may not be ideal.
●
For parallel parking (parallel to the road),
a sound will tell the driver when they must
change from forward gears to reverse; the
»
289
Driving
signal from the parking sensor system does
not indicate changes of direction.
●
The park assist can also be activat
ed af-
terwards, if you pass close to a parallel
parking space at a maximum of 40 km/h
(25 mph) or close to a perpendicular park-
ing space at about 20 km/h (12 mph) and
then press the button.
●
The progress bar on the screen of the in-
strument panel shows a display of the rela-
tive distance to be covered.
●
When the Park Assist system is turning
the steering wheel of the stopped vehicle
the symbol is also displayed. Press on
the brake pedal so that the steering can
turn with the vehicle at a standstill and thus
reduce the number of manoeuvres.
●
A “suitable” parking space length is at
least 1.1 m greater than the length of the
vehicle.
●
If the results of the park assist system are
not as good after changing the wheels, the
system must memorise the perimeter of the
new wheels. This process is performed au-
tomatically while the vehicle is in motion.
To help this process, turn slowly (at less
than 20 km/h [12 mph]), e.g. in an empty
car park.
Leaving a parking space using the
P
ark Assist syst
em
Exiting a parking space
●
Switch on the engine.
●
Press button . When the function is ena-
bled, the button
›››
Fig. 269 will light up.
●
Apply the turn signal for the side on which
you want to leave the parking space.
●
Select reverse gear.
●
Follow the instructions given by the park
assist system.
●
When the next indication appears, release
the st
eering wheel
›››
in Parking using the
park assist syst
em on page 289
:
The sys-
tem will move the steering wheel!
Observe the surrounding area.
●
Observ
e the surr
ounding area and acceler-
ate carefully at a maximum of 7 km/h
(4 mph).
●
The park assist system is only responsible
for moving the steering wheel during the ma-
noeuvre. The driver applies the accelera-
tor, the clutch, the gears and the brake.
●
When it is possible to leave the parking
space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take
control of the steering and when traffic con-
ditions permit, leave the parking space.
Automatic interruption of the manoeuvre
The park assist system stops the manoeuvre
in the event of one of the following:
●
Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
●
The driver moves the steering wheel.
●
A sliding door is opened. To restart the ma-
noeuvre, close the sliding door and press the
button again.
●
There is a system malfunction (system tem-
porarily unavailable).
●
The ASR system is switched off or the ASR
or ESC is working.
WARNING
The steering wheel turns quickly automati-
cally when leaving a parking space using
the park assist system. Placing your hand
between the st
eering wheel spokes could
lead to injuries.
Park Assist brake operation
The Park Assist system helps the driver by
br
aking aut
omatically. Aut
omatic br
aking
does not r
elieve the driver of responsibility for
controlling the accelerator, brake and clutch
›››
.
290
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Braking to avoid damage due to unsuitable
speed
It is possibl
e that the syst
em oper
at
es the
br
akes to reduce excess speed. The parking
manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes
will intervene during each parking process.
Braking to minimise damage
When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle
may brake automatically. In certain circum-
stances (e.g. storm, detection of ultrasounds,
vehicle status, load, inclination), the Park As-
sist system may stop the vehicle completely
before an object.
●
Press the foot brake
›››
!
F
oll
o
wing the int
erv
ention of the brakes, the
Park Assist will stop.
WARNING
Despite the assistance provided by the
park assist system, do not run any risks
when parking. The system is not a replace-
ment f
or driver awareness.
●
Always be ready to brake.
●
Automatic brake intervention will end af-
ter 1.5 seconds approximately. Following
automatic intervention of the brakes, stop
the vehicle yourself.
Parking aid*
Intr
oduction
The parking aid helps the driver when parking
and manoeuvring. When the vehicle ap-
proaches an obstacl
e, forwards or back-
wards, an intermittent audible warning will be
heard, higher or lower depending on the dis-
tance. The shorter the distance, the shorter
the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is
too close to the obstacle, the audible warning
becomes constant.
If you continue to approach an obstacle
when the sound is continuous, this means the
system can no longer measure the distance.
The sensor system on the bumpers transmit
and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound
signal (transmission, reflection from the ob-
stacle and reception), this system continu-
ously calculates the distance between the
bumper and the obstacle.
WARNING
The parking aid and the optical parking
system are no substitute f
or driver aware-
ness.
●
The sensors have blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not registered.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the sensors do not always detect
small children, animals or objects.
●
The surface of certain objects and some
cl
othing do not reflect the ultrasound sig-
nals from the parking distance system. The
system cannot detect or incorrectly de-
tects these objects and people wearing
these types of clothes.
●
External sound sources can affect the
parking distance aid signals. In this case,
under certain circumstances, people and
objects will not be detected.
CAUTION
●
The sensors may not al
ways be able to
det
ect objects such as trailer draw bars,
thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open
boots, etc. This could result in damage to
your car.
●
Although the parking distance warning
system detects and warns of the presence
of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-
pear from the measurement angle of the
sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-
tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it
will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring
the warnings of the parking sensor system
could cause considerable damage to the
vehicle.
●
The bumper sensors may become dam-
aged or misaligned, for example, when
parking.
●
To ensure that the system works properly,
the bumper sensors must be kept clean,
free of ice and snow and uncovered.
»
291
Driving
●
When cleaning the sensors with high-
pressure or steam cl
eaning equipment,
spray the sensors briefly at a distance of
no less than 10 cm (4 inches).
Note
Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous
w
arnings on the parking sensor system, e.g.
rough t
armac, cobbles or the noise of other
vehicles.
Connecting and disconnecting
Fig. 271 Detailed view of the centre console:
butt
on t
o connect or disconnect the park as-
sist.
Fig. 272 Parking sensor system sensors on the
front bumper
●
Press the butt
on when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on
›
›
›
Fig. 271.
●
Automatic connection: engage reverse
gear.
●
Automatic disconnection: drive faster than
15 km/h (9 mph).
The button lights up when the function is
switched on.
Special characteristics
●
The parking aid system sometimes detects
water on the sensors as an obstacle.
●
If the distance does not change, the warn-
ing signal will sound less loudly after a few
seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the
volume will remain constant.
●
When the vehicle moves away from the ob-
stacle, the beeping sound automatically
switches off. On approaching the obstacle
again, the beeping sound will automatically
switch back on.
●
If the electronic parking brake is engaged
or the selector lever is set to P, no audible
warning will be emitted.
●
Your technical service centre can adjust the
volume of the warning signals.
Note
If the parking aid system is faulty, a contin-
uous audible warning will sound when it is
switched on f
or the first time, and the but-
ton will flash. Press the button to discon-
nect the park assist and have the system
checked as soon as possible by a special-
ised workshop.
292
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Optical parking system* (OPS)
Fig. 273
On-screen OPS display:
A
has de-
t
ect
ed an obst
acl
e in the collision z
one;
B
has
det
ect
ed an obst
acl
e in the segment;
C
zone
r
ecor
ded behind the v
ehicl
e
.
Fig. 274 On-screen OPS display:
A
area re-
corded in front of the vehicle;
B
an obstacle
has been detected in the segment.
The optical parking system is an accessory to
the parking aid syst
em
›
›
›
page 292
and the
park assist system
›››
page 287.
The zone recorded by the sensors in front of
and behind the vehicle is displayed on the
factory-fitted infotainment system display.
Any obstacles are displayed in relation to the
vehicle
›››
.
The OPS activ
at
es aut
omatically when the
parking aid
›
›
›
page 292 or the park assist
system is connected
›››
page 287.
Manual disconnection of the optical indi-
cation
●
Press a button on the factory-fitted infotain-
ment system, for example the button.
●
OR: briefly press the function button or
RVC on the screen.
Automatic disconnection of the optical in-
dication
●
Drive forwards at around 10-15 km/h
(6-9 mph).
●
On vehicles with reverse assist, engage re-
verse gear
›››
page 294. The display
changes to the image of the camera.
Zones explored
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
●
Front area: 1.20 m
●
Front side area: 0.60 m
●
Rear area: 1.60 m
●
Rear side area: 0.60 m
Screen display
The image displayed represents the super-
vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-
cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches
the displayed vehicle segment
›››
Fig. 273
B
and
›
›
›
Fig. 27
4
B
. Ultimately, when the sec-
ond-t
o-l
ast segment is sho
wn, the collision
ar
ea has been r
eached. Stop the vehicle!
Segment colours (colour screen)
The distance to the obstacle ahead is
approximately 31-120 cm and 31-160
cm behind. The audio signal is intermit-
tent.
»
Yellow
293
Driving
The distance to the obstacle ahead or
behind is appr
o
ximat
ely
0-30 cm
. The
audio signal is continuous.
1)
With trailer
A specific image is displayed on the screen of
vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket
and an electrically connected trailer. In this
case, the distances behind the vehicle are not
indicated.
Switching the parking sensor system
sound on and off
If the button on the infotainment system
display is pressed briefly, it may mute the
sound of OPS warnings. To switch the warn-
ings back on, press the button again briefly.
When the OPS is switched off and back on
again, muting is cancelled. Error messages
cannot be switched off.
WARNING
Do not be distracted from the traffic when
looking at the screen.
Red
Reverse Assist* (Rear View
Camer
a)
Intr
oduction
The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers
during parking or reversing manoeuvres. The
camer
a image and certain orientation points
generated by the system are indicated on the
factory-fitted infotainment system screen.
Two types of location point (modes) can be
selected:
●
Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to
the road (e.g. in a car park).
●
Mode 2: r
everse parking parallel to the
curb.
The mode can be changed by pressing the
button on the infotainment system screen.
Only the mode to which the points can be
changed will be displayed.
WARNING
Use of the camera to calculate the dis-
tance from obstacles (peopl
e, vehicles,
etc.) is inaccurate and may cause acci-
dents and severe injuries.
●
The camera lens expands and distor
ts
the field of vision and displays the objects
on the screen in a different, vague manner.
●
Some objects may not be displayed or
may not be very clear (e.g. very thin posts
or fences), due to the resolution of the
monitor or if the light is dim.
●
The camera has blind spots in which ob-
stacles and people are not detected.
●
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of
snow and ice. Do not cover it.
WARNING
The intelligent technology in the rear assist
system cannot change the limits imposed
by the laws of physics and by the system it-
self
. Careless or uncontrolled use of the
rear assist system may result in severe inju-
ries and accidents. The system is not a re-
placement for driver awareness.
●
Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-
ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.
●
Always keep a close eye on the area
around the vehicle and always look to-
wards where you are parking. The display
shows the path of the rear end of the vehi-
cle using the current steering angle. The
1)
The permanent sound starts at a somewhat
greater distance on vehicl
es with a factory-fitted
towing bracket.
294
Help with parking and manoeuvring
front of the vehicle turns more in compari-
son with the rear.
●
Do not be distracted fr
om the traffic
when looking at the screen.
●
Always observe the area around the vehi-
cle, as the cameras do not always detect
children, animals or objects.
●
The system might not show all areas
clearly.
●
Only use the rear assist system when the
boot hatch is completely closed.
CAUTION
●
The camera only displays 2D images on
the screen. Due to the l
ack of depth, it
might be difficult or impossible to recog-
nise protruding objects or cracks in the
road.
●
The cameras may not always be able to
detect objects such as thin rails, fences,
posts and trees, etc. This could result in
damage to your car.
Usage instructions
Fig. 275
On the rear lid: location of the reverse
assist camer
a.
Fig. 276
Reverse assist indication: mode 2
connect
ed.
Function buttons on the screen:
displ
ay the menu; hide the menu.
T
urning off the r
e
v
ersing camera im-
ages.
1
2
Display help. The help list explains the
surf
aces and lines on the camer
a image
.
Pr
ess
to exit help.
Mute the sound.
Adjust the display: bright, contrast, colour.
Switching on the orientation points for
rear parking perpendicular to the road
(mode 1).
Displaying the optical parking system.
Reverse assist works when the ignition is on or
with the engine running. After switching off
the ignition, the reverse assist image remains
briefly on the screen.
Connecting the reverse assist
●
Select reverse gear. Mode 1 will be dis-
played.
Manual disconnection
●
Press the button (vehicles with an opti-
cal parking system).
●
OR: press a button on the factory-fitted in-
fotainment system, for example the but-
ton.
●
OR: press the button on the screen.
Automatic off
●
Release the reverse gear. The image turns
off after about 10 seconds, or, in vehicles with
»
3
4
5
6
7
295
Driving
parking systems (OPS), the OPS indication is
immediat
ely displ
ayed.
●
OR:
Driv
e f
orward at more than 15 km / h (9
mph), approximately.
Do not use the reverse assist system in the
following cases
●
– If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis
control (DCC).
●
If the image displayed is not very clear or
reliable (low visibility or dirty lens).
●
If the space behind the vehicle cannot be
clearly or completely recognised.
●
If the vehicle has been overloaded at the
rear.
●
If the driver is not familiar with the system.
●
If the rear lid is open.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. in a rear-
end collision. Have a specialised workshop
check the system.
Optical illusions of the camera (examples)
The rear assist camera produces two-dimen-
sional images. Any cracks in or objects pro-
truding from the ground or from other vehi-
cles are more difficult to spot or cannot be
seen due to a lack of depth in the image dis-
played.
Objects or other vehicles may seem to be
closer or further away than what they really
are:
●
On changing from a flat surface to a slope
or gradient.
●
On changing from a slope or gradient to a
flat surface.
●
If the vehicle has been overloaded at the
rear.
●
On approaching protruding objects. These
objects may be outside the angle of vision of
the camera when reversing.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of
snow and ice:
●
Moisten the lens using a commercially
available, alcohol-based glass cleaning
agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth
›››
.
●
Remove snow using a small brush.
●
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice
›
›
›
.
CAUTION
●
Never use abrasive cl
eaners to clean the
camera lens.
●
Never remove snow or ice from the cam-
era lens using warm or hot water. This could
damage the lens.
Note
●
SEAT recommends that you practise
parking with the rear assist system in a qui-
et l
ocation or in a car park to become fa-
miliar with the system, including the orien-
tation lines and their function.
●
The orientation lines will not be displayed
on the screen if the rear lid is open or the
factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically
connected to a trailer.
Parallel parking (mode 1)
Fig. 277
Screen: orientation lines for the park-
ing space behind the v
ehicl
e
.
Summary of the orientation points
Meaning of orient
ation lines displ
ayed on the
scr
een
›
›
›
Fig. 277. All of the lengths of the
orientation lines use a vehicle located on a
horizontal surface as reference.
296
Help with parking and manoeuvring
Red: safety distance, i.e. road area loca-
t
ed up t
o 40 cm behind the v
ehicl
e
.
Green: prolongation of the rear of the ve-
hicle (somewhat enlarged). The area dis-
played green ends around 2 metres be-
hind the vehicle, on the road.
Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the ve-
hicle as the steering wheel turns. The
area displayed yellow ends around 3 me-
tres behind the vehicle, on the road.
Parking
●
Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-
lect reverse gear.
●
Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel
so that the yellow orientation lines guide you
towards the space
›››
Fig. 277
3
.
●
Align the vehicle straight in the parking
pl
ace using the help of the gr
een orient
ation
lines.
1
2
3
Parallel parking (mode 2)
Fig. 278
Screen: orientation lines and surfaces
f
or the space behind the v
ehicl
e
.
After applying the turn signal, the lines and
surf
aces not r
equir
ed ar
e del
eted.
Summary of the orientation points
Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces dis-
played on the screen
›››
Fig. 278. All of the
lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle
located on a horizontal surface as reference.
Safety distance: road area located up to
40 cm behind the vehicle.
Vehicle side limit.
Turning point when parking. When the
yellow line touches the curb or another
limit of the parking space, the point for
changing direction (magnifying glass) will
have been reached.
1
2
3
Free space required to parallel park the
v
ehicl
e
. The surf
ace displ
ayed must com-
pletely fit in the space.
Possible vehicle parked next to the curb.
Parking
●
Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the
parking space and select reverse gear.
●
Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system
screen for parallel parking.
●
Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel
so that the surface displayed yellow on the
screen stops in front of any obstacles
5
(e.g.
another v
ehicl
e).
●
T
urn the st
eering wheel fully t
owards the
space and reverse slowly.
●
When the yellow line
3
touches the side
limit of the space
, e
.g. the bor
der or curb
(magnifying gl
ass), t
urn the steering wheel
fully in the opposite direction.
●
Continue reversing until the vehicle is inside
the space, parallel to the road. Correct the
position if necessary.
4
5
297
Driving
Towing bracket device*
T
r
ail
er mode
Intr
oduction
Take into account country-specific regula-
tions about driving with a trailer and the use
of a towing br
acket.
The vehicle has been developed primarily for
carrying people, although it can also be used
to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding
technical equipment. This additional load has
an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption
and vehicle performance and in some cases
can reduce the service intervals.
Driving with a trailer requires more force from
the vehicle, and thus more concentration
from the driver.
In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both
the vehicle and the trailer.
Maximum vertical load technically permit-
ted on the coupling device
The maximum technically permitted vertical
load of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch of
the towing device is 100 kg (220 pounds).
Vehicles with the Start-Stop system
If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the
Start-Stop system operates as normal. No
special characteristics need to be tak
en into
account.
If the system does not recognise the trailer or
the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by
SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-
nected by pressing the corresponding button
in the lower part of the centre console before
driving with the trailer, and it should remain
off for the rest of the journey
›››
.
T
r
ail
er w
eight/dr
awbar load
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If
you do not load the trailer up to the maximum
permitted trailer weight, you can then climb
correspondingly steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above
sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-
gine performance and the ability to climb
slopes, the tow load decreases proportional-
ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-
bination must be reduced by 10% for every
1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate
the trailer with the maximum authorised
drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing
bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-
it.
WARNING
Never use the trailer to transport people,
since it would put their life in danger and is
also pr
ohibited.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the towing bracket if it is in a
perfect state of repair and is pr
operly se-
cured.
●
Never modify or repair the towing bracket
in any way.
●
In order to reduce the danger of injury in
the event of rear-end collisions and to
avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists
when parking the vehicle, cover or remove
the tow hook when you are not using a trail-
er.
●
Never fit a towing bracket “with weight
distribution” or “load compensation”. The
vehicle has not been designed for this type
of towing bracket. The towing bracket
could fail and the trailer could be released
from the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects can affect driving
pr
operties and even cause an accident.
298
Towing bracket device*
●
Always secure the load pr
operly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to overturn than those with a
low one.
●
Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
●
Take great care when overtaking.
●
Reduce speed immediately if you notice
that the trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never drive at more than 80 km/h
(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more
than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-
cumstances). This also applies in countries
where driving at higher speeds is permit-
ted. Take into account the speed limit for
vehicles with trailers in the corresponding
country, as it could be less than the speed
limit for vehicles without a trailer.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
WARNING
If the towing bracket has been retrofitted
by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start
-Stop
system must be disconnected manually
whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise
the brake system could be damaged and
could consequently cause a serious acci-
dent or injury.
●
Always disconnect the Start-Stop system
manually when using a towing bracket that
has not been fitt
ed by a SEAT workshop.
Note
●
Bef
ore hitching or unhitching a tr
ailer, al-
ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm
›››
page 93. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could
cause the alarm to go off.
●
Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's
first 1000 km
›››
page 254.
●
SEAT recommends that, if possible, the
tow hook be removed or covered when it is
not going to be used. In the event of a rear-
end collision, the damage to the vehicle
could be greater if the tow hook is fitted.
●
Some retrofitted towing brackets cover
the rear towing eye. In these cases, the
towing eye should not be used for tow-
starting or for towing other vehicles. For
this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-
ted with a towing bracket, always keep the
tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.
Technical requirements
Vehicles that are f
act
ory
-fitt
ed with a t
owing
bracket meet all the technical and legal re-
quirements for driving with a trailer.
If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing
bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for
the maximum authorised load of the trailer
that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing
bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and
the trailer and must be properly secured to
the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing
bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for
this vehicle. Always check and take into ac-
count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-
structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with
weight distribution” or “load compensation”.
Towing bracket fitted on the bumper
Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to
the area where the bumper is mounted. The
towing bracket should not impair the bum-
per's function. Do not make modifications or
repairs to the exhaust system or the brake
system. Make regular checks to ensure that
the towing bracket is secure.
Engine cooling system
Driving with a trailer increases the load on the
engine and cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem should have sufficient coolant and be
prepared for the additional effort involved in
driving with a trailer.
»
299
Driving
Trailer brakes
If the tr
ail
er has its o
wn br
ak
e system, please
take the relevant legal requirements into ac-
count. Never connect the trailer's brake
system to the vehicle's brake system.
Tow cable
Always use a cable between the vehicle and
the trailer
›››
page 300.
Trailer tail lights
The trailer's rear lights should comply with
the statutory safety regulations
›››
page 300.
Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly
to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not
sure that the trailer's electrical connection is
correct, have it checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
Exterior mirrors
If you cannot see the area behind the trailer
with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,
additional mirrors will have to be installed in
accordance with the regulations of the coun-
try in question. The exterior mirrors should be
adjusted before you start driving and must
provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.
Trailer maximum electricity consumption
Never exceed the values indicated!
Brake lights (total) 84 Watts
Turn signal (on each side) 54 watts
Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts
Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts
Rear fog light 42 Watts
WARNING
If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is
not the right one, the trailer could become
det
ached from the vehicle and cause seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
●
If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor
-
rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
●
If the trailer absorbs excessive electric
current, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces. Only use the connections intended for
providing electric current to the trailer.
Hitching and connecting a trailer
Fig. 279 Schematic representation: assign-
ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock
-
et.
Pin Meaning
1 Left turn signal
2 Rear fog light
3 Earth, pins 1 to 8
4 Right turn signal
5 Rear light, right
6 Brake lights
7 Rear light, left
8 Reverse lights
9 Permanent live
10 Live charge cable
11 Unassigned
300
Towing bracket device*
Pin Meaning
12 Unassigned
13 Earth, pins 9 to 13
Power socket for trailer
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole po
wer
socket for the connection between the trailer
and the vehicle. With the engine running,
electrical devices on the trailer receive power
from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin
10 of the trailer power socket).
If the system detects that a trailer has been
connected, the consumers on the trailer will
receive electricity through this connection
(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.
This powers, for example, the trailer's interior
lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in
a caravan only receive electrical power if the
engine is running (through pin 10).
To avoid overloading the electrical system,
you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3
or pin 13 to each other.
If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you
will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not
be available.
Tow cable
The tow rope must always be securely fixed
to the towing vehicle and loose enough so
that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.
However
, make sure that the cable does not
rub on the ground while driving.
Trailer tail lights
Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure
they are working correctly and that they
comply with the relevant safety regulations.
Make sure that the maximum permissible
power that can be absorbed by the trailer is
not exceeded
›››
page 300.
Include in the anti-theft alarm
The trailer is included in the anti-theft system
if the following conditions are met:
●
If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an
anti-theft alarm and towing bracket.
●
If the trailer is electrically connected to the
towing vehicle through the trailer power sock-
et.
●
If the electrical systems of the vehicle and
trailer are in perfect condition and have no
faults or damage.
●
If the vehicle is locked with the key and the
anti-theft alarm is activated.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-
gered if the electrical connection with the
trailer is cut off.
Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always
turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt
sensor could cause the alarm to go off.
Trailers with LED tail lights
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED
rear lights cannot be connected to the anti-
theft alarm system.
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does
not go off when the electrical connection
with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with
light-emitting diodes.
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, it may lead to an ex
cessive
amount of current supplied to the trailer,
which can cause abnormalities in the entire
vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
Ensure that any repairs that need to be
carried out on the electrical system are
carried out by a specialised workshop.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem directly to the electrical connections
of the tail lights or any other power sour-
ces.
WARNING
Contact between the pins of the trailer
power socket can cause short cir
cuits,
overloading of the electrical system or
»
301
Driving
failure of the lighting system, and conse-
quently can cause accidents and serious
injuries.
●
Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-
er socket to each other.
●
Make sur
e any work on bent pins is car-
ried out by a specialised workshop.
CAUTION
Do not leave the trailer connected to the
v
ehicle when parked; place it on its suppor
t
wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or
falls due, for example, to a variation of the
load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will
be placed on the towing bracket and the
trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
Note
●
In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-
tems of the vehicle or tr
ailer, as well as in
the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-
spected by a specialised workshop.
●
If the trailer accessories consume energy
through the power socket to the trailer and
the engine is turned off, the battery will dis-
charge.
●
If the vehicle battery is running low, the
electrical connection with the trailer will be
automatically cut.
Trailer loading
Technically permissible maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling
de
vice
The technically permissible maximum trailer
weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow
›››
. The vertical load on the coupling is ex-
erted vertically from abov
e on the hook of the
towing bracket.
The information on the maximum trailer
weight and vertical load on the coupling de-
vice contained in the type plate of the towing
bracket are experimental values only. The
correct figures for your specific model, which
may be lower than these figures, are given in
the vehicle documentation. The information in
the vehicle documentation takes precedence
at all times.
To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-
mends making the most of the maximum ver-
tical load technically permissible on the
coupling device
›››
page 298. An insufficient
vertical load has a negative influence on the
behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.
The vertical load increases the weight on the
rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-
pacity.
Gross combination weight of the towing
vehicle and trailer
The gr
oss combination weight is the actual
weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual
weight of the loaded trailer.
In some countries trailers are classified into
distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-
taining information from a specialised work-
shop regarding which type of trailer is most
suitable for your vehicle.
Trailer loading
The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
must be balanced. In order to do this, the
load must be as close as possible to the max-
imum vertical load technically permissible on
the coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-
tributed between the back and front of the
trailer:
●
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible or
above it.
●
Secure the trailer load properly.
Tyre pressure
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-
cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendations.
When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the
towing vehicle with the maximum allowable
pressure
›››
page 330.
302
Towing bracket device*
WARNING
If the maximum permissible axle weight, the
maximum load technically permissible on
the coupling point, the maximum author-
ised v
ehicle weight or the gross combina-
tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer
are exceeded, accidents and serious inju-
ries may occur.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
●
The actual weight on the front and rear
axles must never exceed the maximum per-
missible axle weight. The weight on the
front and rear axles must never exceed the
maximum permissible weight.
WARNING
A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-
ity and security of the towing v
ehicle and
trailer, which could lead to accidents and
serious injuries.
●
Always load the trailer correctly.
●
Always secure the load properly using
belts or straps that are suitable and in
good condition.
Driving with a trailer
Adjusting the headlights
The front part of the vehicle may be raised
when the tr
ailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range adjuster
›››
page 121
1)
.
Specific features of driving with a trailer
●
If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake
gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-
vent the jerking that can be caused by the
locking of trailer wheels.
●
Due to the gross combination weight of the
towing vehicle and tr
ailer, the braking dis-
tance increases.
●
When going down a slope, go into a lower
gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-
tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-
vantage of the braking power provided by the
engine. Otherwise, the braking system could
overheat and even fail.
●
The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-
bination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, change the centre of gravity and the
properties of the vehicle.
●
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
is loaded, then the load distribution is incor-
rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and
with extra caution.
Hill starts with a trailer
Depending on the slope of the hill and the
combination weight of the towing vehicle and
trailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-
wards slightly when you first start up.
For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:
●
Press and hold the brake pedal.
●
Press the button once to disconnect the
electronic parking brake
›››
page 281.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way
down.
●
Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-
lector lever to position D
›››
page 245.
●
Pull out the button and hold it in that po-
sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and
trailer with the electronic parking brake.
●
Release the brake pedal.
●
Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of
a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch
pedal.
»
1)
This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED
xenon headlights.
303
Driving
●
Do not r
el
ease the
butt
on until the en-
gine has sufficient po
wer to start driving.
WARNING
If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may
lead to loss of control of the v
ehicle and
serious injury.
●
Driving with a trailer and transporting
heavy or large objects will change the ve-
hicle handling and braking distances.
●
Always drive cautiously and carefully.
Brake earlier than usual.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions. Slow down, especially
when driving down hills or slopes.
●
Accelerate with particular care and cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-
vres.
●
Take great care when overtaking. Reduce
speed immediately if you notice that the
trailer is swaying, however slightly.
●
Never attempt to “straighten” the towing
vehicle and trailer while accelerating.
●
Take into account the speed limit for vehi-
cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than
for vehicles without a trailer.
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle
and tr
ail
er combination
The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer
combination is an additional function of the
electronic stability contr
ol (ESC).
If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system
detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-
tion on the steering control to reduce the
weaving of the trailer.
Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-
tion requirements
●
The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-
ing bracket or has been retro-fitt
ed with a
compatible towing bracket.
●
The ESC and ASR are active. The control
lamp or is not lit up on the instrument
cluster.
●
The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-
cle through the trailer power socket.
●
The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h
(approx. 37 mph).
●
The maximum vertical load technically per-
missible is not being exceeded on the cou-
pling device.
●
The trailer has a rigid draw bar.
●
If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped
with a mechanical overrun brake.
WARNING
The enhanced safety provided by the elec-
tric stability control of the vehicl
e and trail-
er should not lead you to take any risks that
could compromise your safety.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
Accelerate with caution when the road is
slippery.
●
When adjusting any settings, stop accel-
erating.
WARNING
The electric stability control for the vehicle
and trailer may not correctly detect all
driving conditions.
●
When the ESC is s
witched off, the stabili-
sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-
so switched off.
●
The stability system does not always de-
tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise
these correctly.
●
When driving on surfaces with poor grip,
the trailer can even interfere with the sta-
bility system.
●
Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
tip over without having previously weaved.
●
If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-
tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.
installation of a bicycle rack with lights),
304
Towing bracket device*
repeated automatic braking may occur in
extreme driving conditions.
Electrically unlocking trailer
hook*
Description
Fig. 280
On the right side of the luggage com-
partment: butt
on f
or unl
ocking the t
o
w hook.
The towing bracket’s hook is located in the
bumper
. T
o
w hooks f
or el
ectrical unlocking
cannot be removed.
There should be no person, animal or object
in the path of the tow hook
›››
.
Unl
ocking the t
o
w hook and r
emo
ving it
●
Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic
parking brake
›››
page 281.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 280 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically and automatically
turns outwards. The button's control lamp
flashes.
●
Finish remove the tow hook by hand until
you feel and hear that it has engaged and
the control lamp on the button stays on.
●
Close the rear lid.
●
Before hitching the trailer, remove the dust
guard from the ball.
●
The indicator only lights when the boot
hatch is open and when a trailer is not hitch-
ed.
Retracting the tow hook
●
Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic
parking brake.
●
Switch off the engine.
●
Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri-
cal connection between it and the vehicle. If
you are using an adapter, remove it from the
trailer's power socket.
●
Open the rear lid.
●
Pull the
›››
Fig. 280 button briefly. The tow
hook unlocks electrically.
●
Turn the tow hook under the bumper with
your hand until you feel and hear that it en-
gages and the control lamp on the button re-
mains on continuously.
●
Close the rear lid.
The control lamp
●
If the warning light on the button
›››
Fig. 280 flashes, this means that the
tow hook has not been attached properly or
is damaged
›››
.
●
If the warning lamp
›
›
›
Fig. 280
remains
on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor-
rectly in place both when extracted and
when covered.
The control light of the lamp switches off ap-
proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid.
WARNING
Undue use of the towing bracket may
cause injury and accidents.
●
Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-
gaged.
●
Always ensure that no person, animal or
object is to be found in the path of the to
w
hook.
●
Never use a tool or instrument while the
tow hook is moving.
●
Never press the
›››
Fig. 280 button when
there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or
when a carrier system or other accessories
are mounted on the tow hook.
»
305
Driving
●
If the tow hook is not attached properly,
do not use it. Inst
ead, go to a specialised
workshop and have the towing bracket
checked.
●
If you detect any fault in the electrical
system or in the towing bracket, contact a
specialised workshop and ask them to
check it.
●
If the ball has a diameter of less than 49
mm at any one point, do not use the towing
bracket under any circumstances.
CAUTION
If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure
or steam devices, do not point the jet di-
rectly to
wards the retractable tow hook or
the trailer power socket, as this may dam-
age the joints or remove the grease neces-
sary for lubrication.
Note
At extremely low temperatures, the tow
hook may be impossible to operate
. In this
case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca-
tion (for example, a garage).
Fitting a bicycle carrier on the re-
tr
act
abl
e t
o
wbar
The maximum allowed weight of the carrier
syst
em, including the l
oad, is
75 k
g
. The carri-
er system should not protrude more than 700
mm backwards from the spherical head. On-
ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can
be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles
must be mounted as close to the vehicle as
possible (tow hook).
WARNING
The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-
cycle rack mounted on the to
w hook can
cause accidents and injury.
●
Never exceed the maximum weight or the
limits indicated above.
●
The bicycle rack may not be mounted to
the neck of the hook below the ball be-
cause, due to the shape of the neck and
depending on the rack model, the rack
could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-
cle.
●
Always read and take the manufacturer
assembly instructions into account.
CAUTION
If the maximum weight and limits indicated
above are ex
ceeded, the vehicle may suf-
fer considerable damage.
●
Never exceed the values indicated!
Note
SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos-
sible, all remov
able parts of the bicycles
before setting off. These parts include, for
example, baskets and saddlebags, child
seats or batteries. This improves aer
ody-
namics and the centre of gravity of the rack
system.
306
Towing bracket device*
Retrofitting a towing bracket
Description
Fig. 281
Limits and attachment points for ret-
r
ofitting a t
o
wing br
ack
et.
SEAT recommends that towing brackets be
r
etr
ofitt
ed at a specialised w
orkshop
. For ex-
ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-
just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-
tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership for this.
If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance
specifications should always be kept in mind.
The distance between the centre of the ball
head and the road
›››
Fig. 281
D
must never
be l
ess than indicat
ed. This al
so applies when
the v
ehicl
e is fully loaded, including the tech-
nically permissible maximum vertical load on
the coupling device.
Separation distances
›››
Fig. 281:
Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-
cle)
1,040 mm (41 inches)
74 mm (3 inches)
364 mm (14 inches)
247 mm (10 inches)
596 mm (23 inches)
1,097 mm (43 inches)
1,102 mm (43 inches)
WARNING
If the cables are improperly or incorrectly
connected, this may lead to malfunctions
in the entire v
ehicle electronic system, as
well as to accidents and serious injuries.
●
Never connect the trailer's electric sys-
tem to the electrical connections of the tail
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
lights or any other unsuitable power sour-
ces. Only use suitable connectors to con-
nect the tr
ailer.
●
The towing bracket should be retrofitted
only at a specialised workshop.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-
suit
able, the trail
er may separate from the
vehicle while driving. This could cause seri-
ous accidents and fatal injuries.
Note
●
Only use towing brackets that hav
e been
approved by SEAT for the model in ques-
tion.
●
In some versions, the fitting of a conven-
tional towing hook solution is not recom-
mended. Please consult your Technical
Service.
307
Practical tips
Practical tips
Checking and r
efilling l
e
v-
el
s
R
efuelling
Refuelling
Fig. 282
Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.
The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the
v
ehicl
e
.
The fl
ap that co
vers the tank cap is unlocked
and locked automatically using the central
locking.
●
Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
left side.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
●
Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap
›››
Fig. 282.
●
Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as
the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel
supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the
nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion
chamber in the fuel tank.
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank
flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at
›››
page 309.
The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-
en in
›››
page 355.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
rious burns and other injuries.
●
When refuelling, turn off the engine, the
auxiliary heater
›››
page 166
and turn off
the ignition for safety reasons.
●
Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or
a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in
the vicinity due to the risk of explosion.
●
Observe legislation governing the use,
storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-
ter in the vehicle.
●
For safety reasons we do not recommend
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-
cle. In an accident the canister could be
damaged and could leak.
●
If, in e
xceptional circumstances, you
have to carry a spare fuel canister, please
observe the following points:
–
Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-
ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.
This could cause an explosion. Always
place the canister on the ground to fill
it.
–
Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-
ble into the spare fuel canister.
–
If the spare fuel canister is made of
metal, the filling nozzle must be in con-
tact with the canister during filling. This
helps prevent an electrostatic charge
building up.
–
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is
explosive. Risk of fatal accident!
CAUTION
●
If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it
shoul
d be removed immediately. It could
otherwise damage the paintwork.
●
Never run the tank completely dry. The
catalytic converter can be damaged.
●
When filling the fuel tank after having run
it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel
engine, the ignition must be switched on for
at least 30 seconds before starting the en-
gine. When you then start the engine it may
308
Checking and refilling levels
take longer than normal (up to one minute)
to start firing.
For the sake of the environment
Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause
the fuel t
o overflo
w if it becomes warm.
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual release of the fuel tank flap
. If nec-
essary, request assistance from special-
ised personnel.
Note
Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective
device that prevents the inser
tion of the
wrong fuel hose
1)
. It is only possible to re-
fuel with Diesel nozzles.
●
If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if
it is very small, it is possible that it will not
be able to open the protective device. Be-
fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by
turning it, try a different pump or request
specialist help.
●
If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-
ister, the protective device will not open.
One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in
very slowly.
Fuel types
Identification of fuels
1)
Fig. 283
Identification of fuels according to
Eur
opean Union (EU) Dir
ectiv
e 2014/94/
Fuels are identified by different symbols on
the pump and on your v
ehicl
e's t
ank fl
ap
. The
identification serves to prevent confusion
when choosing the fuel.
Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
nol). The number indicates the percent-
1
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
f
or e
x
ampl
e
, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-
diesel). The number indicates the per-
centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”
means, for example, a proportion of bio-
diesel of max. 7%.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas.
Type of petrol
3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines
The correct grade of petr
ol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded
petrol. The petrol must comply with the
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled
(E10)
2)
. The types of petrol are differentiated
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via
the anti-knock index (AKI).
»
2
3
1)
Depending on country
2)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
309
Practical tips
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 oct
ane petr
ol at l
east
W
e r
ecommend refuelling with super 95 oc-
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power
loss) may be used.
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at
least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
CAUTION
●
Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.
E30 - E100 butt
on must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
vehicles with Totalflex engine
›››
page 310,
Ethanol fuel.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
other metal additives entails a permanent
deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
must not be used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an octane rating higher than the
one required by the engine can be used.
●
In countries in which there is no sulphur-
free fuel, it is also all
owed to use low sul-
phur content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines
You can recognise vehicl
es with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with with
the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that
›››
page 309, Type of
petrol
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
sively with petrol every 10,
000 km to de-
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
fuel might have left in the engine.
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
310
Checking and refilling levels
Diesel
3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines
Please note the information on the inside of
the fuel t
ank flap.
We recommend you use Diesel according to
standard EN 590.
The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-
tures, thus affecting the start or operation of
the engine. Ask your service station attendant
if their diesel is suitable for winter use.
CAUTION
●
Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,
heating oil, other fuel
s or thinning agents
as they can cause severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
●
If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not
start the engine under any circumstances.
Risk of damaging the fuel system and the
engine! Obtain technical assistance.
AdBlue
®
Inf
ormation about AdBlue
®
In vehicles with “Selective Catalytic
R
eduction”, a special ur
ea solution (AdBlue) is
inject
ed int
o the e
xhaust gas system in front
of the catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen
oxide emissions.
The consumption of AdBlue
®
depends on
your personal driving style, the temperature
of the system and on the outdoor tempera-
ture when the vehicle is used.
AdBlue
®
freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13
°F). The system has heating elements that
guarantee its operation even at low tempera-
tures.
The capacity of the AdBlue
®
tank is approx.
17 litres.
When the range is less than 2400 km the
instrument panel screen displays a message
requesting an AdBlue
®
refill.
If this message is ignored, the yellow warning
lamp will come on when the remaining
range is less than 1000 km. The indication
that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to
restart the engine will appear on the instru-
ment panel display.
If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when
remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will
no longer be possible to restart the engine.
The red warning lamp will light up.
AdBlue
®
is a registered brand of the German
Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)
and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel
Exhaust Fluid).
WARNING
If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehicle
may not restart after s
witching the ignition
off. The emergency start or jump start will
not be possible either!
●
Top up with AdBlue at the lat
est 1,000 km
or 600 miles before it runs out.
●
Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low.
WARNING
AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that
can cause injuries if it t
ouches the skin,
eyes or respiratory or
gans.
●
If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and
skin, rinse for at least 15 minutes with plen-
ty of water and seek medical help.
●
If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash your
mouth with plenty of water for at least 15
minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting un-
less recommended by a Doctor. Seek med-
ical advice immediately.
CAUTION
AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted
vehicle parts, plastic, it
ems of clothing and
carpets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed as
quickly as possible using a damp cloth and
plenty of cold water.
●
If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove
with warm water and a sponge.
CAUTION
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank excessively can
cause damage t
o the tank.
311
Practical tips
Control and warning lamps
It lights up red
The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level
is too low.
Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then
top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue
›››
page 312.
and
They light up red
The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the
AdBlue system.
Contact a specialised workshop
. Have the system
checked there.
It lights up yellow
The AdBlue reserve is low.
Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or mil
es) that
are indicated
›››
page 312. SEAT recommends con-
tacting a specialised workshop.
and
They light up yellow
There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable
AdBlue fluid has been used.
Contact a specialised workshop. Have the syst
em
checked there.
Several warning and control lamps should
light up f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on, signalling that the function is be-
ing verified. They will switch off after a few
seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Fill AdBlue
®
Fig. 284
On the rear left side of the luggage
compartment: AdBlue t
ank
, behind a co
v
er
.
Fig. 285 AdBlue tank with filler neck cap and
r
efilling bottl
e
Operations prior to refilling
P
ark the v
ehicl
e on a fl
at surf
ace and turn off
the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a
curb, the level indicator may not detect the
refill properly.
312
Checking and refilling levels
Refilling AdBlue
Only use AdBlue
®
that complies with ISO
222
41-
1. Only use original cont
ainers.
●
Observ
e the instructions and inf
ormation
provided by the refill bottle manufacturer.
●
Observe the expiry date.
●
Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle.
●
Place the refill bottle
2
upside down inside
the t
ank fill
er neck
.
●
Pr
ess the r
efill bottle against the filler neck
and keep in this position.
●
Add at least 5.0 litres of AdBlue (6 bot-
tles). A lower quantity would be insufficient.
●
Wait until the contents of the refill bottle
have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do
not crush or damage the bottle!
●
Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise and
remove it carefully
›››
.
●
You can tell when the AdBlue tank is full be-
cause the bottl
e will be empt
y.
Cl
osing the t
ank filling neck
●
Scr
ew on the tank filler neck cap
›››
Fig. 285
1
clockwise until it is fully inser-
t
ed.
●
Pl
ace the co
v
er and t
urn the shut off anti-
clockwise to close it.
Operations before driving
●
After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-
nition.
●
Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-
onds for the system to detect the fluid load.
●
Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds
before starting the engine!
WARNING
AdBlue
®
should only be stored in the origi-
nal container
, which should be tightly
closed and kept in a safe place.
CAUTION
●
Only use AdBlue
®
that complies with ISO
22241-1. Only use original containers.
●
Nev
er mix AdBlue
®
with water, fuel or ad-
ditives. Any type of damage caused by
such a mixture will not be covered by the
warranty.
●
Never pour AdBlue
®
into the fuel tank.
This could result in engine damage.
●
Do not carry the refill bottle inside the
vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-
ture changes or damage to the bottle), the
AdBlue
®
may damage the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ-
ment-friendly manner.
Note
You can buy refill bottles that are adequate
for AdBlue
®
use at SEAT dealerships .
Engine management and
emissions control system
Introduction
WARNING
●
Due to the high temperatur
es reached by
the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you
should not park your vehicle near a surface
that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the emission control system.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near
est spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
»
313
Practical tips
Flashes
Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic
converter.
Reduce speed and driv
e carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
It lights up
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 314.
It lights up
Fault in the petrol engine management.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop
.
When the ignition is switched on, the (Electronic
Pow
er Control) lights up and should go off once the
engine has started.
It lights up
Diesel engine preheating system.
The engine can be started straight away when the
l
amp switches off.
Flashes
Fault in the diesel engine management.
Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a
specialised workshop
.
Note
While the control lamps , , or are
on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel
consumption may go up and the engine
might lose power.
Catalytic converter
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic
converter
●
Only use unleaded petr
ol with petrol en-
gines.
●
Never run the fuel tank dry.
●
When changing or adding engine oil, do not
exceed the necessary amount
›››
page 320,
Topping up the engine oil.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
›››
page 50.
If you should notice misfiring, uneven running
or loss of power when the car is moving, have
the vehicle inspected by a specialised work-
shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp
will light up when any of these symptoms
occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can
enter the exhaust system and escape into the
atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also
be damaged by overheating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause an irregular fuel supply can cause
ignition faults. This allo
ws unburnt fuel to
enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage the cata-
lytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
w
orking perfectly, there may be a smell of
sulphur from the gases on occasions. This
depends on the sulphur cont
ent of the fuel
used. This can quite often be avoided by
changing to another brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-
late filt
ers
The particulate filter eliminates most of the
soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-
mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If
the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short
journeys are made continuously), it becomes
blocked with soot and the following indica-
tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-
late filter: cleaned while the vehi-
cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-
ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).
Regeneration of the petrol and diesel par-
ticulate filter
Requirements for the regeneration journey:
the engine is at operating temperature.
314
Checking and refilling levels
●
Driv
e at a speed of betw
een 50-
120 km/h
(31-
75 mph). This incr
eases the temperature
and burns the soot in the filter
›››
.
●
Consider the legal speed limits as well as
the r
ecommended gears.
●
End the r
egener
ation journey once the con-
tr
ol w
arning lamp has gone out.
If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes
of running in regeneration mode, have a spe-
cialised workshop repair the fault
WARNING
Always adjust your speed to suit the weath-
er conditions, roads, braking distance and
traffic if the par
ticulate filter is in its regen-
eration phase. Route recommendations
should never make you disregard each
country's specific traffic regulations.
CAUTION
●
When the exhaust system detects that
the particul
ate filter is close to saturation,
the self-cleaning function of this system
recommends optimal driving for this func-
tion.
●
Due to the high temperatures caused by
the regeneration of the particulate filter, it
is possible that the radiator fan will acti-
vate after stopping the engine, even it its
operating temperature has not been
reached.
●
Noise, smells and high idle speeds can
occur during regener
ation.
●
Always use the correct engine oil and the
correct fuel to make sure the useful life of
the particulate filter is not affected. Also
avoid making short trips all the time.
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compart-
ment
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scal
ding as w
ell as the risk of accident or fir
e
when w
orking in the engine compartment
(e
.g. when checking and refilling fluids).
Always observe the warnings listed below
and follow all general safety precautions.
The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-
tentially hazardous area
›››
.
WARNING
When work is done in the engine compart-
ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even
fires can occur.
●
S
witch the engine off, remove the key
from the ignition and apply the electronic
parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual
gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has
an automatic gearbox, place the selector
lever in position P. Wait for the engine to
cool down.
●
Never open the bonnet if you see steam
or drips of cool
ant being released from the
engine compartment. Wait until no steam
or coolant can be seen before opening the
bonnet.
●
Keep children away from the engine
compartment.
●
Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-
tion on the engine compartment, as these
may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-
ant).
●
Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-
trical system, particularly at the points
where the jump leads are attached
›››
page 50. The battery could explode.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure.
●
Protect face, hands and arms by cover-
ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect
against escaping coolant and steam.
»
315
Practical tips
●
Always make sure you hav
e not left any
objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in
the engine compartment.
●
If you have to work underneath the vehi-
cle, you must use suitable stands addition-
ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of
accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for
securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
injury.
●
If any work has to be performed when the
engine is started or with the engine running,
there is an additional, potentially fatal,
safety risk from the rotating parts, such as
the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,
and from the high-voltage ignition system.
You should also observe the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing
and long hair do not get trapped in ro-
tating engine parts. Danger of death.
Before starting any work remove jewel-
lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear
tight-fitting clothes.
–
Never accelerate with a gear engaged
without taking the necessary precau-
tions. The vehicle could move, even if
the handbrake is applied. Danger of
death.
●
Observe the following additional warn-
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
trical system is necessary:
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-boar
d network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extin-
guisher immediately available.
For the sake of the environment
●
Inspect the gr
ound underneath your vehi-
cle regul
arly so that any leaks are detec-
ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil
or other fluids in the area where it was
parked, have your vehicle inspected at the
workshop.
●
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-
vironment. For this reason you should make
regular checks on the ground underneath
your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a
specialised workshop.
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 286
Release lever in the driver's footwell
ar
ea.
Fig. 287
Cam under the bonnet
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is r
el
eased fr
om inside the v
ehi-
cl
e.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
against the windscreen.
316
Checking and refilling levels
●
Open the door and pull the l
e
v
er under the
dashboar
d
›
››
Fig. 286
1
. The bonnet disen-
gages fr
om the l
ocking of the pr
ot
ectiv
e lid
due to the effect of a spring.
●
Lift the bonnet using the opening lever
›››
Fig. 287 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully.
The bonnet remains open thanks to the pres-
surised gas spring.
Closing the bonnet
●
To close the bonnet, pull it down to over-
come the gas strut pressure.
●
Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock carrier.
Do not press down.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
WARNING
Make sure that the bonnet is properly
closed. If it opens when driving, it can
cause an accident.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the
windscreen wiper arms, only open it when
the windscreen wipers are in place against
the windscr
een.
Checking levels
Fig. 288
Diagram for the location of the various el-
ements.
»
317
Practical tips
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the v
ehicl
e must be check
ed. Ne
v
er
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
›››
page 321
Engine oil level dipstick
›››
page 319
Engine oil filler cap
›››
page 320
Brake fluid reservoir
›››
page 323
Battery (under the cover)
›››
page 324
Windscreen washer reservoir
›››
page 323
Note
The layout of parts may vary depending on
the engine.
Engine oil
Gener
al not
es
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year r
ound.
Because the use of high-qualit
y oil is essen-
tial f
or the corr
ect oper
ation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
1
2
3
4
5
6
We recommend that the oil change be done
by a t
echnical service or specialised w
ork
-
shop
.
If the engine oil l
evel is too low
You can get information about the correct en-
gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,
VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or
API SN.
Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,
VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.
Have the oil changed by a specialised work-
shop.
Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW
504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00
could increase consumption and the vehicle’s
CO
2
emissions.
Recommended by SEAT
SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to
guarantee high SEAT engine performance.
–
–
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low
›››
page 319 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the specifications
VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,
VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)
›››
page 318.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend k
eeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
318
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil specifications
Diesel engines
With LongLife service VW 507 00
Without LongLife service VW 507 00
Warning lamp
Flashes red
Do not carry on driving!
Engine oil pressure too lo
w.
Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.
If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level
is corr
ect, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at
idle speed! Obtain technical assistance.
It lights up yellow
Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.
Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunit
y to
do so
›››
page 320.
It flashes yellow
Fault in the oil level sensor.
Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-
til then it is advisable t
o check the oil level every time
you refuel.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
Checking the engine oil level
Fig. 289 Engine oil dipstick.
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of
the oil.
Checking oil l
e
v
el
–
P
ark the v
ehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the
operating temperature is reached and then
stop.
–
Wait for about two minutes.
–
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with
a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it
in as far as it will go.
–
Then pull it out once more and check the oil
level
›››
Fig. 289. Top up with engine oil if
necessary.
The oil must leave a mark between zones
A
and
C
. It can never go above zone
A
.
●
Zone
A
: do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: you can add oil but keep the level
in that z
one
.
●
Z
one
C
: add oil until zone
B
.
Depending on ho
w you driv
e and the condi-
tions in which the v
ehicl
e is used, oil con-
sumption can be up t
o 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil
consumption is likely to be higher for the first
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine com-
partment or on the engine must be carried
out cautiously.
●
When working in the engine compart-
ment, al
ways observe the safety warnings
›››
page 315.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
A
, do not start
the engine. This could result in damage to
the engine and cat
alytic converter. Con-
tact a Technical Service.
319
Practical tips
Topping up the engine oil
Fig. 290
In the engine compartment: Engine
oil fill
er cap
.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
the w
arnings
›
›
›
in Working in the engine
compar
tment on page 315
.
T
opping up engine oil
●
Unscr
e
w cap from engine oil filler opening
›››
Fig. 290.
●
Carefully add oil in small quantities (no
more than 0.5 l).
●
To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you
add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes
and recheck the oil level
›››
page 319.
●
If necessary, add some more oil.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
›››
Fig. 289
B
, unscrew the engine oil filler
cap car
efully
›
›
›
.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown
in the corr
esponding engine compartment il
-
lustr
ation
›
›
›
page 317.
Engine oil specification
›››
page 319.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents when topping up.
CAUTION
If the oil level is above area
›››
Fig. 289
A
,
do not start the engine. This could r
esult in
damage to the engine and catalytic con-
verter. Contact a specialised workshop.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must never be above zone
›››
Fig. 289
A
. Otherwise oil can be drawn
in through the crankcase breather and l
eak
into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-
tem.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms to the corre-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend k
eeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Engine oil change
We recommend that you have the engine oil
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
Only change the engine oil yourself if you
have the specialist knowledge requir
ed!
●
Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings
›››
page 315.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil
may cause burn injuries.
●
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,
such as acid burns, caused by splashes of
oil.
●
When removing the oil drain plug with
your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to
help prevent oil from running down your
arm.
●
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
●
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be
stored in a safe place out of the reach of
children.
CAUTION
No additives should be used with engine oil.
This could result in engine damage. Any
damage caused by the use of such addi-
tives w
ould not be covered by the factory
warranty.
320
Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
●
We recommend that you change the en-
gine oil and the filter at a technical service
centr
e.
●
Never pour oil down drains or into the
ground.
●
Use a suitable container when draining
the used oil. It must be large enough to hold
all the engine oil.
Cooling system
Cool
ant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the f
act
ory with a specially tr
eat
ed mixt
ure of
water and at least 40 % of the additive
G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture
gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy
parts of the engine cooling system against
corrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-
siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-
ant.
To protect the cooling system, the percent-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
additive G12evo for optimal protection
against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13
(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-
tection again corrosion and should be avoi-
ded.
WARNING
If there is not enough anti-freeze in the
coolant system, the engine may fail lead-
ing t
o serious damage.
●
Ensure that the percentage of additive is
correct for the lowest expected ambient
temperature in the zone in which the vehi-
cle is to be used.
●
When the outside temperature is very
low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-
cle would be immobilised.
CAUTION
The original additives should never be
mixed with coolants which are not ap-
pro
ved by SEAT.
●
If the fluid in the expansion tank is not
purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-
cates that the G12evo additive has been
mixed with an inadequate coolant. The
coolant must be changed as soon as possi-
ble if this is the case!
For the sake of the environment
Coolants and additives can contaminate
the envir
onment. If any fluids are spilled,
they should be coll
ected and correctly dis-
posed of, with respect to the environment.
321
Practical tips
Refilling coolant
Fig. 291
In the engine compartment: marking
on cool
ant e
xpansion t
ank
.
Fig. 292
Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion t
ank cap
.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment
›
›
›
page 31
7
.
Top up coolant when the level is below the
(minimum) mark.
Checking coolant level
–
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be between the marks
›››
Fig. 291. When the engine is hot, it may
be slightly above the upper mark.
Topping up coolant
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with
a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left
›››
.
–
Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
ant in the e
xpansion t
ank
, otherwise you
coul
d
damage the engine. If there is no
coolant in the expansion tank, do not con-
tinue driving. You should obtain professional
assistance
›››
.
–
If there is still some coolant in the expansion
t
ank
, t
op up t
o the upper mark
.
–
Top up with coolant until the level becomes
stable.
–
Screw the cap back on correctly.
If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-
cialised workshop to have the cooling system
examined.
WARNING
●
The cooling system is under pressure. Do
not unscr
ew the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
burns!
●
Store the antifreeze in its original con-
tainer and keep it out of reach of children.
●
If working inside the engine compart-
ment, remember that, even when the igni-
tion is switched off, the radiator fan may
start up automatically, and therefore there
is a risk of injury.
CAUTION
If you run out of coolant in the expansion
tank, park the car in a safe place and do
not continue driving. Obt
ain technical as-
sistance.
322
Checking and refilling levels
Brake fluid
Check and r
efill the br
ak
e fluid
Fig. 293
Engine compartment: brake fluid res-
erv
oir cap
.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment
›
›
›
page 31
7
.
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the
and markings.
However, if the brake fluid level goes down
noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
mark, there may be a leak in the brake
system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning
light on the instrument panel display monitors
the brake fluid level
›››
page 85.
Changing brake fluid
We recommend that you have the brake fluid
changed by a Technical Service.
WARNING
If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-
ble/old brake fluid is used, the br
ake sys-
tem may fail or braking power may be re-
duced.
●
Check the brake system and the brake
fluid level regularly!
●
When the brake fluid is used and brakes
are subjected to extreme braking forces,
bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-
tem. These bubbles can significantly re-
duce braking power, notably increasing
braking distance, and could result in the to-
tal failure of the brake system.
●
Be sure to always use the correct brake
fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly
meets the VW 501 14 standard.
●
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake
fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official
Service. If none is available, use only high-
quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925
CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards
FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
●
The replacement brake fluid must be
new.
●
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
original container in a safe place out of
reach of children. Risk of poisoning!
CAUTION
Brake fluid should not come into contact
with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abr
asive.
For the sake of the environment
Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.
Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a
prof
essional to dispose of them.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Checking the l
e
v
el of the windo
w
w
asher tank and refilling it
Fig. 294 In the engine compartment: window
w
asher t
ank cap
.
The window washer tank is in the engine
compartment
›
›
›
page 31
7
.
»
323
Practical tips
Check the water level in the windscreen
w
asher r
eserv
oir r
egul
arly and top up as re-
quired.
The container for the windscreen washer
contains the cleaning fluid for the wind-
screen, the rear window and the headlight
washer system*.
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 315.
●
The window washer tank is marked with the
symbol on the cap.
●
Check there is enough windscreen water in
the reservoir.
Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-
screen and headlights. We recommend that
you always add a product to the windscreen
washer fluid.
Recommended windscreen wipers
●
For the hottest seasons we recommend
summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-
tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:
1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-
ter).
●
All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.
Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,
up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2
parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of
mixture in the washer fluid tank.
The capacity of the window washer tank can
be found in
›››
page 355.
CAUTION
If the water from the windscreen washer
does not contain enough anti-freeze
, it may
freeze on the windscreen and rear window,
reducing forward and rear visibility.
●
In winter, ensure the windscreen washer
contains enough anti-freeze.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
windscreen wiper system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the ventila-
tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on
the windscreen and reduce visibility.
CAUTION
Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other
similar additives with the windscreen wash-
er w
ater. A greasy layer may be formed on
the windscreen which will impair visibility.
●
Use clean water with a window cleaner
recommended by SEAT.
●
If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to
the water in the reservoir.
CAUTION
●
Do not mix cleaning products recommen-
ded by SEAT with other products. This
coul
d lead to flocculation and may block
the windscreen washer jets.
●
When topping up service fluids, make ab-
solutely certain that you fill the fluids into
the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-
ids could cause serious malfunctions and
engine damage!
●
Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-
duces visibility through the windscreen,
and leads t
o loss of visibility in headlights
in models with headlight washer.
Battery
General information
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment and is almost maint
enance-fr
ee
. It is
check
ed as part of the Inspection Service
.
Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean
and have the correct tightening torque, espe-
cially in summer and winter.
All work on batteries requires specialist
knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official
Service or a workshop specialising in batter-
ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!
The battery must not be opened. Never try
to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-
erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-
tery that could cause an explosion.
Battery warning indications
Wear eye protection.
324
Checking and refilling levels
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-
tective glov
es and eye protection. Rinse any
splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are
prohibited.
The battery should only be char
ged in a well-
ventilated zone
. Risk of explosion!
Keep children away from acid and batteries!
Disconnecting the battery
The battery should only be disconnected in
ex
ceptional cases. When the battery is dis-
connected, some of the vehicle's functions
are lost. These functions will require resetting
after the battery is reconnected.
When disconnecting the battery from the ve-
hicle on-board network, disconnect first the
negative cable and then the positive cable.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you
disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm
will be triggered.
Winter conditions
During the winter, the starting power may be
reduced, and if necessary, the battery should
be charged
›››
WARNING
Always be aware of the danger of injury
and chemical burns as well as the risk of
accident or fire when working on the bat-
tery and the electrical system:
●
Wear eye pr
otection. Protect your eyes,
skin and clothing from acid and particles
containing lead.
●
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
protective gloves and eye protection. Do
not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid
through the vents.
●
Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on
the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-
tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If
acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a
doctor immediately.
●
Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking
are prohibited. When handling cables and
electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks
and electrostatic charge. Never short the
battery terminals. High-energy sparks can
cause injury.
●
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under charge.
The batteries should be charged in a well-
ventilated room only.
●
Keep children away from acid and bat-
teries.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative ca-
ble on the battery must be disconnected.
When a light bulb is changed, you need on-
ly switch off the light.
●
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-
locking the v
ehicle before you disconnect
the battery! The alarm will otherwise be
triggered.
●
When disconnecting the battery from the
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
●
Switch off all electrical devices before
reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first
the positive cable and then the negative
cable. Never reverse the polarity of the
connections. This could cause an electrical
fire.
●
Never charge a frozen battery, or one
which has thawed. This could result in ex-
plosions and chemical burns. Always re-
place a battery which has frozen. A flat
battery can also freeze at temperatures
close to 0°C (+32°F).
●
Ensure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the battery.
●
Never use a defective battery. This could
cause an explosion. Replace a damaged
battery immediately.
CAUTION
●
Do not expose the battery to direct sun-
light o
ver a long period of time, as the in-
tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the
battery housing.
●
If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-
ditions for a long period, protect the
»
325
Practical tips
battery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will
be damaged.
Warning lamp
It lights up
Alternator fault.
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out when the engine
has start
ed running.
If the control lamp lights up while driving,
the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
tery. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte
level
The electrolyte level should be checked reg-
ul
arly in high-mil
eage v
ehicl
es, in hot coun-
tries and in ol
der batteries.
●
Open the bonnet and then lift the cover
that protects the front part of the battery
›››
in Working in the engine compart-
ment on page 315.
●
Check the col
our displ
ay in the "magic eye"
on the t
op of the batt
ery.
●
If ther
e are air bubbles in the window, tap
the window gently until they disperse.
The position of the battery is shown in the
corresponding engine compartment diagram
›››
page 317.
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery.
There are two different colours:
●
Black: correct charge status.
●
Transparent/light yellow: the battery must
be replaced. Contact a specialised work-
shop.
Charging or changing the battery
If you often drive short distances or if the ve-
hicl
e is not driv
en f
or l
ong periods, the batt
ery
should be checked by a specialised work-
shop between the scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec-
ommend you have the vehicle battery
checked by a Technical Service where it will
be re-charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a
specialised workshop only, as batteries using
special technology have been installed and
they must be charged in a controlled environ-
ment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the
conditions of its location and has special
safety features. If the battery must be re-
placed, consult a technical service for infor-
mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the
size and maintenance, performance and
safety requirements of the new battery in
your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT
recommends you have the battery replaced
by a technical service.
Start-Stop systems (
›››
page 243) are equip-
ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must
only be replaced with a battery of the same
specifications.
Automatic disconnection of devices
The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-
matically implements a range of measures to
prevent the battery from discharging when
high demands are made on it:
●
the idling speed is increased so that the al-
ternator provides more electricity.
326
Wheels
●
wher
e necessary, the po
w
er of the most
po
w
erful devices is reduced or even com-
pletely disconnected.
●
On starting the engine, the power supply
from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga-
rette lighter may be interrupted for a short
time.
The on-board management program cannot
always prevent the battery from running flat.
For example, if the ignition is left on for a long
period with the engine off or if the side lights
or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is
stationary.
WARNING
●
Always use only maintenance free bat
-
teries that do not run flat alone and whose
properties, specifications and size corre-
spond to the standard battery. The specifi-
cations are indicated on the battery case.
●
Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings
›››
in General information on page 325.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain toxic substances such
as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be
disposed of appropriately and must not be
disposed of with or
dinary household waste.
Wheels
Wheel
s and t
yr
es
Intr
oduction
The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard
with anti-puncture technology t
yres (Conti-
Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of
up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a pro-
tective layer inside the tread.
The inclusion of this technology means that
there is no type of spare wheel included in
the vehicle's equipment.
SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and
wheels is carried out by a specialised work-
shop. These workshops have the necessary
special tools and replacement parts, trained
personnel and facilities for disposing of the
old tyres while respecting the environment.
SEAT recommends taking your car in for
technical service.
General notes
–
When driving with ne
w t
yr
es
, be especially
car
eful during the first 500 km (300 miles).
–
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar
obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as
possible at a right angle to the obstacle.
–
Check from time to time if the tyres are
damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or
dents). Remove any foreign objects em-
bedded in the treads.
–
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
–
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
–
Replace any missing valve caps as soon as
possible.
–
Mark the wheels before taking them off so
that they rotate in the same direction when
put back.
–
When removed, the wheels or tyres should
be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark
place.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger
wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.
Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important
›››
page 330.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in
poor condition.
Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.
»
327
Practical tips
If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-
pact or hav
e been damaged, hav
e a special
-
ised w
orkshop check whether or not it is nec-
essary t
o change the tyre.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily
visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the
car pulling to one side, this may indicate
that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce
speed immediately if there is any reason to
suspect that damage may have occurred. In-
spect the tyres for damage. If no external
damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully
to the nearest specialised workshop and
have the car inspected.
Foreign objects inserted in the tyre
●
Do not remove foreign bodies if they have
penetrated through the tyre wall!
●
If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility
system, where necessary seal the damaged
tyre as shown in section
›››
page 41. Use a
specialised workshop for repair or replace-
ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership for this.
The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread
wraps around the foreign body and provision-
ally seals the tyre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-
rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-
ways note the direction of rotation indicated
when mounting the wheel. This makes sure
that optimal use is made of tyre properties in
terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise
and wear.
Subsequent fitting of accessories
If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or
wheel trims, we recommend that you consult
with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice
regarding current techniques.
Speed symbols
The speed rating indicates the maximum
speed permitted for the tyres.
max. 150 km/h (93 mph)
max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
max. 170 km/h (106 mph)
max. 180 km/h (112 mph)
max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
max. 200 km/h (124 mph)
max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 240 km/h (149 mph)
max. 270 km/h (168 mph)
max. 300 km/h (186 mph)
P
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
Z
W
Y
Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for
tyres with a maximum authorised speed
above 240 km/h (149 mph).
WARNING
●
New tyres do not have maximum grip dur
-
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly
carefully to avoid possible accidents.
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. This
may cause an accident.
●
If you notice unusual vibrations or if the
vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop
the vehicle immediately and check the
tyres.
●
Never use old tyres or those with an un-
known history of use.
New wheels and tyres
It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced
by a specialised w
orkshop
. Ther
e they hav
e
the r
equired knowledge, the special tools and
the corresponding spare parts.
●
Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you
have installed new tyres, drive the first 500
km carefully and at a moderate speed.
●
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of
the same type, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, tread pattern.
●
When changing tyres, do not change just
one; change at least two on the same axle.
328
Wheels
●
If you w
ant t
o equip your v
ehicl
e with a
combination t
yres and rims that are different
to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-
cialised workshop before purchasing them
›››
The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for
your v
ehicl
e ar
e list
ed in the v
ehicle docu-
mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity
or COC document
1)
). The vehicle documen-
tation varies depending on the country of res-
idence.
If the type of spare wheel is different form the
normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter
tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare
wheel should only be used temporarily in the
event of a puncture, and the vehicle should
be driven with care. Refit the normal road
wheel as soon as possible.
In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels
must be fitted with tyres of the same brand,
type and tread so that the traction system is
not damaged by a difference in the number
of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event
of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the
same perimeter as normal tyres should be
used.
Manufacturing date
The manufacturing date is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the
wheel):
DOT ... 2218 ...
it means, for example, that the tyre was man-
ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.
WARNING
●
Use only combinations of tyres and rims,
as well as suitabl
e wheel nuts, approved by
SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-
aged, causing an accident.
●
For technical reasons it is not possible to
use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases
not even wheels from the same vehicle
model should be used.
●
Always ensure that the tyres you have
chosen have adequate clearance. When
selecting replacement tyres, do not rely
entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on
the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-
fer significantly depending on the manu-
facturer. Lack of clearance can damage
the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-
danger road safety. Risk of accident!
●
Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in
an emergency, and drive with due care.
●
The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-
ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-
hibited use can cause accidents or can
damage your vehicle.
●
If decorativ
e hubcaps are subsequently
fitted, make sure that they allow enough air
in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-
dent!
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of according to
the l
aws in the country concerned.
Note
●
A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-
ted t
o find out whether wheels or tyres of
different sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
●
Never mount used tyres if you are not
sure of their “previous history”.
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
329
Practical tips
Tyre life
Fig. 295
Position of tyre pressure specification
pl
at
e
Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-
ing habits will incr
ease the useful lif
e of your
t
yr
es.
●
Check t
yre pressure at least once a month,
and also prior to any long trip.
●
The tyre pressure should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the
pressure of warm tyres.
●
Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-
ried by the vehicle
›››
Fig. 295.
●
Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.
●
Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from
time to time.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at
the factory is shown on a label and is valid for
summer and winter tyres. This label
›››
Fig. 295 is either on the driver door strut or
inside the fuel tank flap.
Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-
duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-
ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-
rect inflation pressures are very important,
especially at high speeds.
The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the
vehicle is going to carry the maximum load,
the tyre pressure should be increased to the
maximum value indicated on the sticker
›››
Fig. 295.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre
wear.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
However, certain circumstances may lead to
imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-
brations in the steering wheel.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,
as they otherwise cause excessive wear on
steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted
or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you
should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-
ficial Service.
WARNING
Unsuitable handling of the wheels and
tyres may lead to sudden t
yre pressure los-
ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-
out.
●
The driver is responsible for ensuring that
all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-
ted to the right pressure. The recommen-
ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 295.
●
Check tyre pressures regularly and en-
sure they are maintained at the pressures
indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low
could cause overheating, resulting in tread
detachment or even burst tyres.
●
When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure
should be that indicated on the label
›››
Fig. 295.
●
Regularly check the cold inflation pres-
sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the
330
Wheels
tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they
are cold.
●
Regularly check your t
yres for damage
and wear.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speed or loads specified for the type of
tyre fitted on your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption.
Tread wear indicators
Fig. 296
Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.
Fig. 297 Interchanging tyres.
Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be
f
ound on the base of the original t
yr
e tr
eads,
or
dered at regular intervals and running
across the tread
›››
Fig. 296. The letters "TWI"
or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark
the position of the wear indicators.
The minimum permitted profile depth
1)
have
been reached when the tyres have worn
down to the wear indicators. Replace the
tyres with new ones
›››
.
Changing wheel
s ar
ound
T
o ensur
e that the w
ear is equal on all tyres
the wheels should be changed round from
time to time according to the system
›››
Fig. 297. The useful life of all the tyres will
then be about the same time.
WARNING
The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread is worn down to the tr
ead
wear indicators. Failure to follow this in-
struction could result in an accident.
●
Particularly in difficult driving conditions
such as wet or icy roads. It is important that
the tyre tread be as deep as possible and
be approximately the same on the tyres of
both the front and the rear axles.
●
The scant driving safety due to insuffi-
cient tread depth is particularly evident in
vehicle handling, when there is a risk of
“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water
and when driving through corners, and
braking is also adversely affected.
●
The speed has to be adapted according-
ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control
over the vehicle.
Wheel nuts
The wheel nuts ar
e mat
ched t
o the rims.
When inst
alling diff
erent wheels (for instance
alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is
important to use the correct wheel nuts with
the right length and correctly shaped bolt
»
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
331
Practical tips
heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-
cur
ely and that the br
ak
e syst
em functions
corr
ectly.
The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-
theft wheel nuts*
›››
page 45.
WARNING
Wheel nuts should never be greased or
oiled.
●
Use only wheel nuts which belong to the
wheel.
●
If the prescribed t
orque of the wheel nuts
is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the
tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts
and threads can be damaged.
CAUTION
See
›››
page 48
to find out the recommen-
ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for
steel and alloy rims.
Winter tyres
–
Winter tyres must be fitted on all f
our
wheel
s.
–
Only use wint
er t
yr
es that are approved for
your vehicle.
–
Please note that the maximum permissible
speed for winter tyres may be lower than
for summer tyres.
–
Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-
fective when the tread is worn down.
–
After fitting the wheels you must always
check the tyre pressures. When doing so,
take into account the correct tyre pressures
listed on the rear of the front left door frame
›››
page 330.
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-
sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice
and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or with
high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on
the sidewall).
Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-
proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these
tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents
(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC
1)
).
The vehicle documentation varies depending
on the country of residence.
Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-
ties when the tread is worn down to a depth
of 4 mm.
The performance of winter tyres is also se-
verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is
still much deeper than 4 mm.
A code letter indicating the speed limit is
stamped on all winter tyres
›››
page 328.
Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds
must have an appropriate sticker attached
so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-
ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-
ice and specialised workshop. Please note
the regulations to this effect in your country.
“All-weather” tyres can also be used instead
of winter tyres.
Using winter tyres with V-rating
Please note that the generally applicable
240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres
with the letter V is subject to technical re-
strictions; the maximum permissible speed
for your vehicle may be significantly lower.
The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-
pends directly on the maximum axle weights
for your car and on the listed weight rating of
the tyres being used.
It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to
check the maximum speed which is
1)
COC = certificate of conformity.
332
Wheels
permissible for the V-rated tyres fitted on
your car on the basis of this inf
ormation.
WARNING
Exceeding the maximum speed permitted
for the winter tyres fitt
ed on your car can
cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-
trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.
For the sake of the environment
When winter is over, change back to sum-
mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In
t
emperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-
ance will be improved if summer tyres are
used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises
while driving will all be reduced.
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be fitted t
o the fr
ont
wheel
s
, e
ven on vehicles with four-wheel
drive.
●
Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions.
●
Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).
●
If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC
›››
page 286, Connecting and disconnect-
ing the ASR.
Snow chains will improve braking ability as
well as traction in winter conditions.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre
combination.
205/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 15 mm
Remove any central wheel trims and the rim
ring before fitting snow chains.
WARNING
The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted
chains could lead to serious accidents and
damage.
●
Al
ways the appropriate snow chains.
●
Observe the fitting instructions provided
by the snow chain manufacturer.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
speeds when driving with snow chains.
CAUTION
●
Remove the snow chains t
o drive on
roads without snow. Otherwise they will im-
pair vehicle handling, damage the tyres
and wear out very quickly.
●
Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-
ed if the chains come into direct contact
with them. SEAT recommends the use of
covered snow chains.
Tyre pressure loss indicator
Control lamp
Blinks or lights up
The tyre pressure of a wheel has dropped considera-
bly compared to the pressure set by the driv
er.
Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon
as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking!
Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any dam-
aged tyres.
System fault
Consult a specialised workshop if the tyre pressur
e is
correct and the lamp remains lit after switching the
ignition off and back on again.
Several control and warning lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ch-
ed on while the function is verified. They will
switch off after a few seconds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning lamps on page 86.
333
Practical tips
Tyre monitor system
Fig. 298
Centre console: tyre pressure loss in-
dicat
or butt
on.
The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel
r
e
v
olutions and, with this inf
ormation, the
tr
ead of each wheel using the ABS sensors.
The tyre monitor indicator warns the driver if it
detects a considerable drop in tyre pressure
of one or several tyres while driving. Loss of
tyre pressure will be indicated by the indica-
tor as well as an audible warning and
sometimes a text message on the instrument
panel display.
Wheel tread change
The wheel diameter changes when:
●
Tyre pressure is changed manually.
●
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
●
The tyre structure is damaged.
●
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a
load.
●
The wheels on an axle are subject to a
heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).
●
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
●
The wheel on one axle is changed.
There may be a delay in the reaction of the
tyre monitoring indicator or it may not indi-
cate anything under certain circumstances
(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-
paved roads, or when driving with snow
chains).
Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicator
After changing the tyre pressure or replacing
one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-
cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for
example, when the front and rear wheels are
swapped.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Press and hold down the
›››
Fig. 298
button until an audible signal is heard.
When driving, the system self-calibrates the
tyre pressure provided by the driver and the
wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied
speeds the programmed values are collected
and monitored.
With the wheels under very heavy loads, the
tyre pressure must be increased to the total
recommended tyre pressure before calibra-
tion
›››
Fig. 295.
If the tyre monitor system button is pressed
down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
WARNING
When the tyres are inflated at different
pressures or at a pressure that is t
oo low
then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a
loss of control of the vehicle and a serious
or fatal accident.
●
If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-
mediately and avoid any sudden turning or
braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,
and check the tyre pressure and status.
●
The tyre monitoring system can only op-
erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-
ted to the correct pressure when cold.
●
If a tyre has not been punctured and it
does not have to be changed immediately,
drive to the nearest specialised workshop
at a moderate speed and have the tyre
checked and inflated to the correct pres-
sure.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indica-
tor button could result in the indicat
or giv-
ing erroneous messages or prevented from
indicating the danger caused by a defec-
tive tyre
›››
Fig. 298.
334
Wheels
Note
●
Driving for the first time with new tyres at
a high speed can cause them t
o slightly ex-
pand, which could then produce an air
pressure warning.
●
Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring
system. Regularly check your tyres to en-
sure that the tyre pressure is correct and
that the tyres are not damaged due to
puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.
Remove objects from the tyres only when
they have not pierced the tyres.
●
The tyre monitoring indicator does not
function when there is a fault in the ESC or
ABS
›››
page 284.
●
An incorrect warning may be given when
snow chains are in use because the chains
increase the tread of the wheel.
335
Maintenance
Maintenance
SEAT Maint
enance Pr
o-
gr
amme
Service int
erv
als
Service work and the Digital Main-
tenance Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Main-
t
enance Pl
an”)
The SEAT deal
ership or a specialised w
ork
-
shop records Service receipts in a central
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
mentation of the service history, it is possible
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
receipt after every service carried out con-
taining all the services carried out on the sys-
tem.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-
able in some markets. In this case, your
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-
rent documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop
documents the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were
changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
the next inspection. This information is docu-
mented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
ised workshop will be able to provide specific
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service intervals ar
e not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
●
Make sure that any repairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
alised w
orkshop.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicle due to insufficient w
ork or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maintain its value, but also its corr
ect oper-
ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
guidelines.
Set Service or Flexible Service In-
t
erv
al
s
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service int
erv
al displ
ay
on the instrument panel displ
ay serv
es as a
reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and
the conditions of use of the car, either the
Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
applied for an oil change service..
336
SEAT Maintenance Programme
How to know which type of service needs
t
o his v
ehicl
e
●
Check the t
abl
es below:
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI2
Every 7500 km or after
1 year
b)
QI3
Every 10000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI4
Every 15000 km or aft
er
1 year
b)
QI6 Flexible
Accor
ding to the service in-
t
erv
al displ
ay
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
Bear in mind the inf
ormation about the speci-
fications of the engine oil accor
ding t
o the
VW st
andar
d
›››
page 319.
Particular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
you have to carry out this service, take into
account the individual conditions of use and
personal driving style. A major component of
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
stead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the speci-
fications of the engine oil according to the
VW standard
›››
page 319.
If you do not want to the flexible service
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service interval display
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
ted by the service interval display on the in-
strument panel display
›››
page 81.
The service interval display gives information
for service dates that involve an engine oil
change or an inspection. When the time for
the corresponding service comes, additional
work required, such as the change of brake
fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information about the terms of use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
v
erse conditions of use, some of the work
must be carried out before the next service
period or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in ar
eas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
on equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
»
337
Maintenance
The Service Advisor of your specialised
w
orkshop will gl
adly inf
orm you
about the
need of perf
orming service work between
normal service intervals, always considering
the conditions of use of your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service intervals ar
e not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
●
Have the services conducted at author-
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
shops.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicle due to insufficient w
ork or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Service sets
Sets of services include all the maint
enance
w
orks
needed t
o ensur
e the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
divided into inspection and review services.
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
opment of components) the sets of services
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
specialised workshop is always receiving up-
dates in time.
Additional service offers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceiv
ed f
or their v
ehicl
es and appr
oved by
SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.
These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
facturer's requirements in terms of design,
accuracy of the measurements and materi-
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this
reason, we always recommend the use of
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be
held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manu-
f
act
ur
er
's r
equirements, are an additional
service to you, offering the possibility of re-
placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT approved accessories
for your v
ehicle. The reliability, safety and
suitability of these accessories have been in-
spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT Service Mobility
Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
v
ehicl
e you will be abl
e t
o enjoy the benefits
and co
verage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
For the first two years after the purchase,
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
ditional costs.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
you carry out the recommended Inspection
338
Vehicle maintenance
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service
.
If your SEAT v
ehicl
e is immobilised due t
o a
f
ault or an accident, our assistance services
will help you keep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility
Service differs depending on the country in
which the vehicle was purchased. For further
information ask your SEAT dealership or the
SEAT website in your country.
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of ne
w v
ehicl
es. Check the pur
-
chase agr
eement or complementary addi-
tional documentation provided by your Tech-
nical Service to see the conditions and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official
Service.
Vehicle maintenance
Maint
enance and cl
eaning
Basic observ
ations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain
the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may
become a pr
erequisite to demand the war-
ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-
work.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions
for application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cleaning products and other materials
used f
or car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe
place, out of the reach of children. Danger
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When purchasing car care products,
chose products that ar
e compatible with
the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.
remains of insects, bird excr
ements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
more damage it can cause to the surface.
High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
light, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaning equipment
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
distance between the spraying water. Do not
aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-
roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-
ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or
camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least
40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
pressure cleaner.
»
339
Maintenance
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a dir
ect str
eam or one that has a r
ot
ating
jet f
or forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed
60°C.
Automatic car washes
Spray the vehicle before starting the car
wash.
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator,
especially if your vehicle has detachable
parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-
ing products that do not contain solvents.
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by
hand
To prevent damage to the vehicle when
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner
for matte paint.
Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To
avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do
not apply too much pressure.
Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with
a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-
bre cloth.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of
water with a leather cloth.
WARNING
●
Only wash the vehicle with the ignition
swit
ched off or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk
of accident!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the in-
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of
cut!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
dent! In this case the brakes should be
dried by pressing the brake pedal several
times.
CAUTION
●
Before washing the vehicl
e in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-
view mirrors must always be folded/de-
ployed electrically!
●
Do not wash the vehicl
e in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programs that in-
clude the use of wax. This could dam-
age the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them
may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
wash bays. These places are prepar
ed to
prevent oily water from getting into the
public drains.
Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
tions
The cleaning and maintenance of individual
components of the v
ehicl
e can be check
ed in
the f
oll
owing tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have
340
Vehicle maintenance
special questions or parts that are not listed.
T
ak
e he gener
al consider
ations int
o account
›››
in Take special care with... on
page 344.
Cleaning the exterior
Windscreen wipers
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers
Headlights / Tail lights
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Sensors / Camer
a l
enses
Problem Solution
Dirt
Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-
vent-fr
ee cleaning product
Camera lenses: soft cloth with
an alcohol-free cleaning prod-
uct
Snow/ice
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
with no solvents
Wheels
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water
Brake abrasion
dust
Acid-free special cleaning
product
End exhausts
Problem Solution
Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
uct is required
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if a
steel cleaning product is re-
quir
ed
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
P
aint
Problem Solution
Paint flaws
Check the paint's colour code
in an authorised service and re-
store with a touch-up pencil
Spill
ed fuel Immediately rinse with water
Environmental rust
tank
Apply rust remover and then
apply har
d wax. Go you your
specialised workshop if you
have any queries
Problem Solution
Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
shop take care of this
The wat
er does
not create drop-
lets on the cl
ean
paint
Maintain with hard wax (at
least 2 times a year)
No shine de-
spite sober main-
tenance/paint
Treat with suit
able wax and ap-
ply paint preservative after
-
wards if the wax used does not
contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Tanks, e.g. insect
remains, bird
droppings, tree
sap
, road salt
Immediately soften with water
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
Fat-based dirt,
e.g. cosmetic
products or
sunscreen
Delete immediately with a neu-
tral soap solution
a)
and a soft
cloth
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Carbon fibr
e par
ts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
ted parts
›››
page 339
»
341
Maintenance
Decoration slides
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of water
Interior cl
eaning
Windows
Problem Solution
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and
then dry with a cloth
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Pl
astic par
ts
Problem Solution
Dirt Damp cloth
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if pos-
sible solvent-free plastic clean-
er
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Displ
ays/instrument panel
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal
display cleaner
Control panels
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with
neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of water
Seat belts
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, al-
lowed t
o dry before retracting
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
F
abrics, ar
tificial, Alcantara leather
Problem Solution
Particles of dirt
stuck to surfaces
Vacuum cl
eaner
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
bl
ood etc.
Absorbent cloth and neutral
soap solution
a)
Problem Solution
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil, make-
up, et
c.
Apply a neutral soap solution
a)
.
Absorb the dissolved grease
and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
must treat it with water after-
wards
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream etc.
Special stain remo
ve: dry with
an absorbent cloth, if applica-
ble, apply neutral soap solution
afterwards
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Nat
ur
al leather
Problem Solution
Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
a)
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dry stains: stain remover suita-
ble for leather
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil, make-
up, et
c.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
and suitable stain remover for
leather
Dry stains: grease solvent
spray
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream etc.
Stain remo
ver suitable for
leather
342
Vehicle maintenance
Problem Solution
Care Apply preservative cream regu-
larly to protect fr
om sunlight.
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of water
Carbon fibre par
ts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean like plastic parts
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
a dry cl
oth or sponge
.
●
Do not use cl
eaning pr
oducts that cont
ain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be re-
paired immediately.
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of
cracking the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and
exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to
and fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.
Risk of cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the
rear window, do not put stickers over the
heating elements.
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of
damaging the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The screens, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched off and cooled down before clean-
ing.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
age!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
trol panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must nev-
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
should they be allowed to come into contact
with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
ask your specialised workshop to replace the
belt in question.
»
343
Maintenance
Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-
er
●
Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara
l
eather with l
eather cl
eaning pr
oducts, sol
-
vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers
or similar products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it
removed there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro
fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscreen. In bad visibility conditions
such as humid weather, darkness or when
the sun is in its l
owest point, visibility may
be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
blades to make noise.
Note
●
Remains of insects can be removed much
mor
e easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Remove the vehicle from traffic
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or a l
ong period of time
, cont
act a qualified
w
orkshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-
sion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account instructions regarding
the vehicle's battery
›››
page 324.
Accessories and modifi-
cations t
o the v
ehicl
e
Accessories, spar
e par
ts and
repair work
Introduction
Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer
for advice before purchasing accessories
and r
eplacement parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-
ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-
son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-
cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-
ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official
Service has the latest information from the
manufacturer and can recommend accesso-
ries and replacement parts which are suita-
ble for your requirements. They can also an-
swer any questions you might have regarding
official regulations.
We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-
sories and Genuine SEAT parts
®
. SEAT has
tested these parts and accessories for suita-
bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official
Services have the necessary experience and
facilities to ensure that the parts are installed
correctly and professionally.
344
Accessories and modifications to the vehicle
Any r
etro-fitted equipment which has a di-
r
ect eff
ect on the v
ehicl
e and/or the way it is
driven, such as a cruise control system or
electronically-controlled suspension, must
be approved for use in your vehicle and bear
the e mark (the European Union's authorisa-
tion symbol).
If any additional electrical devices are fit-
ted which do not serve to control the vehicle
itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop
or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the
sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in
the European Union).
WARNING
Accessories, for example telephone hold-
ers or cup holders, should never be fitt
ed
on the covers, or within the working range
of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger
of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-
dent.
Technical modifications
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
components, softw
ar
e
, wiring or dat
a tr
ansfer
in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.
You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership
cannot be held liable for any damage
caused by modifications and/or work per-
formed incorrectly.
We therefore recommend that all work should
be performed by a SEAT Official Service us-
ing genuine SEAT parts
®
.
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or
other work on your vehicle can lead t
o mal-
functions and cause accidents.
Radio telephones and office equip-
ment
Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
Any r
etr
ofit inst
all
ations of r
adio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations
of approved types of radio transmitters provi-
ded that:
●
The antenna is installed correctly.
●
The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
vehicle (and shielded cables are used to-
gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).
●
The effective transmitting power does not
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options
for installing and operating radio transmitters
with a higher transmitting power.
Mobile radio transmitters
Commercial mobile telephones or radio
equipment might interfere with the electron-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.
This may be due to:
●
No external aerial.
●
External aerial incorrectly installed.
●
Transmitting power more than 10 W.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial
›››
.
Pl
ease not
e al
so that the maximum r
ange of
the equipment can only be achie
ved with an
external aerial.
Business equipment
Retrofit installation of business or private
equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and
that any such equipment carries the mark.
Any retrofit equipment that could influence
the driver's control of the vehicle must have a
type approval for your vehicle and must carry
the e mark.
WARNING
Mobile telephones or radio equipment
which is operated inside the vehicle without
»
345
Maintenance
a properly installed external aerial can
create excessiv
e magnetic fields that
could cause a health hazard.
Note
●
The post
erior fitting of electric and elec-
tronic equipment in this v
ehicle affects its
licence and could lead to the withdrawal of
the vehicle registration document under
certain circumstances.
●
Please use the mobile telephone/radio
operating instructions.
346
Information for the user
Information for the user
Inf
ormation f
or the user
Inf
ormation st
or
ed by the
control units
Storage of accident data (Event
Data Recorder)
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
(EDR).
The EDR’
s function is t
o r
ecor
d dat
a in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da-
ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-
ferent vehicle systems behaved.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-
ing data and data from the restraint systems,
such as:
●
How different vehicle systems worked.
●
Whether the driver and the occupants were
wearing their seat belts.
●
How hard the acceleration or brake pedal
was pressed.
●
Vehicle speed.
These data will provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
Data from the driving assist systems are also
recorded. This includes data such as whether
the systems were inactive or active and if
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
aforementioned situations, accelerating or
decelerating the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-
cludes data from systems such as:
●
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
●
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist).
●
Park Pilot system
The EDR data are only recorded in specific
accident situations. No data are recorded in
normal driving conditions.
No audio or video data inside or around the
vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-
ces are personal data such as name, age, or
gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
(such as criminal proceedings authorities)
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
other data sources and create a personal
reference in the context of an accident inves-
tigation.
In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
face while the vehicle is switched on.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
tractual provisions.
Due to legal requirements in safety-related
products, SEAT may use the EDR data for
field research and in order to improve vehicle
system quality. Any data used for the purpo-
ses of research will be treated anonymously
(in other words, no reference will be made to
the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
Description and operation
Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser-
ies of el
ectr
onic contr
ol units r
esponsibl
e for
the engine and gearbox management. In ad-
dition, the control units supervise the per-
formance of the exhaust gas system and the
airbag systems.
Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,
these electronic control units are continuous-
ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event of
faults or deviations from the theoretical val-
ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the
warning lamps on the instrument panel light
up in the event of faults.
This data can only be read and analysed us-
ing special equipment.
»
347
Information for the user
The storing of the data allows specialised
w
orkshops t
o det
ect and r
epair f
aults. Stored
data may include:
●
Data relating to the engine or the gearbox
●
Speed
●
Direction of travel
●
Braking force
●
Detection of seat belt
The vehicle control units never record conver-
sations held by passengers in the vehicle.
In vehicles equipped with an emergency call
function via the mobile phone or other appli-
ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible
to send the vehicle position. If the control unit
records an accident with airbag activation,
the system may automatically send a signal.
This will depend on the network operator.
Normally, transmission is only possible in
areas with good coverage.
Event Data Recorder
The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-
corder.
An event data recorder temporarily stores the
vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of
an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed
information about how the accident occur-
red. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys-
tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat
belt status, seat positions and airbag activa-
tion times may be stored. The volume of data
depends on the manufacturer.
Event data recorders can only be mounted
with authorisation from the vehicle owner
and, in some countries, they are governed by
local legislation.
Reprogramming of control units
On the whole, all the data required for the
component management is stored in the
control units. The programming of certain
convenience functions, such as the turn sig-
nals, individual door opening and instructions
on the display can be modified using special
equipment at the workshop. If this is the case,
the information and descriptions given in the
Instruction Manual will not match the original
functions. Therefore, SEAT recommends that
any modifications be recorded in the section
“Other workshop notes” in the Maintenance
Programme.
The technical service centre must have a re-
cord of any modification to the programming.
Reading the vehicle's fault memory
There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-
cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-
ory. The fault memory documents errors and
deviations from the theoretical values of the
electronic control units.
The diagnostics connector is in the driver side
footwell area, next to the lever for opening
the bonnet, below a cover.
The fault memory should only be read and
reset by a specialised workshop.
Other important information
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of mat
erial
s and manuf
ac-
t
ur
e of your new SEAT.
Constructive measures to encourage re-
cycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of materials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
348
Information for the user
●
Use of r
ecycl
ed mat
erial
s and/or mat
erials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Stickers and plates
Some parts in the engine compartment come
from the factory with certificates of saf
ety, la-
bels or plates containing important informa-
tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, for
example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas-
senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or
on the floor of the boot.
●
Never remove these certificates of safety,
labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in
good condition and are legible.
●
If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of
safety, label or plat
e, is replaced, the special-
ised workshop should attach the information
back in the same place.
Certificate of safety
A certificate of safety on the door strut states
that all the safety standards and regulations
established by the national traffic authorities
responsible for road safety were met at the
time of manufacture. It may also give the
month and year of manufacture, together
with the vehicle ID number.
Warning of high voltage label*
There is a label close to the bonnet lock
which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's
electrical system. The vehicle ignition system
complies with several standards, including
the Canadian standard, ICES-002.
Using the vehicle in other countries
and continents
The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for
use in a particular country in accordance
with the national legislation in f
orce at the
time of manufacture.
If the vehicle is sold in another country or
used in another country for an extended peri-
od of time, the applicable legislation of that
country should be observed.
It may be necessary to fit or remove certain
pieces of equipment or to deactivate certain
functions. Service work may also be affected.
This is particularly true if the vehicle is used in
a different climate for an extended period of
time.
As there are different types of frequency
bands around the world, you may find that
the radio or navigation system supplied at the
factory does not work in another country.
CAUTION
●
SEAT does not accept liability for any
damage to the vehicl
e due to the use of a
lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or
the non-availability of genuine spare parts.
●
SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi-
cle does not comply in part or in full with
the legal requirements of other countries or
continents.
349
Information for the user
Radio and antenna reception
The aerial of radio and navigation systems fit-
ted at the factory may be mounted in diff
er-
ent parts of the vehicle:
●
On the inside of the rear window, next to the
rear window heating,
●
on the inside of the rear side windows,
●
on the inside of the windscreen,
●
on the roof of the vehicle.
Aerials mounted on the inside of a window
can be recognised by the fine wires.
CAUTION
Aerials on the inside of windows may be
damaged if knocked or if cleaned with cor-
rosiv
e or acid cleaning products. Do not
stick adhesive labels over the heating ele-
ments and never clean the inside of the
rear window with corrosive or acid prod-
ucts or other similar chemical products.
Note
There may be interference with AM station
reception if electrical equipment is used
close to the ant
enna built into the glass.
Information about SEAT repairs
WARNING
Repairs or modifications which are not per-
formed correctly may result in damage or
errors in the v
ehicle operation, affecting
the effectiveness of the driver assist and
airbag systems. This could result in serious
accident.
●
Have any repairs or modifications carried
out at a specialised workshop.
Collection of end-of-life vehicles
and scr
apping
Collection of end-of-life vehicles
An e
xt
ensiv
e netw
ork of used car r
eception
centres already exists in much of Europe. Af-
ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re-
ceive a certificate of destruction describing
the environmentally friendly scrapping of the
vehicle in accordance with applicable legis-
lation.
We will collect the used vehicle free of
charge, provided it complies with all national
legislation.
Please see your technical service for further
information about the collection and scrap-
ping of end-of-life vehicles.
Scrapping
The relevant safety requirements must be ob-
served when the vehicle or components of
the airbag or belt tensioner systems are
scrapped. These requirements are known to
specialised workshops.
Recycling of electrical or electron-
ic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
ar
e not permanently fitt
ed in the v
ehicl
e must
be mark
ed with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be
discarded as home waste but through selec-
tive waste collection.
Information about the EU Di-
rective 2014/53/EU
Simplified EU compliance declara-
tion
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manuf
act
ur
ers of these de
vices de-
cl
are that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
350
Information for the user
The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is av
ail
abl
e online at the f
oll
owing address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Table of correspondences
The table of correspondences will help you to
associate the name of the device in the dec-
laration of compliance with the f
eatures of
the vehicle and the terminology used in the
on-board documentation.
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the device
according t
o the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Radiofrequency re-
mote control (vehicle)
FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS14
77,
FS94
Radio frequency re-
mote control (auxili-
ary heater)
Sender STH SEAT -
50000914
T
elestart
Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW
Telestart
Bluetooth MIB2 Entry
MIB Standard 2
MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the device
according t
o the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Keyless Access Sys-
tem
MQB-B B
Radar sensors for as-
sistance syst
ems
ARS4-B
MRRev
o14F
BSD3.0
Central control unit 5WK50254
5WK50474
Infotainment system MIB2 Entry
MIB Standard 2
MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Wireless charging WCH-183
WCH-185
5G0.980.611
Connection to the ex-
t
ernal antenna of the
car
UMTS/GSM-MMC
UM
TS/GSM-MMC-AG2
LTE-MBC-EU
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the device
according t
o the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Instrument panel eNSF
Immobilizer integrated in
dashboard module
instrument cluster
Antenna FM/AM Ant
enna Base
Antennas MQB27 Small/Big
family
Antennas KSA Small Fam III
5Q0.035.507 R
oof Antenna
GNSS Antenna VAG
720166002
8S7.035.503.B
»
351
Information for the user
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the device
according t
o the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225
6F9.035.225
3V5.035.577.A
7N0.
035.552.J
7N0.035.552.K
7N0.035.552.Q
5F4.035.225
5F4.035.225.A
5F4.035.225.B
5F9.035.225
5F9.035.225.A
5F9.035.225.B
575,035,225
575.035.225.A
575.035.225.B
5FJ.035.225
5FJ.035.225.A
5FJ.035.225.B
Addresses of the manufacturers
According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all
relevant components must include the ad-
dr
ess of the manufacturer.
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required:
Radioelectrical
equipment fitted
in the vehicle
Addresses of the
manuf
acturers
Radiofrequency remote
control key
Della KGaA Hueck & Co
.
Rixbecker Straße 75
59552 Lippstadt,
GERMANY
Radioelectrical
equipment fitted
in the vehicle
Addresses of the
manuf
acturers
Radio frequency re-
mote control (auxiliary
heater)
Digades gmbH
Äußere W
eberstraße 20
02763 Zittau, GERMANY
W
ebasto Thermo &
Comfort SE
Friedrichshafener Str. 9
82205 Gilching, GERMANY
R
adar sensors for as-
sistance systems
ADC Automotive Dist
ance
Control Systems GmbH
Peter
-Dornier-Straße 10
88131 Lindau, GERMANY
Robert Bosch GmbH
Postfach 16 61
71226 Leonber
g,
GERMANY
Frequency bands, station power
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
All SEAT models
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
352
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra
Auxiliary heating
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco
Bluethooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Connection to the external antenna of the car
GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambra
and T
arr
aco
GSM 1800: 1
7
10-
1785 MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm
LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm
Tarraco
LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm
LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Radar sensors for assistance systems
76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra
35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco
24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra
»
353
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models
a)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
354
Indications about the technical data
Technical data
Indications about the
t
echnical dat
a
Impor
t
ant inf
ormation
Introduction
The values indicated in the technical data
may diff
er depending on optional equipment
or v
ersion of the model, as w
ell as in the case
of special v
ehicl
es and equipment for certain
countries.
The information in the official vehicle docu-
mentation takes precedence at all times.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-
fications section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denote engine power
.
rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the die-
sel combustion power.
RON
Resear
ch octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petrol.
Vehicle identification data
Vehicle ID number
The vehicle ID number can be found in the
foll
owing places:
●
One the vehicle's data label.
●
In front, under the windscreen.
●
To the right in the engine compartment.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right
hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export
countries do not have a type plate.
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om measur
ements perf
ormed or supervised
by certified EU l
abor
atories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions de-
pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
gers.
Filling capacities
Tank level
Petrol and die-
sel engines
73 l, 8 l reserve
Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-
t
ainer
Versions without
headlight washer
system
approx. 3.5 litr
es
Versions with
headlight washer
system
approx. 6 litr
es
Weights
Load on the roof
The maximum authorised r
oof l
oad f
or your
v
ehicl
e is 100 kg (220 pounds).
Empty weight, total weight, axle loads
The empty weight of the vehicle with driver
(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)
1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can
»
355
Technical data
increase the empty weight, which means that
the possibl
e useful l
oad decr
eases pr
opor
-
tionally.
Trailer weight
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball head of the towing device is 100 kg.
WARNING
The values indicated for the maximum per-
mitted weights must not be exceeded.
Ther
e is a risk of accident and damage!
356
Indications about the technical data
Engine specifications
Petrol engines 1.4 TSI Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-4,000
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,395
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual DSG
Top speed (km/h) 200 (VI) 198 (VI)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.9 9.9
Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,300 / 2,430 2,310 / 2,430
Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,500 130 (177)/3,500-4,000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,750-3,000 380/1,750-2,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,968 4/1,968
Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN
Gearbox manual DSG DSG DSG 4Drive
Top speed (km/h) 198 (VI) 198 (VI) 210 (VI) 208 (VII)
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.6 10.3 9.3 9.1
Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,390 / 2,520 2,410 / 2,540 2,390 / 2,540 2,560 / 2,590
357
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 299 Dimensions.
ALHAMBRA
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 968/966
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,919
D Length (mm) 4,854
E/F Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1,569/1,617
G Width (mm) 1,904
H Height at kerb w
eight (mm) 1,720
Turning radius (m) 11.9
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
358
Index
Index
Numbers and Symbol
s
4Driv
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
A
ABS
see
Anti-l
ock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . . . 135
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Active cylinder management (ACT)
status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
AdBlue
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Additional heating
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
see also Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Adjust
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 136
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Air conditioning
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Alternator
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Android Auto™
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Anti-trap function
electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Aspects to think about before starting the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ASR
connection and disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
see also Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . 284
Assistance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Assistance systems
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
anti-slip regulation during acceleration
(ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as-
sistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
359
Index
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
driv
er al
ert syst
em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
4
dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . 253
ear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . 260
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
parking distance warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 76
steering wheel assist for parking . . . . . . . . . . 287
tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Audible warning
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 283
Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 116
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
emergency release of the selector lever. . . 251
ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . 248
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 248
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 169
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
B
Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
change on the remote control (independ-
ent heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bicycle carrier
fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . 306
max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 275
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Blown bulbs
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Bluetooth®
connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Braking system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
BSD
see blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
BSD Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
C
Camera
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Capacities
AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Card compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Care
see Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 155
360
Index
Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Centr
al l
ocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
anti-theft al
arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
xenon headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Childproof locks
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Child seat
integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Child seats
group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34
Cleaning the vehicle
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Climate control
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Clocks
set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Communication between the Infotainment
System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Connectivity
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Connectors
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 314
press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 264
rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 308
remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 167
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
windscreen washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Controls and displays
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
361
Index
Convenience close function
windo
ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1
1
Conv
enience functions
reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Convenience open function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Convenience phone system
outside antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cooling system
check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cornering lights
dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
D
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Data bank view
see MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Data logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
DCC
see Adaptive suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Deactivation of cylinders
see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 69
Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . . 175
Detection of road signs
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Diagnostic connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Diesel
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Disconnection of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Disposal
airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
vehicle at the end of its useful life . . . . . . . . . 350
Distance control
see Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Door
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Door emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Drink holder
bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Driving
data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Dynamic chassis control (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Electric
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Electric child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157
362
Index
Electric sliding door
anti-tr
ap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
opening and cl
osing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
El
ectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Electronic engine torque management
(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 243
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Emergencies
anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Emergency braking assist system
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Emergency closing and opening
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Emergency opening
driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Emergency operation
gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Emissions control system
AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Engine
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Engine and ignition
12 volt power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . 240
emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 241
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315, 317
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321, 322
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Engine failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Engine oil
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 320
checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 319
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Environment
ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Environmental tip
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
363
Index
ESC
el
ectr
onic st
abilit
y contr
ol (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 284
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Event data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347, 348
Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Exterior lighting
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Exterior mirrors
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
F
Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Factors that have a negative influence on
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fault
park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Fault memory
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Filling capacities
fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
First aid kit
housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Folding chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Folding the rear seats
load surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Frequency band
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Front Assist
see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 260
Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fuel
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Fuel consumption
inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 313
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fuel tank cap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Full Link™
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
map representation, navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 220
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58
preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
G
GALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Gearbox DSG
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Gear change
engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 245
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
H
Handbrake
see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
364
Index
Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 16
Head-pr
ot
ection airbags
saf
et
y instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
Headlights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 132
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
I
Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Information call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173
phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 196
sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 179
station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 336
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70
menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 84
use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
seat belt route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 175
Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Interior mirror
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
positive pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
K
Keyless Access
Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
365
Index
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
special char
act
eristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
st
arting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keyless Entry
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keyless Exit
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Keys
assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 102
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Kick-down
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
L
Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Lane Assist system
see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 250
Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Loading the luggage compartment
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 138
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Lock and unlock
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 138
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
electric lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
electric opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
folding the rear seats down as a cargo sur-
face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
opening and closing controlled by sensors
(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
unfolding and folding the net partition. . . . . . 147
Luggage compartment net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
M
Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Main menu
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Maintenance
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
366
Index
Malfunctions
adaptiv
e cruise contr
ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
dynamic chassis contr
ol (DCC) . . . . . . . . . . .
254
emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Map display
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Media
changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
MEDIA
data bank view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
MFD
see Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
MirrorLink™
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mirrors
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Multifunction steering wheel
with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
N
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
my route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
points of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 215
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
NAV (navigation)
map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Net
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
unfolding and folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Noise
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328, 332
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
O
Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
367
Index
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
with the centr
al l
ocking s
wit
ch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Operating fault
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249, 250
Operation in winter
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Overseas
longer stay with the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
P
Painting the vehicle
care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Panoramic sliding sunroof
see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
connecting or disconnecting (leaving park-
ing space) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
connecting or disconnecting (parking) . . . . 289
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
leaving a parking space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
parking preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291, 292
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Parking assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Parking brake
automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Parking side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 14
Petrol
additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Phone management
three button module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Portable rubbish bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Power sockets
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Power steering
see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Pre-installation for basic mobile phone . . . . . . 226
possible connection types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Preheating system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Press & Drive
start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
R
Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 265
Radio
frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
RADIO
additional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
save and delete station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 196
set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
368
Index
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
st
ation tr
acking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
tr
acking of D
AB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Radio-operated remote control
see Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Radio reception
antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
net to cover the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 273
RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 110
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rear mounting
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Refuelling
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote control key
unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 167
changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Reprogramming of control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 78
Road signs detection system
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Rotation direction
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Running in
new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Safety instructions
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Seat
access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . 135
folding the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seat adjustment
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seat belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 21
369
Index
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
seat belt height adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
unf
ast
ened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
with tw
o buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat belt with two buckles
fasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
twisted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
unfasten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat functions
access aid for the third row of seats . . . . . . . 135
lumbar massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Seats
adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 136
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Selling the vehicle
in other countries/continents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Service
Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Setup
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 248
Side airbags
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
manual opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Special characteristics
AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 305
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 55
tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Start-Stop system
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 243
the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Station
set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
active cylinder management status (ACT) . 69
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Emergency brake assistance system (Front
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 247
370
Index
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
8
t
yr
e contr
ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 74
Steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Steering wheel
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 248
Steering wheel brake assist system
brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Steering wheel park assist
interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Stickers and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
front centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
glasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
in the front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
in the roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
portable rubbish bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
rear footwell area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage compartment accessories
see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Storage compartment in the roof console . . . 152
Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Storage of trip data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Storing objects
bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 136
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sun blinds
rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
T
Tail lights
change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Telephone
Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
during a phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
favourites (quick access to the phone
book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 225
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
TELEPHONE
switching the telephone management sys-
tem off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Temperature indicator
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Time
adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 246, 248
To change the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34
371
Index
Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 34
T
or
que
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
8
T
owable loads
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
Tow hook
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Towing device
fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . 305
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54
automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 55
tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-
er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301
trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . 305
vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 298, 302
Trailer mode
see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Transport
luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
rail system with fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Trips abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tyre pressure loss indicator
tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
U
Unlock and lock
by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 209
load devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
372
Index
V
V
anit
y mirr
or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
V
ehicle
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 96
vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Vehicle battery
assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
automatic disconnection of devices . . . . . . 326
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 324
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
positive pole for jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Vehicle care
wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
antenna built into the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
W
Warning symbols
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 120
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Washing the vehicle
conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 339
high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 339
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 291
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 331
anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 47
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Windows
automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Window washer
window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Window washer water
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Windscreen washer fluid
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Winter
menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Winter conditions
sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
373
Index
Wiper and rear window wiper blades
cl
eaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
r
epl
acement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
X
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
374
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Owner’s manual
SEAT Alhambra
7N5012720BN
Inglés
7N5012720BN (11.19)
SEAT Alhambra Inglés (11.19)
